This **preview** has intentionally **blurred** parts. Sign up to view the full document

**Unformatted Document Excerpt**

1: MEASUREMENT 1. Chapter The SI standard of time is based on: A. the daily rotation of the earth B. the frequency of light emitted by Kr86 C. the yearly revolution of the earth about the sun D. a precision pendulum clock E. none of these

2. A nanosecond is: A. 109 s B. 109 s C. 1010 s D. 1010 s E. 1012 3. The SI standard of length is based on: A. the distance from the north pole to the equator along a meridian passing through Paris B. wavelength of light emitted by Hg198 C. wavelength of light emitted by Kr86 D. a precision meter stick in Paris E. the speed of light 4. In 1866, the U. S. Congress dened the U. S. yard as exactly 3600/3937 international meter. This was done primarily because: A. length can be measured more accurately in meters than in yards B. the meter is more stable than the yard C. this denition relates the common U. S. length units to a more widely used system D. there are more wavelengths in a yard than in a meter E. the members of this Congress were exceptionally intelligent 5. Which of the following is closest to a yard in length? A. 0.01 m B. 0.1 m C. 1 m D. 100 m E. 1000 m Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT 1 6. There is no SI base unit for area because: A. an area has no thickness; hence no physical standard can be built B. we live in a three (not a two) dimensional world C. it is impossible to express square feet in terms of meters D. area can be expressed in terms of square meters E. area is not an important physical quantity 7. The SI base unit for mass is: A. gram B. pound C. kilogram D. ounce E. kilopound 8. A gram is: A. 106 kg B. 103 kg C. 1 kg D. 103 kg E. 106 kg 9. Which of the following weighs about a pound? A. 0.05 kg B. 0.5 kg C. 5 kg D. 50 kg E. 500 kg 10. (5.0 104 ) (3.0 106 ) = A. 1.5 109 B. 1.5 1010 C. 1.5 1011 D. 1.5 1012 E. 1.5 1013 11. (5.0 104 ) (3.0 106 ) = A. 1.5 103 B. 1.5 101 C. 1.5 101 D. 1.5 103 E. 1.5 105 2 Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT 12. 5.0 105 + 3.0 106 = A. 8.0 105 B. 8.0 106 C. 5.3 105 D. 3.5 105 E. 3.5 106 13. (7.0 106 )/(2.0 106 ) = A. 3.5 1012 B. 3.5 106 C. 3.5 D. 3.5 106 E. 3.5 1012 14. The number of signicant gures in 0.00150 is: A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5 E. 6 15. The number of signicant gures in 15.0 is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 4 E. 5 16. 3.2 2.7 = A. 9 B. 8 C. 8.6 D. 8.64 E. 8.640 Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT 3 17. 1.513 + 27.3 = A. 29 B. 28.8 C. 28.9 D. 28.81 E. 28.813 ( ) 18. 1 mi is equivalent to 1609 m so 55 mph is: A. 15 m/s B. 25 m/s C. 66 m/s D. 88 m/s E. 1500 m/s 19. A sphere with a radius of 1.7 cm has a volume of: A. 2.1 105 m3 B. 9.1 104 m3 C. 3.6 103 m3 D. 0.11 m3 E. 21 m3 20. A sphere with a radius of 1.7 cm has a surface area of: A. 2.1 105 m2 B. 9.1 104 m2 C. 3.6 103 m2 D. 0.11 m2 E. 36 m2 21. A right circular cylinder with a radius of 2.3 cm and a height of 1.4 m has a volume of: A. 0.20 m3 B. 0.14 m3 C. 9.3 103 m3 D. 2.3 103 m3 E. 7.4 104 m3 22. A right circular cylinder with a radius of 2.3 cm and a height of 1.4 cm has a total surface area of: A. 1.7 103 m2 B. 3.2 103 m2 C. 2.0 103 m3 D. 5.3 103 m2 E. 7.4 103 m2 4 Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT 23. A cubic box with an edge of exactly 1 cm has a volume of: A. 109 m3 B. 106 m3 C. 103 m3 D. 103 m3 E. 106 m3 24. A square with an edge of exactly 1 cm has an area of: A. 106 m2 B. 104 m2 C. 102 m2 D. 104 m2 E. 106 m2 25. 1 m is equivalent to 3.281 ft. A cube with an edge of 1.5 ft has a volume of: A. 1.2 102 m3 B. 9.6 102 m3 C. 10.5 m3 D. 9.5 102 m3 E. 0.21 m3 26. During a short interval of time the speed v in m/s of an automobile is given by v = at2 + bt3 , where the time t is in seconds. The units of a and b are respectively: A. m s2 ; m s4 B. s3 /m; s4 /m C. m/s2 ; m/s3 3 4 D. m/s ; m/s 4 5 E. m/s ; m/s 27. Suppose A = BC , where A has the dimension L/M and C has the dimension L/T. Then B has the dimension: A. T/M B. L2 /TM C. TM/L2 D. L2 T/M E. M/L2 T Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT 5 28. Suppose A = B n C m , where A has dimensions LT, B has dimensions L 2 T1 , and C has dimensions LT2 . Then the exponents n and m have the values: A. 2/3; 1/3 B. 2; 3 C. 4/5; 1/5 D. 1/5; 3/5 E. 1/2; 1/2 6 Chapter 1: MEASUREMENT Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 1. A particle moves along the x axis from xi to xf . Of the following values of the initial and nal coordinates, which results in the displacement with the largest magnitude? A. xi = 4 m, xf = 6 m B. xi = 4 m, xf = 8 m C. xi = 4 m, xf = 2 m D. xi = 4 m, xf = 2 m E. xi = 4 m, xf = 4 m 2. A particle moves along the x axis from xi to xf . Of the following values of the initial and nal coordinates, which results in a negative displacement? A. xi = 4 m, xf = 6 m B. xi = 4 m, xf = 8 m C. xi = 4 m, xf = 2 m D. xi = 4 m, xf = 2 m E. xi = 4 m, xf = 4 m 3. The average speed of a moving object during a given interval of time is always: A. the magnitude of its average velocity over the interval B. the distance covered during the time interval divided by the time interval C. one-half its speed at the end of the interval D. its acceleration multiplied by the time interval E. one-half its acceleration multiplied by the time interval. 4. Two automobiles are 150 kilometers apart and traveling toward each other. One automobile is moving at 60 km/h and the other is moving at 40 km/h mph. In how many hours will they meet? A. 2.5 B. 2.0 C. 1.75 D. 1.5 E. 1.25 5. A car travels 40 kilometers at an average speed of 80 km/h and then travels 40 kilometers at an average speed of 40 km/h. The average speed of the car for this 80-km trip is: A. 40 km/h B. 45 km/h C. 48 km/h D. 53 km/h E. 80 km/h Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 7 6. A car starts from Hither, goes 50 km in a straight line to Yon, immediately turns around, and returns to Hither. The time for this round trip is 2 hours. The magnitude of the average velocity of the car for this round trip is: A. 0 B. 50 km/hr C. 100 km/hr D. 200 km/hr E. cannot be calculated without knowing the acceleration 7. A car starts from Hither, goes 50 km in a straight line to Yon, immediately turns around, and returns to Hither. The time for this round trip is 2 hours. The average speed of the car for this round trip is: A. 0 B. 50 km/h C. 100 km/h D. 200 km/h E. cannot be calculated without knowing the acceleration 8. The coordinate of a particle in meters is given by x(t) = 16t 3.0t3 , where the time t is in seconds. The particle is momentarily at rest at t = A. 0.75 s B. 1.3 s C. 5.3 s D. 7.3 s E. 9.3 s 9. A drag racing car starts from rest at t = 0 and moves along a straight line with velocity given by v = bt2 , where b is a constant. The expression for the distance traveled by this car from its position at t = 0 is: A. bt3 B. bt3 /3 C. 4bt2 D. 3bt2 E. bt3/2 10. A ball rolls up a slope. At the end of three seconds its velocity is 20 cm/s; at the end of eight seconds its velocity is 0. What is the average acceleration from the third to the eighth second? A. 2.5 cm/s2 2 B. 4.0 cm/s 2 C. 5.0 cm/s 2 D. 6.0 cm/s 2 E. 6.67 cm/s 8 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 11. The coordinate of an object is given as a function of time by x = 7t 3t2 , where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Its average velocity over the interval from t = 0 to t = 4 s is: A. 5 m/s B. 5 m/s C. 11 m/s D. 11 m/s E. 14.5 m/s 12. The velocity of an object is given as a function of time by v = 4t 3t2 , where v is in m/s and t is in seconds. Its average velocity over the interval from t = 0 to t = 2 s: A. is 0 B. is 2 m/s C. is 2 m/s D. is 4 m/s E. cannot be calculated unless the initial position is given 13. The coordinate of an object is given as a function of time by x = 4t2 3t3 , where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Its average acceleration over the interval from t = 0 to t = 2 s is: 2 A. 4 m/s 2 B. 4 m/s 2 C. 10 m/s 2 D. 10 m/s 2 E. 13 m/s 14. Each of four particles move along an x axis. Their coordinates (in meters) as functions of time (in seconds) are given by particle 1: x(t) = 3.5 2.7t3 particle 2: x(t) = 3.5 + 2.7t3 particle 3: x(t) = 3.5 + 2.7t2 particle 4: x(t) = 3.5 3.4t 2.7t2 Which of these particles have constant acceleration? A. All four B. Only 1 and 2 C. Only 2 and 3 D. Only 3 and 4 E. None of them Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 9 15. Each of four particles move along an x axis. Their coordinates (in meters) as functions of time (in seconds) are given by particle 1: x(t) = 3.5 2.7t3 particle 2: x(t) = 3.5 + 2.7t3 particle 3: x(t) = 3.5 + 2.7t2 particle 4: x(t) = 3.5 3.4t 2.7t2 Which of these particles is speeding up for t > 0? A. All four B. Only 1 C. Only 2 and 3 D. Only 2, 3, and 4 E. None of them 16. An object starts from rest at the origin and moves along the x axis with a constant acceleration of 4 m/s2 . Its average velocity as it goes from x = 2 m to x = 8 m is: A. 1 m/s B. 2 m/s C. 3 m/s D. 5 m/s E. 6 m/s 17. Of A. B. C. D. E. the following situations, which one is impossible? A body having velocity east and acceleration east A body having velocity east and acceleration west A body having zero velocity and non-zero acceleration A body having constant acceleration and variable velocity A body having constant velocity and variable acceleration 18. Throughout a time interval, while the speed of a particle increases as it moves along the x axis, its velocity and acceleration might be: A. positive and negative, respectively B. negative and positive, respectively C. negative and negative, respectively D. negative and zero, respectively E. positive and zero, respectively 19. A particle moves on the x axis. When its acceleration is positive and increasing: A. its velocity must be positive B. its velocity must be negative C. it must be slowing down D. it must be speeding up E. none of the above must be true 10 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 20. The position y of a particle moving along the y axis depends on the time t according to the equation y = at bt2 . The dimensions of the quantities a and b are respectively: A. L2 /T, L3 /T2 B. L/T2 , L2 /T C. L/T, L/T2 D. L3 /T, T2 /L E. none of these 21. A particle moves along the x axis according to the equation x = 6t2 , where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Therefore: A. the acceleration of the particle is 6 m/s2 B. t cannot be negative C. the particle follows a parabolic path D. each second the velocity of the particle changes by 9.8 m/s E. none of the above 22. Over a short interval near time t = 0 the coordinate of an automobile in meters is given by x(t) = 27t 4.0t3 , where t is in seconds. At the end of 1.0 s the acceleration of the auto is: A. 27 m/s2 B. 4.0 m/s2 C. 4.0 m/s2 D. 12 m/s2 E. 24 m/s2 23. Over a short interval, starting at time t = 0, the coordinate of an automobile in meters is given by x(t) = 27t 4.0t3 , where t is in seconds. The magnitudes of the initial (at t = 0) velocity and acceleration of the auto respectively are: A. 0; 12 m/s2 B. 0; 24 m/s2 C. 27 m/s; 0 D. 27 m/s; 12 m/s2 E. 27 m/s; 24 m/s2 24. At time t = 0 a car has a velocity of 16 m/s. It slows down with an acceleration given by 0.50t, in m/s2 for t in seconds. It stops at t = A. 64 s B. 32 s C. 16 s D. 8.0 s E. 4.0 s Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 11 25. At time t = 0 a car has a velocity of 16 m/s. It slows down with an acceleration given by 0.50t, in m/s2 for t in seconds. At the end of 4.0 s it has traveled: A. 0 B. 12 m C. 14 m D. 25 m E. 59 m 26. At time t = 0 a car has a velocity of 16 m/s. It slows down with an acceleration given by 0.50t, in m/s2 for t in seconds. By the time it stops it has traveled: A. 15 m B. 31 m C. 62 m D. 85 m E. 100 m 27. Starting at time t = 0, an object moves along a straight line with velocity in m/s given by v (t) = 98 2t2 , where t is in seconds. When it momentarily stops its acceleration is: A. 0 B. 4.0 m/s2 C. 9.8 m/s2 D. 28 m/s2 E. 49 m/s2 28. Starting at time t = 0, an object moves along a straight line. Its coordinate in meters is given by x(t) = 75t 1.0t3 , where t is in seconds. When it momentarily stops its acceleration is: A. 0 B. 73 m/s2 C. 30 m/s2 D. 9.8 m/s2 E. 9.2 103 m/s2 29. A car, initially at rest, travels 20 m in 4 s along a straight line with constant acceleration. The acceleration of the car is: A. 0.4 m/s2 2 B. 1.3 m/s 2 C. 2.5 m/s D. 4.9 m/s2 E. 9.8 m/s2 12 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 30. A racing car traveling with constant acceleration increases its speed from 10 m/s to 50 m/s over a distance of 60 m. How long does this take? A. 2.0 s B. 4.0 s C. 5.0 s D. 8.0 s E. The time cannot be calculated since the speed is not constant 31. A car starts from rest and goes down a slope with a constant acceleration of 5 m/s2 . After 5 s the car reaches the bottom of the hill. Its speed at the bottom of the hill, in meters per second, is: A. 1 B. 12.5 C. 25 D. 50 E. 160 32. A car moving with an initial velocity of 25 m/s north has a constant acceleration of 3 m/s2 south. After 6 seconds its velocity will be: A. 7 m/s north B. 7 m/s south C. 43 m/s north D. 20 m/s north E. 20 m/s south 33. An object with an initial velocity of 12 m/s west experiences a constant acceleration of 4 m/s2 west for 3 seconds. During this time the object travels a distance of: A. 12 m B. 24 m C. 36 m D. 54 m E. 144 m 34. How far does a car travel in 6 s if its initial velocity is 2 m/s and its acceleration is 2 m/s2 in the forward direction? A. 12 m B. 14 m C. 24 m D. 36 m E. 48 m Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 13 35. At a stop light, a truck traveling at 15 m/s passes a car as it starts from rest. The truck travels at constant velocity and the car accelerates at 3 m/s2 . How much time does the car take to catch up to the truck? A. 5 s B. 10 s C. 15 s D. 20 s E. 25 s 36. A ball is in free fall. Its acceleration is: A. downward during both ascent and descent B. downward during ascent and upward during descent C. upward during ascent and downward during descent D. upward during both ascent and descent E. downward at all times except at the very top, when it is zero 37. A ball is in free fall. Upward is taken to be the positive direction. The displacement of the ball during a short time interval is: A. positive during both ascent and descent B. negative during both ascent and descent C. negative during ascent and positive during descent D. positive during ascent and negative during descent E. none of the above 38. A baseball is thrown vertically into the air. The acceleration of the ball at its highest point is: A. zero B. g , down C. g , up D. 2g , down E. 2g , up 39. Which one of the following statements is correct for an object released from rest? A. The average velocity during the rst second of time is 4.9 m/s B. During each second the object falls 9.8 m C. The acceleration changes by 9.8 m/s2 every second D. The object falls 9.8 m during the rst second of time E. The acceleration of the object is proportional to its weight 14 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 40. A freely falling body has a constant acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 . This means that: A. the body falls 9.8 m during each second B. the body falls 9.8 m during the rst second only C. the speed of the body increases by 9.8 m/s during each second D. the acceleration of the body increases by 9.8 m/s2 during each second E. the acceleration of the body decreases by 9.8 m/s2 during each second 41. An A. B. C. D. E. object is shot vertically upward. While it is rising: its velocity and acceleration are both upward its velocity is upward and its acceleration is downward its velocity and acceleration are both downward its velocity is downward and its acceleration is upward its velocity and acceleration are both decreasing 42. An object is thrown straight up from ground level with a speed of 50 m/s. If g = 10 m/s2 its distance above ground level 1.0 s later is: A. 40 m B. 45 m C. 50 m D. 55 m E. 60 m 43. An object is thrown straight up from ground level with a speed of 50 m/s. If g = 10 m/s2 its distance above ground level 6.0 s later is: A. 0.00 m B. 270 m C. 330 m D. 480 m E. none of these 44. At a location where g = 9.80 m/s2 , an object is thrown vertically down with an initial speed of 1.00 m/s. After 5.00 s the object will have traveled: A. 125 m B. 127.5 m C. 245 m D. 250 m E. 255 m Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 15 45. An object is thrown vertically upward at 35 m/s. Taking g = 10 m/s2 , the velocity of the object 5 s later is: A. 7.0 m/s up B. 15 m/s down C. 15 m/s up D. 85 m/s down E. 85 m/s up 46. A feather, initially at rest, is released in a vacuum 12 m above the surface of the earth. Which of the following statements is correct? A. The maximum velocity of the feather is 9.8 m/s B. The acceleration of the feather decreases until terminal velocity is reached C. The acceleration of the feather remains constant during the fall D. The acceleration of the feather increases during the fall E. The acceleration of the feather is zero 47. An A. B. C. D. E. object is released from rest. How far does it fall during the second second of its fall? 4.9 m 9.8 m 15 m 20 m 25 m 48. A heavy ball falls freely, starting from rest. Between the third and fourth second of time it travels a distance of: A. 4.9 m B. 9.8 m C. 29.4 m D. 34.3 m E. 39.8 m 49. As a rocket is accelerating vertically upward at 9.8 m/s2 near Earths surface, it releases a projectile. Immediately after release the acceleration (in m/s2 ) of the projectile is: A. 9.8 down B. 0 C. 9.8 up D. 19.6 up E. none of the above 16 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 50. A stone is released from a balloon that is descending at a constant speed of 10 m/s. Neglecting air resistance, after 20 s the speed of the stone is: A. 2160 m/s B. 1760 m/s C. 206 m/s D. 196 m/s E. 186 m/s 51. An object dropped from the window of a tall building hits the ground in 12.0 s. If its acceleration is 9.80 m/s2 , the height of the window above the ground is: A. 29.4 m B. 58.8 m C. 118 m D. 353 m E. 706 m 52. Neglecting the eect of air resistance a stone dropped o a 175-m high building lands on the ground in: A. 3 s B. 4 s C. 6 s D. 18 s E. 36 s 53. A stone is thrown vertically upward with an initial speed of 19.5 m/s. It will rise to a maximum height of: A. 4.9 m B. 9.8 m C. 19.4 m D. 38.8 m E. none of these 54. A baseball is hit straight up and is caught by the catcher 2.0 s later. The maximum height of the ball during this interval is: A. 4.9 m B. 7.4 m C. 9.8 m D. 12.6 m E. 19.6 m Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 17 55. An object is thrown straight down with an initial speed of 4 m/s from a window which is 8 m above the ground. The time it takes the object to reach the ground is: A. 0.80 s B. 0.93 s C. 1.3 s D. 1.7 s E. 2.0 s 56. A stone is released from rest from the edge of a building roof 190 m above the ground. Neglecting air resistance, the speed of the stone, just before striking the ground, is: A. 43 m/s B. 61 m/s C. 120 m/s D. 190 m/s E. 1400 m/s 57. An object is thrown vertically upward with a certain initial velocity in a world where the that to which acceleration due to gravity is 19.6 m/s2 . The height to which it rises is the object would rise if thrown upward with the same initial velocity on the Earth. Neglect friction. A. half 2 times B. C. twice D. four times E. cannot be calculated from the given data 58. A projectile is shot vertically upward with a given initial velocity. It reaches a maximum height of 100 m. If, on a second shot, the initial velocity is doubled then the projectile will reach a maximum height of: A. 70.7 m B. 141.4 m C. 200 m D. 241 m E. 400 m 59. One object is thrown vertically upward with an initial velocity of 100 m/s and another object with an initial velocity of 10 m/s. The maximum height reached by the rst object will be that of the other. A. 10 times B. 100 times C. 1000 times D. 10, 000 times E. none of these 18 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 60. The area under a velocity-time graph represents: A. acceleration B. change in acceleration C. speed D. change in velocity E. displacement 61. Displacement can be obtained from: A. the slope of an acceleration-time graph B. the slope of a velocity-time graph C. the area under an acceleration-time graph D. the area under a velocity-time graph E. the slope of an acceleration-time graph 62. An object has a constant acceleration of 3 m/s2 . The coordinate versus time graph for this object has a slope: A. that increases with time B. that is constant C. that decreases with time D. of 3 m/s E. of 3 m/s2 63. The coordinate-time graph of an object is a straight line with a positive slope. The object has: A. constant displacement B. steadily increasing acceleration C. steadily decreasing acceleration D. constant velocity E. steadily increasing velocity Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 19 64. Which of the following ve coordinate versus time graphs represents the motion of an object moving with a constant nonzero speed? x . .. .. . . ... ... . .. ... ..... .. ....... x t .... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .. A x ...................... ..................... t t B x .. .... ........ . .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . C x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t D t E 65. Which of the following ve acceleration versus time graphs is correct for an object moving in a straight line at a constant velocity of 20 m/s? a a ...................... ..................... t .. ... .... .. ... . .. .... . .... ... ... .. A a t B a .. ... .. ... .. ... . .. .... . .. ... . .. ... ... C a t ...................... ..................... D 20 Chapter 2: . .. .. ... .. .. .. .... ..... ....... ... MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE E t t 66. Which of the following ve coordinate versus time graphs represents the motion of an object whose speed is increasing? x . .. .. . . ... ... . .. ... ..... .. ....... x t .... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .. A x t .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .... . ... ........ .. B x .. .......... .. .... . . ... .. .. . .. .. . . t C x .. .... .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . ... .... ... . .. t t D E 67. A car accelerates from rest on a straight road. A short time later, the car decelerates to a stop and then returns to its original position in a similar manner, by speeding up and then slowing to a stop. Which of the following ve coordinate versus time graphs best describes the motion? x .. ...... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. . . .. .... ... .. x t . .. ...... .. .. ..... ..... . .... .. .. .. ..... A x ...... . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. . . t B x ..... .. . ... .. ... . .. ... .. .. ... .. .... .. .. . C x t D t . ... . .. . .. . .. . ......... ....... .. ... . ....... t E Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 21 68. The acceleration of an object, starting from rest, is shown in the graph below. Other than at t = 0, when is the velocity of the object equal to zero? a(m/s2 ) 5 ................... .......... ....... .. .. .. .. .... .. . .. . . . .. ..... .. ......... .. .. . .. .. . .. 4 .. .. . . .. .. .. 1 2 3 ... .. 5 .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 5 A. B. C. D. E. t(s) During the interval from 1.0 s to 3.0 s At t = 3.5 s At t = 4.0 s At t = 5.0 s At no other time less than or equal to 5 s 69. An elevator is moving upward with constant acceleration. The dashed curve shows the position y of the ceiling of the elevator as a function of the time t. At the instant indicated by the dot, a bolt breaks loose and drops from the ceiling. Which curve best represents the position of the bolt as a function of time? y . .. ... A .... ... ... ... .. . . ............. ... .. .................. ....... . . . .. .. . . ...... .... .. . . ... B .. . . . .... .......... .......... ....... ..... .. . ........... . .... . . . . .. .. . .. . .. ....... .... .. . ......... . . .. . .. ... C . ....... . ... . ... ........ . . . ... ... ......... . ... . .. .. . . . .......... D .E .. ..... ... .... . . . ... . .. ... ... .... ... .. .. .... ... .. .. . 22 Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE t 70. The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a car moving in a straight line. At point Q the car must be: v P . ........... . ................... ..... . ...... .... ....... . ... ... .. ... ... ..... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. ... . Q .. A. B. C. D. E. t moving with zero acceleration traveling downhill traveling below ground-level reducing speed traveling in the reverse direction to that at point P 71. The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a car moving in a straight line. At point P the car must be: v .... ......... . . ................... .. ........ . ..... .......... P........... ... ....... .. ...... . .. ..... . .. .... ... ... A. B. C. D. E. t moving with zero acceleration climbing the hill accelerating stationary moving at about 45 with respect to the x axis Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 23 72. The graph represents the straight line motion of a car. How far does the car travel between t = 2 s and t = 5 s? v (m/s) 12 ....................... ......................... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. . . ... .. . ... ... . 6 .. ... . .. ... . .. .. ... ... . . ... .. . . 2 5 9 A. B. C. D. E. t(s) 4m 12 m 24 m 36 m 60 m 73. The diagram represents the straight line motion of a car. Which of the following statements is true? v (m/s) 12 ....................... ......................... ... ... .. ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... .. . ... .. 6. . ... ... . . ... .. . . ... .. . ... .. .. 2 5 9 A. B. C. D. E. 24 The The The The The ans: car car car car car B accelerates, stops, and reverses accelerates at 6 m/s2 for the rst 2 s is moving for a total time of 12 s decelerates at 12 m/s2 for the last 4 s returns to its starting point when t = 9 s Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE t(s) 74. Consider the following ve graphs (note the axes carefully). Which of these represents motion at constant speed? x . .. ... . .. ... . .... . .. .... .. .... . .. ... .. v t ... . .. .... .. .... . .. ... . .. .... .... .. I a t . .. ... . .. ... ... . .. .... .. .... . .. ... . . II v III a ...................... ..................... ...................... ..................... t t IV A. B. C. D. E. t V IV only IV and V only I, II, and III only I and II only I and IV only 75. An object is dropped from rest. Which of the following ve graphs correctly represents its motion? The positive direction is taken to be downward. v v ...................... ..................... t .. ... . .. .... . .. ... . .. ... .... .... .. A v t . .. . .. . . ... ... ... .... ..... ...... ... B v . ... ......... .... ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . y t D t C ... ..... .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . . t E Chapter 2: MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE 25 76. A stone is dropped from a cli. The graph (carefully note the axes) which best represents its motion while it falls is: x . .. . .. .... .. ... . .. .... . ... .... ... ... v t .. .. ... .. .. ... ... ..... .......... .. A v t .. ... . .. ... . ... .... ... .. ... . .. .... . ... B a .. .. . . .. ... .. .. .. .... ......... ... t C a t .... .... .. ... ... .... .. .... . .. ... . ... D t E 77. An object is thrown vertically into the air. Which of the following ve graphs represents the velocity (v ) of the object as a function of the time (t)? The positive direction is taken to be upward. v . ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . ... .... .... .... v v ...................... ..................... t t A B v . .. . .. ... .. ... . .. ... ....... ...... ... v t .. ..... ....... ... ... .. ... ... . .. .. . D 26 Chapter 2: ... . .. ... . .. .... . .. ... . .. ... . .. .... . .. . C MOTION ALONG A STRAIGHT LINE E t t Chapter 3: VECTORS 1. We say that the displacement of a particle is a vector quantity. Our best justication for this assertion is: A. displacement can be specied by a magnitude and a direction B. operating with displacements according to the rules for manipulating vectors leads to results in agreement with experiments C. a displacement is obviously not a scalar D. displacement can be specied by three numbers E. displacement is associated with motion 2. The vectors a, b, and c are related by c = b a. Which diagram below illustrates this relationship? . .... .... ..... ..... .... . . . .... ... c.................................. . .. .. . . ... . ... . .. . ... .. b ... . ... . ... . . ... ... . . ..... .. . .. .... . ............................ ..... ..... ... .. ............................ ... ... . a .... .... ....... ...... .. ..... ....... . ...... . c................................. . .. .. . ... ... .. . .. . ... .. b ... . ... . ... c b .......... .. .......... c B .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. ..... . . . .. . . .... . ......................... . . .... . .... . ........................... . .... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . ......................... . . ..... .. .. ........................... . ... a . . ... . ... ... . . .. ... .. ........................... ........................... .. . .. .. ... ... . a A ..... ..... . .. .......... .......... . .. . .. . . ... .... ..... .. ..... .. . .. b ......... . .......... a C D E. None of these 3. A vector of magnitude 3 CANNOT be added to a vector of magnitude 4 so that the magnitude of the resultant is: A. zero B. 1 C. 3 D. 5 E. 7 4. A vector of magnitude 20 is added to a vector of magnitude 25. The magnitude of this sum might be: A. zero B. 3 C. 12 D. 47 E. 50 Chapter 3: VECTORS 27 5. A vector S of magnitude 6 and another vector T have a sum of magnitude 12. The vector T : A. must have a magnitude of at least 6 but no more than 18 B. may have a magnitude of 20 C. cannot have a magnitude greater than 12 D. must be perpendicular to S E. must be perpendicular to the vector sum 6. The vector A is: A. greater than A in magnitude B. less than A in magnitude C. in the same direction as A D. in the direction opposite to A E. perpendicular to A 7. The vector V3 in the diagram is equal to: ....... ................ .. . . ...... . . ...... . ...... . ...... . . ...... . ...... V . V2 . ......3 . .. . . ... .. . ... . .. ...... .. . . . . ...... . . ...... . ...... . . . ..... . . .. . . ................................................................................................ . . ... V1 A. B. C. D. E. V1 V2 V1 + V2 V2 V1 V1 cos V1 /(cos ) 8. If |A + B |2 = A2 + B 2 , then: A. B. C. D. E. 28 A and B must be parallel and in the same direction A and B must be parallel and in opposite directions either A or B must be zero the angle between A and B must be 60 none of the above is true Chapter 3: VECTORS 9. If |A + B | = A + B and neither A nor B vanish, then: A. B. C. D. E. A and B are parallel and in the same direction A and B are parallel and in opposite directions the angle between A and B is 45 the angle between A and B is 60 A is perpendicular to B 10. If |A B | = A + B and neither A nor B vanish, then: A. B. C. D. E. A and B are parallel and in the same direction A and B are parallel and in opposite directions the angle between A and B is 45 the angle between A and B is 60 A is perpendicular to B 11. Four vectors (A, B , C , D ) all have the same magnitude. The angle between adjacent vectors is 45 as shown. The correct vector equation is: . ....... . ..... ..... B A. ..... . ... . . ....... . 45 .. ............. .. . . ....... . ... . .......... 45 .............................................................. ... .... .. .... .. .C ............ 45 ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . ....... .. D A. B. C. D. E. ABC +D =0 B + D 2C = 0 A+B =B+D A+B+C +D =0 (A + C )/ 2 = B 12. Vectors A and B lie in the xy plane. We can deduce that A = B if: 2 2 A. A2 + A2 = Bx + By x y B. Ax + Ay = Bx + By C. Ax = Bx and Ay = By D. Ay /Ax = By /Bx E. Ax = Ay and Bx = By Chapter 3: VECTORS 29 13. A vector has a magnitude of 12. When its tail is at the origin it lies between the positive x axis and the negative y axis and makes an angle of 30 with the x axis. Its y component is: 3 A. 6/ B. 6 3 C. 6 D. 6 E. 12 14. If the x component of a vector A, in the xy plane, is half as large as the magnitude of the vector, the tangent of the angle between the vector and the x axis is: 3 A. B. 2 1/ 3/2 C. D. 3/2 E. 3 15. If A = (6 m) (8 m) then 4A has magnitude: i j A. 10 m B. 20 m C. 30 m D. 40 m E. 50 m 16. A vector has a component of 10 m in the +x direction, a component of 10 m in the +y direction, and a component of 5 m in the +z direction. The magnitude of this vector is: A. zero B. 15 m C. 20 m D. 25 m E. 225 m 17. Let A. B. C. D. E. 30 V = (2.00 m) + (6.00 m) (3.00 m) k. The magnitude of V is: i j 5.00 m 5.57 m 7.00 m 7.42 m 8.54 m Chapter 3: VECTORS 18. A vector in the xy plane has a magnitude of 25 m and an x component of 12 m. The angle it makes with the positive x axis is: A. 26 B. 29 C. 61 D. 64 E. 241 19. The angle between A = (25 m) + (45 m) and the positive x axis is: i j A. 29 B. 61 C. 151 D. 209 E. 241 20. The angle between A = (25 m) + (45 m) and the positive x axis is: i j A. 29 B. 61 C. 119 D. 151 E. 209 21. Let A = (2 m) +(6 m) (3 m) k and B = (4 m) +(2 m) i j i j+(1 m) k. The vector sum S = A + B is: A. (6 m) + (8 m) (2 m) k i j B. (2 m) + (4 m) (4 m) k i j (4 m) + (4 m) k C. (2 m) i j + (12 m) (3 m) k D. (8 m) i j E. none of these 22. Let A = (2 m) + (6 m) (3 m) k and B = (4 m) + (2 m + (1 m) k. The vector dierence i j i j D = A B is: A. (6 m) + (8 m) (2 m) k i j + (4 m) (4 m) k B. (2 m) i j C. (2 m) (4 m) + (4 m) k i j D. (8 m) + (12 m) (3 m) k i j E. none of these Chapter 3: VECTORS 31 23. If A = (2 m) (3 m) and B = (1 m) (2 m) then A 2B = i j i j, A. (1 m) j B. (1 m) j (7 m) C. (4 m) i j D. (4 m) + (1 m) i j E. (4 m) + (7 m) i j 24. In the diagram, A has magnitude 12 m and B has magnitude 8 m. The x component of A + B is about: y A. B. C. D. E. .. ......... ..... ..... . ..... ............ 60 A .... . .... . ... ..... ... ..... . ... ..... ... ... . ... . ..... .. ... ...... B . .. . ........... 45 ... ... . ..... .. x 5.5 m 7.6 m 12 m 14 m 15 m 25. A certain vector in the xy plane has an x component of 4 m and a y component of 10 m. It is then rotated in the xy plane so its x component is doubled. Its new y component is about: A. 20 m B. 7.2 m C. 5.0 m D. 4.5 m E. 2.2 m 26. Vectors A and B each have magnitude L. When drawn with their tails at the same point, the angle between them is 30 . The value of A B is: A. zero B. 2 L C. 3L2 /2 D. 2L2 E. none of these 32 Chapter 3: VECTORS 27. Let A = (2 m) + (6 m) (3 m) k and B = (4 m) + (2 m) + (1 m) k. Then A B = i j i j A. (8 m) + (12 m) (3 m) k i j (14 m) (20 m) k B. (12 m) i j 2 C. 23 m D. 17 m2 E. none of these 28. Two vectors have magnitudes of 10 m and 15 m. The angle between them when they are drawn with their tails at the same point is 65 . The component of the longer vector along the line of the shorter is: A. 0 B. 4.2 m C. 6.3 m D. 9.1 m E. 14 m 29. Let S = (1 m) + (2 m) + (2 m) k and T = (3 m) + (4 m) k. The angle between these two i j i vectors is given by: A. cos1 (14/15) B. cos1 (11/225) C. cos1 (104/225) D. cos1 (11/15) E. cannot be found since S and T do not lie in the same plane 30. Two vectors lie with their tails at the same point. When the angle between them is increased by 20 their scalar product has the same magnitude but changes from positive to negative. The original angle between them was: A. 0 B. 60 C. 70 D. 80 E. 90 31. If the magnitude of the sum of two vectors is less than the magnitude of either vector, then: A. the scalar product of the vectors must be negative B. the scalar product of the vectors must be positive C. the vectors must be parallel and in opposite directions D. the vectors must be parallel and in the same direction E. none of the above Chapter 3: VECTORS 33 32. If the magnitude of the sum of two vectors is greater than the magnitude of either vector, then: A. the scalar product of the vectors must be negative B. the scalar product of the vectors must be positive C. the vectors must be parallel and in opposite directions D. the vectors must be parallel and in the same direction E. none of the above 33. Vectors A and B each have magnitude L. When drawn with their tails at the same point, the angle between them is 60 . The magnitude of the vector product A B is: A. L2 /2 B. 2 L C. 3L2 /2 D. 2L2 E. none of these 34. Two vectors lie with their tails at the same point. When the angle between them is increased by 20 the magnitude of their vector product doubles. The original angle between them was about: A. 0 B. 18 C. 25 D. 45 E. 90 35. Two vectors have magnitudes of 10 m and 15 m. The angle between them when they are drawn with their tails at the same point is 65 . The component of the longer vector along the line perpendicular to the shorter vector, in the plane of the vectors, is: A. 0 B. 4.2 m C. 6.3 m D. 9.1 m E. 14 m 36. The two vectors (3 m) (2 m) and (2 m) + (3 m) (2 m) k dene a plane. It is the plane of i j i j the triangle with both tails at one vertex and each head at one of the other vertices. Which of the following vectors is perpendicular to the plane? A. (4 m) + (6 m) + (13 m) k i j + (6 m) + (13 m) k B. (4 m) i j C. (4 m) (6 m) + (13 m) k i j + (6 m (13 m) k D. (4 m) i j E. (4 m) + (6 m) i j 34 Chapter 3: VECTORS 37. Let R = S T and = 90 , where is the angle between S and T when they are drawn with their tails at the same point. Which of the following is NOT true? A. |R| = |S ||T | sin B. R = T S C. R S = 0 D. R T = 0 E. S T = 0 38. The value of ( k) is: ij A. zero B. +1 C. 1 D. 3 3 E. i) 39. The value of k ( k is: A. zero B. +1 C. 1 D. 3 3 E. Chapter 3: VECTORS 35 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 1. Velocity is dened as: A. rate of change of position with time B. position divided by time C. rate of change of acceleration with time D. a speeding up or slowing down E. change of position 2. Acceleration is dened as: A. rate of change of position with time B. speed divided by time C. rate of change of velocity with time D. a speeding up or slowing down E. change of velocity 3. Which of the following is a scalar quantity? A. Speed B. Velocity C. Displacement D. Acceleration E. None of these 4. Which of the following is a vector quantity? A. Mass B. Density C. Speed D. Temperature E. None of these 5. Which of the following is NOT an example of accelerated motion? A. Vertical component of projectile motion B. Circular motion at constant speed C. A swinging pendulum D. Earths motion about sun E. Horizontal component of projectile motion 36 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 6. A particle goes from x = 2 m, y = 3 m, z = 1 m to x = 3 m, y = 1 m, z = 4 m. Its displacement is: A. (1 m) + (2 m) + (5 m) k i j (4 m) + (3 m) k B. (5 m) i j C. (5 m) + (4 m) (3 m) k i j (2 m) (5 m) k D. (1 m) i j E. (5 m) (2 m) + (3 m) k i j 7. A jet plane in straight horizontal ight passes over your head. When it is directly above you, the sound seems to come from a point behind the plane in a direction 30 from the vertical. The speed of the plane is: A. the same as the speed of sound B. half the speed of sound C. three-fths the speed of sound D. 0.866 times the speed of sound E. twice the speed of sound 8. A plane traveling north at 200 m/s turns and then travels south at 200 m/s. The change in its velocity is: A. zero B. 200 m/s north C. 200 m/s south D. 400 m/s north E. 400 m/s south 9. Two bodies are falling with negligible air resistance, side by side, above a horizontal plane. If one of the bodies is given an additional horizontal acceleration during its descent, it: A. strikes the plane at the same time as the other body B. strikes the plane earlier than the other body C. has the vertical component of its velocity altered D. has the vertical component of its acceleration altered E. follows a straight line path along the resultant acceleration vector 10. The velocity of a projectile equals its initial velocity added to: A. a constant horizontal velocity B. a constant vertical velocity C. a constantly increasing horizontal velocity D. a constantly increasing downward velocity E. a constant velocity directed at the target Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 37 11. A stone thrown from the top of a tall building follows a path that is: A. circular B. made of two straight line segments C. hyperbolic D. parabolic E. a straight line 12. Identical guns re identical bullets horizontally at the same speed from the same height above level planes, one on the Earth and one on the Moon. Which of the following three statements is/are true? I. The horizontal distance traveled by the bullet is greater for the Moon. II. The ight time is less for the bullet on the Earth. III. The velocity of the bullets at impact are the same. A. III only B. I and II only C. I and III only D. II and III only E. I, II, III 13. A stone is thrown horizontally and follows the path XYZ shown. The direction of the acceleration of the stone at point Y is: .. . ..................................................... ..... ..... .... .... .... .... X .... .... .... .... . . ............... .. . Y ...................... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . horizontal Z A. B. C. D. E. 38 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 14. A bullet shot horizontally from a gun: A. strikes the ground much later than one dropped vertically from the same point at the same instant B. never strikes the ground C. strikes the ground at approximately the same time as one dropped vertically from the same point at the same instant D. travels in a straight line E. strikes the ground much sooner than one dropped from the same point at the same instant 15. A bomber ying in level ight with constant velocity releases a bomb before it is over the target. Neglecting air resistance, which one of the following is NOT true? A. The bomber is over the target when the bomb strikes B. The acceleration of the bomb is constant C. The horizontal velocity of the plane equals the vertical velocity of the bomb when it hits the target D. The bomb travels in a curved path E. The time of ight of the bomb is independent of the horizontal speed of the plane 16. The airplane shown is in level ight at an altitude of 0.50 km and a speed of 150 km/h. At what distance d should it release a heavy bomb to hit the target X? Take g = 10 m/s2 . ...... ........ .. .. ............. .. ... .......................... . .... . . ............. . ............. .............. ..... . . ..... .. . . .......................... .................... .............. | | | 0.5 km | | | ..... ..... ..... 150 km/h ..................... .................... ... .. .. ... X d .......................... .......................... .......................... ............................... ............................... ............................... A. B. C. D. E. 150 m 295 m 420 m 2550 m 15, 000 m Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 39 17. An object is shot from the back of a railroad atcar moving at 40 km/h on a straight horizontal road. The launcher is aimed upward, perpendicular to the bed of the atcar. The object falls: A. in front of the atcar B. behind the atcar C. on the atcar D. either behind or in front of the atcar, depending on the initial speed of the object E. to the side of the atcar 18. A ball is thrown horizontally from the top of a 20-m high hill. It strikes the ground at an angle of 45 . With what speed was it thrown? . ..... ... ........ .......... ......... .. . ...................................... .. .......... ......... . ........................ ............ . ...... . .......... . ............. | ........ . .. ............ .............................. ............... ....... ..... .. ............ . ................. ................................. | ... ....... ..... ................................... .................... .................... ...... ..... ...... ............... ........................................... .. ................... . ....... .................... ......... .. .. ..................... 20 m .. . ..................................................... .. . . .... . ....................... ..... . ....................... ......... ........................ ........................ . .. . .......................... | .. . ........ . ..................................................... .. .. ........................ .. ...... ......................... ...... ......................... ................................ .................................... .. . . . ... .. . . ................................ . | ......................................................................... . ..................................................................... . ....... . .................................... .. ......................................................................... 45 ......... . ...................................... . ...................................... . . . .. . . . A. B. C. D. E. 14 m/s 20 m/s 28 m/s 32 m/s 40 m/s 19. A stone is thrown outward from the top of a 59.4-m high cli with an upward velocity component of 19.5 m/s. How long is stone in the air? A. 4.00 s B. 5.00 s C. 6.00 s D. 7.00 s E. 8.00 s 20. A large cannon is red from ground level over level ground at an angle of 30 above the horizontal. The muzzle speed is 980 m/s. Neglecting air resistance, the projectile will travel what horizontal distance before striking the ground? A. 4.3 km B. 8.5 km C. 43 km D. 85 km E. 170 km 40 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 21. A boy on the edge of a vertical cli 20 m high throws a stone horizontally outward with a speed of 20 m/s. It strikes the ground at what horizontal distance from the foot of the cli ? Use 2 g = 10 m/s . A. 10 m B. 40 m C. 50 m D. 50 5 m E. none of these 22. Which of the curves on the graph below best represents the vertical component vy of the velocity versus the time t for a projectile red at an angle of 45 above the horizontal? .... ...... vy ......... ... F ............. . ........... . ................................... ....................................... B .. A ........ .................................... ....... ........ ...... ..... ............ .. C t ... ....... O. ....... ....... ...... ...................................... E .................................... ... D A. B. C. D. E. OC DE AB AE AF Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 41 23. A cannon res a projectile as shown. The dashed line shows the trajectory in the absence of gravity; points MNOP correspond to the position of the projectile at one second intervals. If 2 g = 10 m/s , the lengths X,Y,Z are: . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. Y . .. .. . .. ......... ...... .. ................... ..... .... . ..... ...... .... .... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .. ... ..... .. ..... .. . .. ... .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .. ... .. . .. ....... .. ....... .. .. .. .... .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . .......... .. ........... . . .. . .. .. .. ... .. ... .. . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .... ..... . .. .. ... .. ..... .. ......... . ... ..... ............ ......... . ..... . M A. B. C. D. E. X N O Z P 5 m, 10 m, 15 m 5 m, 20 m, 45 m 10 m, 40 m, 90 m 10 m, 20 m, 30 m 0.2 m, 0.8 m, 1.8 m 24. A dart is thrown horizontally toward X at 20 m/s as shown. It hits Y 0.1 s later. The distance XY is: .... . . ..... . . . .... . ....... . .... .... . . .... .... . . .... . .... . .... . .... . .... . .... . .... . .... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ..... . . . . .................. ................... . .. .............. ........... .......... . . . ............. . ........... . . .. ........... ... ..... . .............. .. ........ . ... ..... ........ . . .. . ..... . ..... . ...... . ...... . .... . .... . ...... . . ...... .... . . ..... . .... . ..... .... . . ..... . .... ..... . . . . ........... .... . . .... . . . .......... .... .... . . . . .... . .... . . . .... . . .... . . . .... . . .... . . .... . .... . . . .. ...... . . . . . ... . ...... . . . ... . . ... . . ... .. . ... .... . . .. ... . ... .... . .... . . .... .. .. . .... . . .... .. .... ..... ..... . . .... ...... .... . . ... .... ... . .... ... . . .... ..... .... ... . . .... .... .... .... ..... .......... ..... ......... . A. B. C. D. E. 42 2m 1m 0.5 m 0.1 m 0.05 m Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS X Y 25. A projectile is red from ground level over level ground with an initial velocity that has a 2 vertical component of 20 m/s and a horizontal component of 30 m/s. Using g = 10 m/s , the distance from launching to landing points is: A. 40 m B. 60 m C. 80 m D. 120 m E. 180 m 26. An object, tied to a string, moves in a circle at constant speed on a horizontal surface as shown. The direction of the displacement of this object, as it travels from W to X is: W ................... .................... .... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. ... ... ... .. .. .... .. ... ... ... .. ... . .. . . .... .... .. ..................... .................... .. ... ... . ... ... ... .... ..... Z ..... ..... ... Y .. X A. B. C. D. E. 27. A toy racing car moves with constant speed around the circle shown below. When it is at point A its coordinates are x = 0, y = 3 m and its velocity is (6 m/s) When it is at point B its i. velocity and acceleration are: y A ................... ..................... ..... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. ... ... ... ... . . .... .... ..................... ......... .......... B A. B. C. D. E. x 2 i, (6 m/s) and (12 m/s ) respectively j 2 (6 m/s) and (12 m/s ) i, respectively i 2 i, (6 m/s) and (12 m/s ) respectively j 2 and (2 m/s ) j, respectively (6 m/s) i (6 m/s) and 0, respectively j Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 43 28. An airplane makes a gradual 90 turn while ying at a constant speed of 200 m/s. The process takes 20.0 seconds to complete. For this turn the magnitude of the average acceleration of the plane is: A. zero 2 B. 40 m/s 2 C. 20 m/s 2 D. 14 m/s 2 E. 10 m/s 29. An airplane is ying north at 500 km/h. It makes a gradual 180 turn at constant speed, changing its direction of travel from north through east to south. The process takes 40 s. The average acceleration of the plane for this turn (in km/hs) is: A. 12.5 km/h s, north B. 12.5 km/h s, east C. 12.5 km/h s, south D. 25 km/h s, north E. 25 km/h s, south 30. An object is moving on a circular path of radius meters at a constant speed of 4.0 m/s. The time required for one revolution is: A. 2/2 s B. 2 /2 s C. /2 s D. 2 /4 E. 2/ s 31. A particle moves at constant speed in a circular path. The instantaneous velocity and instantaneous acceleration vectors are: A. both tangent to the circular path B. both perpendicular to the circular path C. perpendicular to each other D. opposite to each other E. none of the above 32. A stone is tied to a string and whirled at constant speed in a horizontal circle. The speed is then doubled without changing the length of the string. Afterward the magnitude of the acceleration of the stone is: A. the same B. twice as great C. four times as great D. half as great E. one-fourth as great 44 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 33. Two objects are traveling around dierent circular orbits with constant speed. They both have the same acceleration but object A is traveling twice as fast as object B. The orbit radius for the orbit radius for object B. object A is A. one-fourth B. one-half C. the same as D. twice E. four times 34. A stone is tied to a 0.50-m string and whirled at a constant speed of 4.0 m/s in a vertical circle. Its acceleration at the top of the circle is: 2 A. 9.8 m/s , up B. 9.8 m/s2 , down 2 C. 8.0 m/s , down 2 D. 32 m/s , up 2 E. 32 m/s , down 35. A stone is tied to a 0.50-m string and whirled at a constant speed of 4.0 m/s in a vertical circle. Its acceleration at the bottom of the circle is: 2 A. 9.8 m/s , up B. 9.8 m/s2 , down C. 8.0 m/s2 , up 2 D. 32 m/s , up 2 E. 32 m/s , down 36. A car rounds a 20-m radius curve at 10 m/s. The magnitude of its acceleration is: A. 0 2 B. 0.20 m/s 2 C. 5.0 m/s D. 40 m/s2 2 E. 400 m/s 37. For a biological sample in a 1.0-m radius centrifuge to have a centripetal acceleration of 25g its speed must be: A. 11 m/s B. 16 m/s C. 50 m/s D. 122 m/s E. 245 m/s Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 45 38. A girl jogs around a horizontal circle with a constant speed. She travels one fourth of a revolution, a distance of 25 m along the circumference of the circle, in 5.0 s. The magnitude of her acceleration is: 2 A. 0.31 m/s B. 1.3 m/s2 C. 1.6 m/s2 2 D. 3.9 m/s 2 E. 6.3 m/s 39. A stone is tied to the end of a string and is swung with constant speed around a horizontal circle with a radius of 1.5 m. If it makes two complete revolutions each second, the magnitude of its acceleration is: 2 A. 0.24 m/s 2 B. 2.4 m/s C. 24 m/s2 2 D. 240 m/s 2 E. 2400 m/s 40. A Ferris wheel with a radius of 8.0 m makes 1 revolution every 10 s. When a passenger is at the top, essentially a diameter above the ground, he releases a ball. How far from the point on the ground directly under the release point does the ball land? A. 0 B. 1.0 m C. 8.0 m D. 9.1 m E. 16 m 41. A boat is able to move through still water at 20 m/s. It makes a round trip to a town 3.0 km upstream. If the river ows at 5 m/s, the time required for this round trip is: A. 120 s B. 150 s C. 200 s D. 300 s E. 320 s 46 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 42. A boat is traveling upstream at 14 km/h with respect to a river that is owing at 6 km/h (with respect to the ground). A man runs directly across the boat, from one side to the other, at 6 km/h (with respect to the boat). The speed of the man with respect to the ground is: A. 10 km/h B. 14 km/h C. 18.5 km/h D. 21 km/h E. 26 km/h 43. A ferry boat is sailing at 12 km/h 30 W of N with respect to a river that is owing at 6.0 km/h E. As observed from the shore, the ferry boat is sailing: A. 30 E of N B. due N C. 30 W of N D. 45 E of N E. none of these 44. A boy wishes to row across a river in the shortest possible time. He can row at 2 m/s in still water and the river is owing at 1 m/s. At what angle should he point the bow (front) of his boat? .. .. . . . . .... ..... . . ... ..... A. B. C. D. E. .. ... .. .. .. . .. .. ......... . ...... .. . . .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .... . .. ... . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . ..................... .................... .. . . .. .... 1 m/s 30 45 60 63 90 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 47 45. A girl wishes to swim across a river to a point directly opposite as shown. She can swim at 2 m/s in still water and the river is owing at 1 m/s. At what angle with respect to the line joining the starting and nishing points should she swim? .... ......................... ........................ .. .. 1 m/s A. B. C. D. E. nish start . .. .. . . . .. ........... .......... .. ..... .... . .... .... .. .. ... ... ... . ..... . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . . . .. .. 30 45 60 63 90 46. A motor boat can travel at 10 km/h in still water. A river ows at 5 km/h west. A boater wishes to cross from the south bank to a point directly opposite on the north bank. At what angle must the boat be headed? A. 27 E of N B. 30 E of N C. 45 E of N D. 60 E of N E. depends on the width of the river 47. Two projectiles are in ight at the same time. The acceleration of one relative to the other: 2 A. is always 9.8 m/s B. can be as large as 19.8 m/s2 C. can be horizontal D. is zero E. none of these 48 Chapter 4: MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 1. An A. B. C. D. E. example of an inertial reference frame is: any reference frame that is not accelerating a frame attached to a particle on which there are no forces any reference frame that is at rest a reference frame attached to the center of the universe a reference frame attached to Earth 2. An A. B. C. D. E. object moving at constant velocity in an inertial frame must: have a net force on it eventually stop due to gravity not have any force of gravity on it have zero net force on it have no frictional force on it 3. In SI units a force is numerically equal to the A. velocity of the standard kilogram B. speed of the standard kilogram C. velocity of any object D. acceleration of the standard kilogram E. acceleration of any object , when the force is applied to it. 4. Which of the following quantities is NOT a vector? A. Mass B. Displacement C. Weight D. Acceleration E. Force 5. A newton is the force: A. of gravity on a 1 kg body B. of gravity on a 1 g body 2 C. that gives a 1 g body an acceleration of 1 cm/s 2 D. that gives a 1 kg body an acceleration of 1 m/s 2 E. that gives a 1 kg body an acceleration of 9.8 m/s Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 49 6. The unit of force called the newton is: 2 A. 9.8 kg m/s 2 B. 1 kg m/s C. dened by means of Newtons third law D. 1 kg of mass E. 1 kg of force 7. A force of 1 N is: A. 1 kg/s B. 1 kg m/s C. 1 kg m/s2 D. 1 kg m2 /s 2 E. 1 kg m2 /s 8. The standard 1-kg mass is attached to a compressed spring and the spring is released. If the mass initially has an acceleration of 5.6 m/s2 , the force of the spring has a magnitude of: A. 2.8 N B. 5.6 N C. 11.2 N D. 0 E. an undetermined amount 9. Acceleration is always in the direction: A. of the displacement B. of the initial velocity C. of the nal velocity D. of the net force E. opposite to the frictional force 10. The term mass refers to the same physical concept as: A. weight B. inertia C. force D. acceleration C. volume 50 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 11. The inertia of a body tends to cause the body to: A. speed up B. slow down C. resist any change in its motion D. fall toward Earth E. decelerate due to friction 12. A heavy ball is suspended as shown. A quick jerk on the lower string will break that string but a slow pull on the lower string will break the upper string. The rst result occurs because: ..................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... ..... .... ... . ...... . ...... .... ... ...... ...... . ....... ... .... ..... ..... .. A. B. C. D. E. upper string lower string the force is too small to move the ball action and reaction is operating the ball has inertia air friction holds the ball back the ball has too much energy 2 13. When a certain force is applied to the standard kilogram its acceleration is 5.0 m/s . When the same force is applied to another object its acceleration is one-fth as much. The mass of the object is: A. 0.2 kg B. 0.5 kg C. 1.0 kg D. 5.0 kg E. 10 kg 14. Mass diers from weight in that: A. all objects have weight but some lack mass B. weight is a force and mass is not C. the mass of an object is always more than its weight D. mass can be expressed only in the metric system E. there is no dierence Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 51 15. The mass of a body: A. is slightly dierent at dierent places on Earth B. is a vector C. is independent of the free-fall acceleration D. is the same for all bodies of the same volume E. can be measured most accurately on a spring scale 16. The mass and weight of a body: A. dier by a factor of 9.8 B. are identical C. are the same physical quantities expressed in dierent units D. are both a direct measure of the inertia of the body E. have the same ratio as that of any other body placed at that location 17. An object placed on an equal-arm balance requires 12 kg to balance it. When placed on a spring scale, the scale reads 12 kg. Everything (balance, scale, set of weights and object) is now transported to the Moon where the free-fall acceleration is one-sixth that on Earth. The new readings of the balance and spring scale (respectively) are: A. 12 kg, 12 kg B. 2 kg, 2 kg C. 12 kg, 2 kg D. 2 kg, 12 kg E. 12 kg, 72 kg 18. Two objects, one having three times the mass of the other, are dropped from the same height in a vacuum. At the end of their fall, their velocities are equal because: A. anything falling in vacuum has constant velocity B. all objects reach the same terminal velocity C. the acceleration of the larger object is three times greater than that of the smaller object D. the force of gravity is the same for both objects E. none of the above 19. A feather and a lead ball are dropped from rest in vacuum on the Moon. The acceleration of the feather is: A. more than that of the lead ball B. the same as that of the lead ball C. less than that of the lead ball 2 D. 9.8 m/s E. zero since it oats in a vacuum 52 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 20. The block shown moves with constant velocity on a horizontal surface. Two of the forces on it are shown. A frictional force exerted by the surface is the only other horizontal force on the block. The frictional force is: 3N 5N ... . .......................... ......................... .. .... .... . ... ................... ................... ..... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................. .................. A. B. C. D. E. 0 2 N, leftward 2 N, rightward slightly more than 2 N, leftward slightly less than 2 N, leftward 21. Two forces, one with a magnitude of 3 N and the other with a magnitude of 5 N, are applied to an object. For which orientations of the forces shown in the diagrams is the magnitude of the acceleration of the object the least? 3N . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 5N . ... ................... .................. .. .... ... ... .. ......................... ......................... . .... .... 3N .. ... .... ..... ..... . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. 5N ... .. ......................... ......................... . .... .... A . ......................... ......................... .. .... .... B C 3N 3N ... ... ............... ............... .... .... ..... ..... .. . ... . .... . ... .. .. .. .. .. 5N ... . .. ......................... ......................... . ... .... ... . .. .......................... ........................ . .. .. .. . D 3N 5 .N . . 5N E 22. A crate rests on a horizontal surface and a woman pulls on it with a 10-N force. Rank the situations shown below according to the magnitude of the normal force exerted by the surface on the crate, least to greatest. . .. . . .. .. . .. . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . 10 N ... ... ..... ..... . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. 10 N ... ... ................ ............... . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 1 A. B. C. D. E. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 2 10 N .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 3 1, 2, 3 2, 1, 3 2, 3, 1 1, 3, 2 3, 2, 1 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 53 23. A heavy wooden block is dragged by a force F along a rough steel plate, as shown in the diagrams for two cases. The magnitude of the applied force F is the same for both cases. The normal force in (ii), as compared with the normal force in (i) is: F .. .. .............. .............. .. . . .... .... F ............................. ............................. ....... ............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ....... ...... ...... .... .. . ... .... ... ........ .... .. . ....... .... . .... .. .... . . .. .... .... ..... .... . . .. .... .. ... .. .... .... . .. . .... . . .. .. ........ . .. .. ....... .... .... .. ... . .... .... . . .... ....... . .. .. ... .... . .. . .. .. .. . . ..... . .. .. ..... . .. .... . . .. .. .... . . .... . . .. .. . .. ..... . ..... .. . . .. ....... . . .. ....... . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . . .... . ..... . . .. . . . ..... . ....... . .. . ... . . .... . .. . .. (i) A. B. C. D. E. (ii) the same greater less less for some angles of the incline and greater for others less or greater, depending on the magnitude of the applied force F . 24. Equal forces F act on isolated bodies A and B. The mass of B is three times that of A. The magnitude of the acceleration of A is: A. three times that of B B. 1/3 that of B C. the same as B D. nine times that of B E. 1/9 that of B 25. A car travels east at constant velocity. The net force on the car is: A. east B. west C. up D. down E. zero 26. A constant force of 8.0 N is exerted for 4.0 s on a 16-kg object initially at rest. The change in speed of this object will be: A. 0.5 m/s B. 2 m/s C. 4 m/s D. 8 m/s E. 32 m/s 54 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 27. A 6-kg object is moving south. A net force of 12 N north on it results in the object having an acceleration of: 2 A. 2 m/s , north 2 B. 2 m/s , south C. 6 m/s2 , north 2 D. 18 m/s , north 2 E. 18 m/s , south 28. A 9000-N automobile is pushed along a level road by four students who apply a total forward force of 500 N. Neglecting friction, the acceleration of the automobile is: 2 A. 0.055 m/s 2 B. 0.54 m/s 2 C. 1.8 m/s 2 D. 9.8 m/s 2 E. 18 m/s 29. An object rests on a horizontal frictionless surface. A horizontal force of magnitude F is applied. This force produces an acceleration: A. only if F is larger than the weight of the object B. only while the object suddenly changes from rest to motion C. always D. only if the inertia of the object decreases E. only if F is increasing 30. A 25-kg crate is pushed across a frictionless horizontal oor with a force of 20 N, directed 20 below the horizontal. The acceleration of the crate is: 2 A. 0.27 m/s 2 B. 0.75 m/s C. 0.80 m/s2 2 D. 170 m/s 2 E. 470 m/s 31. A ball with a weight of 1.5 N is thrown at an angle of 30 above the horizontal with an initial speed of 12 m/s. At its highest point, the net force on the ball is: A. 9.8 N, 30 below horizontal B. zero C. 9.8 N, up D. 9.8 N, down E. 1.5 N, down Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 55 32. Two forces are applied to a 5.0-kg crate; one is 6.0 N to the north and the other is 8.0 N to the west. The magnitude of the acceleration of the crate is: 2 A. 0.50 m/s 2 B. 2.0 m/s C. 2.8 m/s2 2 D. 10 m/s 2 E. 50 m/s 33. A 400-N steel ball is suspended by a light rope from the ceiling. The tension in the rope is: A. 400 N B. 800 N C. zero D. 200 N E. 560 N 34. A heavy steel ball B is suspended by a cord from a block of wood W. The entire system is dropped through the air. Neglecting air resistance, the tension in the cord is: A. zero B. the dierence in the masses of B and W C. the dierence in the weights of B and W D. the weight of B E. none of these 35. A circus performer of weight W is walking along a high wire as shown. The tension in the wire: .. ..... ..... .... .. ... ...... . ... ........ .. .... ..... ........ .. .... ................ . ......... . ....... .. . . ... . .. .. . . .. ... . .... . ... ....... . . . .... . . . ... . . ... . . .. . .. . . .. .. ..... . .. . . . .. ......... ...... .. . . ............. .. . . . .. ....... ........ . .. . . ....... . .......... . .. . . . ............. ........ .. . . .. .................................................. . . .................. .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ............................... .... .. A. B. C. D. E. 56 is approximately W is approximately W/2 is much less than W is much more than W depends on whether he stands on one foot or two feet Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I . .... 2 36. A 1000-kg elevator is rising and its speed is increasing at 3 m/s . The tension force of the cable on the elevator is: A. 6800 N B. 1000 N C. 3000 N D. 9800 N E. 12800 N 37. A 5-kg block is suspended by a rope from the ceiling of an elevator as the elevator accelerates 2 downward at 3.0 m/s . The tension force of the rope on the block is: A. 15 N, up B. 34 N, up C. 34 N, down D. 64 N, up E. 64 N, down 38. A crane operator lowers a 16, 000-N steel ball with a downward acceleration of 3 m/s2 . The tension force of the cable is: A. 4900 N B. 11, 000 N C. 16, 000 N D. 21, 000 N E. 48, 000 N 39. A 1-N pendulum bob is held at an angle from the vertical by a 2-N horizontal force F as shown. The tension in the string supporting the pendulum bob (in newtons) is: .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..................... ... ... .. ........ ........ . .... .. .. . . ... . .. ... .......................................................................... F . . A. B. C. D. E. cos 2/ cos 5 1 none of these Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 57 2 40. A car moves horizontally with a constant acceleration of 3 m/s . A ball is suspended by a string from the ceiling of the car. The ball does not swing, being at rest with respect to the car. What angle does the string make with the vertical? A. 17 B. 35 C. 52 D. 73 E. Cannot be found without knowing the length of the string 2 41. A man weighing 700 Nb is in an elevator that is accelerating upward at 4 m/s . The force exerted on him by the elevator oor is: A. 71 N B. 290 N C. 410 N D. 700 N E. 990 N 42. You stand on a spring scale on the oor of an elevator. Of the following, the scale shows the highest reading when the elevator: A. moves upward with increasing speed B. moves upward with decreasing speed C. remains stationary D. moves downward with increasing speed E. moves downward at constant speed 43. You stand on a spring scale on the oor of an elevator. Of the following, the scale shows the highest reading when the elevator: A. moves downward with increasing speed B. moves downward with decreasing speed C. remains stationary D. moves upward with decreasing speed E. moves upward at constant speed 44. When a 25-kg crate is pushed across a frictionless horizontal oor with a force of 200 N, directed 20 below the horizontal, the magnitude of the normal force of the oor on the crate is: A. 25 N B. 68 N C. 180 N D. 250 N E. 310 N 58 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 45. A block slides down a frictionless plane that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. The acceleration of the block is: 2 A. 980 cm/s 2 B. 566 cm/s C. 849 cm/s2 D. zero 2 E. 490 cm/s 46. A 25-N crate slides down a frictionless incline that is 25 above the horizontal. The magnitude of the normal force of the incline on the crate is: A. 11 N B. 23 N C. 25 N D. 100 N E. 220 N 47. A 25-N crate is held at rest on a frictionless incline by a force that is parallel to the incline. If the incline is 25 above the horizontal the magnitude of the applied force is: A. 4.1 N B. 4.6 N C. 8.9 N D. 11 N E. 23 N 48. A 25-N crate is held at rest on a frictionless incline by a force that is parallel to the incline. If the incline is 25 above the horizontal the magnitude of the normal force of the incline on the crate is: A. 4.1 N B. 4.6 N C. 8.9 N D. 11 N E. 23 N 49. A 32-N force, parallel to the incline, is required to push a certain crate at constant velocity up a frictionless incline that is 30 above the horizontal. The mass of the crate is: A. 3.3 kg B. 3.8 kg C. 5.7 kg D. 6.5 kg E. 160 kg Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 59 50. A sled is on an icy (frictionless) slope that is 30 above the horizontal. When a 40-N force, parallel to the incline and directed up the incline, is applied to the sled, the acceleration of the 2 sled is 2.0 m/s , down the incline. The mass of the sled is: A. 3.8 kg B. 4.1 kg C. 5.8 kg D. 6.2 kg E. 10 kg 51. When a 40-N force, parallel to the incline and directed up the incline, is applied to a crate on 2 a frictionless incline that is 30 above the horizontal, the acceleration of the crate is 2.0 m/s , up the incline. The mass of the crate is: A. 3.8 kg B. 4.1 kg C. 5.8 kg D. 6.2 kg E. 10 kg 52. The reaction force does not cancel the action force because: A. the action force is greater than the reaction force B. they are on dierent bodies C. they are in the same direction D. the reaction force exists only after the action force is removed E. the reaction force is greater than the action force 53. A book rests on a table, exerting a downward force on the table. The reaction to this force is: A. the force of Earth on the book B. the force of the table on the book C. the force of Earth on the table D. the force of the book on Earth E. the inertia of the book 54. A lead block is suspended from your hand by a string. The reaction to the force of gravity on the block is the force exerted by: A. the string on the block B. the block on the string C. the string on the hand D. the hand on the string E. the block on Earth 60 Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 2 55. A 5-kg concrete block is lowered with a downward acceleration of 2.8 m/s by means of a rope. The force of the block on the rope is: A. 14 N, up B. 14 N, down C. 35 N, up D. 35 N, down E. 49 N, up 56. A 90-kg man stands in an elevator that is moving up at a constant speed of 5.0 m/s. The force exerted by him on the oor is about: A. zero B. 90 N C. 880 N D. 450 N E. 49 N 57. A 90-kg man stands in an elevator that has a downward acceleration of 1.4 m/s2 . The force exerted by him on the oor is about: A. zero B. 90 N C. 760 N D. 880 N E. 1010 N 58. A 5-kg concrete block is lowered with a downward acceleration of 2.8 m/s2 by means of a rope. The force of the block on Earth is: A. 14 N, up B. 14 N, down C. 35 N, up D. 35 N, down E. 49 N, up Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 61 59. Two blocks are connected by a string and pulley as shown. Assuming that the string and pulley are massless, the magnitude of the acceleration of each block is: ..................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........... .............. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .... .... ... ... ......... ......... 90 g 110 g A. B. C. D. E. 2 0.049 m/s 2 0.020 m/s 0.0098 m/s2 2 0.54 m/s 2 0.98 m/s 60. A 70-N block and a 35-N block are connected by a string as shown. If the pulley is massless and the surface is frictionless, the magnitude of the acceleration of the 35-N block is: ..... ........... .... ...... ... .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ... ............. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ................ ................ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. . .. . . ..... .. .... ..... . . .. .... . .... .... . .... . ... . . ..... .. .... ..... . . .. .... . .. .. 70 N . ... ..... . pulley 35 N A. B. C. D. E. 62 2 1.6 m/s 2 3.3 m/s 2 4.9 m/s 6.7 m/s2 2 9.8 m/s Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 61. A 13-N weight and a 12-N weight are connected by a massless string over a massless, frictionless pulley. The 13-N weight has a downward acceleration with magnitude equal to that of a freely falling body times: A. 1 B. 1/12 C. 1/13 D. 1/25 E. 13/25 62. A massless rope passes over a massless pulley suspended from the ceiling. A 4-kg block is attached to one end and a 5-kg block is attached to the other end. The acceleration of the 5-kg block is: A. g/4 B. 5g/9 C. 4g/9 D. g/5 E. g/9 63. Two blocks, weighing 250 N and 350 N, respectively, are connected by a string that passes over a massless pulley as shown. The tension in the string is: .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ............. ..... ........ ... .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . ... .. .. .... ............. ........... 250 N 350 N A. B. C. D. E. 210 N 290 N 410 N 500 N 4900 N Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 63 64. Three books (X, Y, and Z) rest on a table. The weight of each book is indicated. The net force acting on book Y is: X 4N 5N Z 10 N ............................. ............................. Y ............................. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. B. C. D. E. 4 N down 5 N up 9 N down zero none of these 65. Three books (X, Y, and Z) rest on a table. The weight of each book is indicated. The force of book Z on book Y is: X 4N 5N Z 10 N ............................. ............................. Y ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A. B. C. D. E. 0 5N 9N 14 N 19 N 66. Three blocks (A,B,C), each having mass M , are connected by strings as shown. Block C is pulled to the right by a force F that causes the entire system to accelerate. Neglecting friction, the net force acting on block B is: A B C . . ................. ................ .. .. ... ..... F .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ................................. A. B. C. D. E. 64 zero F /3 F /2 2F /3 F Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 67. Two blocks with masses m and M are pushed along a horizontal frictionless surface by a horizontal applied force F as shown. The magnitude of the force of either of these blocks on the other is: F . . ................. ................ .. .. ... ..... M m .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...................... A. B. C. D. E. mF/(m + M ) mF/M mF/(M m) M F/(M + m) M F/m 68. Two blocks (A and B) are in contact on a horizontal frictionless surface. A 36-N constant force is applied to A as shown. The magnitude of the force of A on B is: 36 N . . ................. ................ .. .. ... ..... A B mA = 4.0 kg mB = 20 kg .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ......................... A. B. C. D. E. 1.5 N 6.0 N 29 N 30 N 36 N 69. A short 10-g string is used to pull a 50-g toy across a frictionless horizontal surface. If a 3.0 102 -N force is applied horizontally to the free end, the force of the string on the toy, at the other end, is: A. 0.15 N B. 6.0 103 N C. 2.5 102 N D. 3.0 102 N E. 3.5 102 N Chapter 5: FORCE AND MOTION I 65 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 1. A brick slides on a horizontal surface. Which of the following will increase the magnitude of the frictional force on it? A. Putting a second brick on top B. Decreasing the surface area of contact C. Increasing the surface area of contact D. Decreasing the mass of the brick E. None of the above 2. The coecient of kinetic friction: A. is in the direction of the frictional force B. is in the direction of the normal force C. is the ratio of force to area D. can have units of newtons E. is none of the above 3. When the brakes of an automobile are applied, the road exerts the greatest retarding force: A. while the wheels are sliding B. just before the wheels start to slide C. when the automobile is going fastest D. when the acceleration is least E. at the instant when the speed begins to change 4. A forward horizontal force of 12 N is used to pull a 240-N crate at constant velocity across a horizontal oor. The coecient of friction is: A. 0.5 B. 0.05 C. 2 D. 0.2 E. 20 5. The speed of a 4.0-N hockey puck, sliding across a level ice surface, decreases at the rate of 2 0.61 m/s . The coecient of kinetic friction between the puck and ice is: A. 0.062 B. 0.41 C. 0.62 D. 1.2 E. 9.8 66 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 6. A crate rests on a horizontal surface and a woman pulls on it with a 10-N force. No matter what the orientation of the force, the crate does not move. Rank the situations shown below according to the magnitude of the frictional force of the surface on the crate, least to greatest. . . .. . .. . .... .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . 10 N .. .... .. ..... ...... .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 10 N .. . . ................ ............... . . ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 1 A. B. C. D. E. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 2 10 N .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 3 1, 2, 3 2, 1, 3 2, 3, 1 1, 3, 2 3, 2, 1 7. A crate with a weight of 50 N rests on a horizontal surface. A person pulls horizontally on it with a force of 10 N and it does not move. To start it moving, a second person pulls vertically upward on the crate. If the coecient of static friction is 0.4, what is the smallest vertical force for which the crate moves? . .. .. .. . ..... .... . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N .. . .. ..................... .................... . .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................. .................. A. B. C. D. E. 4N 10 N 14 N 25 N 35 N 8. A 40-N crate rests on a rough horizontal oor. A 12-N horizontal force is then applied to it. If the coecients of friction are s = 0.5 and k = 0.4, the magnitude of the frictional force on the crate is: A. 8 N B. 12 N C. 16 N D. 20 N E. 40 N Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 67 9. A 24-N horizontal force is applied to a 40-N block initially at rest on a rough horizontal surface. If the coecients of friction are s = 0.5 and k = 0.4, the magnitude of the frictional force on the block is: A. 8 N B. 12 N C. 16 N D. 20 N E. 400 N 10. A horizontal shove of at least 200 N is required to start moving a 800-N crate initially at rest on a horizontal oor. The coecient of static friction is: A. 0.25 B. 0.125 C. 0.50 D. 4.00 E. none of these 11. A force F (larger than the largest possible force of static friction) is applied to the left to an object moving to the right on a horizontal surface. Then: A. the object must be moving at constant speed B. F and the friction force act in opposite directions C. the object must be slowing down D. the object must be speeding up E. the object must come to rest and remain at rest 12. A bureau rests on a rough horizontal surface (s = 0.50, k = 0.40). A constant horizontal force, just sucient to start the bureau in motion, is then applied. The acceleration of the bureau is: A. 0 2 B. 0.98 m/s 2 C. 3.3 m/s 2 D. 4.5 m/s E. 8.9 m/s2 13. A car is traveling at 15 m/s on a horizontal road. The brakes are applied and the car skids to a stop in 4.0 s. The coecient of kinetic friction between the tires and road is: A. 0.38 B. 0.69 C. 0.76 D. 0.92 E. 1.11 68 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 14. A boy pulls a wooden box along a rough horizontal oor at constant speed by means of a force P as shown. In the diagram f is the magnitude of the force of friction, N is the magnitude of the normal force, and Fg is the magnitude of the force of gravity. Which of the following must be true? . .. .. .. ..... . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f N . ... ........................ ........................ .. .... .... ... . ..................... ..................... .. .. . . .. Fg : force of gravity f : frictional force N : normal force P ............................. ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .... ..... . .. .. . .. g . F A. B. C. D. E. P = f and N P = f and N P > f and N P > f and N none of these = Fg > Fg < Fg = Fg 15. A boy pulls a wooden box along a rough horizontal oor at constant speed by means of a force P as shown. In the diagram f is the magnitude of the force of friction, N is the magnitude of the normal force, and Fg is the magnitude of the force of gravity. Which of the following must be true? . .. .. . .. . .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . f N ...... ....... .. .. ..... ... . ... . .... ... .... ... ... ... . .. .... ... .... Fg : force of gravity f : frictional force N : normal force P . . .............................. .............................. .. .... .... .. ............................. . ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ..... .. . .. . .. g . F A. B. C. D. E. P = f and N P = f and N P > f and N P > f and N none of these = Fg > Fg < Fg = Fg Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 69 16. A 400-N block is dragged along a horizontal surface by an applied force F as shown. The coefcient of kinetic friction is k = 0.4 and the block moves at constant velocity. The magnitude of F is: . ...... ...... .. ... .... ... ... . ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... F (3/5)F (4/5)F ............................. ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A. B. C. D. E. 100 N 150 N 200 N 290 N 400 Nb 17. A block of mass m is pulled at constant velocity along a rough horizontal oor by an applied force T as shown. The magnitude of the frictional force is: ... .... ....... .. .... ... . ... . ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... . ... .. . . ... ... . . ... ... . T ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A. B. C. D. E. 70 T cos T sin zero mg mg cos Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 18. A block of mass m is pulled along a rough horizontal oor by an applied force T as shown. The vertical component of the force exerted on the block by the oor is: ....... ...... . .. .... ... . ... . ... ... ... ... . . ... ... .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... . ... .. . ... ... . . ... ... . T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . A. B. C. D. E. mg mg T cos mg + T cos mg T sin mg + T sin 19. A 12-kg crate rests on a horizontal surface and a boy pulls on it with a force that is 30 below the horizontal. If the coecient of static friction is 0.40, the minimum magnitude force he needs to start the crate moving is: A. 44 N B. 47 N C. 54 N D. 56 N E. 71 N 20. A crate resting on a rough horizontal oor is to be moved horizontally. The coecient of static friction is 0.40. To start the crate moving with the weakest possible applied force, in what direction should the force be applied? A. Horizontal B. 24 below the horizontal C. 22 above the horizontal D. 24 above the horizontal E. 66 below the horizontal 21. A 50-N force is applied to a crate on a horizontal rough oor, causing it to move horizontally. If the coecient of kinetic friction is 0.50, in what direction should the force be applied to obtain the greatest acceleration? A. Horizontal B. 60 above the horizontal C. 30 above the horizontal D. 27 above the horizontal E. 30 below the horizontal Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 71 22. A professor holds an eraser against a vertical chalkboard by pushing horizontally on it. He pushes with a force that is much greater than is required to hold the eraser. The force of friction exerted by the board on the eraser increases if he: A. pushes with slightly greater force B. pushes with slightly less force C. stops pushing D. pushes so his force is slightly downward but has the same magnitude E. pushes so his force is slightly upward but has the same magnitude 23. A horizontal force of 12 N pushes a 0.5-kg book against a vertical wall. The book is initially at rest. If the coecients of friction are s = 0.6 and k = 0.8 which of the following is true? A. The magnitude of the frictional force is 4.9 N B. The magnitude of the frictional force is 7.2 N C. The normal force is 4.9 N D. The book will start moving and accelerate E. If started moving downward, the book will decelerate 24. A horizontal force of 5.0 N pushes a 0.50-kg book against a vertical wall. The book is initially at rest. If the coecients of friction are s = 0.6 and k = 0.80, the magnitude of the frictional force is: A. 0 B. 4.9 N C. 3.0 N D. 5.0 N E. 4.0 N 25. A horizontal force of 12 N pushes a 0.50-kg book against a vertical wall. The book is initially at rest. If s = 0.6 and k = 0.80, the acceleration of the book in m/s2 is: A. 0 2 B. 9.4 m/s 2 C. 9.8 m/s 2 D. 14.4 m/s E. 19.2 m/s2 26. A horizontal force of 5.0 N pushes a 0.50-kg block against a vertical wall. The block is initially at rest. If s = 0.60 and k = 0.80, the acceleration of the block in m/s2 is: A. 0 B. 1.8 C. 6.0 D. 8.0 E. 9.8 72 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 27. A heavy wooden block is dragged by a force F along a rough steel plate, as shown below for two possible situations. The magnitude of F is the same for the two situations. The magnitude of the frictional force in (ii), as compared with that in (i) is: F .. . .. ............... ............. . .. . .. .. . . ... ....... ...... ..... ..... .... ... ..... . .... ... ........ . .... .... ... . . .. . ... . .... .... .... .... . . .. .. .... . .... . .... .... . .... . . . .. ............ .......... . . . .... .. .... . . .. .. . . ....... . .... ........ . .... .. . .. .. ... . ..... . . .. .. . .. . . . ..... . . ....... . .. .. .. . . .... . .. .... . . . . .. . .. . . .. ..... . . . ...... . . ......... . .. ..... . . .. ...... . . . ..... .. . . .. . . .. . . . ..... . . .... . . . .. . . . .... . . ..... . . . . ....... . . .. ....... .. .. . .. .... .. .. ....... ..... ..... .. .. . F ............................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. (ii) (i) A. B. C. D. E. the same greater less less for some angles and greater for others can be less or greater, depending on the magnitude of the applied force. 28. A block is rst placed on its long side and then on its short side on the same inclined plane, as shown. The block slides down the plane on its short side but remains at rest on its long side. A possible explanation is: . ... .... . .... .. ... ... ... .. .... . .... .. .. .. . .... .... .... .. . .. .... . ... .. ... ..... . ... ..... . ... .. .......... .. ........... . ..... .... .... . . . .. ... . . .... . . .. .... ... ... . . . ... . . . .. . .. .... . . . .. .... .. . . . .. . . .. ..... . . . ..... . . .. .. . . . ........ . . ........ . .. . .. .. . .... . .. .......... . . .. .......... . .. . ..... ... . .. . ...... . . ... . ... ...... ... . .. . . . . . ..... . . ....... .. . . . .. .... . . . .... . . . ..... . . . . . ... . . ........ . . .. . .... . .. .. m m v (ii) A. B. C. D. E. ..... ..... .... .. .... ... .... .... .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ... .. . ...... .... .. .. .. .. .... . . .. ..... . . . .. . .. .. ....... . . .. .. ........ .. .. . .. . .. ...... . ......... .. .. .. ... .... . .. . .. ........... . .. ... .. .. ...... .. . . .... .. ...... .. . .. . .. . . .. . ..... ..... .. . . .. ... .. . .... . . . ... ...... ...... ..... . . . .. ... . .. ............ . ....... . . .. ......... . . .... . . . .. ..... ... . ..... .... .. . . . . ..... . . . ....... . . . . ... . . . ... . . . . . .... ... . ......... . . .. . . ... . . ....... . .. . .... . .. .. (ii) the short side is smoother the frictional force is less because the contact area is less the center of gravity is higher in the second case the normal force is less in the second case the force of gravity is more nearly down the plane in the second case 29. A box rests on a rough board 10 meters long. When one end of the board is slowly raised to a height of 6 meters above the other end, the box begins to slide. The coecient of static friction is: A. 0.8 B. 0.25 C. 0.4 D. 0.6 E. 0.75 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 73 30. A block is placed on a rough wooden plane. It is found that when the plane is tilted 30 to the horizontal, the block will slide down at constant speed. The coecient of kinetic friction of the block with the plane is: A. 0.500 B. 0.577 C. 1.73 D. 0.866 E. 4.90 31. A crate is sliding down an incline that is 35 above the horizontal. If the coecient of kinetic friction is 0.40, the acceleration of the crate is: A. 0 2 B. 2.4 m/s C. 5.8 m/s2 2 D. 8.8 m/s 2 E. 10.3 m/s 32. A 5.0-kg crate is resting on a horizontal plank. The coecient of static friction is 0.50 and the coecient of kinetic friction is 0.40. After one end of the plank is raised so the plank makes an angle of 25 with the horizontal, the force of friction is: A. 0 B. 18 N C. 21 N D. 22 N E. 44 N 33. A 5.0-kg crate is resting on a horizontal plank. The coecient of static friction is 0.50 and the coecient of kinetic friction is 0.40. After one end of the plank is raised so the plank makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal, the force of friction is: A. 0 B. 18 N C. 21 N D. 22 N E. 44 N 74 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 34. A 5.0-kg crate is on an incline that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. If the coecient of static friction is 0.50, the minimum force that can be applied parallel to the plane to hold the crate at rest is: A. 0 B. 3.3 N C. 30 N D. 46 N E. 55 N 35. A 5.0-kg crate is on an incline that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. If the coecient of static friction is 0.5, the maximum force that can be applied parallel to the plane without moving the crate is: A. 0 B. 3.3 N C. 30 N D. 46 N E. 55 N 36. Block A, with mass mA , is initially at rest on a horizontal oor. Block B, with mass mB , is initially at rest on the horizontal top surface of A. The coecient of static friction between the two blocks is s . Block A is pulled with a horizontal force. It begins to slide out from under B if the force is greater than: A. mA g B. mB g C. s mA g D. s mB g E. s (mA + mB )g 37. The system shown remains at rest. Each block weighs 20 N. The force of friction on the upper block is: .. ............ ..... ....... ... ... .. .... .. ..... ...... . . . .... . ... .... . .... . . .. .. . .. . . .... .. . . .... .... ... .... . .. . .. .... .... .... .. .. .... . . . .. . .. .............. .... .... .. .............. .... .. ....... . . . ..... .. .. ..... .... ....... .. .... .. .. .. ... ... ... . .. .. ........... . .. . .... .. .. ....... .. .... .... . ... . . .. . . .... .... ..... . ...... . . .. . .. .... .... ..... .. ........ . .. ..... .... . . .. .. ... . . . .... . . . .... . . .. .. .... . . ... . . . . ... . . .. .. .... . . .... . .. . ..... .. ........ . .. . . .. . ... ..... . .. .. ....... .. . ... . . . ......... . .. . ..... . . ..... . .... . . . .. . ...... .. . ...... .. . ... ..... .... .. . .... .. . .... .. . .... .. . .... . .... . ..... ....... W a W = 20 N a = 3m b = 4m W b A. B. C. D. E. 4N 8N 12 N 16 N 20 N Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 75 38. Block A, with a mass of 50 kg, rests on a horizontal table top. The coecient of static friction is 0.40. A horizontal string is attached to A and passes over a massless, frictionless pulley as shown. The smallest mass mB of block B, attached to the dangling end, that will start A moving when it is attached to the other end of the string is: ........... ............ ... .. ... .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. ... .. . ..... ...... . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .......... ............... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... . .... .... . .... ..... . .. .. . .. . .... ..... . .... .... . .... .... . .. . .. .... . .. .. . .. . .... ..... . .. .. A . ..... ..... pulley B A. B. C. D. E. 20 kg 30 kg 40 kg 50 kg 70 kg 39. Block A, with a mass of 10 kg, rests on a 35 incline. The coecient of static friction is 0.40. An attached string is parallel to the incline and passes over a massless, frictionless pulley at the top. The largest mass mB of block B, attached to the dangling end, for which A begins to slide down the incline is: ..... ........ ..... .... ..... .. .. .... .... . . . ..... . .... .. . . ... .... . . ... .... . . . . .... ... .... .... .. .... . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .... .... .. .... .... . . . .. .. ...... .... .. ....... .. ..... ...... .... .. ............. . . . .. .. ... . . .... . ...... ... . .... ...... ... ... . .... .. ...... . .. .... . ... .... ..... . . .. ......... .. ............ . .... .... .. . . .... ..... .. . .... .. .. . . .. .. .... ..... .. ........ . .. ... . . ..... . .. .. . .. . ..... . . .... . . .. .. ..... . . .... . . . .. ..... . . .. .... . . . . .. . ..... .. . .. ........ . .. ... ..... .. .... . . .. ..... . . .. ......... .. . . .. . ...... .. . ... . . ..... . . . .... . . ......... . .... . ..... . .... . . ..... .. . .... .. . ... .. . .... . .... . ...... ....... A A. B. C. D. E. 76 2.5 kg 3.5 kg 5.9 kg 9.0 kg 10.5 kg Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II B 40. Block A, with a mass of 10 kg, rests on a 35 incline. The coecient of static friction is 0.40. An attached string is parallel to the incline and passes over a massless, frictionless pulley at the top. The largest mass mB , attached to the dangling end, for which A remains at rest is: ............ ............. .. .. ... .. .... ..... . .... . . .... . . . .... . ...... .... . ...... . . . . .. . . . . .... .... . .... . .... .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... .. .. ... . . . .. . ... . . ............. .... . .... ............ .... .. .... .... . ... . ... . .... .... . ... . .. ..... . .. ...... . .... .... .. ........... . .. . .... .... .. .......... . .. . . .... .... ... . ... . . .... ...... . .... ....... .. . . ... ... ... .. . .... . ...... . . . .. .. ..... . . ..... . . .. .. ..... . . ..... .. . .. . ... . . ... . .. ...... . . ...... .. .. .... . . .. .... . . .. . . .... . . . .. .... . . .. . .... . . .. .......... .. . . ...... . . . .. . ...... . .. ...... .. . ... ... ..... . . ..... .. . .... . . . ..... .. . ... . . .... .. . .... . .... . ..... ....... A A. B. C. D. E. B 2.5 kg 3.5 kg 5.9 kg 9.0 kg 10.5 kg 41. Block A, with a mass of 10 kg, rests on a 30 incline. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.20. The attached string is parallel to the incline and passes over a massless, frictionless pulley at the top. Block B, with a mass of 8.0 kg, is attached to the dangling end of the string. The acceleration of B is: ........... ............ ... .. ... .. .... ..... . .... . . .... . . . .... . ...... .... . ...... . . .. . . . . . .... .... .. .... .... .. . . . . . .. .. . .... .... .. .... .... . .. ... . . . .. ..... .. . ...... ..... .. ... .... .. .... ............ .... .... . .. .... .. . ... .... . .. .. ..... . .. .... ...... . .... . ... . . .. ........ .. . . .. .. .. ......... . .... .... .. . ... .. .. . .... ...... . . .... ...... .. . . . . ... . ... ... .... . ..... . . .. .... . . . . .. ..... . . ... . .. . .. .. .. .. ..... . ...... .. . .. .. .. .. . . . ...... . ...... .. . .. .. .... .. .... . . .. . . .. ... .. . .. .. .... . . ... . . . .. ...... .. . . . ...... . . . .. ...... .. ...... .. . . . ... ..... . . ..... .. . .. ..... . . ..... . . . .... . . .... . . ... . ... . ...... ....... A A. B. C. D. E. B 0.69 m/s2 , up the plane 2 0.69 m/s , down the plane 2 2.6 m/s , up the plane 2 2.6 m/s , down the plane 0 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 77 42. Block A, with a mass of 10 kg, rests on a 30 incline. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.20. The attached string is parallel to the incline and passes over a massless, frictionless pulley at the top. Block B, with a mass of 3.0 kg, is attached to the dangling end of the string. The acceleration of B is: ........... ............ .... .. .... . .. ..... ..... . . . .... . . . .. .... . . . . .... .... .. .... .... ... . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .... .. .. .... . .... . . . . . .. ...... ... .. .... .. .... .. ....... . .... . . .. .. .......... ......... ..... .... .. ..... ..... .... .. . .. ... .... .... .. .... . . .. .. . .... . . .... .... .. ......... .. . .. ........ . . . .... .... .. . .. .... .... ..... . .... . . . .... .... .. . .... ........ . . .. .. .. .. . .... . . .. .... . . .. . .. ... . . .... . . . .. .. ..... . . ...... . . .. . ... . . .. .... . . . .. .... .. . .... .. . . .. .. .. .... . ..... . . .. .... . . .. .... . . . .. .......... .. .. . ...... .. . .... . .... . . . .... . . .... ... .. . .. ..... . ..... . . ..... . . ..... .. . .... . .... .. . ... . ... . .... ....... A A. B. C. D. E. B 0.20 m/s2 , up 2 0.20 m/s , down 2 2.8 m/s , up 2 2.8 m/s , down 0 43. A 1000-kg airplane moves in straight ight at constant speed. The force of air friction is 1800 N. The net force on the plane is: A. zero B. 11800 N C. 1800 N D. 9800 N E. none of these 44. Why do raindrops fall with constant speed during the later stages of their descent? A. The gravitational force is the same for all drops B. Air resistance just balances the force of gravity C. The drops all fall from the same height D. The force of gravity is negligible for objects as small as raindrops E. Gravity cannot increase the speed of a falling object to more than 9.8 m/s 45. A ball is thrown downward from the edge of a cli with an initial speed that is three times the terminal speed. Initially its acceleration is A. upward and greater than g B. upward and less than g C. downward and greater than g D. downward and less than g E. downward and equal to g 78 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 46. A ball is thrown upward into the air with a speed that is greater than terminal speed. On the way up it slows down and, after its speed equals the terminal speed but before it gets to the top of its trajectory: A. its speed is constant B. it continues to slow down C. it speeds up D. its motion becomes jerky E. none of the above 47. A ball is thrown upward into the air with a speed that is greater than terminal speed. It lands at the place where it was thrown. During its ight the force of air resistance is the greatest: A. just after it is thrown B. halfway up C. at the top of its trajectory D. halfway down E. just before it lands. 48. Uniform circular motion is the direct consequence of: A. Newtons third law B. a force that is always tangent to the path C. an acceleration tangent to the path D. a force of constant magnitude that is always directed away from the same xed point E. a force of constant magnitude that is always directed toward the same xed point 49. An A. B. C. D. E. object moving in a circle at constant speed: must have only one force acting on it is not accelerating is held to its path by centrifugal force has an acceleration of constant magnitude has an acceleration that is tangent to the circle 50. An object of mass m and another object of mass 2m are each forced to move along a circle of radius 1.0 m at a constant speed of 1.0 m/s. The magnitudes of their accelerations are: A. equal B. in the ratio of 2 : 1 C. in the ratio of 2 : 1 D. in the ratio of 4 : 1 E. zero Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 79 51. The magnitude of the force required to cause a 0.04-kg object to move at 0.6 m/s in a circle of radius 1.0 m is: A. 2.4 102 N B. 1.4 102 N C. 1.4 102 N D. 2.42 102 N E. 3.13 N 52. A 0.2-kg stone is attached to a string and swung in a circle of radius 0.6 m on a horizontal and frictionless surface. If the stone makes 150 revolutions per minute, the tension force of the string on the stone is: A. 0.03 N B. 0.2 N C. 0.9 N D. 1.96 N E. 30 N 53. Which of the following ve graphs is correct for a particle moving in a circle of radius r at a constant speed of 10 m/s? a a ...................... ..................... r . ... . .. .... .. .... . .. ... . ... .... ... . .. A a r . .. . .. . ... ... . .. .... ..... ....... . .. B a . ..... ....... .. .... . .. ... .. .. .. .. . C a r D r .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... ... ..... ......... .. r E 54. An object moves around a circle. If the radius is doubled keeping the speed the same then the magnitude of the centripetal force must be: A. twice as great B. half as great C. four times as great D. one-fourth as great E. the same 80 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 55. An object moves in a circle. If the mass is tripled, the speed halved, and the radius unchanged, then the magnitude of the centripetal force must be multiplied by a factor of: A. 3/2 B. 3/4 C. 9/4 D. 6 E. 12 56. If a A. B. C. D. E. satellite moves above Earths atmosphere in a circular orbit with constant speed, then: its acceleration and velocity are always in the same direction the net force on it is zero its velocity is constant it will fall back to Earth when its fuel is used up its acceleration is toward the Earth 57. A 800-N passenger in a car presses against the car door with a 200 N force when the car makes a left turn at 13 m/s. The (faulty) door will pop open under a force of 800 N. Of the following, the least speed for which the passenger is thrown out of the car is: A. 14 m/s B. 19 m/s C. 20 m/s D. 26 m/s E. 54 m/s 58. If a certain car, going with speed v1 , rounds a level curve with a radius R1 , it is just on the verge of skidding. If its speed is now doubled, the radius of the tightest curve on the same road that it can round without skidding is: A. 2R1 B. 4R1 C. R1 /2 D. R1 /4 E. R1 59. An automobile moves on a level horizontal road in a circle of radius 30 m. The coecient of friction between tires and road is 0.50. The maximum speed with which this car can round this curve is: A. 3.0 m/s B. 4.9 m/s C. 9.8 m/s D. 12 m/s E. 13 m/s Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 81 60. The driver of a 1000-kg car tries to turn through a circle of radius 100 m on an unbanked curve at a speed of 10 m/s. The actual frictional force between the tires and slippery road has a magnitude of 900 N. The car: A. slides into the inside of the curve B. makes the turn C. slows down due to the frictional force D. makes the turn only if it goes faster E. slides o to the outside of the curve 61. A car rounds a 75-m radius curve at a constant speed of 18 m/s. A ball is suspended by a string from the ceiling the car and moves with the car. The angle between the string and the vertical is: A. 0 B. 1.4 C. 24 D. 90 E. cannot be found without knowing the mass of the ball 62. A giant wheel, having a diameter of 40 m, is tted with a cage and platform on which a man of mass m stands. The wheel is rotated in a vertical plane at such a speed that the force exerted by the man on the platform is equal to his weight when the cage is at X, as shown. The net force on the man at point X is: X ...................... ....................... .... .... ...... ..... . .. . ...... ..... . .. ... ... . ..... ... . ......... ... ... ...... . .. ..... .. ..... ..... .. .. ...... .. .. .... . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... . .... . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . ... .... . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... ... ... ... .... .... .. .... ..... ....... .... .................. ............. wheel A. B. C. D. E. 82 zero mg , down mg , up 2mg , down 2mg , up Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II man in cage .. ..... .. .. . .. .... . .... 63. A giant wheel, 40 m in diameter, is tted with a cage and platform on which a man can stand. The wheel rotates at such a speed that when the cage is at X (as shown) the force exerted by the man on the platform is equal to his weight. The speed of the man is: X ... .............. ......... ............ ....... . .... .... ...... ...... . ...... ..... ....... ... .. ... .. ... . ..... ... ....... ... ... ..... .. ..... .. .. . . ....... ......... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .... . . ... . . . ... . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . ... . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. ... . ... ... ... .... ... .... .... ...... .... ....... ............... ............. man in cage .... ..... .. .. .. .. .... .. wheel A. B. C. D. E. 14 m/s 20 m/s 28 m/s 80 m/s 120 m/s 64. A person riding a Ferris wheel is strapped into her seat by a seat belt. The wheel is spun so that the centripetal acceleration is g . Select the correct combination of forces that act on her when she is at the top. In the table Fg = force of gravity, down; Fb = seat belt force, down; and Fs = seat force, up. A. B. C. D. E. Fg 0 mg 0 mg mg Fb mg 0 0 mg 0 Fs 0 0 mg 0 mg 65. One end of a 1.0-m long string is xed, the other end is attached to a 2.0-kg stone. The stone swings in a vertical circle, passing the bottom point at 4.0 m/s. The tension force of the string at this point is about: A. 0 B. 12 N C. 20 N D. 32 N E. 52 N Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 83 66. One end of a 1.0-m string is xed, the other end is attached to a 2.0-kg stone. The stone swings in a vertical circle, passing the top point at 4.0 m/s. The tension force of the string (in newtons) at this point is about: A. 0 B. 12 C. 20 D. 32 E. 52 67. A coin is placed on a horizontal phonograph turntable. Let N be the magnitude of the normal force exerted by the turntable on the coin, f be the magnitude of the frictional force exerted by the turntable on the coin, and fs, max be the maximum possible force of static friction. The speed of the turntable is increased in small steps. If the coin does not slide, then A. N increases, f increases, and fs, max stays the same B. N increases, f increases, and fs, max increases C. f increases and both N and fs, max stay the same D. N , f , and fs, max all stay the same E. N , f , and fs, max all increase 68. The iron ball shown is being swung in a vertical circle at the end of a 0.7-m long string. How slowly can the ball go through its top position without having the string go slack? ..... ... . . .... .... . .. .. .. .. ... .... ... .... .... ... .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . . .... ... ... ... .... .... ... ... . . ... ..... . .... . A. B. C. D. E. 1.3 m/s 2.6 m/s 3.9 m/s 6.9 m/s 9.8 m/s 69. A block is suspended by a rope from the ceiling of a car. When the car rounds a 45-m radius horizontal curve at 22 m/s (about 50 mph), what angle does the rope make with the vertical? A. 0 B. 25 C. 48 D. 65 E. 90 84 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 70. Circular freeway entrance and exit ramps are commonly banked to handle a car moving at 13 m/s. To design a similar ramp for 26 m/s one should: A. increase radius by factor of 2 B. decrease radius by factor of 2 C. increase radius by factor of 4 D. decrease radius by factor of 4 E. increase radius by factor of 2 71. At what angle should the roadway on a curve with a 50 m radius be banked to allow cars to negotiate the curve at 12 m/s even if the roadway is icy (and the frictional force is zero)? A. 0 B. 16 C. 18 D. 35 E. 73 Chapter 6: FORCE AND MOTION II 85 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 1. Which of the following is NOT a correct unit for work? A. erg B. ftlb C. watt D. newtonmeter E. joule 2. Which of the following groups does NOT contain a scalar quantity? A. velocity, force, power B. displacement, acceleration, force C. acceleration, speed, work D. energy, work, distance E. pressure, weight, time 3. A boy holds a 40-N weight at arms length for 10 s. His arm is 1.5 m above the ground. The work done by the force of the boy on the weight while he is holding it is: A. 0 B. 6.1 J C. 40 J D. 60 J E. 90 J 4. A crate moves 10 m to the right on a horizontal surface as a woman pulls on it with a 10-N force. Rank the situations shown below according to the work done by her force, least to greatest. 10 N 10 N .. . . ................ ............... . . ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 1 A. B. C. D. E. 86 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ..... .... ... .. . . 2 1, 2, 3 2, 1, 3 2, 3, 1 1, 3, 2 3, 2, 1 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK . . .. .. ... . ... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 10 N .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. 3 5. An object moves in a circle at constant speed. The work done by the centripetal force is zero because: A. the displacement for each revolution is zero B. the average force for each revolution is zero C. there is no friction D. the magnitude of the acceleration is zero E. the centripetal force is perpendicular to the velocity 6. An object of mass 1 g is whirled in a horizontal circle of radius 0.5 m at a constant speed of 2 m/s. The work done on the object during one revolution is: A. 0 B. 1 J C. 2 J D. 4 J E. 16 J 7. The work done by gravity during the descent of a projectile: A. is positive B. is negative C. is zero D. depends for its sign on the direction of the y axis E. depends for its sign on the direction of both the x and y axes 8. A baseball is hit high into the upper bleachers of left eld. Over its entire ight the work done by gravity and the work done by air resistance, respectively, are: A. positive; positive B. positive; negative C. negative; positive D. negative; negative E. unknown since vital information is lacking 9. A line drive to the shortstop is caught at the same height as it was originally hit. Over its entire ight the work done by gravity and the work done by air resistance, respectively, are: A. zero; positive B. zero; negative C. positive; negative D. negative; positive E. negative; negative Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 87 10. A 2-kg object is moving at 3 m/s. A 4-N force is applied in the direction of motion and then removed after the object has traveled an additional 5 m. The work done by this force is: A. 12 J B. 15 J C. 18 J D. 20 J E. 38 J 11. A sledge (including load) weighs 5000 N. It is pulled on level snow by a dog team exerting a horizontal force on it. The coecient of kinetic friction between sledge and snow is 0.05. How much work is done by the dog team pulling the sledge 1000 m at constant speed? A. 2.5 104 J B. 2.5 105 J C. 5.0 105 J D. 2.5 106 J E. 5.0 106 J 12. Camping equipment weighing 6000 N is pulled across a frozen lake by means of a horizontal rope. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.05. The work done by the campers in pulling the equipment 1000 m at constant velocity is: A. 3.1 104 J B. 1.5 105 J C. 3.0 105 J D. 2.9 106 J E. 6.0 106 J 13. Camping equipment weighing 6000 N is pulled across a frozen lake by means of a horizontal rope. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.05. How much work is done by the campers in pulling the equipment 1000 m if its speed is increasing at the constant rate of 0.20 m/s2 ? A. 1.2 106 J B. 1.8 105 J C. 3.0 105 J D. 4.2 105 J E. 1.2 106 J 14. A 1-kg block is lifted vertically 1 m by a boy. The work done by the boy is about: A. 1 ft lb B. 1 J C. 10 J D. 0.1 J E. zero 88 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 15. A 0.50-kg object moves in a horizontal circular track with a radius of 2.5 m. An external force of 3.0 N, always tangent to the track, causes the object to speed up as it goes around. The work done by the external force as the mass makes one revolution is: A. 24 J B. 47 J C. 59 J D. 94 J E. 120 J 16. A man pulls a 100-N crate up a frictionless 30 slope 5 m high, as shown. Assuming that the crate moves at constant speed, the work done by the man is: . ........ ............ ... ... .. .. .... .. . .... .... . .. .... . ... . . .. . .. ...... .... . .... . . ...... . .. .. . .. . .. . .... . . ..... . . .. ... .... .... .... .... .. .. ... ... .. .... .... .... . ..... ..... .... .. ... . . . . ........... ... ....... ... .... .... .... .... .. ... .... .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ... .... .. ...... ... .... .. ...... ... .... ... .... .. . .. . . ... ... .... .... .... .... ... .... . . .. ... ... ...... .. ... .. .. .... .... . . .. . ... .. .. .. ... ..... .. .... .... ... . .. . ... .. ... .. .... .... . ... .. ... .. .... .. ... .... .. .. . .... .. .... . . .. ...... ......... . .... .... .... .... .... .... . .. .... .... . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ....... 100 N 5m .. 30 . . A. B. C. D. E. 500 J 250 J 0 250 J 500 J 17. A man pushes an 80-N crate a distance of 5.0 m upward along a frictionless slope that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. His force is parallel to the slope. If the speed of the crate decreases at a rate of 1.5 m/s2 , then the work done by the man is: A. 200 J B. 61 J C. 140 J D. 200 J E. 260 J 18. A man pushes an 80-N crate a distance of 5.0 m upward along a frictionless slope that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. The force he exerts is parallel to the slope. If the speed of the crate is constant, then the work done by the man is: A. 200 J B. 61 J C. 140 J D. 200 J E. 260 J Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 89 19. An 80-N crate slides with constant speed a distance of 5.0 m downward along a rough slope that makes an angle of 30 with the horizontal. The work done by the force of gravity is: A. 400 J B. 200 J C. 69 J D. 200 J E. 400 J 20. A man pulls a sled along a rough horizontal surface by applying a constant force F at an angle above the horizontal. In pulling the sled a horizontal distance d, the work done by the man is: A. F d B. F d cos C. F d sin D. F d/ cos E. F d/ sin 21. A man wishes to pull a crate 15 m across a rough oor by exerting a force of 100 N. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.25. For the man to do the least work, the angle between the force and the horizontal should be: A. 0 B. 14 C. 43 D. 66 E. 76 22. A particle moves 5 m in the positive x direction while being acted upon by a constant force F = (4 N) + (2 N) (4 N)k. The work done on the particle by this force is: i j A. 20 J B. 10 J C. 20 J D. 30 J E. is impossible to calculate without knowing other forces 23. A block is attached to the end of an ideal spring and moved from coordinate xi to coordinate xf . The relaxed position is at x = 0. The work done by spring is positive if: A. xi = 2 cm and xf = 4 cm B. xi = 2 cm and xf = 4 cm C. xi = 2 cm and xf = 4 cm D. xi = 2 cm and xf = 4 cm E. xi = 4 cm and xf = 2 cm 90 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 24. An ideal spring, with a pointer attached to its end, hangs next to a scale. With a 100-N weight attached, the pointer indicates 40 on the scale as shown. Using a 200-N weight instead results in 60 on the scale. Using an unknown weight X instead results in 30 on the scale. The weight of X is: . ......... ............ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... ... .. ........... ........ .............. ........ . .. . ... .... ..... . ... . .... .. .................... .. .................... . .. ...... .... ........ .. . . ...... ... .... .. .. ................... .. .................... .......... .......... .... ... ..... ... ...... . . ..... . . .. ................. . .................. ........ ....... ...... .... .... . . . ... . ... .. .................... .. ................... ............ . ............ ....... .. .. .. .... . ........... . .. ...... . .. .................... .. .................... .... .. ... .... ... .. ................ . ... .. .................... .. .................... . .. ............. ........ .. .................... .. . .. .. ................... .. .................... ... .. . . . ........ .. .. ... .... .. ..... . .................. .. ........... ... ..... ............................ . ........................ .. .. .. . 0 40 100 N A. B. C. D. E. 10 N 20 N 30 N 40 N 50 N 25. Three identical ideal springs (X,Y,Z) are arranged as shown. When a 4.0-kg mass is hung on X, the mass descends 3.0 cm. When a 6.0-kg mass is hung on Y, the mass descends: ..................... .. .. .. ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ......... .. .. .. .. .. . . . .......... . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . . .. . .. . ... . ... ... ... .. ...... .... .. ...... .... . .................. . .................. ........ ....... .... .... .. . ... . . ............ .. . ... ............ .. . ... . .. ..................... .. ..................... .. .................... .. .................... . .. . . . .. . ............. . ...... ............. . ...... ... ... ........ . . ....... .. . ........ . . ....... .. . . .................... . .................... .. ..................... .. ..................... .. .. . .. .. . ...... . ... ...... . ... . . ... ..... ... ..... . . .. . . .. ........ .... .. ... ........ .... .. ... .. .. .. ................... .. ................... .. .................... .. .................... . .. . . .. . ...... ..... ... .... ...... ..... ... .... .. .. . .. .. . . . . . ... . . . . ... ........ . . ..... ........ . . ..... .. .................... .. .................... .. .................... .. .................... .. .. . . .. .. . . ..... ... .. .. .. ..... ... .. .. .. . . .. ..... . .. ... ... .. .... ... ... ... .. .................... .. .................... ... .. ..... .. ..................... .. ..................... .. .. .. ..... . ......... .. ..... . ......... .. . .. .......... ... . .... .......... ... . .... ........................ ... . ........................ ... . .. ..................... .. ..................... . . ......... .. . ...... ......... .. . ...... ... . .. . ..... ... . .. . ..... ...................... ...................... . .................... . .................... .. ... ........ ...... .. ... ........ ...... ... .. .... . . .. ... .. .... . . .. . . .. .. ... ... ...... ...... .. ................... .. ................... .. .............. .. .............. ... ... ...... ...... ....... ........ ... .... ........ .. ... .. ....... .. .. ................... .... ... ... .. . . . ..... . .......... . ....... . .................... .. .................... .. .. ......... .. .. .. ...... . . .... .. .. .. . ................ . .................. .............. ........ . ........ .. .... ...................... .. . ... .. .................... .. .................... . ....... . . ....... . . ... .. ....... ... ....... .. .................... .. ..................... . . .. ........ . .. ..... . .................... ...................... . . ....... . ..... .. ................... ..... .. .. ...... ... ....... ... .. .................... .. ..................... . ... .. .. . ..... ... ... . .. ....... .. . ... ...................... .. ..................... ..... .. .. ... ....... ........ . .. .. .. .. .................... . ................ .. ... ...... ....... ... X Z Y A. B. C. D. E. 2.0 cm 4.0 cm 4.5 cm 6.0 cm 9.0 cm Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 91 26. When a certain rubber band is stretched a distance x, it exerts a restoring force of magnitude F = Ax, where A is a constant. The work done by a person in stretching this rubber band from x = 0 to x = L, beginning and ending at rest, is: A. AL2 B. A + 2L C. A + 2L2 D. A/L E. AL2 /2 27. When a certain rubber band is stretched a distance x, it exerts a restoring force of magnitude F = ax + bx2 , where a and b are constants. The work done in stretching this rubber band from x = 0 to x = L is: A. aL2 + bLx3 B. aL + 2bL2 C. a + 2bL D. bL E. aL2 /2 + bL3 /3 28. An ideal spring is hung vertically from the ceiling. When a 2.0-kg mass hangs at rest from it the spring is extended 6.0 cm from its relaxed length. A downward external force is now applied to the mass to extend the spring an additional 10 cm. While the spring is being extended by the force, the work done by the spring is: A. 3.6 J B. 3.3 J C. 3.4 105 J D. 3.3 J E. 3.6 J 29. An ideal spring is hung vertically from the ceiling. When a 2.0-kg block hangs at rest from it the spring is extended 6.0 cm from its relaxed length. A upward external force is then applied to the block to move it upward a distance of 16 cm. While the block is moving upward the work done by the spring is: A. 1.0 J B. 0.52 J C. 0.26 J D. 0.52 J E. 1.0 J 92 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 30. Which of the following bodies has the largest kinetic energy? A. Mass 3M and speed V B. Mass 3M and speed 2V C. Mass 2M and speed 3V D. Mass M and speed 4V E. All four of the above have the same kinetic energy 31. Two trailers, X with mass 500 kg and Y with mass 2000 kg, are being pulled at the same speed. The ratio of the kinetic energy of Y to that of X is: A. 1:1 B. 2:1 C. 4:1 D. 9:1 E. 1500:1 32. A 8000-N car is traveling at 12 m/s along a horizontal road when the brakes are applied. The car skids to a stop in 4.0 s. How much kinetic energy does the car lose in this time? A. 4.8 104 J B. 5.9 104 J C. 1.2 105 J D. 5.8 105 J E. 4.8 106 J 33. The velocity of a particle moving along the x axis changes from vi to vf . For which values of vi and vf is the total work done on the particle positive? A. vi = 5 m/s, vf = 2 m/s B. vi = 5 m/s, vf = 2 m/s C. vi = 5 m/s, vf = 2 m/s D. vi = 5 m/s, vf = 2 m/s E. vi = 2 m/s, vf = 5 m/s 34. An object is constrained by a cord to move in a circular path of radius 0.5 m on a horizontal frictionless surface. The cord will break if its tension exceeds 16 N. The maximum kinetic energy the object can have is: A. 4 J B. 8 J C. 16 J D. 32 J E. 64 J Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 93 35. The weight of an object on the moon is one-sixth of its weight on Earth. The ratio of the kinetic energy of a body on Earth moving with speed V to that of the same body moving with speed V on the moon is: A. 6:1 B. 36:1 C. 1:1 D. 1:6 E. 1:36 36. Which of the following is the correct combination of dimensions for energy? A. MLT B. LT2 /m C. ML2 /T2 D. M2 L3 T E. ML/T2 37. The amount of work required to stop a moving object is equal to: A. the velocity of the object B. the kinetic energy of the object C. the mass of the object times its acceleration D. the mass of the object times its velocity E. the square of the velocity of the object 38. A 5.0-kg cart is moving horizontally at 6.0 m/s. In order to change its speed to 10.0 m/s, the net work done on the cart must be: A. 40 J B. 90 J C. 160 J D. 400 J E. 550 J 94 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 39. A crate is initially at rest on a horizontal frictionless table. A constant horizontal force F is applied. Which of the following ve graphs is a correct plot of work W as a function of the crates speed v ? W W .. .... .. .... . ... .... .... . .. ... .... . . v A . .. .. .. ..... .. ... . ...... . ... . .. .... . .... .... ... . .... v B W W . . . . .. .. .. .. . .... ......... .. .... . .. .... .. ... . .. ... . .. ... .. v C . .. .. W . .. . .. .. .. ... ... ... ...... ........ .. v D ... .......... .... ... .... .. .. .. .. .. . v E 40. An 8-N block slides down an incline. It has an initial speed of 7 m/s. The work done by the resultant force on this block is: A. 3 J B. 6 J C. 56 J D. impossible to calculate without more information E. none of these 41. A 4-kg cart starts up an incline with a speed of 3 m/s and comes to rest 2 m up the incline. The total work done on the car is: A. 6 J B. 8 J C. 12 J D. 18 J E. impossible to calculate without more information 42. Two objects with masses of m1 and m2 have the same kinetic energy and are both moving to the right. The same constant force F is applied to the left to both masses. If m1 = 4m2 , the ratio of the stopping distance of m1 to that of m2 is: A. 1:4 B. 4:1 C. 1:2 D. 2:1 E. 1:1 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 95 43. A Boston Red Sox baseball player catches a ball of mass m that is moving toward him with speed v . While bringing the ball to rest, his hand moves back a distance d. Assuming constant deceleration, the horizontal force exerted on the ball by his hand is: A. mv/d B. mvd C. mv 2 /d D. 2mv/d E. mv 2 /(2d) 44. A 0.50-kg object moves on a horizontal circular track with a radius of 2.5 m. An external force of 3.0 N, always tangent to the track, causes the object to speed up as it goes around. If it starts from rest its speed at the end of one revolution is: A. 9.8 m/s B. 14 m/s C. 15 m/s D. 19 m/s E. 21 m/s 45. A 0.50-kg object moves on a horizontal frictionless circular track with a radius of 2.5 m. An external force of 3.0 N, always tangent to the track, causes the object to speed up as it goes around. If it starts from rest, then at the end of one revolution the radial component of the force of the track on it is: A. 19 N B. 38 N C. 47 N D. 75 N E. 96 N 46. A 2-kg block is attached to a horizonal ideal spring with a spring constant of 200 N/m. When the spring has its equilibrium length the block is given a speed of 5 m/s. What is the maximum elongation of the spring? A. 0 B. 0.05 m C. 5 m D. 10 m E. 100 m 96 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 47. At time t = 0 a particle starts moving along the x axis. If its kinetic energy increases uniformly with t the net force acting on it must be: A. constant B. proportional to t C. inversely proportional to t D. proportional to t E. proportional to 1/ t 48. At time t = 0 a 2-kg particle has a velocity of (4 m/s) (3 m/s) At t = 3 s its velocity is i j. + (3 m/s) During this time the work done on it was: (2 m/s) i j. A. 4 J B. 4 J C. 12 J D. 40 J E. (4 J) + (36 J) i j 49. A particle starts from rest at time t = 0 and moves along the x axis. If the net force on it is proportional to t, its kinetic energy is proportional to: A. t B. t2 C. t4 D. 1/t2 E. none of the above 50. A 1.5-kg crate falls from a height of 2.0 m onto an industrial spring scale with a spring constant of 1.5 105 N/m. At its greatest compression the reading on the scale is: A. 15 N B. 30 N C. 1.5 103 N D. 2.1 103 N E. 3.0 103 N 51. A particle moving along the x axis is acted upon by a single force F = F0 ekx , where F0 and k are constants. The particle is released from rest at x = 0. It will attain a maximum kinetic energy of: A. F0 /k B. F0 /ek C. kF0 D. 1/2(kF0 )2 E. kek F0 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 97 52. The mechanical advantage of any machine is: A. the eciency of the machine B. the work done by the machine C. the ratio of the work done by the machine to the work expended on it D. the ratio of the force exerted by the machine to the force applied to it E. the ratio of the force applied to the machine to the force exerted by it 53. In raising an object to a given height by means of an inclined plane, as compared with raising the object vertically, there is a reduction in: A. work required B. distance pushed C. friction D. force required E. value of the acceleration due to gravity 54. A watt is: 3 A. kg m/s B. kg m2 /s C. kg m2 /s3 D. kg m/s 2 E. kg m2 /s 55. Power has the dimensions of: A. ML2 /T2 B. MT/L2 C. ML/T2 D. ML2 /T3 E. none of these 56. Which of the following ve units represents a quantity that is NOT the same as the other four? A. joule B. erg C. watt D. footpound E. newtonmeter 98 Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 57. Which of the following ve quantities is NOT an expression for energy? Here m is a mass, g is the acceleration due to gravity, h and d are distances, F is a force, v is a speed, a is an acceleration, P is power, and t is time. A. mgh B. F d C. 1/2mv2 D. ma E. P t 58. A wattsecond is a unit of: A. force B. power C. displacement D. speed E. energy 59. A watt per hour is a unit of: A. energy B. power C. force D. acceleration E. none of these 60. A kilowatthour is a unit of: A. power B. energy/time C. work D. power/time E. force/distance Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 99 61. A man moves the 10-g object shown in a vertical plane from position X to position Y along a circular track of radius 20 m. The process takes 0.75 min. The work done by the man is about: Y ............. ................. ...... .... ..... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... .... ... .. ..... .. .... .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .... ..... ..... .... . .... ... .... .. ...... ... ...... ............. ............ object A. B. C. D. E. .. .... ..... .. ... .. . .. .. .. ........... .. ........... .. X 1J 2J 4J 6J 12 J 62. A woman lifts a barbell 2.0 m in 5.0 s. If she lifts it the same distance in 10 s, the work done by her is: A. four times as great B. two times as great C. the same D. half as great E. one-fourth as great 63. An escalator is used to move 20 people (60 kg each) per minute from the rst oor of a department store to the second oor, 5 m above. Neglecting friction, the power required is approximately: ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . ... .... .... .... .. . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . . .. .... .... .... ... . .... .... ... ... .... .... .... .... . .... .... ... .... .... .... .... ... .... .... . .... .... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... .. 30 A. B. C. D. E. 100 100 W 200 W 1000 W 2000 W 60, 000 W Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK | | | 5m | | | 64. A person holds an 80-N weight 2 m above the oor for 30 seconds. The power required to do this is: A. 80 W B. 40 W C. 20 W D. 10 W E. none of these 65. A 50-N force is the only force on a 2-kg object that starts from rest. When the force has been acting for 2 s the rate at which it is doing work is: A. 75 W B. 100 W C. 1000 W D. 2500 W E. 5000 W 66. A 50-N force is the only force a 2-kg crate that starts from rest. At the instant the object has gone 2 m the rate at which the force is doing work is: A. 2.5 W B. 25 W C. 75 W D. 100 W E. 500 W 67. A particle starts from rest and is acted on by a net force that does work at a rate that is proportional to the time t. The speed of the particle is proportional to: t A. B. t C. t2 D. 1/ t E. 1/t Chapter 7: KINETIC ENERGY AND WORK 101 Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 1. Only if a force on a particle is conservative: A. is its work zero when the particle moves exactly once around any closed path B. is its work always equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the particle C. does it obey Newtons second law D. does it obey Newtons third law E. is it not a frictional force 2. A nonconservative force: A. violates Newtons second law B. violates Newtons third law C. cannot do any work D. must be perpendicular to the velocity of the particle on which it acts E. none of the above 3. The sum of the kinetic and potential energies of a system of objects is conserved: A. only when no external force acts on the objects B. only when the objects move along closed paths C. only when the work done by the resultant external force is zero D. always E. none of the above 4. A force on a particle is conservative if: A. its work equals the change in the kinetic energy of the particle B. it obeys Newtons second law C. it obeys Newtons third law D. its work depends on the end points of every motion, not on the path between E. it is not a frictional force 5. Two particles interact by conservative forces. In addition, an external force acts on each particle. They complete round trips, ending at the points where they started. Which of the following must have the same values at the beginning and end of this trip? A. the total kinetic energy of the two-particle system B. the potential energy of the two-particle system C. the mechanical energy of the two-particle system D. the total linear momentum of the two-particle system E. none of the above 102 Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 6. Two objects interact with each other and with no other objects. Initially object A has a speed of 5 m/s and object B has a speed of 10 m/s. In the course of their motion they return to their initial positions. Then A has a speed of 4 m/s and B has a speed of 7 m/s. We can conclude: A. the potential energy changed from the beginning to the end of the trip B. mechanical energy was increased by nonconservative forces C. mechanical energy was decreased by nonconservative forces D. mechanical energy was increased by conservative forces E. mechanical energy was decreased by conservative forces 7. A good example of kinetic energy is provided by: A. a wound clock spring B. the raised weights of a grandfathers clock C. a tornado D. a gallon of gasoline E. an automobile storage battery 8. No A. B. C. D. E. kinetic energy is possessed by: a shooting star a rotating propeller on a moving airplane a pendulum at the bottom of its swing an elevator standing at the fth oor a cyclone 9. The wound spring of a clock possesses: A. kinetic but no potential energy B. potential but no kinetic energy C. both potential and kinetic energy in equal amounts D. neither potential nor kinetic energy E. both potential and kinetic energy, but more kinetic energy than potential energy 10. A body at rest in a system is capable of doing work if: A. the potential energy of the system is positive B. the potential energy of the system is negative C. it is free to move in such a way as to decrease its kinetic energy D. it is free to move in such a way as to decrease the potential energy of the system E. it is free to move in such a way as to increase the potential energy of the system Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 103 11. Which one of the following ve quantities CANNOT be used as a unit of potential energy? A. wattsecond B. gramcm/s2 C. joule D. kgm2 /s2 E. ftlb 12. Suppose that the fundamental dimensions are taken to be: force (F), velocity (V) and time (T). The dimensions of potential energy are then: A. F/T B. FVT C. FV/T D. F/T2 E. FV2 /T2 13. The graphs below show the magnitude of the force on a particle as the particle moves along the positive x axis from the origin to x = x1 . The force is parallel to the x axis and is conservative. The maximum magnitude F1 has the same value for all graphs. Rank the situations according to the change in the potential energy associated with the force, least (or most negative) to greatest (or most positive). F F F1 ........ .. ...... ...... ..... .. ...... .... x1 x 1 A. B. C. D. E. 104 F ...................... F1 ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . x1 x 2 x1 ... ...... x ...... .... ...... ...... .. F1 .... 3 1, 2, 3 1, 3, 2 2, 3, 1 3, 2, 1 2, 1, 3 Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 14. A golf ball is struck by a golf club and falls on a green three meters above the tee. The potential energy of the Earth-ball system is greatest: A. just before the ball is struck B. just after the ball is struck C. just after the ball lands on the green D. when the ball comes to rest on the green E. when the ball reaches the highest point in its ight 15. A ball is held at a height H above a oor. It is then released and falls to the oor. If air resistance can be ignored, which of the ve graphs below correctly gives the mechanical energy E of the Earth-ball system as a function of the altitude y of the ball? y ............. ............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. E ..... . ....... ..... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .y H A E H 0 E .. .... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... .y H B .. .. . .. ... ... ... ..... ......... ... y H D E . .. . .. .... . .. . .. ... . .. ... .. ... ... . y H C E ...................... ..................... H y E 16. A 6.0-kg block is released from rest 80 m above the ground. When it has fallen 60 m its kinetic energy is approximately: A. 4800 J B. 3500 J C. 1200 J D. 120 J E. 60 J Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 105 17. A 2-kg block is thrown upward from a point 20 m above Earths surface. At what height above Earths surface will the gravitational potential energy of the Earth-block system have increased by 500 J? A. 5 m B. 25 m C. 46 m D. 70 m E. 270 m 18. An I. II. III. IV. V. A. B. C. D. E. elevator is rising at constant speed. Consider the following statements: the upward cable force is constant the kinetic energy of the elevator is constant the gravitational potential energy of the Earth-elevator system is constant the acceleration of the elevator is zero the mechanical energy of the Earth-elevator system is constant all ve are true only II and V are true only IV and V are true only I, II, and III are true only I, II, and IV are true 19. A projectile of mass 0.50 kg is red with an initial speed of 10 m/s at an angle of 60 above the horizontal. The potential energy of the projectile-Earth system (relative potential energy when the projectile is at ground level) is: A. 25 J B. 18.75 J C. 12.5 J D. 6.25 J E. none of these 20. For a block of mass m to slide without friction up the rise of height h shown, it must have a minimum initial kinetic energy of: v .. . .. .................... .................... . ... .... .............................................................................. ............................................................................. m A. B. C. D. E. 106 . ................................. .................................. . ..... . .... .. . ... ... . . ... .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . ... ... ... . .. . . ..... ..... h gh mgh gh/2 mgh/2 2mgh Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 21. A 2.2-kg block starts from rest on a rough inclined plane that makes an angle of 25 with the horizontal. The coecient of kinetic friction is 0.25. As the block goes 2.0 m down the plane, the mechanical energy of the Earth-block system changes by: A. 0 B. 9.8 J C. 9.8 J D. 18 J E. 18 J 22. A simple pendulum consists of a 2.0-kg mass attached to a string. It is released from rest at X as shown. Its speed at the lowest point Y is about: ..................... . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... X . . . . . . . . ... . ... ........ ....... .. .. ... ... .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ....... ... ....... ... ............................. ... ......... .................. .. Y A. B. C. D. E. . . . . . . . . ..... . ... . . .. . . 1.85 m . . . . . . ... .... . . . . . . . . . 0. 90 m/s 3.6 m/s 3.6 m/s 6.0 m/s 36 m/s 23. The long pendulum shown is drawn aside until the ball has risen 0.50 m. It is then given an initial speed of 3.0 m/s. The speed of the ball at its lowest position is: ..................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... . . . . ... . . ... .... .... ... .. . .. ... ...... ...... ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ....... ....... ........................... ........................... A. B. C. D. E. zero 0.89 m/s 3.1 m/s 3.7 m/s 4.3 m/s Chapter 8: . . . . . . . . .... . .... . . .. . . 0.5 m . . . .. .. .... . .. . . . . . . . . . POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 107 24. A particle moves along the x axis under the inuence of a stationary object. The net force on 3 the particle is given by F = (8 N/m )x3 . If the potential energy is taken to be zero for x = 0 then the potential energy is given by: 4 A. (2 J/m )x4 B. (2 J/m4 )x4 C. (24 J/m2 x2 2 D. (24 J/m )x2 4 E. 5 J (2 J/m )x4 25. A 0.20-kg particle moves along the x axis under the inuence of a stationary object. The potential energy is given by 2 4 U (x) = (8.0 J/m )x2 + (2.0 J/m )x4 , where x is in coordinate of the particle. If the particle has a speed of 5.0 m/s when it is at x = 1.0 m, its speed when it is at the origin is: A. 0 B. 2.5 m/s C. 5.7 m/s D. 7.9 m/s E. 11 m/s 26. Which of the ve graphs correctly shows the potential energy of a spring as a function of its elongation x? U U ...................... ..................... x .. ... .... .. .... .. .... . .. ... . .. ... . . A 108 Chapter 8: x . .. . .. .. .. ... . .. ... ...... ...... . .. B U U ........... .. .... . ... .. .. . . .. .. . D x x C U. .. .. .. ... ... .... ... ... ..... ......... .. x E POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 27. A force of 10 N holds an ideal spring with a 20-N/m spring constant in compression. The potential energy stored in the spring is: A. 0.5 J B. 2.5 J C. 5 J D. 10 J E. 200 J 28. An ideal spring is used to re a 15.0-g pellet horizontally. The spring has a spring constant of 20 N/m and is initially compressed by 7.0 cm. The kinetic energy of the pellet as it leaves the spring is: A. zero B. 2.5 102 J C. 4.9 102 J D. 9.8 102 J E. 1.4 J 29. A 0.50-kg block attached to an ideal spring with a spring constant of 80 N/m oscillates on a horizontal frictionless surface. The total mechanical energy is 0.12 J. The greatest extension of the spring from its equilibrium length is: A. 1.5 103 m B. 3.0 103 m C. 0.039 m D. 0.054 m E. 18 m 30. A 0.50-kg block attached to an ideal spring with a spring constant of 80 N/m oscillates on a horizontal frictionless surface. The total mechanical energy is 0.12 J. The greatest speed of the block is: A. 0.15 m/s B. 0.24 m/s C. 0.49 m/s D. 0.69 m/s E. 1.46 m/s 31. A 0.50-kg block attached to an ideal spring with a spring constant of 80 N/m oscillates on a horizontal frictionless surface. When the spring is 4.0 cm longer than its equilibrium length, the speed of the block is 0.50 m/s. The greatest speed of the block is: A. 0.23 m/s B. 0.32 m/s C. 0.55 m/s D. 0.71 m/s E. 0.93 m/s Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 109 32. A 0.5-kg block slides along a horizontal frictionless surface at 2 m/s. It is brought to rest by compressing a very long spring of spring constant 800 N/m. The maximum spring compression is: A. 0 B. 3 cm C. 5 cm D. 80 cm E. 80 m 33. A block of mass m is initially moving to the right on a horizontal frictionless surface at a speed v . It then compresses a spring of spring constant k . At the instant when the kinetic energy of the block is equal to the potential energy of the spring, the spring is compressed a distance of: A. v m/2k B. (1/2)mv2 C. (1/4)mv2 D. mv2 /4k E. (1/4) mv/k 34. A 700-N man jumps out of a window into a re net 10 m below. The net stretches 2 m before bringing the man to rest and tossing him back into the air. The maximum potential energy of the net, compared to its unstretched potential energy, is: A. 300 J B. 710 J C. 850 J D. 7000 J E. 8400 J 35. A toy cork gun contains a spring whose spring constant is 10.0 N/m. The spring is compressed 5.00 cm and then used to propel a 6.00-g cork. The cork, however, sticks to the spring for 1.00 cm beyond its unstretched length before separation occurs. The muzzle velocity of this cork is: spring cork .... .... .. .... .... .... ... ... .... . .... ... . ..... .... .. .... . . .... ... .... .. . . . . .... ..... .. ... . ............................................................................... ... ......... ................................................................... .. ........ ... .. .. . .. . . .. ......................... . . . . .. . . ............... . ............ ............ .......................... ................................. .. .. .. .................... .. ................ . . .... .. .. ... . . . ... .............. ....... ........ ... ........ . ... .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . ............... ...... ... . .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ...... . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . ... .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. .... .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. ..... .. ............ .. ... .................. .. . ... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... .. . . .. . ........................................................................................................... . ............... ........... .... .......... .. ............................................................ . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ........ ....... .... .... ....... . . ............ ........... . .... ..... . .. ..... . ..... . ...... . ...... . ..... . . ....... . . .... . ... . .. ... . A. B. C. D. E. 110 . . ... .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. 1.02 m/s 1.41 m/s 2.00 m/s 2.04 m/s 4.00 m/s Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 36. A small object of mass m, on the end of a light cord, is held horizontally at a distance r from a xed support as shown. The object is then released. What is the tension force of the cord when the object is at the lowest point of its swing? r ... ......................... m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .... .... ..... . .... ... ..... ... . .... . ... ... ... ...... .. ................... ...... ...... A. B. C. D. E. mg/2 mg 2mg 3mg mgr 37. The string in the gure is 50 cm long. When the ball is released from rest, it swings along the dotted arc. How fast is it going at the lowest point in its swing? . . . . . . . . . . A. B. C. D. E. .. .. .. ..... .... .... ... .. 50 cm... ........................ ... . .. . . ... .... ... ... .... .... ... ... . . .. .. . .. .... ... ... 2.0 m/s 2.2 m/s 3.1 m/s 4.4 m/s 6.0 m/s 38. A block is released from rest at point P and slides along the frictionless track shown. At point Q, its speed is: P ........................... ..... ... | ... | ... Q ... ............ ... h1 | ........ ............ .. ...... ..... ................. | ..... h2 | . ..................|...... ......................... ......................... ......................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ground level A. B. C. D. E. 2g h1 h2 2g (h1 h2 ) (h1 h2 )/2g 2g (h1 h2 ) (h1 h2 )2 /2g Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 111 39. A small object of mass m starts from rest at the position shown and slides along the frictionless loop-the-loop track of radius R. What is the smallest value of y such that the object will slide without losing contact with the track? ... . ..... . . . .. ..... .. ...... . . ... . .. . ... ... . .... . ...... ... ...... . .. . .. ...... ... ...... .. .. . ...... ..... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ..... ..... ..... . ... ... . ..... ........ .. ..... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .... . ... . ... .. . . .. . .. ... .. ... ... . . . .. ... . ... .. .. . ... . . . ... . .. ... .. ... . .. .. .. . . . ... .. . ... . . .. . ... . . .. .. .. . . . .. ....... ...... . ... . . . . .. . . . ... .. ... . ... . .... .... . .... ... .. . . . .... .... .. . .. .... ..... .. .. .. ..... .. ..... .. ...... ... ....... ..... . ............... .. .. ... ............................................................................ ..................................................................... . .... . .. . .. .. .. .. m y R A. B. C. D. E. R/4 R/2 R 2R zero 40. A small object slides along the frictionless loop-the-loop with a diameter of 3 m. What minimum speed must it have at the top of the loop? ... ..... .. ..... .. ...... ... .. .. ... ... . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .............. ................ ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. ... ... . ... . . .. ... . ... . .... .. . ... . . ... . . . .. .. . .. . . . ....... ....... . . . .. . . .. . .. . ... . ... ... . .... . .... .... .. . . .. .. . . .... .... .. .. . .... .... .. . .. ..... ..... .. .. .. ... ...... ...... ... .............. ... ........... .. . .. ....................................................................... . ... ............ .................................................. . .. . ... . .... .... | 3m | A. B. C. D. E. 1.9 m/s 3.8 m/s 5.4 m/s 15 m/s 29 m/s 41. A rectangular block is moving along a frictionless path when it encounters the circular loop as shown. The block passes points 1, 2, 3, 4, 1 before returning to the horizontal track. At point 3: 3 ..... .................... . . ........ .......... . .... ... ... . .... . ... ... ... . .. ... .. ..... ... . . ..... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. ...... ...... .. . .. . .. .. ... .. .... ...... ... ...... .... . .... .. .. .. . ... .... . . . .... . ...................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................... ... ............................ .. . . ... . .... ... .... . .... . ... 1 2 1 A. B. C. D. E. 112 its mechanical energy is a minimum the forces on it are balanced it is not accelerating its speed is a minimum it experiences a net upward force Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 42. A ball of mass m, at one end of a string of length L, rotates in a vertical circle just fast enough to prevent the string from going slack at the top of the circle. The speed of the ball at the bottom of the circle is: ................. .................. ... .... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .... . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. . .. . ... ........ ....... .. ... ................. ................ A. B. C. D. E. .. .... L ..... ... . . m 2gL 3gL 4gL 5gL 7gL 43. A particle is released from rest at the point x = a and moves along the x axis subject to the potential energy function U (x) shown. The particle: U ... .. ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. ... ... .... ... .... .. .. . .... .. ... ... .... .. ..... ... ..... .... ..... ....... .......... ......... x a A. B. C. D. E. moves to moves to moves to moves to moves to b c d e a point to the left of x = e, stops, and remains at rest a point to x = e, then moves to the left innity at varying speed x = b, where it remains at rest x = e and then to x = d, where it remains at rest 44. The potential energy of a particle moving along the x axis is given by 2 4 U (x) = (8.0 J/m )x2 + (2.0 J/m )x4 . If the total mechanical energy is 9.0 J, the limits of motion are: A. 0.96 m; +0.96 m B. 2.2 m; +2.2 m C. 1.6 m; +1.6 m D. 0.96 m; +2.2 m E. 0.96 m; +1.6 m Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 113 45. The potential energy of a 0.20-kg particle moving along the x axis is given by 2 4 U (x) = (8.0 J/m )x2 + (2.0 J/m )x4 . When the particle is at x = 1.0 m it is traveling in the positive x direction with a speed of 5.0 m/s. It next stops momentarily to turn around at x = A. 0 B. 1.1 m C. 1.1 m D. 2.3 m E. 2.3 m 46. Given a potential energy function U (x), the corresponding force F is in the positive x direction if: A. U is positive B. U is negative C. U is an increasing function of x D. U is a decreasing function of x E. it is impossible to obtain the direction of F from U 47. As a particle moves along the x axis it is acted upon by a conservative force. The potential energy is shown below as a function of the coordinate x of the particle. Rank the labeled regions according to the magnitude of the force, least to greatest. . . . U (x) . . . .................... ............. .... . ... . . ... . .. . ... . . ... . ... . . .. . ... . ... . .................. ........... A A. B. C. D. E. 114 B C Dx AB, BC, CD AB, CD, BC BC, CD, AB BC, AB, CD CD, BC, AB Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 48. The rst graph shows the potential energy U (x) for a particle moving on the x axis. Which of the other ve graphs correctly gives the force F exerted on the particle? U F .. parabola . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ... .. .. .. ... .... .... ... ..... ... x F . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . ... x .......... .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. F .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. x .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .... . . ... . ..... ..... ...... x ... ... ... .. . .. . . .. A B F. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. x .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . D C F .. .. . .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .... ..... ......... . ..... x E Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 115 49. The diagram shows a plot of the potential energy as a function of x for a particle moving along the x axis. The points of stable equilibrium are: U .. .. .. . .. ............. .. .. .. .... .. ... .. ... . .. . .. .. ..... .. ...... ........ .. ................... . .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. ... ... .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. x ab A. B. C. D. E. c d e only a only b only c only d b and d 50. The diagram shows a plot of the potential energy as a function of x for a particle moving along the x axis. The points of unstable equilibrium are: U .. .. ... . .. ............. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. ... ... . .. .. .. .. .............. ... .. ..................... . .. ... .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. ... ... . . .. .. .. . .... .. .. .. . x ab A. B. C. D. E. 116 c d e only a only b only c only d b and d Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 51. The diagram shows a plot of the potential energy as a function of x for a particle moving along the x axis. Of the labeled points, the points of neutral equilibrium are: U .. .. .. . .. ............. .. .. .. .... .. ... .. ... . .. . .. .. ..... .. ...... ........ .. ................... . .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. ... ... .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. x ab A. B. C. D. E. c d e only a only b only c only d b and d 52. The potential energy of a body of mass m is given by U = mgx + 1 kx2 . The corresponding 2 force is: A. mgx2 /2 + kx3 /6 B. mgx2 /2 kx3 /6 C. mg + kx/2 D. mg + kx E. mg kx 53. The potential energy of a 0.20-kg particle moving along the x axis is given by 2 4 U (x) = (8.0 J/m )x2 + (2.0 J/m )x4 . When the particle is at x = 1.0 m the magnitude of its acceleration is: A. 0 B. 8 m/s2 2 C. 8 m/s 2 D. 40 m/s 2 E. 40 m/s Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 117 54. The potential energy for the interaction between the two atoms in a diatomic molecule is U = A/x12 B/x6 , where A and B are constants and x is the interatomic distance. The magnitude of the force of one atom on the other is: F A. B. C. D. E. . .. . .. ................................................. F x . . ......................... ........................ .. .. .... ... 12A/|x|13 6B/|x|7 13A/|x|13 + 7B/|x|7 11A/|x|11 + 5B/|x|5 72A/|x|12 72B/|x|6 A/|x|13 B/|x|7 55. The thermal energy of a system consisting of a thrown ball, Earth, and the air is most closely associated with: A. the gravitational interaction of Earth and the ball B. the kinetic energy of the ball as a whole C. motions of the individual particles within the ball D. motions of individual particles within the ball and the air E. the kinetic energy of Earth as a whole 56. Three identical blocks move either on a horizontal surface, up a plane, or down a plane, as shown below. They start with dierent speeds and continue to move until brought to rest by friction. They all move the same distance. Rank the three situations according to the initial speeds, least to greatest. v .. .. .............. .............. .. . .. ... ... . v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . (1) A. B. C. D. E. 118 . .. .. ....... ...... .... .. .... ... . .. ... .... .. ......... ........ . . .... .... .. .. . .. ... .. ..... ... .. . ... . .. .... . .... .... .. .......... . .. .... . . . ........ . . . .... .... . ... . . . ....... . .... .......... . .... . .. .. .... .. .. . .... . . ..... . . . .. .. ..... ... . .. . . .... . . . .. ..... .. . .. .. . .... . . . . ... . . .. . ... . . .. ........ . ........ . . . .. .......... .. ........ . . .. .... .... ..... . . . .. . .... . . .... . .. . .. . .... . . . .... .... . ......... . . ... ...... . . ...... . . .. .. . . . .... . .. . .. (2) v . .. .... .. .... ... ... .... .. .. . .... . .... .. ... .. .... ... .... . .. . .. .... . .... .... .. .......... . .... . . .... . ........ .. . .... . . . . ... . . . ....... . .... .......... . .... . .. .. .... .. .. .... . . .... ... . .. .. .... . . . ..... .... . .. ... . . ..... . . . .. . .... . . . .. . ... . . ..... . . ........ . . ...... ... ........ . .... .. . ... ... . .. ............ . ..... .. ... ..... . . .. ...... ...... .. .. . . .... .... . . .... . . ..... . .. . .. . .... . . . .... .... . ......... . . .. ... ..... . . ........ . .. . . . .... . .. . .. (3) The same for all cases 1, 2, 3 1, then 2 and 3 tie 3, 1, 2 2, 1, 3 Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 57. Objects A and B interact with each other via both conservative and nonconservative forces. Let KA and KB be the kinetic energies, U be the potential energy, and Eint be the thermal energy. If no external agent does work on the objects then: A. KA + U is conserved B. KA + U + Eint is conserved C. KA + KB + Eint is conserved D. KA + KB + U is conserved E. KA + KB + U + Eint is conserved 58. A block slides across a rough horizontal table top. The work done by friction changes: A. only the kinetic energy B. only the potential energy C. only the internal energy D. only the kinetic and potential energies E. only the kinetic and internal energies 59. A 25-g ball is released from rest 80 m above the surface of Earth. During the fall the total internal energy of the ball and air increases by 15 J. Just before it hits the surface its speed is A. 19 m/s B. 36 m/s C. 40 m/s D. 45 m/s E. 53 m/s 60. A 5-kg projectile is red over level ground with a velocity of 200 m/s at an angle of 25 above the horizontal. Just before it hits the ground its speed is 150 m/s. Over the entire trip the change in the internal energy of the projectile and air is: A. +19, 000 J B. 19, 000 J C. +44, 000 J D. 44, 000 J E. 0 61. A 0.75-kg block slides on a rough horizontal table top. Just before it hits a horizontal ideal spring its speed is 3.5 m/s. It compresses the spring 5.7 cm before coming to rest. If the spring constant is 1200 N/m, the internal energy of the block and the table top must have: A. not changed B. decreased by 1.9 J C. decreased by 2.6 J D. increased by 1.9 J E. increased by 2.6 J Chapter 8: POTENTIAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION OF ENERGY 119 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 1. Which one of the following statements is true? A. the center of mass of an object must lie within the object B. all the mass of an object is actually concentrated at its center of mass C. the center of mass of an object cannot move if there is zero net force on the object D. the center of mass of a cylinder must lie on its axis E. none of the above 2. The x and y coordinates of the center of mass of the three-particle system shown below are: y (m) 4m 3m 6 kg 2m 5 kg 1m 4 kg 1 m A. B. C. D. E. 2m 3m 4 m x (m) 0, 0 1.3 m, 1.7 m 1.4 m, 1.9 m 1.9 m, 2.5 m 1.4 m, 2.5 m 3. The center of mass of a uniform disk of radius R is located: A. on the rim B. a distance R/2 from the center C. a distance R/3 from the center D. a distance 2R/3 from the center E. at the center 4. The center of mass of the system consisting of Earth, the Sun, and the planet Mars is: A. closer to Earth than to either of the other bodies B. closer to the Sun than to either of the other bodies C. closer to Mars than to either of the other bodies D. at the geometric center of the triangle formed by the three bodies E. at the center of the line joining Earth and Mars 120 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 5. The center of mass of Earths atmosphere is: A. a little less than halfway between Earths surface and the outer boundary of the atmosphere B. near the surface of Earth C. near the outer boundary of the atmosphere D. near the center of Earth E. none of the above 6. A thick uniform wire is bent into the shape of the letter U as shown. Which point indicates the location of the center of mass of this wire? A B D C E 7. A machinist starts with three identical square plates but cuts one corner from one of them, two corners from the second, and three corners from the third. Rank the three plates according to the x coordinate of their centers of mass, from smallest to largest. y y y x 1 A. B. C. D. E. x 2 x 3 1, 2, 3 1 and 2 tie, then 3 1, then 2 and 3 tie 3, 2, 1 1 and 3 tie, then 2 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 121 8. Block A, with a mass of 4 kg, is moving with a speed of 2.0 m/s while block B, with a mass of 8 kg, is moving in the opposite direction with a speed of 3 m/s. The center of mass of the two block-system is moving with a velocity of: A. 1.3 m/s in the same direction as A B. 1.3 m/s in the same direction as B C. 2.7 m/s in the same direction as A D. 1.0 m/s in the same direction as B E. 5.0 m/s in the same direction as A 9. At the same instant that a 0.50-kg ball is dropped from 25 m above Earth, a second ball, with a mass of 0.25 kg, is thrown straight upward from Earths surface with an initial speed of 15 m/s. They move along nearby lines and pass each other without colliding. At the end of 2.0 s the height above Earths surface of the center of mass of the two-ball system is: A. 2.9 m B. 4.0 m C. 5.0 m D. 7.1 m E. 10.4 m 10. At the same instant that a 0.50-kg ball is dropped from 25 m above Earth, a second ball, with a mass of 0.25 kg, is thrown straight upward from Earths surface with an initial speed of 15 m/s. They move along nearby lines and pass without colliding. At the end of 2.0 s the velocity of the center of mass of the two-ball system is: A. 11 m/s, down B. 11 m/s, up C. 15 m/s, down D. 15 m/s, up E. 20 m/s, down 11. At the same instant that a 0.50-kg ball is dropped from 25 m above Earth, a second ball, with a mass of 0.25 kg, is thrown straight upward from Earths surface with an initial speed of 15 m/s. They move along nearby lines and pass without colliding. At the end of 2.0 s the magnitude of the acceleration of the center of mass of the two-ball system is: A. 0.25g B. 0.50g C. 0.75g D. g E. g/0.75 122 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 12. A light rope passes over a light frictionless pulley attached to the ceiling. An object with a large mass is tied to one end and an object with a smaller mass is tied to the other end. Starting from rest the heavier object moves downward and the lighter object moves upward with the same magnitude acceleration. Which of the following statements is true for the system consisting of the two masses? A. The center of mass remains at rest. B. The net external force is zero. C. The velocity of the center of mass is a constant. D. The acceleration of the center of mass is g , downward. E. None of the above statements are true. 13. Two 4.0-kg blocks are tied together with a compressed spring between them. They are thrown from the ground with an initial velocity of 35 m/s, 45 above the horizontal. At the highest point of the trajectory they become untied and spring apart. About how far below the highest point is the center of mass of the two-block system 2.0 s later, before either fragment has hit the ground? A. 12 m B. 20 m C. 31 m D. Cant tell because the velocities of the fragments are not given. E. Cant tell because the coordinates of the highest point are not given. 14. The center of mass of a system of particles has a constant velocity if: A. the forces exerted by the particles on each other sum to zero B. the external forces acting on particles of the system sum to zero C. the velocity of the center of mass is initially zero D. the particles are distributed symmetrically around the center of mass E. the center of mass is at the geometric center of the system 15. The center of mass of a system of particles remains at the same place if: A. it is initially at rest and the external forces sum to zero B. it is initially at rest and the internal forces sum to zero C. the sum of the external forces is less than the maximum force of static friction D. no friction acts internally E. none of the above 16. A man sits in the back of a canoe in still water. He then moves to the front of the canoe and sits there. Afterwards the canoe: A. is forward of its original position and moving forward B. is forward of its original position and moving backward C. is rearward of its original position and moving forward D. is rearward of its original position and moving backward E. is rearward of its original position and not moving Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 123 17. A 640-N hunter gets a rope around a 3200-N polar bear. They are stationary, 20 m apart, on frictionless level ice. When the hunter pulls the polar bear to him, the polar bear will move: A. 1.0 m B. 3.3 m C. 10 m D. 12 m E. 17 m 18. Two boys, with masses of 40 kg and 60 kg, respectively, stand on a horizontal frictionless surface holding the ends of a light 10-m long rod. The boys pull themselves together along the rod. When they meet the 60-kg boy will have moved what distance? A. 4 m B. 5 m C. 6 m D. 10 m E. need to know the forces they exert 19. The center of mass of a system of particles obeys an equation similar to Newtons second law F = macom , where: A. F is the net internal force and m is the total mass of the system B. F is the net internal force and m is the mass acting on the system C. F is the net external force and m is the total mass of the system D. F is the force of gravity and m is the mass of Earth E. F is the force of gravity and m is the total mass of the system 20. A large wedge with a mass of 10 kg rests on a horizontal frictionless surface, as shown. A block with a mass of 5.0 kg starts from rest and slides down the inclined surface of the wedge, which is rough. At one instant the vertical component of the blocks velocity is 3.0 m/s and the horizontal component is 6.0 m/s. At that instant the velocity of the wedge is: 5.0 kg .... .... .... .. .... ... .... .. .... .. .. .... .... .... .... .. ...... ........ .... .... . . .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .... .... .. ... .. .... ... .. ...... .. . .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . . .... .... .... .... .... .... ... ... .... .... . . 10 kg A. B. C. D. E. 124 3.0 m/s to the left 3.0 m/s to the right 6.0 m/s to the right 6.0 m/s to the left 17 m/s to the right Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 21. A 2.0-kg block is attached to one end of a spring with a spring constant of 100 N/m and a 4.0-kg block is attached to the other end. The blocks are placed on a horizontal frictionless surface and set into motion. At one instant the 2.0-kg block is observed to be traveling to the right with a speed of 0.50 m/s and the 4.0-kg block is observed to be traveling to the left with a speed of 0.30 m/s. Since the only forces on the blocks are the force of gravity, the normal force of the surface, and the force of the spring, we conclude that: A. the spring is compressed at the time of the observation B. the spring is not compressed at the time of observation C. the motion was started with the masses at rest D. the motion was started with at least one of masses moving E. the motion was started by compressing the spring 22. A 2.0-kg mass is attached to one end of a spring with a spring constant of 100 N/m and a 4.0-kg mass is attached to the other end. The masses are placed on a horizontal frictionless surface and the spring is compressed 10 cm. The spring is then released with the masses at rest and the masses oscillate. When the spring has its equilibrium length for the rst time the 2.0-kg mass has a speed of 0.36 m/s. The mechanical energy that has been lost to the instant is: A. zero B. 0.31 J C. 0.61 J D. 0.81 J E. 1.2 J 23. Momentum may be expressed in: A. kg/m B. grams C. Ns D. kg/(ms) E. N/s 24. The momentum of an object at a given instant is independent of its: A. inertia B. mass C. speed D. velocity E. acceleration Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 125 25. Two bodies, A and B, have equal kinetic energies. The mass of A is nine times that of B. The ratio of the momentum of A to that of B is: A. 1:9 B. 1:3 C. 1:1 D. 3:1 E. 9:1 26. Two objects, P and Q, have the same momentum. Q has more kinetic energy than P if it: A. weighs more than P B. is moving faster than P C. weighs the same as P D. is moving slower than P E. is moving at the same speed as P 27. A particle moves along the x axis. Its momentum is graphed below as a function of time. Rank the numbered regions according to the magnitude of the force acting on the particle, least to greatest. p 2 ............... ........................ ........ 3 .. ........ . ........ .. ........ . 1. .... .. .... . . .... .. .... 4 . ... . . .... . .... .. ... . .... .... ... ... t A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 2, 3, 4, 1, 4, 3, 1, 3, 4, 2, 4, 3, 4 1 2 2 1 28. A 1.0-kg ball moving at 2.0 m/s perpendicular to a wall rebounds from the wall at 1.5 m/s. The change in the momentum of the ball is: A. zero B. 0.5 N s away from wall C. 0.5 N s toward wall D. 3.5 N s away from wall E. 3.5 N s toward wall 126 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 29. If the total momentum of a system is changing: A. particles of the system must be exerting forces on each other B. the system must be under the inuence of gravity C. the center of mass must have constant velocity D. a net external force must be acting on the system E. none of the above 30. When you step on the accelerator to increase the speed of your car, the force that accelerates the car is: A. the force of your foot on the accelerator B. the force of friction of the road on the tires C. the force of the engine on the drive shaft D. the normal force of the road on the tires E. none of the above 31. A 2.5-kg stone is released from rest and falls toward Earth. After 4.0 s, the magnitude of its momentum is: A. 98 kg m/s B. 78 kg m/s C. 39 kg m/s D. 24 kg m/s E. zero 32. A 64-kg woman stands on frictionless level ice with a 0.10-kg stone at her feet. She kicks the stone with her foot so that she acquires a velocity of 0.0017 m/s in the forward direction. The velocity acquired by the stone is: A. 1.1 m/s forward B. 1.1 m/s backward C. 0.0017 m/s forward D. 0.0017 m/s backward E. none of these 33. A man is marooned at rest on level frictionless ice. In desperation, he hurls his shoe to the right at 15 m/s. If the man weighs 720 N and the shoe weighs 4.0 N, the man moves to the left with a speed of: A. 0 B. 2.1 102 m/s C. 8.3 102 m/s D. 15 m/s E. 2.7 103 m/s Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 127 34. Two spacemen are oating together with zero speed in a gravity-free region of space. The mass of spaceman A is 120 kg and that of spaceman B is 90 kg. Spaceman A pushes B away from him with B attaining a nal speed of 0.5 m/s. The nal recoil speed of A is: A. zero B. 0.38 m/s C. 0.5 m/s D. 0.67 m/s E. 1.0 m/s 35. A projectile in ight explodes into several fragments. The total momentum of the fragments immediately after this explosion: A. is the same as the momentum of the projectile immediately before the explosion B. has been changed into kinetic energy of the fragments C. is less than the momentum of the projectile immediately before the explosion D. is more than the momentum of the projectile immediately before the explosion E. has been changed into radiant energy 36. A rie of mass M is initially at rest but free to recoil. It res a bullet of mass m and velocity v (relative to the ground). After ring, the velocity of the rie (relative to the ground) is: A. mv B. M v/m C. mv/M D. v E. mv/M 37. Bullets from two revolvers are red with the same velocity. The bullet from gun #1 is twice as heavy as the bullet from gun #2. Gun #1 weighs three times as much as gun #2. The ratio of the momentum imparted to gun #1 to that imparted to gun #2 is: A. 2:3 B. 3:2 C. 2:1 D. 3:1 E. 6:1 128 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 38. A 5-kg object can move along the x axis. It is subjected to a force F in the positive x direction; a graph of F as a function of time t is shown below. Over the time the force is applied the change in the velocity of the object is: F (N) 4 2 A. B. C. D. E. ... . . .. .... .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. 1 2 3 4 t(s) 0.8 m/s 1.1 m/s 1.6 m/s 2.3 m/s 4.0 m/s 39. Force: A. equals the negative integral (with respect to distance) of the potential energy function B. is the ability to do work C. is the rate of change of doing work D. equals the time rate of change of momentum E. has dimensions of momentum multiplied by time 40. Cart A, with a mass of 0.20 kg, travels on a horizontal air track at 3.0 m/s and hits cart B, which has a mass of 0.40 kg and is initially traveling away from A at 2.0 m/s. After the collision the center of mass of the two cart system has a speed of: A. zero B. 0.33 m/s C. 2.3 m/s D. 2.5 m/s E. 5.0 m/s Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 129 41. A 500-kg sack of coal is dropped on a 2000-kg railroad atcar which was initially moving at 3 m/s as shown. After the sack rests on the atcar, the speed of the atcar is: . . . .... 500 kg . . .......... .......... . ......... ......... .. . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. ............. . . ........... 2000 kg .. .. . .. ........ ..... . ........ ....... . ....... .. ... . .. ......... .. ...... ..... . ... ... A. B. C. D. E. Santa Fe ... ... .................. .................. .... .... 3 m/s .. .. . .. ........ ..... . ........ ....... ... . ....... .. . .. ......... .. ...... ..... . ... ... 0.6 m/s 1.2 m/s 1.8 m/s 2.4 m/s 3.6 m/s 42. A cart loaded with sand slides forward along a horizontal frictionless track. As the cart moves, sand trickles out at a constant rate through a hole in the back of the cart. The acceleration of the cart is: A. constant and in the forward direction B. constant and in the backward direction C. variable and in the forward direction D. variable and in the backward direction E. zero 43. The thrust of a rocket is: A. a gravitational force acting on the rocket B. the force of the exiting fuel gases on the rocket C. any force that is external to the rocket-fuel system D. a force that arises from the reduction in mass of the rocket-fuel system E. none of the above 44. At one instant of time a rocket is traveling in outer space at 2500 m/s and is exhausting fuel at a rate of 100 kg/s. If the speed of the fuel as it leaves the rocket is 1500 m/s, relative to the rocket, the thrust is: A. 0 B. 1.0 105 N C. 1.5 105 N D. 2.9 105 N E. 2.5 105 N 130 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 45. A rocket exhausts fuel with a velocity of 1500 m/s, relative to the rocket. It starts from rest in outer space with fuel comprising 80 per cent of the total mass. When all the fuel has been exhausted its speed is: A. 3600 m/s B. 2400 m/s C. 1200 m/s D. 880 m/s E. 400 m/s 46. A 1000-kg space probe is motionless in space. To start moving, its main engine is red for 5 s during which time it ejects exhaust gases at 5000 m/s. At the end of this process it is moving at 20 m/s. The approximate mass of the ejected gas is: ...................................................................................................................... .... . ..................... . . ....... . ... 1000 kg . .. ... . ........... . ................................................................................................................................... . .. . . .. ............... ............... .... .... .. 20 m/s A. B. C. D. E. . .... ...... ...... ...... .... . .......... ...... .......... ...... . ...... .. ...... .... ...... ......... ...... ........... .......... . . . .. ...... ........... ...... .......... . .. ...... ...... ...... ...... .. . ...... ........... ...... ........... .. .. . . ...... ........... .......... ...... ........... ......... ...... . ...... . ...... .......... ...... .......... ...... ...... ...... ..... . . ........................ ........................ .. .. ... .... . 5000 m/s 0.8 kg 4 kg 5 kg 20 kg 25 kg 47. The physical quantity impulse has the same dimensions as that of: A. force B. power C. energy D. momentum E. work 48. The law of conservation of momentum applies to a system of colliding objects only if: A. there is no change in kinetic energy of the system B. the coecient of restitution is one C. the coecient of restitution is zero D. the net external impulse is zero E. the collisions are all elastic Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 131 49. Sphere X, of mass 2 kg, is moving to the right at 10 m/s. Sphere Y, of mass 4 kg, is moving to the left at 10 m/s. The two spheres collide head-on. The magnitude of the impulse of X on Y is: A. twice the magnitude of the impulse of Y on X B. half the magnitude of the impulse of Y on X C. one-fourth the magnitude of the impulse of Y on X D. four times the magnitude of the impulse of Y on X E. the same as the magnitude of the impulse of Y on X 50. Two bodies of unequal mass, placed at rest on a frictionless surface, are acted on by equal horizontal forces for equal times. Just after these forces are removed, the body of greater mass will have: A. the greater speed B. the greater acceleration C. the smaller momentum D. the greater momentum E. the same momentum as the other body 51. A 0.2-kg rubber ball is dropped from the window of a building. It strikes the sidewalk below at 30 m/s and rebounds up at 20 m/s. The impulse on the ball during the collision is: A. 10 N s upward B. 10 N s downward C. 2.0 N s upward D. 2.0 N s downward E. 9.8 N s upward 52. A 10-kg block of ice is at rest on a frictionless horizontal surface. A 1.0-N force is applied in an easterly direction for 1.0 s. During this time interval, the block: A. acquires a speed of 1 m/s B. moves 10 cm C. acquires a momentum of 1.0 kg m/s D. acquires a kinetic energy of 0.1 J E. none of the above 132 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 53. A uniform narrow bar, resting on ice, is given a transverse horizontal impulse J at one end as shown. The center of mass of the bar COM will then: COM A. B. C. D. E. . . .. .... . .... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... ................... J . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remain at rest move in a circle move in a straight line move in a parabola move along some other curve 54. What magnitude impulse will give a 2.0-kg object a momentum change of magnitude + 50 kg m/s? A. +25 N s B. 25 N s C. +50 N s D. 50 N s E. +100 N s 55. A students life was saved in an automobile accident because an airbag expanded in front of his head. If the car had not been equipped with an airbag, the windshield would have stopped the motion of his head in a much shorter time. Compared to the windshield, the airbag: A. causes a much smaller change in momentum B. exerts a much smaller impulse C. causes a much smaller change in kinetic energy D. exerts a much smaller force E. does much more work Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 133 56. A ball hits a wall and rebounds with the same speed, as diagramed below. The changes in the components of the momentum of the ball are: y .. . .. . .. ... .... .. .. ...... ...... . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. . .. ...... ... ...... .. ... . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .............. .............. A. B. C. D. E. px px px px px ans: > 0, < 0, = 0, = 0, > 0, C py py py py py x >0 >0 >0 <0 <0 57. A golf ball of mass m is hit by a golf club so that the ball leaves the tee with speed v . The club is in contact with the ball for time T . The magnitude of the average force on the club on the ball during the time T is: A. mvT B. mv/T C. (1/2)mv2 T D. mv2 /(2T ) E. mT 2 /(2v ) 58. A 640-N acrobat falls 5.0 m from rest into a net. The net tosses him back up with the same speed he had just before he hit the net. The magnitude of the average upward force exerted on him by the net during this collision is: A. 32 N B. 64 N C. 320 N D. 640 N E. impossible to determine from given data 59. Whenever an object strikes a stationary object of equal mass: A. the two objects cannot stick together B. the collision must be elastic C. the rst object must stop D. momentum is not necessarily conserved E. none of the above 134 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 60. For a two-body collision involving objects with dierent masses, a frame of reference which has the same velocity relative to the laboratory as does the center of mass of the two objects is: A. a frame for which the momentum of the incident object is zero B. a frame for which the momentum of the target object is zero C. a frame for which the average momentum of the two objects is zero D. a frame for which the total momentum of the two objects is zero E. none of the above 61. An A. B. C. D. E. inelastic collision is one in which: momentum is not conserved but kinetic energy is conserved total mass is not conserved but momentum is conserved neither kinetic energy nor momentum is conserved momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved the total impulse is equal to the change in kinetic energy 62. A 4.0-N puck is traveling at 3.0 m/s. It strikes a 8.0-N puck, which is stationary. The two pucks stick together. Their common nal speed is: A. 1.0 m/s B. 1.5 m/s C. 2.0 m/s D. 2.3 m/s E. 3.0 m/s 63. A 3.00-g bullet traveling horizontally at 400 m/s hits a 3.00-kg wooden block, which is initially at rest on a smooth horizontal table. The bullet buries itself in the block without passing through. The speed of the block after the collision is: A. 1.33 m/s B. 0.40 m/s C. 12.0 m/s D. 40.0 m/s E. 160 m/s 64. A 2-kg cart, traveling on a horizontal air track with a speed of 3 m/s, collides with a stationary 4-kg cart. The carts stick together. The impulse exerted by one cart on the other has a magnitude of: A. 0 B. 4 N s C. 6 N s D. 9 N s E. 12 N s Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 135 65. A 3-g bullet is red horizontally into a 10-kg block of wood suspended by a rope from the ceiling. The block swings in an arc, rising 3 mm above its lowest position. The velocity of the bullet was: A. unknown since the heat generated in the collision was not given B. 8.0 102 m/s C. 24.0 m/s D. 8.00 m/s E. 2.4 104 m/s 66. A 3.0-kg and a 2.0-kg cart approach each other on a horizontal air track. They collide and stick together. After the collision their total kinetic energy is 40 J. The speed of their center of mass is: A. zero B. 2.8 m/s C. 4.0 m/s D. 5.2 m/s E. 6.3 m/s 67. Blocks A and B are moving toward each other. A has a mass of 2.0 kg and a velocity of 50 m/s, while B has a mass of 4.0 kg and a velocity of 25 m/s. They suer a completely inelastic collision. The kinetic energy lost during the collision is: A. 0 B. 1250 J C. 3750 J D. 5000 J E. 5600 J 68. For a completely inelastic two-body collision the kinetic energy retained by the objects is the same as: A. the total kinetic energy before the collision B. the dierence in the kinetic energies of the objects before the collision 2 C. 1 M vcom , where M is the total mass and vcom is the velocity of the center of mass 2 D. the kinetic energy of the more massive body before the collision E. the kinetic energy of the less massive body before the collision 69. A 75-kg man is riding in a 30-kg cart at 2.0 m/s. He jumps o in such a way as to land on the ground with no horizontal velocity. The resulting change in speed of the cart is: A. zero B. 2.0 m/s C. 3.0 m/s D. 5.0 m/s E. 7.0 m/s 136 Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 70. An A. B. C. D. E. elastic collision is one in which: momentum is not conserved but kinetic energy is conserved total mass is not conserved but momentum is conserved kinetic energy and momentum are both conserved momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved the total impulse is equal to the change in kinetic energy 71. Object A strikes the stationary object B head-on in an elastic collision. The mass of A is xed, you may choose the mass of B appropriately. Then: A. for B to have the greatest recoil speed, choose mB = mA B. for B to have the greatest recoil momentum, choose mB mA C. for B to have the greatest recoil kinetic energy, choose mB mA D. for B to have the least recoil speed, choose mB = mA E. for B to have the greatest recoil kinetic energy, choose mB = mA 72. Block A, with a mass of 2.0 kg, moves along the x axis with a velocity of 5.0 m/s in the positive x direction. It suers an elastic collision with block B, initially at rest, and the blocks leave the collision along the x axis. If B is much more massive than A, the speed of A after the collision is: A. 0 B. +5.0 m/s C. 5.0 m/s D. +10 m/s E. 10 m/s 73. A very massive object traveling at 10 m/s strikes a very light object, initially at rest, and the light object moves o in the direction of travel of the heavy object. If the collision is elastic, the speed of the lighter object is: A. 5.0 m/s B. 10 m/s C. 15 m/s D. 20 m/s E. Cant tell from the information given. 74. Sphere A has mass m and is moving with velocity v . It makes a head-on elastic collision with a stationary sphere B of mass 2m. After the collision their speeds (vA and vB ) are: A. 0, v/2 B. v/3, 2v/3 C. v , v D. 2v/3, v/3 E. none of these Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 137 75. Blocks A and B are moving toward each other along the x axis. A has a mass of 2.0 kg and a velocity of 50 m/s, while B has a mass of 4.0 kg and a velocity of 25 m/s. They suer an elastic collision and move o along the x axis. The kinetic energy transferred from A to B during the collision is: A. 0 B. 2500 J C. 5000 J D. 7500 J E. 10000 J 76. When a particle suers a head-on elastic collision with another particle, initially at rest, the greatest fraction of kinetic energy is transferred if: A. the incident particle is initially traveling very fast B. the incident particle is traveling very slowly C. the incident particle is much more massive than the target particle D. the incident particle is much less massive than the target particle E. the incident and target particle have the same mass 77. Two objects, X and Y, are held at rest on a horizontal frictionless surface and a spring is compressed between them. The mass of X is 2/5 times the mass of Y. Immediately after the spring is released, X has a kinetic energy of 50 J and Y has a kinetic energy of: A. 20 J B. 8 J C. 310 J D. 125 J E. 50 J 78. Two carts (A and B), having spring bumpers, collide as shown. Cart A has a mass of 2 kg and is initially moving to the right. Cart B has a mass of 3 kg and is initially stationary. When the separation between the carts is a minimum: .. . .. ..................... .................... .. .. ... ... ....... ... ... .. . . . . . . . .. .. ... ........ ..... A. B. C. D. E. 138 A ... ....... ... ... .. . . . . . . . .. .. ... ........ ..... ................. .................. .. . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . .. . ................ . ..... ... ................ . . . . .. . .......... ... ................ .................. .. . . . . . . . . . ................ . . ........ ....... . .. .... . . .. . . . . . ........ ....... . ................ .. . . . . . ... ....... ... ... .. . . . . . . . .. .. ... ........ ..... B ... ....... ... ... .. . . . . . . . .. .. ... ........ ..... cart B is still at rest cart A has come to rest the carts have the same momentum the carts have the same kinetic energy the kinetic energy of the system is at a minimum Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 79. Two identical carts travel at 1 m/s in opposite directions on a common horizontal surface. They collide head-on and are reported to rebound, each with a speed of 2 m/s. Then: A. momentum was not conserved; therefore, the report must be false B. if some other form of energy were changed to kinetic during the collision, the report could be true C. if the collision were elastic, the report could be true D. if friction were present, the report could be true E. if the duration of the collision were long enough, the report could be true 80. A block moves at 5.0 m/s in the positive x direction and hits an identical block, initially at rest. A small amount of gunpowder had been placed on one of the blocks. The explosion does not harm the blocks but it doubles their total kinetic energy. After the explosion the blocks move along the x axis and the incident block has a speed in of: A. 1.8 m/s B. 5.0 m/s C. 6.8 m/s D. 7.1 m/s E. 11.8 m/s 81. A stream of gas consists of n molecules. Each molecule has mass m and speed v . The stream is reected elastically from a rigid surface as shown. The magnitude of the change in the total momentum of the stream is: .... .... .... .. .... . . ....... ....... .... ... v .. .. 30 . . . . . . . . v................................... . 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... A. B. C. D. E. 2mnv 2mnv sin 30 mnv sin 30 mnv cos 30 mnv Chapter 9: CENTER OF MASS AND LINEAR MOMENTUM 139 Chapter 10: ROTATION 1. A radian is about: A. 25 B. 37 C. 45 D. 57 E. 90 2. One revolution is the same as: A. 1 rad B. 57 rad C. /2 rad D. rad E. 2 rad 3. One revolution per minute is about: A. 0.0524 rad/s B. 0.105 rad/s C. 0.95 rad/s D. 1.57 rad/s E. 6.28 rad/s 4. If a A. B. C. D. E. wheel turns with constant angular speed then: each point on its rim moves with constant velocity each point on its rim moves with constant acceleration the wheel turns through equal angles in equal times the angle through which the wheel turns in each second increases as time goes on the angle through which the wheel turns in each second decreases as time goes on 5. If a A. B. C. D. E. wheel is turning at 3.0 rad/s, the time it takes to complete one revolution is about: 0.33 s 0.67 s 1.0 s 1.3 s 2.1 s 140 Chapter 10: ROTATION 6. If wheel turning at a constant rate completes 100 revolutions in 10 s its angular speed is: A. 0.31 rad/s B. 0.63 rad/s C. 10 rad/s D. 31 rad/s E. 63 rad/s 7. The angular speed of the second hand of a watch is: A. ( /1800) rad/s B. ( /60) m/s C. ( /30) m/s D. (2 ) m/s E. (60) m/s 8. The angular speed of the minute hand of a watch is: A. (60/ ) m/s B. (1800/ ) m/s C. ( ) m/s D. ( /1800) m/s E. ( /60) m/s 9. A ywheel is initially rotating at 20 rad/s and has a constant angular acceleration. After 9.0 s it has rotated through 450 rad. Its angular acceleration is: A. 3.3 rad/s B. 4.4 rad/s C. 5.6 rad/s D. 6.7 rad/s E. 11 rad/s 10. Ten seconds after an electric fan is turned on, the fan rotates at 300 rev/min. Its average angular acceleration is: A. 3.14 rad/s2 B. 30 rad/s2 2 C. 30 rev/s 2 D. 50 rev/min E. 1800 rev/s2 Chapter 10: ROTATION 141 2 11. A wheel rotates with a constant angular acceleration of rad/s . During a certain time interval its angular displacement is rad. At the end of the interval its angular velocity is 2 rad/s. Its angular velocity at the beginning of the interval is: A. zero B. 1 rad/s C. /s rad D. 2 rad/s E. 2 rad/s 12. A ywheel rotating at 12 rev/s is brought to rest in 6 s. The magnitude of the average angular acceleration in rad/s2 of the wheel during this process is: A. 1/ B. 2 C. 4 D. 4 E. 72 13. A phonograph turntable, initially rotating at 0.75 rev/s, slows down and stops in 30 s. The magnitude of its average angular acceleration in rad/s2 for this process is: A. 1.5 B. 1.5 C. /40 D. /20 E. 0.75 14. The angular velocity of a rotating wheel increases by 2 rev/s every minute. The angular acceleration in rad/s2 of this wheel is: A. 42 B. 2 C. 1/30 D. /15 E. 4 15. A wheel initially has an angular velocity of 18 rad/s. It has a constant angular acceleration of 2 2.0 rad/s and is slowing at rst. What time elapses before its angular velocity is 18 rad/s in the direction opposite to its initial angular velocity? A. 3.0 s B. 6.0 s C. 9.0 s D. 18 s E. 36 s 142 Chapter 10: ROTATION 16. A wheel initially has an angular velocity of 36 rad/s but after 6.0 s its angular velocity is 24 rad/s. If its angular acceleration is constant its value is: A. B. C. D. E. 2 2.0 rad/s 2.0 rad/s2 2 3.0 rad/s 2 3.0 rad/s 2 6.0 rad/s 17. A wheel initially has an angular velocity of 36 rad/s but after 6.0 s its angular velocity is 24 rad/s. If its angular acceleration is constant the value is: A. B. C. D. E. 2 2.0 rad/s 2.0 rad/s2 2 3.0 rad/s 2 3.0 rad/s 2 6.0 rad/s 2 18. A wheel initially has an angular velocity of 18 rad/s but it is slowing at a rate of 2.0 rad/s . By the time it stops it will have turned through: A. 81 rad B. 160 rad C. 245 rad D. 330 rad E. 410 rad 2 19. A wheel starts from rest and has an angular acceleration of 4.0 rad/s . When it has made 10 rev its angular velocity is: A. 16 rad/s B. 22 rad/s C. 32 rad/s D. 250 rad/s E. 500 rad/s 2 20. A wheel starts from rest and has an angular acceleration of 4.0 rad/s . The time it takes to make 10 rev is: A. 0.50 s B. 0.71 s C. 2.2 s D. 2.8 s E. 5.6 s Chapter 10: ROTATION 143 4 21. A wheel starts from rest and has an angular acceleration that is given by (t) = (6 rad/s )t2 . The angle through which it turns in time t is given by: A. [(1/8)t4 ] rad B. [(1/4)t4 ] rad C. [(1/2)t4 ] rad D. (t4 ) rad E. 12 rad 4 22. A wheel starts from rest and has an angular acceleration that is given by (t) = (6.0 rad/s )t2 . The time it takes to make 10 rev is: A. 2.8 s B. 3.3 s C. 4.0 s D. 4.7 s E. 5.3 s 23. A wheel starts from rest and has an angular acceleration that is given by (t) = (6.0 rad/s4 )t2 . After it has turned through 10 rev its angular velocity is: A. 63 rad/s B. 75 rad/s C. 89 rad/s D. 130 rad/s E. 210 rad/s 24. A wheel is spinning at 27 rad/s but is slowing with an angular acceleration that has a magnitude 4 given by (3.0 rad/s )t2 . It stops in a time of: A. 1.7 s B. 2.6 s C. 3.0 s D. 4.4 s E. 7.3 s 25. If the angular velocity vector of a spinning body points out of the page then, when viewed from above the page, the body is spinning: A. clockwise about an axis that is perpendicular to the page B. counterclockwise about an axis that is perpendicular to the page C. about an axis that is parallel to the page D. about an axis that is changing orientation E. about an axis that is getting longer 144 Chapter 10: ROTATION 26. The angular velocity vector of a spinning body points out of the page. If the angular acceleration vector points into the page then: A. the body is slowing down B. the body is speeding up C. the body is starting to turn in the opposite direction D. the axis of rotation is changing orientation E. none of the above 27. A child, riding on a large merry-go-round, travels a distance of 3000 m in a circle of diameter 40 m. The total angle through which she revolves is: A. 50 rad B. 75 rad C. 150 rad D. 314 rad E. none of these 28. The gure shows a cylinder of radius 0.7 m rotating about its axis at 10 rad/s. The speed of the point P is: .............. ................ ..... .... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... .... .... ................. ................ . .. .. P........ A. B. C. D. E. .. ... . .... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.0 m/s 14 rad/s 7.0 rad/s 0.70 m/s none of these Chapter 10: ROTATION 145 29. The fan shown has been turned on and is now slowing as it rotates clockwise. The direction of the acceleration of the point X on the fan tip could be: . . . . ... .... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X . . .. . .... ..... ..... ...... .......... . ... . .. . ... .. .... ........... .. .. . ... ..... . ..... ... . . .... . ........... ... ........... .... ................ ................ ... . . . . .. . .. ... . . . .. . . .. . . ..... ......... .... .. ....... .... . ...... ................. .... ....... . .................. ......... .. . .. .... .. . . . .................. ............. ...... . .... ..... .. . ..... ...... . ..... ..... .. . ... . . . . ... ............. .... ..... . ... . .... . ... . .. ... .. .......... .... ..... .... ... . ... .... . ........ . .. .......... .. .. ... ... .. ....... .. .. . . . . ........ . ..... ....... . . ......... .... . . . . . ..... .... ... .. . . ... . . .. .. . . . ... . ..... . . . .... . . ..... . . . . ... . ... . . . . . . .... ..... . . . . . ....... . . .. . . .. . . .. . ............. . ....... ........ .. .. ..... . .. ....... .. ..... ... . ..... ..... .. ..... .. . .......... ... ....... .... .. . .... .... ... ....... . .. . . . ... ... ... ... ..... ..... . ... .. ..... . .. . .... . . ............. .... .......... .. .. . . ... ......... .................. ................ . . .. ...... ........ ................. ................. .... . . .. . .. ... . . . .. ............... ........ ........ . ................. .. ............. . .. . . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. ... .. .... .. ... . . . .. ... . .. ... . ... .... .. ... .. .... .... ........ ...... . ....... .. . ... . .... .... .. .. . . . .. . .. ... . . . . .. .. ... .... .. A. B. C. D. E. 30. A wheel of diameter 3.0 cm has a 4.0-m cord wrapped around its periphery. Starting from rest, 2 the wheel is given a constant angular acceleration of 2.0 rad/s . The cord will unwind in: A. 0.82 s B. 2.0 s C. 8.0 s D. 16 s E. 130 s 31. A particle moves in a circular path of radius 0.10 m with a constant angular speed of 5 rev/s. The acceleration of the particle is: 2 A. 0.10 m/s 2 B. 0.50 m/s C. 500 m/s2 2 D. 10002 m/s 2 E. 102 m/s 32. A car travels north at constant velocity. It goes over a piece of mud, which sticks to the tire. The initial acceleration of the mud, as it leaves the ground, is: A. vertically upward B. horizontally to the north C. horizontally to the south D. zero E. upward and forward at 45 to the horizontal 146 Chapter 10: ROTATION 33. Wrapping paper is being from a 5.0-cm radius tube, free to rotate on its axis. If it is pulled at the constant rate of 10 cm/s and does not slip on the tube, the angular velocity of the tube is: A. 2.0 rad/s B. 5.0 rad/s C. 10 rad/s D. 25 rad/s E. 50 rad/s 34. String is wrapped around the periphery of a 5.0-cm radius cylinder, free to rotate on its axis. The string is pulled straight out at a constant rate of 10 cm/s and does not slip on the cylinder. As each small segment of string leaves the cylinder, its acceleration changes by: A. 0 2 B. 0.010 m/s C. 0.020 m/s2 D. 0.10 m/s2 2 E. 0.20 m/s 35. A ywheel of diameter 1.2 m has a constant angular acceleration of 5.0 rad/s2 . The tangential acceleration of a point on its rim is: A. 5.0 rad/s2 B. 3.0 m/s2 C. 5.0 m/s2 2 D. 6.0 m/s 2 E. 12 m/s 36. For a wheel spinning with constant angular acceleration on an axis through its center, the ratio of the speed of a point on the rim to the speed of a point halfway between the center and the rim is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 1/2 D. 4 E. 1/4 37. For a wheel spinning on an axis through its center, the ratio of the tangential acceleration of a point on the rim to the tangential acceleration of a point halfway between the center and the rim is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 1/2 D. 4 E. 1/4 Chapter 10: ROTATION 147 38. For a wheel spinning on an axis through its center, the ratio of the radial acceleration of a point on the rim to the radial acceleration of a point halfway between the center and the rim is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 1/2 D. 4 E. 1/4 39. Two wheels are identical but wheel B is spinning with twice the angular speed of wheel A. The ratio of the magnitude of the radial acceleration of a point on the rim of B to the magnitude of the radial acceleration of a point on the rim of A is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 1/2 D. 4 E. 1/4 40. A wheel starts from rest and spins with a constant angular acceleration. As time goes on the acceleration vector for a point on the rim: A. decreases in magnitude and becomes more nearly tangent to the rim B. decreases in magnitude and becomes more early radial C. increases in magnitude and becomes more nearly tangent to the rim D. increases in magnitude and becomes more nearly radial E. increases in magnitude but retains the same angle with the tangent to the rim 41. The magnitude of the acceleration of a point on a spinning wheel is increased by a factor of 4 if: A. the magnitudes of the angular velocity and the angular acceleration are each multiplied by a factor of 4 B. the magnitude of the angular velocity is multiplied by a factor of 4 and the angular acceleration is not changed C. the magnitudes of the angular velocity and the angular acceleration are each multiplied by a factor of 2 D. the magnitude of the angular velocity is multiplied by a factor of 2 and the angular acceleration is not changed E. the magnitude of the angular velocity is multiplied by a factor of 2 and the magnitude of the angular acceleration is multiplied by a factor of 4 148 Chapter 10: ROTATION 42. Three identical balls are tied by light strings to the same rod and rotate around it, as shown below. Rank the balls according to their rotational inertia, least to greatest. 1 m ball 1 2m ball 2 3m A. B. C. D. E. ball 3 1, 2, 3 3, 2, 1 3, then 1 and 2 tie 1, 3, 2 All are the same 43. Four identical particles, each with mass m, are arranged in the x, y plane as shown. They are connected by light sticks to form a rigid body. If m = 2.0 kg and a = 1.0 m, the rotational inertia of this array about the y axis is: y a a a x a ........... ............... ...... ... ... .. ... ...... ................ ... .... ........... A. B. C. D. E. 4.0 kg m2 12 kg m2 9.6 kg m2 4.8 kg m2 none of these Chapter 10: ROTATION 149 44. Three identical balls, with masses of M , 2M , and 3M , are fastened to a massless rod of length L as shown. The rotational inertia about the left end of the rod is: L/2 L/2 3M 2M M .............. ............... .... ... . .... ...... ........ . .... .............. ..... . .. A. B. C. D. E. M L2 /2 M L2 3M L2 /2 6M L2 3M L2 /4 45. The rotational inertia of a thin cylindrical shell of mass M , radius R, and length L about its central axis (XX ) is: ............................................................................... ............................................................................... X ........................................................................................................................................................... ... .... .... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... ... L A. B. C. D. E. | R | X M R2 /2 M L2 /2 M L2 M R2 none of these 46. The rotational inertia of a wheel about its axle does not depend upon its: A. diameter B. mass C. distribution of mass D. speed of rotation E. material composition 150 Chapter 10: ROTATION 47. Consider four objects, each having the same mass and the same radius: 1. a solid sphere 2. a hollow sphere 3. a at disk in the x, y plane 4. a hoop in the x, y plane The order of increasing rotational inertia about an axis through the center of mass and parallel to the z axis is: A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 1, 3, 2, 4 D. 4, 2, 3, 1 E. 3, 1, 2, 4 48. A and B are two solid cylinders made of aluminum. Their dimensions are shown. The ratio of the rotational inertia of B to that of A about the common axis XX is: R X . .... ....................... ............................ .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ............................ .... ....................... . . A ... ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... L .. .. . ......... .............................................. ....................................................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. ........................................................ ....................................................... .. . .. B .... .... .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. ... .. .. | 2R | X 2L A. B. C. D. E. 2 4 8 16 32 49. Two uniform circular disks having the same mass and the same thickness are made from dierent materials. The disk with the smaller rotational inertia is: A. the one made from the more dense material B. the one made from the less dense material C. neither both rotational inertias are the same D. the disk with the larger angular velocity E. the disk with the larger torque Chapter 10: ROTATION 151 50. A uniform solid cylinder made of lead has the same mass and the same length as a uniform solid cylinder made of wood. The rotational inertia of the lead cylinder compared to the wooden one is: A. greater B. less C. same D. unknown unless the radii are given E. unknown unless both the masses and the radii are given 51. To A. B. C. increase the rotational inertia of a solid disk about its axis without changing its mass: drill holes near the rim and put the material near the axis drill holes near the axis and put the material near the rim drill holes at points on a circle near the rim and put the material at points between the holes D. drill holes at points on a circle near the axis and put the material at points between the holes E. do none of the above (the rotational inertia cannot be changed without changing the mass) 52. The rotational inertia of a disk about its axis is 0.70 kg m2 . When a 2.0-kg weight is added to its rim, 0.40 m from the axis, the rotational inertia becomes: A. 0.38 kg m2 B. 0.54 kg m2 C. 0.70 kg m2 D. 0.86 kg m2 E. 1.0 kg m2 53. When a thin uniform stick of mass M and length L is pivoted about its midpoint, its rotational inertia is M L2 /12. When pivoted about a parallel axis through one end, its rotational inertia is: A. M L2 /12 B. M L2 /6 C. M L2 /3 D. 7M L2 /12 E. 13M L2 /12 54. The rotational inertia of a solid uniform sphere about a diameter is (2/5)M R2 , where M is its mass and R is its radius. If the sphere is pivoted about an axis that is tangent to its surface, its rotational inertia is: A. M R2 B. (2/5)M R2 C. (3/5)M R2 D. (5/2)M R2 E. (7/5)M R2 152 Chapter 10: ROTATION 55. A solid uniform sphere of radius R and mass M has a rotational inertia about a diameter that is given by (2/5)M R2 . A light string of length 3R is attached to the surface and used to suspend the sphere from the ceiling. Its rotational inertia about the point of attachment at the ceiling is: A. (2/5)M R2 B. 9M R2 C. 16M R2 D. (47/5)M R2 E. (82/5)M R2 56. A force with a given magnitude is to be applied to a wheel. The torque can be maximized by: A. applying the force near the axle, radially outward from the axle B. applying the force near the rim, radially outward from the axle C. applying the force near the axle, parallel to a tangent to the wheel D. applying the force at the rim, tangent to the rim E. applying the force at the rim, at 45 to the tangent 57. The meter stick shown below rotates about an axis through the point marked , 20 cm from one end. Five forces act on the stick: one at each end, one at the pivot point, and two 40 cm from one end, as shown. The magnitudes of the forces are all the same. Rank the forces according to the magnitudes of the torques they produce about the pivot point, least to greatest. F1 . . .. . .. .. . .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F2 . .. ... .... ..... .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. F3 F . . .. . .. 4 .. . .. ..... . . .. . ... . .... ..... .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . ... . .. . .. ... . . . ........................ ........................ .. .. .... F .... 5 0 cm 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm 100 cm A. B. C. D. E. F1 , F2 , F1 and F2 and F2 , F5 , F2 and F3 , F4 , F5 F2 tie, then F3 , F4 , F5 F5 tie, then F4 , F1 , F3 F1 and F3 tie, then F4 F5 tie, then F4 , then F1 and F3 tie Chapter 10: ROTATION 153 58. A rod is pivoted about its center. A 5-N force is applied 4 m from the pivot and another 5-N force is applied 2 m from the pivot, as shown. The magnitude of the total torque about the pivot (in Nm) is: ....... ...... 5 N.......................... ... ... . .. ... ... ................... 30 .. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . ..... .. ... . ... ... ...... ....... 2.0 m 4.0 m ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . .... .... .... ... 30 5N A. B. C. D. E. 0 5 8.7 15 26 59. = I for an object rotating about a xed axis, where is the net torque acting on it, I is its rotational inertia, and is its angular acceleration. This expression: A. is the denition of torque B. is the denition of rotational inertia C. is the denition of angular acceleration D. follows directly from Newtons second law E. depends on a principle of physics that is unrelated to Newtons second law 60. A meter stick on a horizontal frictionless table top is pivoted at the 80-cm mark. It is initially at rest. A horizontal force F1 is applied perpendicularly to the end of the stick at 0 cm, as shown. A second horizontal force F2 (not shown) is applied at the 100-cm end of the stick. If the stick does not rotate: F1 . .. .. . .. . . .. .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 cm 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm 100 cm A. B. C. D. E. 154 |F2 | > |F1 | |F2 | < |F1 | |F2 | = |F1 | |F2 | > |F1 | |F2 | > |F1 | for for for for for Chapter 10: all orientations of all orientations of all orientations of some orientations some orientations ROTATION F2 F2 F2 of F2 and |F2 | < |F1 | for others of F2 and |F2 | = |F1 | for others 61. A uniform disk, a thin hoop, and a uniform sphere, all with the same mass and same outer radius, are each free to rotate about a xed axis through its center. Assume the hoop is connected to the rotation axis by light spokes. With the objects starting from rest, identical forces are simultaneously applied to the rims, as shown. Rank the objects according to their angular accelerations, least to greatest. hoop disk .......... ............ ..... ... .... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. ... .. ... . ....... . ........ ................................. ..... ..... .. ..... ............... ... ... . A. B. C. D. E. sphere .. . .................. ................. ... ... . .... .... .. .... F .. ... ... .......... ...... ........ ..... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... ... .. . ..... ... ..... ........ ............................ ..... .................... ... ... .. .... .... F F disk, hoop, sphere hoop, disk, sphere hoop, sphere, disk hoop, disk, sphere sphere, disk, hoop 62. A disk is free to rotate on a xed axis. A force of given magnitude F , in the plane of the disk, is to be applied. Of the following alternatives the greatest angular acceleration is obtained if the force is: A. applied tangentially halfway between the axis and the rim B. applied tangentially at the rim C. applied radially halfway between the axis and the rim D. applied radially at the rim E. applied at the rim but neither radially nor tangentially 63. A cylinder is 0.10 m in radius and 0.20 m in length. Its rotational inertia, about the cylinder axis on which it is mounted, is 0.020 kg m2 . A string is wound around the cylinder and pulled with a force of 1.0 N. The angular acceleration of the cylinder is: 2 A. 2.5 rad/s B. 5.0 rad/s2 2 C. 10 rad/s 2 D. 15 rad/s 2 E. 20 rad/s Chapter 10: ROTATION 155 64. A disk with a rotational inertia of 2.0 kg m2 and a radius of 0.40 m rotates on a frictionless xed axis perpendicular to the disk faces and through its center. A force of 5.0 N is applied tangentially to the rim. The angular acceleration of the disk is: 2 A. 0.40 rad/s B. 0.60 rad/s2 C. 1.0 rad/s2 2 D. 2.5 rad/s 2 E. 10 rad/s 65. A disk with a rotational inertia of 5.0 kg m2 and a radius of 0.25 m rotates on a frictionless xed axis perpendicular to the disk and through its center. A force of 8.0 N is applied along the rotation axis. The angular acceleration of the disk is: A. 0 2 B. 0.40 rad/s C. 0.60 rad/s2 2 D. 1.0 rad/s 2 E. 2.5 rad/s 66. A disk with a rotational inertia of 5.0 kg m2 and a radius of 0.25 m rotates on a frictionless xed axis perpendicular to the disk and through its center. A force of 8.0 N is applied tangentially to the rim. If the disk starts at rest, then after it has turned through half a revolution its angular velocity is: A. 0.57 rad/s B. 0.64 rad/s C. 0.80 rad/s D. 1.6 rad/s E. 3.2 rad/s 67. A thin circular hoop of mass 1.0 kg and radius 2.0 m is rotating about an axis through its center 2 and perpendicular to its plane. It is slowing down at the rate of 7.0 rad/s . The net torque acting on it is: A. 7.0 N m B. 14.0 N m C. 28.0 N m D. 44.0 N m E. none of these 156 Chapter 10: ROTATION 68. A certain wheel has a rotational inertia of 12 kg m2 . As it turns through 5.0 rev its angular velocity increases from 5.0 rad/s to 6.0 rad/s. If the net torque is constant its value is: A. 0.016 N m B. 0.18 N m C. 0.57 N m D. 2.1 N m E. 3.6 N m 69. A 16-kg block is attached to a cord that is wrapped around the rim of a ywheel of diameter 0.40 m and hangs vertically, as shown. The rotational inertia of the ywheel is 0.50 kg m2 . When the block is released and the cord unwinds, the acceleration of the block is: . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. . . . .. ................ . . .... ...... ... .... . . ... ... ... . ... . ... ... . . ... . . ... . . . ... .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. . . . ........... . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ..... .... . ...... ................ ............. | | 0.4 m | | 16 kg A. B. C. D. E. 0.15g 0.56g 0.84g g 1.3g 70. A 8.0-cm radius disk with a rotational inertia of 0.12 kg m2 is free to rotate on a horizontal axis. A string is fastened to the surface of the disk and a 10-kg mass hangs from the other end. The mass is raised by using a crank to apply a 9.0-Nm torque to the disk. The acceleration of the mass is: 2 A. 0.50 m/s 2 B. 1.7 m/s C. 6.2 m/s2 2 D. 12 m/s 2 E. 20 m/s Chapter 10: ROTATION 157 71. A 0.70-kg disk with a rotational inertia given by M R2 /2 is free to rotate on a xed horizontal axis suspended from the ceiling. A string is wrapped around the disk and a 2.0-kg mass hangs from the free end. If the string does not slip, then as the mass falls and the cylinder rotates, the suspension holding the cylinder pulls up on the cylinder with a force of: A. 6.9 N B. 9.8 N C. 16 N D. 26 N E. 29 N 72. A small disk of radius R1 is mounted coaxially with a larger disk of radius R2 . The disks are securely fastened to each other and the combination is free to rotate on a xed axle that is perpendicular to a horizontal frictionless table top, as shown in the overhead view below. The rotational inertia of the combination is I . A string is wrapped around the larger disk and attached to a block of mass m, on the table. Another string is wrapped around the smaller disk and is pulled with a force F as shown. The acceleration of the block is: . ..................... ........................ ..... .... ..... .... .... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. 2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........... ............. .. . .. ...... .. ... ..... ... . . . . ... . .. . ... . . ... . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . ... 1 . ... .. . . . .. .. .... ... .. .... ... . ................................................. .... ...................................... ......... .... .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ... ... ... ... ... . ... ... .... ... .... .... ..... .... ..... ....................... ...................... m R R A. B. C. D. E. 158 R1 F/mR2 R1 R2 F/(I R1 R2 F/(I R1 R2 F/(I R1 R2 F/(I 2 mR2 ) 2 + mR2 ) mR1 R2 ) + mR1 R2 ) Chapter 10: ROTATION F 73. A small disk of radius R1 is fastened coaxially to a larger disk of radius R2 . The combination is free to rotate on a xed axle, which is perpendicular to a horizontal frictionless table top, as shown in the overhead view below. The rotational inertia of the combination is I . A string is wrapped around the larger disk and attached to a block of mass m, on the table. Another string is wrapped around the smaller disk and is pulled with a force F as shown. The tension in the string pulling the block is: ..................... ....................... ...... ..... .... .... .... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. .. .. . 2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... . .. .......... ........ .. ...... ......... . . .. . . ... . .. . ... . ... . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . ... 1 . . ... .. . . . ... . .... .. .... ... .. ... .................................................. ....................................... ......... .... .. . . ... .. .. . . ..... .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ... ... . . ... .... ... ... .... ..... .... .... ..... ......................... ........... ........... m R R A. B. C. D. E. R1 F/R2 mR1 R2 F/(I mR1 R2 F/(I mR1 R2 F/(I mR1 R2 F/(I F 2 mR2 ) 2 + mR2 ) mR1 R2 ) + mR1 R2 ) 74. A block is attached to each end of a rope that passes over a pulley suspended from the ceiling. The blocks do not have the same mass. If the rope does not slip on the pulley, then at any instant after the blocks start moving, the rope: A. pulls on both blocks, but exerts a greater force on the heavier block B. pulls on both blocks, but exerts a greater force on the lighter block C. pulls on both blocks and exerts the same magnitude force on both D. does not pull on either block E. pulls only on the lighter block 75. A pulley with a radius of 3.0 cm and a rotational inertia of 4.5 103 kg m2 is suspended from the ceiling. A rope passes over it with a 2.0-kg block attached to one end and a 4.0-kg block attached to the other. The rope does not slip on the pulley. When the speed of the heavier block is 2.0 m/s the kinetic energy of the pulley is: A. 0.15 J B. 0.30 J C. 1.0 J D. 10 J E. 20 J Chapter 10: ROTATION 159 76. A pulley with a radius of 3.0 cm and a rotational inertia of 4.5 103 kg m2 is suspended from the ceiling. A rope passes over it with a 2.0-kg block attached to one end and a 4.0-kg block attached to the other. The rope does not slip on the pulley. At any instant after the blocks start moving, the object with the greatest kinetic energy is: A. the heavier block B. the lighter block C. the pulley D. either block (the two blocks have the same kinetic energy) E. none (all three objects have the same kinetic energy) 77. A disk with a rotational inertia of 5.0 kg m2 and a radius of 0.25 m rotates on a xed axis perpendicular to the disk and through its center. A force of 2.0 N is applied tangentially to the rim. As the disk turns through half a revolution the work done by the force is: A. 1.6 J B. 2.5 J C. 6.3 J D. 10 J E. 40 J 78. A circular saw is powered by a motor. When the saw is used to cut wood, the wood exerts a torque of 0.80 N m on the saw blade. If the blade rotates with a constant angular velocity of 20 rad/s the work done on the blade by the motor in 1.0 min is: A. 0 B. 480 J C. 960 J D. 1400 J E. 1800 J 2 79. A disk has a rotational inertia of 6.0 kg m2 and a constant angular acceleration of 2.0 rad/s . If it starts from rest the work done during the rst 5.0 s by the net torque acting on it is: A. 0 B. 30 J C. 60 J D. 300 J E. 600 J 80. A disk starts from rest and rotates around a xed axis, subject to a constant net torque. The as the work done during the rst 5 s. work done by the torque during the second 5 s is A. the same B. twice as much C. half as much D. four times as much E. one-fourth as much 160 Chapter 10: ROTATION 81. A disk starts from rest and rotates about a xed axis, subject to a constant net torque. The as the work done during the work done by the torque during the second revolution is rst revolution. A. the same B. twice as much C. half as much D. four times as much E. one-fourth as much Chapter 10: ROTATION 161 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 1. A wheel rolls without sliding along a horizontal road as shown. The velocity of the center of the wheel is represented by . Point P is painted on the rim of the wheel. The instantaneous velocity of point P is: .............. ................ ...... .... ..... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . ...... ........ .. ............. .. ... .. . .. .. .. . ... ... . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ....................... ...................... .. . . . . . ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. ... ... ... ... .... ... .... ... ..................... ........ .. ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..................... ..................... v P A. B. C. D. E. zero 2. A wheel of radius 0.5 m rolls without sliding on a horizontal surface as shown. Starting from 2 rest, the wheel moves with constant angular acceleration 6 rad/s . The distance traveled by the center of the wheel from t = 0 to t = 3 s is: .................. ................. ..... ..... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .... ................ .. .. . .. . ................. . .. . .. . ... . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . ....................... ..................... . .. . . . . ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .... .... . .................... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ . . . . . . . . . ..................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..................... A. B. C. D. E. v zero 27 m 13.5 m 18 m none of these 3. Two wheels roll side-by-side without sliding, at the same speed. The radius of wheel 2 is twice the radius of wheel 1. The angular velocity of wheel 2 is: A. twice the angular velocity of wheel 1 B. the same as the angular velocity of wheel 1 C. half the angular velocity of wheel 1 D. more than twice the angular velocity of wheel 1 E. less than half the angular velocity of wheel 1 162 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 4. A forward force on the axle accelerates a rolling wheel on a horizontal surface. If the wheel does not slide the frictional force of the surface on the wheel is: A. zero B. in the forward direction C. in the backward direction D. in the upward direction E. in the downward direction 5. When the speed of a rear-drive car is increasing on a horizontal road the direction of the frictional force on the tires is: A. forward for all tires B. backward for all tires C. forward for the front tires and backward for the rear tires D. backward for the front tires and forward for the rear tires E. zero 6. A solid wheel with mass M , radius R, and rotational inertia M R2 /2, rolls without sliding on a horizontal surface. A horizontal force F is applied to the axle and the center of mass has an acceleration a. The magnitudes of the applied force F and the frictional force f of the surface, respectively, are: A. F = M a, f = 0 B. F = M a, f = M a/2 C. F = 2M a, f = M a D. F = 2M a, f = M a/2 E. F = 3M a/2, f = M a/2 7. The coecient of static friction between a certain cylinder and a horizontal oor is 0.40. If the rotational inertia of the cylinder about its symmetry axis is given by I = (1/2)M R2 , then the magnitude of the maximum acceleration the cylinder can have without sliding is: A. 0.1g B. 0.2g C. 0.4g D. 0.8g E. g 8. A thin-walled hollow tube rolls without sliding along the oor. The ratio of its translational kinetic energy to its rotational kinetic energy (about an axis through its center of mass) is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 1/2 E. 1/3 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 163 9. A sphere and a cylinder of equal mass and radius are simultaneously released from rest on the same inclined plane and roll without sliding down the incline. Then: A. the sphere reaches the bottom rst because it has the greater inertia B. the cylinder reaches the bottom rst because it picks up more rotational energy C. the sphere reaches the bottom rst because it picks up more rotational energy D. they reach the bottom together E. none of the above are true 10. A hoop, a uniform disk, and a uniform sphere, all with the same mass and outer radius, start with the same speed and roll without sliding up identical inclines. Rank the objects according to how high they go, least to greatest. A. hoop, disk, sphere B. disk, hoop, sphere C. sphere, hoop, disk D. sphere, disk, hoop E. hoop, sphere, disk 11. A hoop rolls with constant velocity and without sliding along level ground. Its rotational kinetic energy is: A. half its translational kinetic energy B. the same as its translational kinetic energy C. twice its translational kinetic energy D. four times its translational kinetic energy E. one-third its translational kinetic energy 12. Two identical disks, with rotational inertia I (= 1 M R2 ), roll without sliding across a horizontal 2 oor with the same speed and then up inclines. Disk A rolls up its incline without sliding. On the other hand, disk B rolls up a frictionless incline. Otherwise the inclines are identical. Disk A reaches a height 12 cm above the oor before rolling down again. Disk B reaches a height above the oor of: A. 24 cm B. 18 cm C. 12 cm D. 8 cm E. 6 cm 164 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 13. A yo-yo, arranged as shown, rests on a frictionless surface. When a force F is applied to the string as shown, the yo-yo: ............... ................ ..... .... ..... .... . .. ... .... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .. ......... ........ .. .. ..... ........ . . .. .. .. .. ... ... . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. ... . .. .. ... .. .. . ..... . . ...... ....... .. . .... .. ..................................................... .... ............... ............................. .. . . .. .... .... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ..... ..... .... .... .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ....... ...... . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................... A. B. C. D. E. moves to moves to moves to moves to moves to the the the the the F left and rotates counterclockwise right and rotates counterclockwise left and rotates clockwise right and rotates clockwise right and does not rotate 14. When we apply the energy conservation principle to a cylinder rolling down an incline without sliding, we exclude the work done by friction because: A. there is no friction present B. the angular velocity of the center of mass about the point of contact is zero C. the coecient of kinetic friction is zero D. the linear velocity of the point of contact (relative to the inclined surface) is zero E. the coecient of static and kinetic friction are equal 15. Two uniform cylinders have dierent masses and dierent rotational inertias. They simultaneously start from rest at the top of an inclined plane and roll without sliding down the plane. The cylinder that gets to the bottom rst is: A. the one with the larger mass B. the one with the smaller mass C. the one with the larger rotational inertia D. the one with the smaller rotational inertia E. neither (they arrive together) 16. A 5.0-kg ball rolls without sliding from rest down an inclined plane. A 4.0-kg block, mounted on roller bearings totaling 100 g, rolls from rest down the same plane. At the bottom, the block has: A. greater speed than the ball B. less speed than the ball C. the same speed as the ball D. greater or less speed than the ball,depending on the angle of inclination E. greater or less speed than the ball, depending on the radius of the ball Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 165 17. A cylinder of radius R = 6.0 cm is on a rough horizontal surface. The coecient of kinetic friction between the cylinder and the surface is 0.30 and the rotational inertia for rotation about the axis is given by M R2 /2, where M is its mass. Initially it is not rotating but its center of mass has a speed of 7.0 m/s. After 2.0 s the speed of its center of mass and its angular velocity about its center of mass, respectively, are: A. 1.1 m/s, 0 B. 1.1 m/s, 19 rad/s C. 1.1 m/s, 98 rad/s D. 1.1 m/s, 200 rad/s E. 5.9 m/s, 98 rad/s 18. The fundamental dimensions of angular momentum are: A. masslengthtime1 B. masslength2 time2 C. mass2 time1 D. masslength2 time2 E. none of these 19. Possible units of angular momentum are: A. kgm/s B. kgm2 /s2 C. kgm/s2 D. kgm2 /s E. none of these 20. The unit kgm2 /s can be used for: A. angular momentum B. rotational kinetic energy C. rotational inertia D. torque E. power 21. The newtonsecond is a unit of: A. work B. angular momentum C. power D. linear momentum E. none of these 166 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 22. A 2.0-kg block travels around a 0.50-m radius circle with an angular velocity of 12 rad/s. The magnitude of its angular momentum about the center of the circle is: A. 6.0 kg m2 /s B. 12 kg m2 /s C. 48 kg/m2 s D. 72 kg m2 /s2 2 E. 576 kg/m s2 23. The angular momentum vector of Earth about its rotation axis, due to its daily rotation, is directed: A. tangent to the equator toward the east B. tangent to the equator toward the west C. north D. south E. toward the Sun 24. A 6.0-kg particle moves to the right at 4.0 m/s as shown. The magnitude of its angular momentum about the point O is: 6 kg A. B. C. D. E. 4 m/s ... . .. ... . ................................. . . . . . ....... . . . . . ....... . . . . ....... . . . . ....... . . . 30 . ....... . . . . ....... . . . . ..... . . . 12 m ................... . . .. ....... ....... ...... O zero 288 kg m2 /s 144 kg m2 /s 24 kg m2 /s 249 kg m2 /s Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 167 25. Two objects are moving in the x, y plane as shown. The magnitude of their total angular momentum (about the origin O) is: 2 m/s y .. ... ............................. ............................ .... .... . . . . . .. ... . . ... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 m/s 6 kg | 1m | 3 kg x O 2m A. B. C. D. E. zero 6 kg m2 /s 12 kg m2 /s 30 kg m2 /s 78 kg m2 /s 26. A 2.0-kg block starts from rest on the positive x axis 3.0 m from the origin and thereafter has an 2 2 i j. acceleration given by a = (4.0 m/s ) (3.0 m/s ) At the end of 2.0 s its angular momentum about the origin is: A. 0 B. (36 kg m2 /s) k C. (+48 kg m2 /s) k 2 D. (96 kg m /s) k E. (+96 kg m2 /s) k 27. A 15-g paper clip is attached to the rim of a phonograph record with a radius of 30 cm, spinning at 3.5 rad/s. The magnitude of its angular momentum is: A. 1.4 103 kg m2 /s B. 4.7 103 kg m2 /s C. 1.6 102 kg m2 /s D. 3.2 101 kg m2 /s E. 1.1 kg m2 /s 28. As a 2.0-kg block travels around a 0.50-m radius circle it has an angular speed of 12 rad/s. The circle is parallel to the xy plane and is centered on the z axis, 0.75 m from the origin. The magnitude of its angular momentum around the origin is: A. 6.0 kg m2 /s B. 9.0 kg m2 /s C. 11 kg m2 /s D. 14 kg m2 /s E. 20 kg m2 /s 168 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 29. As a 2.0-kg block travels around a 0.50-m radius circle it has an angular speed of 12 rad/s. The circle is parallel to the xy plane and is centered on the z axis, a distance of 0.75 m from the origin. The z component of the angular momentum around the origin is: A. 6.0 kg m2 /s B. 9.0 kg m2 /s C. 11 kg m2 /s D. 14 kg m2 /s E. 20 kg m2 /s 30. As a 2.0-kg block travels around a 0.50-m radius circle it has an angular speed of 12 rad/s. The circle is parallel to the xy plane and is centered on the z axis, 0.75 m from the origin. The component in the xy plane of the angular momentum around the origin has a magnitude of: A. 0 B. 6.0 kg m2 /s C. 9.0 kg m2 /s D. 11 kg m2 /s E. 14 kg m2 /s 31. A uniform disk has radius R and mass M . When it is spinning with angular velocity about an axis through its center and perpendicular to its face its angular momentum is I . When it is spinning with the same angular velocity about a parallel axis a distance h away its angular momentum is: A. I B. (I + M h2 ) C. I M h2 ) D. (I + M R2 ) E. (I M R2 ) 32. A pulley with radius R and rotational inertia I is free to rotate on a horizontal xed axis through its center. A string passes over the pulley. A block of mass m1 is attached to one end and a block of mass m2 is attached to the other. At one time the block with mass m1 is moving downward with speed v . If the string does not slip on the pulley, the magnitude of the total angular momentum, about the pulley center, of the blocks and pulley, considered as a system, is given by: A. (m1 m2 )vR + Iv/R B. (m1 + m2 )vR + Iv/R C. (m1 m2 )vR + Iv/R2 D. (m1 + m2 )vR + Iv/R2 E. none of the above Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 169 33. A single force acts on a particle situated on the positive x axis. The torque about the origin is in the negative z direction. The force might be: A. in the positive y direction B. in the negative y direction C. in the positive x direction D. in the negative x direction E. in the positive z direction 34. A rod rests on frictionless ice. Forces that are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction are then simultaneously applied to its ends as shown. The quantity that vanishes is its: . . .. .. . .. .. . .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... .................... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .................... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .................... .................... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ..... . ... . .. . . . F F A. B. C. D. E. angular momentum angular acceleration total linear momentum kinetic energy rotational inertia 35. A 2.0-kg stone is tied to a 0.50-m long string and swung around a circle at a constant angular velocity of 12 rad/s. The net torque on the stone about the center of the circle is: A. 0 B. 6.0 N m C. 12 N m D. 72 N m E. 140 N m 36. A 2.0-kg stone is tied to a 0.50-m long string and swung around a circle at a constant angular velocity of 12 rad/s. The circle is parallel to the xy plane and is centered on the z axis, 0.75 m from the origin. The magnitude of the torque about the origin is: A. 0 B. 6.0 N m C. 14 N m D. 72 N m E. 108 N m 170 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 37. A 2.0-kg block starts from rest on the positive x axis 3.0 m from the origin and thereafter 2 2 i j. has an acceleration given by a = (4.0 m/s ) (3.0 m/s ) The torque, relative to the origin, acting on it at the end of 2.0 s is: A. 0 B. (18 N m) k C. (+24 N m) k D. (144 N m) k E. (+144 N m) k 38. A uniform disk, a thin hoop, and a uniform sphere, all with the same mass and same outer radius, are each free to rotate about a xed axis through its center. Assume the hoop is connected to the rotation axis by light spokes. With the objects starting from rest, identical forces are simultaneously applied to the rims, as shown. Rank the objects according to their angular momenta after a given time t, least to greatest. hoop disk ............ ................ .... ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . ... ... ... .. ..... ...... ......... .... .............................. .. ... ...................... ... .... A. B. C. D. E. sphere .. . .................. ................... .... .. .. . .... .... .... .... ............... ................ ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . ... . ... ... .... . ...... ........ .............................. ... ... .. .... ... ................. .... .... F F F all tie disk, hoop, sphere hoop, disk, sphere hoop, sphere, disk hoop, disk, sphere 39. A single force acts on a particle P. Rank each of the orientations of the force shown below according to the magnitude of the time rate of change of the particles angular momentum about the point O, least to greatest. O .. .... ......................... ........................ .. .... . P 1 A. B. C. D. E. . .. . .. ................................................. P O 2 . .. .. .. . ... . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O P 3 . ... . .. ..... ..... .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. O P 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1 and 2 tie, then 3, 4 1 and 2 tie, then 4, 3 1 and 2 tie, then 3 and 4 tie All are the same Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 171 40. A pulley with radius R is free to rotate on a horizontal xed axis through its center. A string passes over the pulley. Mass m1 is attached to one end and mass m2 is attached to the other. The portion of the string attached to m1 has tension T1 and the portion attached to m2 has tension T2 . The magnitude of the total external torque, about the pulley center, acting on the masses and pulley, considered as a system, is given by: A. |m1 m2 |gR B. (m1 + m2 )gR C. |m1 m2 |gR + (T1 + T2 )R D. (m1 + m2 )gR + (T1 T2 )R E. |m1 m2 |gR + (T2 T1 )R 41. An ice skater with rotational inertia I0 is spinning with angular speed 0 . She pulls her arms in, thereby increasing her angular speed to 40 . Her rotational inertia is then: A. I0 B. I0 /2 C. 2I0 D. I0 /4 E. 4I0 42. A man, with his arms at his sides, is spinning on a light frictionless turntable. When he extends his arms: A. his angular velocity increases B. his angular velocity remains the same C. his rotational inertia decreases D. his rotational kinetic energy increases E. his angular momentum remains the same 43. A man, holding a weight in each hand, stands at the center of a horizontal frictionless rotating turntable. The eect of the weights is to double the rotational inertia of the system. As he is rotating, the man opens his hands and drops the two weights. They fall outside the turntable. Then: A. his angular velocity doubles B. his angular velocity remains about the same C. his angular velocity is halved D. the direction of his angular momentum vector changes E. his rotational kinetic energy increases 172 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 44. A uniform sphere of radius R rotates about a diameter with an angular momentum of magnitude L. Under the action of internal forces the sphere collapses to a uniform sphere of radius R/2. The magnitude of its new angular momentum is: A. L/4 B. L/2 C. L D. 2L E. 4L 45. When a man on a frictionless rotating stool extends his arms horizontally, his rotational kinetic energy: A. must increase B. must decrease C. must remain the same D. may increase or decrease depending on his initial angular velocity E. may increase or decrease depending on his angular acceleration 46. When a woman on a frictionless rotating turntable extends her arms out horizontally, her angular momentum: A. must increase B. must decrease C. must remain the same D. may increase or decrease depending on her initial angular velocity E. tilts away from the vertical 47. Two disks are mounted on low-friction bearings on a common shaft. The rst disc has rotational inertia I and is spinning with angular velocity . The second disc has rotational inertia 2I and is spinning in the same direction as the rst disc with angular velocity 2 as shown. The two disks are slowly forced toward each other along the shaft until they couple and have a nal common angular velocity of: .. .................. ....... ......... .. . .. .... . . . . .................. .. ..................... ... .. ... . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . ................. .. . . . . . .................. ... . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ............. ................ . . . . . ............... . . . .......... . ................ . . . . .. . . . ................. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . ................. . . . .......... . . ............... . . . . ................ . . . . . ................ . . ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . ... ... . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . ................... .. . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . ..................... .. .................... . .. . ............... .............. .. . .... .... I A. B. C. D. E. 2 2I 5 /3 3 7/3 3 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 173 48. A wheel with rotational inertia I , mounted on a vertical shaft with negligible rotational inertia, is rotating with angular speed 0 . A nonrotating wheel with rotational inertia 2I is suddenly dropped onto the same shaft as shown. The resultant combination of the two wheels and shaft will rotate at: ......................... ............................. ........ ..... ....... ..... .. .. .... ..... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . ......... .......... . . . . . . .. . . . .... .... . . . ..... ... . ... .. . . ... .. .. . ... . .. .... . .. .. .. .. .. ... ..... ..... ... . . . .... . . ..... ........ .... .. . . ..... .......... . ..... ... . .... .......... ...... ... . . . .... . . ........ ............ ...... ..... .......................... ........ . . ...... . . ......... . . ................................ . . ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... ......... ..... ..... . .. . .... .... . . .. . .... .... . .. .. . . . . .. .. . ... .. . .. . .. . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... ...... ....... ............. .... .... ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . ..... .... . . . ... ... . . ... .... . . ... ... . . .. . . ... .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .... . . .. . . ..... .. ... . . . .. .. .. ... . .. . .. . .... .. .. .... .. .. . . . ...... ..... .... ......... .. ..... ............ ..... ....... . . ..... ......... .. .. .................... . ... .. ........ ......... . .. .. ... ..... ... .... . .... ........ . .... ........... .. .... ........................ ....... ..... ................... . ...... ..... . ........ .. ......... ........................ ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .... ..... .... ... A. B. C. D. E. 0 /2 20 0 /3 30 0 /4 49. A phonograph record is dropped onto a freely spinning turntable. Then: A. neither angular momentum nor mechanical energy is conserved because of the frictional forces between record and turntable B. the frictional force between record and turntable increases the total angular momentum C. the frictional force between record and turntable decreases the total angular momentum D. the total angular momentum remains constant E. the sum of the angular momentum and rotational kinetic energy remains constant 50. A playground merry-go-round has a radius R and a rotational inertia I . When the merry-goround is at rest, a child with mass m runs with speed v along a line tangent to the rim and jumps on. The angular velocity of the merry-go-round is then: A. mv/I B. v/R C. mRv/I D. 2mRv/I E. mRv/(mR2 + I ) 174 Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 51. A playground merry-go-round has a radius of 3.0 m and a rotational inertia of 600 kg m2 . It is initially spinning at 0.80 rad/s when a 20-kg child crawls from the center to the rim. When the child reaches the rim the angular velocity of the merry-go-round is: A. 0.62 rad/s B. 0.73 rad/s C. 0.80 rad/s D. 0.89 rad/s E. 1.1 rad/s 52. Two pendulum bobs of unequal mass are suspended from the same xed point by strings of equal length. The lighter bob is drawn aside and then released so that it collides with the other bob on reaching the vertical position. The collision is elastic. What quantities are conserved in the collision? A. Both kinetic energy and angular momentum of the system B. Only kinetic energy C. Only angular momentum D. Angular speed of lighter bob E. None of the above 53. A particle, held by a string whose other end is attached to a xed point C, moves in a circle on a horizontal frictionless surface. If the string is cut, the angular momentum of the particle about the point C: A. increases B. decreases C. does not change D. changes direction but not magnitude E. none of these 54. A block with mass M , on the end of a string, moves in a circle on a horizontal frictionless table as shown. As the string is slowly pulled through a small hole in the table: ................................................. ................................................ . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. .... ..... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. ... .. ... .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .... . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. ....... . ...... .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .................................... ... .. ..................................... . .M . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... pull . . A. B. C. D. E. the angular momentum of the block remains constant the angular momentum of the block decreases the kinetic energy of the block remains constant the kinetic energy of the block decreases none of the above Chapter 11: ROLLING, TORQUE, AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM 175 Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 1. A net torque applied to a rigid object always tends to produce: A. linear acceleration B. rotational equilibrium C. angular acceleration D. rotational inertia E. none of these 2. The conditions that the net force and the net torque both vanish: A. hold for every rigid body in equilibrium B. hold only for elastic solid bodies in equilibrium C. hold for every solid body D. are always sucient to calculate the forces on a solid object in equilibrium E. are sucient to calculate the forces on a solid object in equilibrium only if the object is elastic 3. For an object in equilibrium the net torque acting on it vanishes only if each torque is calculated about: A. the center of mass B. the center of gravity C. the geometrical center D. the point of application of the force E. the same point 4. For A. B. C. D. E. a body to be in equilibrium under the combined action of several forces: all the forces must be applied at the same point all of the forces form pairs of equal and opposite forces the sum of the components of all the forces in any direction must equal zero any two of these forces must be balanced by a third force the lines of action of all the forces must pass through the center of gravity of the body 5. For A. B. C. D. E. a body to be in equilibrium under the combined action of several forces: all the forces must be applied at the same point all of the forces form pairs of equal and opposite forces any two of these forces must be balanced by a third force the sum of the torques about any point must equal zero the lines of action of all the forces must pass through the center of gravity of the body 176 Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 6. To determine if a rigid body is in equilibrium the vector sum of the gravitational forces acting on the particles of the body can be replaced by a single force acting at: A. the center of mass B. the geometrical center C. the center of gravity D. a point on the boundary E. none of the above 7. The center of gravity coincides with the center of mass: A. always B. never C. if the center of mass is at the geometrical center of the body D. if the acceleration due to gravity is uniform over the body E. if the body has a uniform distribution of mass 8. The location of which of the following points within an object might depend on the orientation of the object? A. Its center of mass B. Its center of gravity C. Its geometrical center D. Its center of momentum E. None of the above 9. A cylinder placed so it can roll on a horizontal table top, with its center of gravity above its geometrical center, is: A. in stable equilibrium B. in unstable equilibrium C. in neutral equilibrium D. not in equilibrium E. none of the above 10. A cylinder placed so it can roll on a horizontal table top, with its center of gravity below its geometrical center, is: A. in stable equilibrium B. in unstable equilibrium C. in neutral equilibrium D. not in equilibrium E. none of the above Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 177 11. A cube balanced with one edge in contact with a table top and with its center of gravity directly equilibrium with respect to rotation about the edge and in above the edge is in equilibrium with respect to rotation about a horizontal axis that is perpendicular to the edge. A. stable, stable B. stable, unstable C. unstable, stable D. unstable, unstable E. unstable, neutral 12. A meter stick on a horizontal frictionless table top is pivoted at the 80-cm mark. A force F1 is applied perpendicularly to the end of the stick at 0 cm, as shown. A second force F2 (not shown) is applied perpendicularly at the 100-cm end of the stick. The forces are horizontal. If the stick does not move, the force exerted by the pivot on the stick: F1 . . .. .. ... . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pivot .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .... .... ... ... . 0 cm 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm 100 cm A. B. C. D. E. must be must be must be must be must be zero in the same direction as F1 and have magnitude |F2 | |F1 | directed opposite to F1 and have magnitude |F2 | |F1 | in the same direction as F1 and have magnitude |F2 | + |F1 | directed opposite to F1 and have magnitude |F2 | + |F1 | 13. A meter stick on a horizontal frictionless table top is pivoted at the 80-cm mark. A force F1 is applied perpendicularly to the end of the stick at 0 cm, as shown. A second force F2 (not shown) is applied perpendicularly at the 60-cm mark. The forces are horizontal. If the stick does not move, the force exerted by the pivot on the stick: F1 . .. .. . .. . . ... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pivot .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... . ... ... 0 cm 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm 100 cm A. B. C. D. E. 178 must be must be must be must be must be zero in the same direction as F1 and have magnitude |F2 | |F1 | directed opposite to F1 and have magnitude |F2 | |F1 | in the same direction as F1 and have magnitude |F2 | + |F1 | directed opposite to F1 and have magnitude |F2 | + |F1 | Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 14. Three identical uniform rods are each acted on by two or more forces, all perpendicular to the rods and all equal in magnitude. Which of the rods could be in static equilibrium if an additional force is applied at the center of mass of the rod? . . .. .. ... . . ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ... . . ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . ... ... .. . .. . . . . .. . .. . .... .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . ..... .. . .. . .. . 1 A. B. C. D. E. 2 . . .. .. .. . . ... . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . ... ... .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . ... . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Only 1 Only 2 Only 3 Only 1 and 2 All three 15. A 160-N child sits on a light swing and is pulled back and held with a horizontal force of 100 N. The magnitude of the tension force of each of the two supporting ropes is: A. 60 N B. 94 N C. 120 N D. 190 N E. 260 N 16. The diagram shows a stationary 5-kg uniform rod (AC), 1 m long, held against a wall by a rope (AE) and friction between the rod and the wall. To use a single equation to nd the force exerted on the rod by the rope at which point should you place the reference point for computing torque? .. .. . ... .. . ... .. . . ... .... .... . ... .. ... . ... .. . ... ... .. . . ... ... .. .. ... ... ... . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... . .. ... ... . .. .. .... ... ... . ... ... ... .. ... ... . ... ... . . ... ... .. ... ... ... . ... .. . ... .. . ... .. . ... .. . . E D A B C Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 179 17. A picture P of weight W is hung by two strings as shown. The magnitude of the tension force of each string is T . The total upward pull of the strings on the picture is: . ................................. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . T T P A. B. C. D. E. 2W cos T sin T cos 2T sin 2T cos 18. A picture can be hung on a wall with string in three dierent ways, as shown. The magnitude of the tension force of the string is: .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . I A. B. C. D. E. ..... ...... ... ...... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . .. II III least in I greatest in I greatest in II least in III greatest in III 19. A uniform plank is supported by two equal 120-N forces at X and Y, as shown. The support at X is then moved to Z (half-way to the plank center). The supporting forces at Y and Z are then: X Z Y . . . . .. ... .. .. . ......... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ............ ... ... ... ........ . .... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. ... ... ...... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . . A. B. C. D. E. 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FY = 240 N, FZ = 120 N FY = 200 N, FZ = 40 N FY = 40 N, FZ = 200 N FY = 80 N, FZ = 160 N FY = 160 N, FZ = 80 N Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. A uniform rod AB is 1.2 m long and weighs 16 N. It is suspended by strings AC and BD as shown. A block P weighing 96 N is attached at E, 0.30 m from A. The magnitude of the tension force of the string BD is: ............................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. C E A A. B. C. D. E. D B P 8.0 N 24 N 32 N 48 N 80 N 21. A 5.0-m weightless strut, hinged to a wall, is used to support an 800-N block as shown. The horizontal and vertical components of the force of the hinge on the strut are: . ... .... . .. .... . ... .... . ... ... .... ... ... ... . .. . .... . ... .... . ... ... . ... .... . .. .... . ... .... . ... ... .... ... . ... .... . ... .... . ... .... . ... .... . ... ....... ............ .. .... .. ... .... ... . .. . . . . . .. .... ..... . .... ..... .. ............ ............. . . ... ... . ... ... hinge A. B. C. D. E. 3m 800 N FH = 800 N, FY = 800 N FH = 600 N, FY = 800 N FH = 800 N, FY = 600 N FH = 1200 N, FY = 800 N FH = 0, FY = 800 N 22. A uniform plank is 6.0 m long and weighs 80 N. It is balanced on a sawhorse at its center. An additional 160 N weight is now placed on the left end of the plank. To keep the plank balanced, it must be moved what distance to the left? A. 6.0 m B. 2.0 m C. 1.5 m D. 1.0 m E. 0.50 m Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 181 23. A uniform 240-g meter stick can be balanced by a 240-g weight placed at the 100-cm mark if the fulcrum is placed at the point marked: A. 75 cm B. 60 cm C. 50 cm D. 40 cm E. 80 cm 24. A ladder leans against a wall. If the ladder is not to slip, which one of the following must be true? . ... ... . ... ... .. ... . . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... .. .... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... ... ... . ... ... . ... ... ... ... . ... ... . ... ... ... ... .................................................................. ................................................................... A. B. C. D. E. The coecient of friction between the ladder and the wall must not be zero The coecient of friction between the ladder and the oor must not be zero Both A and B Either A or B Neither A nor B 25. An 80-N uniform plank leans against a frictionless wall as shown. The magnitude of the torque (about point P) applied to the plank by the wall is: . . ... ... ... .... . .. .. ... . . ... ... . .. .... . . ... ... . ... ... . . ... ... ... ... . . . .. ... . . ... ... . ... ... . . ... ... . .. .... . . ... ... . . ... ... .... ... . . ... ... .................. .................. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... | | | 4m | | | P 3m A. B. C. D. E. 182 40 N m 60 N m 120 N m 160 N m 240 N m Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 26. An 800-N man stands halfway up a 5.0-m long ladder of negligible weight. The base of the ladder is 3.0 m from the wall as shown. Assuming that the wall-ladder contact is frictionless, the wall pushes against the ladder with a force of magnitude: . . ... ... . . ... ... .. ... . .. . . ... ... . . .. ..... ... ... .. .. . .. .. .... . . . .. ... ... . ... ... . . .. .. ... . . ... ... . . ... ... . . ... ... . ... ... . . ... ... ... ... . . . ... ... ... .... . . ... ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .......................................................................... . .. .. . 3m A. B. C. D. E. 150 N 300 N 400 N 600 N 800 N 27. A uniform ladder is 10 m long and weighs 400 N. It rests with its upper end against a frictionless vertical wall. Its lower end rests on the ground and is prevented from slipping by a peg driven into the ground. The ladder makes a 30 angle with the horizontal. The magnitude of the force exerted on the peg by the ladder is: . . .... .... . . .... .... . . .... .... . .... .... . . .... .... . . .... ... . . .... .... . . .... .... . .... .... . . .... .... . .. ... ... . . .... .... . . . . . . ... . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ..... ..... .... .... .... .... .... .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .... .... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... peg 30 A. B. C. D. E. zero 200 N 400 N 470 N 670 N Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 183 28. A window washer attempts to lean a ladder against a frictionless wall. He nds that the ladder slips on the ground when it is placed at an angle of less than 75 to the ground but remains in place when the angle is greater than 75 . The coecient of static friction between the ladder and the ground: A. is about 0.13 B. is about 0.27 C. is about 1.0 D. depends on the mass of the ladder E. depends on the length of the ladder 29. The 600-N ball shown is suspended on a string AB and rests against a frictionless vertical wall. The string makes an angle of 30 with the wall. The magnitude of the tension force of the string is: . . . ... .. ... . . . .. . .. ..... . .. . . .... .. .... .. . . . .. . . ....... ....... ...... ...... .. .... .. . .... ... .. .. ... ............. . ...... ......... .. ..... ... .. .. ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. ... . . .. . .. . .. . ... . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . .. . ... ... ... .. ..... ..... ........ .. .......... ..... .. . . ... . .. . .. . . 30 600 N A. B. C. D. E. 184 A B 690 N 1200 N 2100 N 2400 N none of these Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 30. The 600-N ball shown is suspended on a string AB and rests against a frictionless vertical wall. The string makes an angle of 30 with the wall. The ball presses against the wall with a force of mangitude: . . ... . .. .. . . .. . .. .... . . .. . .... . ... .. . .. .. . .. ....... ....... ...... .... .. ... ..... .. . . .... . .... . .... .. . ................ .. ..... ........ ... .. ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. ... . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . ... .... . .. .. . .. .... . .. .. .. . ... .. . ... ... ... ..... ..... ........ .. ..... ... . ..... .. . ... . .. .. .. . 30 600 N A. B. C. D. E. A B 120 N 300 N 350 N 600 N 690 N 31. The uniform rod shown below is held in place by the rope and wall. Suppose you know the weight of the rod and all dimensions. Then you can solve a single equation for the force of the rope on the rod, provided you write expressions for the torques about the point: .. .. .. .. ... . ... . ... .. ... ........ . . ........ .... ..... ..... . ... ..... .... . .... . ..... . ..... .. .... .... .... . ..... ... ..... .... . .... . ..... .. ..... . ..... .... . .... ... ..... . . .. .. . . .. . ... . . . .. . .. 1 A. B. C. D. E. 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1, 2, or 3 Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 185 32. A 240-N weight is hung from two ropes as shown. The tension force of the horizontal rope has magnitude: ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. ... ... . .... .... . ... .... .... .... .. .... ... .... .... . . .... . .... .. .... .... . .... ... .... . .. ... .... .. .... ... .... .. . . .... . . ............................. ..... . ............................... ..... . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . .. . ... . .. .. . ... . . . .. . ... .. ... . . .. A. B. C. D. E. 30 240 N 0 656 N 480 N 416 N 176 N 33. A 960-N block is suspended as shown. The beam AB is weightless and is hinged to the wall at A. The tension force of the cable BC has magnitude: . ... .... . .. .... . ... .... . ... ..... .......... .... ... ... .... ... ... .... ... . .... ... ... ... . ... ... . . .... ... .. ... .... ... . .... ... ... .... ... ... . .. .... ... .. .. .... ... . ... ... ... .... .... ... .... ... .. ... . .. ... ... . .... ... ... ....... ............ .... ... ... ... ... .... .. ... ..... .. . . . .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . ... .. . ... ... . . . . . ............ ............. . . . . . .. . . .. ... . . . ........... ........... . . ........... ............ ... .... . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ... .... . . . . . . .. . . ... . . . . . . ............................. ............................ . ... .... C | 3m | B A 4m 960 N A. B. C. D. E. 186 720 N 1200 N 1280 N 1600 N none of these Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 34. A horizontal beam of weight W is supported by a hinge and cable as shown. The force exerted on the beam by the hinge has a vertical component that must be: . ... .... . ... .... ... ... . . . ......... ... ...... ... .... ... ... .... ... .... ... . .. ... .... .. ... ... ... . .... ... ... .... ... .... .. .. ... ... .. .. .... ... . ... .... ... .... ... ... .... .. ... ... . .. ... .... . ... ... ... .... .... ... ... .... .......... ........... .. .... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... . . . ... ...... . .. . .. . . . ... ..... . .... ..... .. . . . ......... .......... . .. . ... . . . . . ... .... . . . . . .. .... ... . . ..... . . .. ... .... . .. . .. . .. ... . . . ... .... ... ... . cable hinge W A. B. C. D. E. nonzero and up nonzero and down nonzero but not enough information given to know whether up or down zero equal to W 35. A 400-N uniform vertical boom is attached to the ceiling by a hinge, as shown. An 800-N weight W and a horizontal guy wire are attached to the lower end of the boom as indicated. The pulley is massless and frictionless. The tension force T of the horizontal guy wire has magnitude: . . .......... .......... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . ...... . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . ..... . ........ .. ... .. ........ .. .. ... . ... . .... . .......... ... . .... ...... . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . ... . . . .... .. . ...... ...... ... .. . .......... . .... .. . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .............. .. . .. . . . . . . . pulley W = 800 N A. B. C. D. E. 60 hinge boom (400 N) guy wire 340 N 400 N 690 N 800 N 1200 N Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 187 36. A picture is to be hung from the ceiling by means of two wires. Order the following arrangements of the wires according to the tension force of wire B, from least to greatest. ............... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............... A B ............... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............... A B cm I A. B. C. D. E. cm II ............... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............... A B cm III I, II, III III, II, I I and II tie, then III II, I, III all tie 37. The pull P is just sucient to keep the 14-N block and the weightless pulleys in equilibrium as shown. The magnitude T of the tension force of the upper cable is: ........ ......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . . . . ....... ........ .. .. ... . .. ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .... ... .. . . .. ........ . .. . . . . ....... . . . . . . .... ..... . . . . .... . . .... . ... . .... . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . ... ... . ... . .. . ......... . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . ........... . . .... . .... . . . . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . .. .... . . . . ............ . . . .. . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . ..... . . . . .. . .. . .. . T 14 lb A. B. C. D. E. 188 P 14 N 28 N 16 N 9.33 N 18.7 N Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 38. The ideal mechanical advantage (i.e. the ratio of the weight W to the pull P for equilibrium) of the combination of pulleys shown is: ............... . . . ..... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . ............ ... . .... . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . ... .. . .. . . . . . ............ . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. ... . . .. . . . . . ........... . ... . . ............ . .. . .. . . .. ... . . . . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . ... . .. . . . ... . ... .... . . ... . . . ...... ... . . . . . . . ........ . . . ........... . . .. .. . . . .. ... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . ... . .... .... . ..... . .... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . P W A. B. C. D. E. 1 2 3 4 5 39. Stress can be measured in: A. N/m2 B. Nm2 C. N/m D. Nm E. none of these (it is unitless) 40. Strain can be measured in: A. N/m2 B. Nm2 C. N/m D. Nm E. none of these (it is unitless) 41. Youngs modulus can be correctly given in: A. Nm B. N/m2 C. Nm/s D. N/m E. joules Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 189 42. Youngs modulus is a proportionality constant that relates the force per unit area applied perpendicularly at the surface of an object to: A. the shear B. the fractional change in volume C. the fractional change in length D. the pressure E. the spring constant 43. Youngs modulus can be used to calculate the strain for a stress that is: A. just below the ultimate strength B. just above the ultimate strength C. well below the yield strength D. well above the yield strength E. none of the above 44. The ultimate strength of a sample is the stress at which the sample: A. returns to its original shape when the stress is removed B. remains underwater C. breaks D. bends 180 E. does none of these 45. A certain wire stretches 0.90 cm when outward forces with magnitude F are applied to each end. The same forces are applied to a wire of the same material but with three times the diameter and three times the length. The second wire stretches: A. 0.10 cm B. 0.30 cm C. 0.90 cm D. 2.7 cm E. 8.1 cm 46. A force of 5000 N is applied outwardly to each end of a 5.0-m long rod with a radius of 34.0 cm and a Youngs modulus of 125 108 N/m2 . The elongation of the rod is: A. 0.0020 mm B. 0.0040 mm C. 0.14 mm D. 0.55 mm E. 1.42 mm 190 Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 47. A 4.0-m long steel beam with a cross-sectional area of 1.0 102 m2 and a Youngs modulus 2 of 2.0 1011 N/m is wedged horizontally between two vertical walls. In order to wedge the beam, it is compressed by 0.020 mm. If the coecient of static friction between the beam and the walls is 0.70 the maximum mass (including its own) it can bear without slipping is: A. 0 B. 3.6 kg C. 36 kg D. 71 kg E. 710 kg 48. Two supports, made of the same material and initially of equal length, are 2.0 m apart. A sti board with a length of 4.0 m and a mass of 10 kg is placed on the supports, with one support at the left end and the other at the midpoint. A block is placed on the board a distance of 0.50 m from the left end. As a result the board is horizontal. The mass of the block is: A. zero B. 2.3 kg C. 6.6 kg D. 10 kg E. 20 kg 49. The bulk modulus is a proportionality constant that relates the pressure acting on an object to: A. the shear B. the fractional change in volume C. the fractional change in length D. Youngs modulus E. the spring constant 2 50. A cube with edges exactly 2 cm long is made of material with a bulk modulus of 3.5 109 N/m . When it is subjected to a pressure of 3.0 105 Pa its volume is: A. 7.31 cm3 B. 7.99931 cm3 C. 8.00069 cm3 D. 8.69 cm3 E. none of these 2 51. A cube with 2.0-cm sides is made of material with a bulk modulus of 4.7 105 N/m . When it is subjected to a pressure of 2.0 105 Pa the length of its any of its sides is: A. 0.85 cm B. 1.15 cm C. 1.66 cm D. 2.0 cm E. none of these Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY 191 52. To shear a cube-shaped object, forces of equal magnitude and opposite directions might be applied: A. to opposite faces, perpendicular to the faces B. to opposite faces, parallel to the faces C. to adjacent faces, perpendicular to the faces D. to adjacent faces, neither parallel or perpendicular to the faces E. to a single face, in any direction 53. A shearing force of 50 N is applied to an aluminum rod with a length of 10 m, a cross-sectional 2 area of 1.0 105 m, and a shear modulus of 2.5 1010 N/m . As a result the rod is sheared through a distance of: A. zero B. 1.9 mm C. 1.9 cm D. 19 cm E. 1.9 m 192 Chapter 12: EQUILIBRIUM AND ELASTICITY Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 1. In the formula F = Gm1 m2 /r2 , the quantity G: A. depends on the local value of g B. is used only when Earth is one of the two masses C. is greatest at the surface of Earth D. is a universal constant of nature E. is related to the Sun in the same way that g is related to Earth 2. The magnitude of the acceleration of a planet in orbit around the Sun is proportional to: A. the mass of the planet B. the mass of the Sun C. the distance between the planet and the Sun D. the reciprocal of the distance between the planet and the Sun E. the product of the mass of the planet and the mass of the Sun 3. Suitable units for the gravitational constant G are: A. kgm/s2 B. m/s2 C. Ns/m D. kgm/s E. m3 /(kgs2 ) 4. The gravitational constant G has the derived units: A. Nm B. Nm/kg C. Nkg/m D. Nm2 /kg2 E. Nkg2 /m2 5. Earth exerts a gravitational force on the Moon, keeping it in its orbit. The reaction to this force, in the sense of Newtons third law, is: A. the centripetal force on the Moon B. the nearly circular orbit of the Moon C. the gravitational force on Earth by the Moon D. the tides due to the Moon E. the apple hitting Newton on the head. Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 193 6. A particle might be placed 1. inside a uniform spherical shell of mass M , but not at the center 2. inside a uniform spherical shell of mass M , at the center 3. outside a uniform spherical shell of mass M , a distance r from the center 4. outside a uniform solid sphere of mass M , a distance 2r from the center Rank these situations according to the magnitude of the gravitational force on the particle, least to greatest. A. All tie B. 1, 2, 3, 4 C. 1 and 2 tie, then 3 and 4 tie D. 1 and 2 tie, then 3, then 4 E. 1 and 2 tie, then 4, then 3 7. Three particles, two with mass m and one with mass M , might be arranged in any of the four congurations known below. Rank the congurations according to the magnitude of the gravitational force on M , least to greatest. m d M d m d m m 1 A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 2, 3, 2, d M 2 d m M d m 3 d m d m M 4 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .............................. .............................. 4 4 3 2 4 8. Four particles, each with mass m are arranged symmetrically about the origin on the x axis. A fth particle, with mass M , is on the y axis. The direction of the gravitational force on M is: y M m A. B. C. D. E. 194 none of these directions Chapter 13: GRAVITATION m m m x 9. Let F1 be the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the Sun by Earth and F2 be the magnitude of the force exerted on Earth by the Sun. Then: A. F1 is much greater than F2 B. F1 is slightly greater than F2 C. F1 is equal to F2 D. F1 is slightly less than F2 E. F1 is much less than F2 10. Let is: A. B. C. D. E. M denote the mass of Earth and let R denote its radius. The ratio g/G at Earths surface R2 /M M/R2 M R2 M/R R/M 11. Venus has a mass of about 0.0558 times the mass of Earth and a diameter of about 0.381 times the diameter of Earth. The acceleration of a body falling near the surface of Venus is about: 2 A. 0.21 m/s 2 B. 1.4 m/s 2 C. 2.8 m/s 2 D. 3.8 m/s 2 E. 25 m/s 12. The approximate value of g at an altitude above Earth equal to one Earth diameter is: 2 A. 9.8 m/s B. 4.9 m/s2 C. 2.5 m/s2 2 D. 1.9 m/s 2 E. 1.1 m/s 13. A rocket ship is coasting toward a planet. Its captain wishes to know the value of g at the surface of the planet. This may be inferred by: A. measuring the apparent weight of one of the crew B. measuring the apparent weight of an object of known mass in the ship C. measuring the diameter of the planet D. measuring the density of the planet E. observing the ships acceleration and correcting for the distance from the center of the planet. Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 195 14. To measure the mass of a planet with the same radius as Earth, an astronaut drops an object from rest (relative to the planet) from an altitude of one radius above the surface. When the object hits its speed is 4 times what it would be if the same experiment were carried out for Earth. In units of Earth masses, the mass of the planet is: A. 2 B. 4 C. 8 D. 16 E. 32 15. Suppose you have a pendulum clock that keeps correct time on Earth (acceleration due to gravity = 9.8 m/s2 ). Without changing the clock, you take it to the Moon (acceleration due to gravity = 1.6 m/s2 ). For every hour interval (on Earth) the Moon clock will record: A. (9.8/1.6) h B. 1 h 9.8/1.6 h C. D. (1.6/9.8) h 1.6/9.8 h E. 16. The mass of an object: A. is slightly dierent at dierent locations on Earth B. is a vector C. is independent of the acceleration due to gravity D. is the same for all objects of the same size and shape E. can be measured directly and accurately on a spring scale 17. An astronaut on the Moon simultaneously drops a feather and a hammer. The fact that they land together shows that: A. no gravity forces act on a body in a vacuum B. the acceleration due to gravity on the Moon is less than on Earth C. in the absence of air resistance all bodies at a given location fall with the same acceleration D. the feather has a greater weight on the Moon than on Earth E. G = 0 on the Moon 18. The mass of a hypothetical planet is 1/100 that of Earth and its radius is 1/4 that of Earth. If a person weighs 600 N on Earth, what would he weigh on this planet? A. 24 N B. 48 N C. 96 N D. 192 N E. 600 N 196 Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 19. An object at the surface of Earth (at a distance R from the center of Earth) weighs 90 N. Its weight at a distance 3R from the center of Earth is: A. 10 N B. 30 N C. 90 N D. 270 N E. 810 N 20. An object is raised from the surface of Earth to a height of two Earth radii above Earth. Then: A. its mass increases and its weight remains constant B. both its mass and weight remain constant C. its mass remains constant and its weight decreases D. both its mass and its weight decrease E. its mass remains constant and its weight increases 21. A spring scale, calibrated in newtons, is used to weigh sugar. If it were possible to weigh sugar at the following locations, where will the buyer get the most sugar to a newton? A. At the north pole B. At the equator C. At the center of Earth D. On the Moon E. On Jupiter 22. Of A. B. C. D. E. the following where would the weight of an object be the least? 2000 miles above Earths surface At the north pole At the equator At the center of Earth At the south pole 23. If Earth were to rotate only 100 times per year about its axis: A. airplanes ying west to east would make better time B. we would y o Earths surface C. our apparent weight would slightly increase D. Earths atmosphere would oat into outer space E. our apparent weight would slightly decrease Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 197 24. An A. B. C. D. E. astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft feels weightless because she: is beyond the range of gravity is pulled outward by centrifugal force has no acceleration has the same acceleration as the spacecraft is outside Earths atmosphere 25. Each of the four corners of a square with edge a is occupied by a point mass m. There is a fth mass, also m, at the center of the square. To remove the mass from the center to a point far away the work that must be done by an external agent is given by: A. 4Gm2 /a B. 4Gm2 /a 2Gm C. 4 2 /a D. 4 2Gm2 /a E. 4Gm2 /a2 26. Two particles, each of mass m, are a distance d apart. To bring a third particle, with mass 2m, from far away to a resting point midway between the two particles the work done by an external agent is given by: A. 4Gm2 /d B. 4Gm2 /d C. 8Gm2 /d2 D. 8Gm2 /d2 E. zero 27. The escape speed at the surface of Earth is approximately 8 km/s. What is the mass, in units of Earths mass, of a planet with twice the radius of Earth for which the escape speed is twice that for Earth? A. 2 B. 4 C. 8 D. 1/2 E. 1/4 28. Neglecting air resistance, a 1.0-kg projectile has an escape velocity of about 11 km/s at the surface of Earth. The corresponding escape velocity for a 2.0 kg projectile is: A. 3.5 km/s B. 5.5 km/s C. 7.1 km/s D. 10 km/s E. 11 km/s 198 Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 29. Neglecting air resistance, the escape speed from a certain planet for an empty space vehicle is 1.12 104 m/s. What is the corresponding escape speed for the fully loaded vehicle, which has triple the mass of the empty one? A. 3.73 103 m/s B. 1.12 104 m/s C. 3.36 104 m/s D. 9.98 104 m/s E. 1.40 1012 m/s 30. An object is dropped from an altitude of one Earth radius above Earths surface. If M is the mass of Earth and R is its radius the speed of the object just before it hits Earth is given by: GM/R A. GM/2R B. 2GM/R C. GM/R2 D. E. GM/2R2 31. A projectile is red straight upward from Earths surface with a speed that is half the escape speed. If R is the radius of Earth, the highest altitude reached, measured from the surface, is: A. R/4 B. R/3 C. R/2 D. R E. 2R 32. The mass density of a certain planet has spherical symmetry but varies in such a way that the mass inside every spherical surface with center at the center of the planet is proportional to the radius of the surface. If r is the distance from the center of the planet to a point mass inside the planet, the gravitational force on the mass is: A. not dependent on r B. proportional to r2 C. proportional to r D. proportional to 1/r E. proportional to 1/r2 Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 199 33. A spherical shell has inner radius R1 , outer radius R2 , and mass M , distributed uniformly throughout the shell. The magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the shell by a point mass particle of m, located a distance d from the center, inside the inner radius, is: A. 0 2 B. GM m/R1 2 C. GM m/d 2 D. GM m/(R2 d2 ) E. GM m/(R1 d)2 34. A spherical shell has inner radius R1 , outer radius R2 , and mass M , distributed uniformly throughout the shell. The magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the shell by a point mass m, located a distance d from the center, outside the outer radius, is: A. 0 2 B. GM m/R1 C. GM m/d2 2 D. GM m/(R2 d2 ) E. GM m/(R1 d)2 35. A spherical shell has inner radius R1 , outer radius R2 , and mass M , distributed uniformly throughout the shell. The magnitude of the gravitational force exerted on the shell by a point particle of mass m located a distance d from the center, outside the inner radius and inside the outer radius, is: A. 0 B. GM m/d2 3 C. GM m/(R2 d3 ) 3 3 3 D. GM m(d3 R1 )/d2 (R2 R1 ) 3 3 E. GM m/(d R1 ) 36. An A. B. C. D. E. articial satellite of Earth releases a bomb. Neglecting air resistance, the bomb will: strike Earth under the satellite at the instant of release strike Earth under the satellite at the instant of impact strike Earth ahead of the satellite at the instant of impact strike Earth behind the satellite at the instant of impact never strike Earth 37. An astronaut nishes some work on the outside of his satellite, which is in circular orbit around Earth. He leaves his wrench outside the satellite. The wrench will: A. fall directly down to Earth B. continue in orbit at reduced speed C. continue in orbit with the satellite D. y o tangentially into space E. spiral down to Earth 200 Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 38. The elliptical orbit of a planet around the Sun is shown on the diagram. Which of the following statements is true? E D ......................... ................................ ........ ..... ...... .... .... ..... .... .... ... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .... .... ... ... . .... ..... ... .... ...... ...... ..... .............................. ........................... A A. B. C. D. E. B C the eccentricity of the orbit is less than zero the eccentricity of the orbit is greater than 1 the sun might be at point C the sun might be at point D the sun might be at point B 39. Consider the statement: Earth moves in a stable orbit around the Sun and is therefore in equilibrium. The statement is: A. false, because no moving body can be in equilibrium B. true, because Earth does not fall into or y away from the Sun C. false, because Earth is rotating on its axis and no rotating body can be in equilibrium D. false, because Earth has a considerable acceleration E. true, because if it were not in equilibrium then buildings and structures would not be stable 40. A planet travels in an elliptical orbit about a star X as shown. The magnitude of the acceleration of the planet is: Q ...................... ............................... ......... ..... ..... ...... ..... .... .... .... .... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... . ... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... . .... ... .... .... ..... ..... ...... ..... ....... .............. ................ ........................ P W X V A. B. C. D. E. R S U T greatest at point Q greatest at point S greatest at point U greatest at point W the same at all points Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 201 41. In planetary motion the line from the star to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal times. This is a direct consequence of: A. the conservation of energy B. the conservation of momentum C. the conservation of angular momentum D. the conservation of mass E. none of the above 42. The speed of a comet in an elliptical orbit about the Sun: A. decreases while it is receding from the Sun B. is constant C. is greatest when farthest from the Sun D. varies sinusoidally with time E. equals L/(mr ), where L is its angular momentum, m is its mass, and r is its distance from the Sun 43. A planet travels in an elliptical orbit about a star as shown. At what pair of points is the speed of the planet the same? Q ................... ..................... .......... ......... ..... ..... .... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... .... . ..... ... ...... .... . ... ......... ............................... ........ ............ P........................ .. ... R W S V A. B. C. D. E. 202 W and S P and T P and R Q and U V and R Chapter 13: GRAVITATION U T 44. Planet 1 and planet 2 are both in circular orbits around the same central star. The orbit of planet 2 has a radius that is much larger than the radius of the orbit of planet 1. This means that: A. the period of planet 1 is greater than the period of planet 2 and the speed of planet 1 is greater than the speed of planet 2 B. the period of planet 1 is greater than the period of planet 2 and the speed of planet 1 is less than the speed of planet 2 C. the period of planet 1 is less than the period of planet 2 and the speed of planet 1 is less than the speed of planet 2 D. the period of planet 1 is less than the period of planet 2 and the speed of planet 1 is greater than the speed of planet 2 E. the planets have the same speed and the same period 45. For a planet in orbit around a star the perihelion distance is rp ad its speed at perihelion is vp . The aphelion distance is ra and its speed at aphelion is va . Which of the following is true? A. va = vp B. va /ra = vp /rp C. va ra = vp rp 2 2 D. va /ra = vp /rp 2 2 E. va ra = vp rp 46. A planet is in circular orbit around the Sun. Its distance from the Sun is four times the average distance of Earth from the Sun. The period of this planet, in Earth years, is: A. 4 B. 8 C. 16 D. 64 E. 2.52 47. Two planets are orbiting a star in a distant galaxy. The rst has a semimajor axis of 150 106 km, an eccentricity of 0.20, and a period of 1.0 Earth years. The second has a semimajor axis of 250 106 km, an eccentricity of 0.30, and a period of: A. 0.46 Earth years B. 0.57 Earth years C. 1.4 Earth years D. 1.8 Earth years E. 2.2 Earth years Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 203 48. A small satellite is in elliptical orbit around Earth as shown. If L denotes the magnitude of its angular momentum and K denotes kinetic energy: .. ..... ...................... ....................... ........ ..... ....... ..... .... ..... ..... .... ... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... ... ... ... ... .... ... ... .... . . .... ..... .... .... ..... ........ ..... .......... ..... ..................... .............. . . .. . .. 2 Earth 1 A. B. C. D. E. L2 > L1 L2 > L1 L2 = L 1 L2 < L1 L2 = L 1 and and and and and K2 K2 K2 K2 K2 > K1 = K1 = K1 = K1 > K1 49. Assume that Earth is in circular orbit around the Sun with kinetic energy K and potential energy U , taken to be zero for innite separation. Then, the relationship between K and U : A. is K = U B. is K = U C. is K = U/2 D. is K = U/2 E. depends on the radius of the orbit 50. An articial Earth satellite is moved from a circular orbit with radius R to a circular orbit with radius 2R. During this move: A. the gravitational force does positive work, the kinetic energy of the satellite increases, and the potential energy of the Earth-satellite system increases B. the gravitational force does positive work, the kinetic energy of the satellite increases, and the potential energy of the Earth-satellite system decreases C. the gravitational force does positive work, the kinetic energy of the satellite decreases, and the potential energy of the Earth-satellite system increases D. the gravitational force does negative work, the kinetic energy of the satellite increases, and the potential energy of the Earth-satellite system decreases E. the gravitational force does negative work, the kinetic energy of the satellite decreases, and the potential energy of the Earth-satellite system increases 51. An articial satellite of Earth nears the end of its life due to air resistance. While still in orbit: A. it moves faster as the orbit lowers B. it moves slower as the orbit lowers C. it slowly spirals away from Earth D. it moves slower in the same orbit but with a decreasing period E. it moves faster in the same orbit but with an increasing period 204 Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 52. A spaceship is returning to Earth with its engine turned o. Consider only the gravitational eld of Earth and let M be the mass of Earth, m be the mass of the spaceship, and R be the distance from the center of Earth. In moving from position 1 to position 2 the kinetic energy of the spaceship increases by: 1 1 A. GM m 2 R2 GM m/R2 R2 1 1 1 B. GM m 2+ 2 R1 R2 R1 R 2 C. GM m 2 R1 R1 R2 D. GM m R1 R2 R1 R2 E. GM m 2 2 R1 R2 53. Given the perihelion distance, aphelion distance, and speed at perihelion of a planet, which of the following CANNOT be calculated? A. The mass of the star B. The mass of the planet C. The speed of the planet at aphelion D. The period of orbit E. The semimajor axis of the orbit 54. The orbit of a certain satellite has a semimajor axis of 1.5 107 m and an eccentricity of 0.20. Its perigee (minimum distance) and apogee (maximum distance) are respectively: A. 1.2 107 m, 1.8 107 m B. 3.0 106 m, 1.2 107 m C. 9.6 106 m, 1.0 107 m D. 1.0 107 m, 1.2 107 m E. 9.6 106 m, 1.8 107 m 55. A planet in another solar system orbits a star with a mass of 4.0 1030 kg. At one point in its orbit it is 250 106 km from the star and is moving at 35 km/s. Take the universal gravitational 2 constant to be 6.67 1011 m2 /s kg and calculate the semimajor axis of the planets orbit. The result is: A. 79 106 km B. 160 106 km C. 290 106 km D. 320 106 km E. 590 106 km Chapter 13: GRAVITATION 205 Chapter 14: 1. All A. B. C. D. E. FLUIDS uids are: gases liquids gases or liquids non-metallic transparent 2. Gases may be distinguished from other forms of matter by their: A. lack of color B. small atomic weights C. inability to form free surfaces D. ability to ow E. ability to exert a buoyant force 3. 1 Pa is: A. 1 N/m B. 1 m/N C. 1 kg/m s D. 1 kg/m s2 E. 1 N/m s 4. Mercury is a convenient liquid to use in a barometer because: A. it is a metal B. it has a high boiling point C. it expands little with temperature D. it has a high density E. it looks silvery 5. To A. B. C. D. E. 206 obtain the absolute pressure from the gauge pressure: subtract atmospheric pressure add atmospheric pressure subtract 273 add 273 convert to N/m2 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 6. Barometers and open-tube manometers are two instruments that are used to measure pressure. A. Both measure gauge pressure B. Both measure absolute pressure C. Barometers measure gauge pressure and manometers measure absolute pressure D. Barometers measure absolute pressure and manometers measure gauge pressure E. Both measure an average of the absolute and gauge pressures 3 7. To measure moderately low pressures oil with a density of 8.5 102 kg/m is used in place of mercury in a barometer. A change in the height of the oil column of 1.0 mm indicates a change in pressure of about: A. 1.2 107 Pa B. 1.2 105 Pa C. 0.85 Pa D. 1.2 Pa E. 8.3 Pa 8. The pressure exerted on the ground by a man is greatest when: A. he stands with both feet at on the ground B. he stands at on one foot C. he stands on the toes of one foot D. he lies down on the ground E. all of the above yield the same pressure 9. The vessels shown below all contain water to the same height. Rank them according to the pressure exerted by the water on the vessel bottoms, least to greatest. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ......................... ......................... ........................... ............................ ......................... ........................ . ........................ ......................... . . . 1 A. B. C. D. E. 2 4 3 1, 2, 3, 4 3, 4, 2, 1 4, 3, 2, 1 2, 3, 4, 1 All pressures are the same Chapter 14: FLUIDS 207 10. In a stationary homogeneous liquid: A. pressure is the same at all points B. pressure depends on the direction C. pressure is independent of any atmospheric pressure on the upper surface of the liquid D. pressure is the same at all points at the same level E. none of the above 11. Which of the following ve statements, concerning the upper surface pressure of a liquid, is FALSE? A. It is independent of the surface area B. It is the same for all points on that surface C. It would not increase if the liquid depth were increased D. It would increase if the liquid density were increased E. It would increase if the atmospheric pressure increased 12. Several cans of dierent sizes and shapes are all lled with the same liquid to the same depth. Then: A. the weight of the liquid is the same for all cans B. the force of the liquid on the bottom of each can is the same C. the least pressure is at the bottom of the can with the largest bottom area D. the greatest pressure is at the bottom of the can with the largest bottom area E. the pressure on the bottom of each can is the same 13. An airtight box, having a lid of area 80 cm2 , is partially evacuated. Atmospheric pressure is 1.01 105 Pa. A force of 600 N is required to pull the lid o the box. The pressure in the box was: A. 2.60 104 Pa B. 6.35 104 Pa C. 7.50 104 Pa D. 1.38 105 Pa E. 1.76 105 Pa 14. A closed hemispherical shell of radius R is lled with uid at uniform pressure p. The net force of the uid on the curved portion of the shell is given by: A. 2 R2 p B. R2 p C. 4 R2 p D. (4/3) R2 p E. (4/3) R3 p 208 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 15. The diagram shows a U-tube with cross-sectional area A and partially lled with oil of density . A solid cylinder, which ts the tube tightly but can slide without friction, is placed in the right arm. The system is in equilibrium. The weight of the cylinder is: ... ... ... | ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... L ... ... cylinder ... ... ... ... | ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... | ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... oil ... ... ... h ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... | ... ... ... ... ... ............... ... ........... ... ... ............ ... ... ........... ... ... ............ ... ... ... ... ... A. B. C. D. E. ALg L3 g A(L + h)g A(L h)g none of these 3 16. The density of water is 1.0 g/cm . The density of the oil in the left column of the U-tube shown below is: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . . . . . ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. ... .. . .. ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .... .. ... ..... .. .. .................. .. ............ . .. .. .. .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ...................... .......... .......... ------- ------- | ---2 cm ------------.... ---.... .... oil ---- 10 cm ---.... ---.... ---.... ---.... ---- | .... ---- .... ---.... ---.... ---.... water ---.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... ....... . . . ......... ........ . . .......... ............. . . . .......... ........... . . . . ......... ... . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . ............... .. . .... A. B. C. D. E. 3 0.20 g/cm 0.80 g/cm3 3 1.0 g/cm 3 1.3 g/cm 3 5.0 g/cm Chapter 14: FLUIDS 209 3 17. A uniform U-tube is partially lled with water. Oil, of density 0.75 g/cm , is poured into the right arm until the water level in the left arm rises 3 cm. The length of the oil column is then: A. 2.25 cm B. 8 cm C. 6 cm D. 4 cm E. need to know the cross-sectional area of the U-tube 18. A long U-tube contains mercury (density = 14 103 kg/m3 ). When 10 cm of water (density 3 = 1.0 103 kg/m ) is poured into the left arm, the mercury in the right arm rises above its original level by: A. 0.36 cm B. 0.72 cm C. 14 cm D. 35 cm E. 70 cm 19. A bucket of water is pushed from left to right with increasing speed across a horizontal surface. Consider the pressure at two points at the same level in the water. A. It is the same B. It is higher at the point on the left C. It is higher at the point on the right D. At rst it is higher at the point on the left but as the bucket speeds up it is lower there E. At rst it is higher at the point on the right but as the bucket speeds up it is lower there 20. A bucket resting on the oor of an elevator contains an incompressible uid of density . When the elevator has an upward acceleration of magnitude a the pressure dierence between two points in a uid separated by a vertical distance h, is given by: A. ah B. g h C. (g + a)h D. (g a)h E. gah 21. A bucket resting on the oor of an elevator contains an incompressible uid of density . When the elevator has a downward acceleration of magnitude a the pressure dierence between two points in a uid, separated by a vertical distance h, is given by: A. ah B. g h C. (g + a)h D. (g a)h E. gah 210 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 22. An object completely submerged in a uid displaces its own volume of uid. This is: A. Pascals paradox B. Archimedes principle C. Pascals principle D. true, but none of the above E. false 23. A certain object oats in uids of density 1. 0.90 2. 0 3. 1.10 Which of the following statements is true? A. the buoyant force of uid i is greater than the buoyant forces of the other two uids B. the buoyant force of uid 3 is greater than the buoyant forces of the other two uids C. the three uids exert the same buoyant force D. the object displace the same volume of all three uids E. none of these are true 24. A certain object oats in uids of density 1. 0.90 2. 0 3. 1.10 Rank these uids according to the volume displaced by the object, least to greatest. A. 1, 2, 3 B. 3, 2, 1 C. 2, 3, 1 D. 3, 1, 2 E. All are the same Chapter 14: FLUIDS 211 25. Two identical blocks of ice oat in water as shown. Then: A B A. block A displaces a greater volume of water since the pressure acts on a smaller bottom area B. block B displaces a greater volume of water since the pressure is less on its bottom C. the two blocks displace equal volumes of water since they have the same weight D. block A displaces a greater volume of water since its submerged end is lower in the water E. block B displaces a greater volume of water since its submerged end has a greater area 26. A block of ice at 0 C is oating on the surface of ice water in a beaker. The surface of the water just comes to the top of the beaker. When the ice melts the water level will: A. rise and overow will occur B. remain the same C. fall D. depend on the initial ratio of water to ice E. depend on the shape of the block of ice 27. A block of ice at 0 C containing a piece of cork is oating on the surface of ice water in a beaker. When the ice has melted the water level: A. is higher B. is lower C. is the same D. depends on the initial ratio of water to ice E. depends on the shape of the ice block 28. A pirate chest rests at the bottom of an ocean. If the water is still, the net force it exerts on the chest: A. is upward B. is downward C. is zero D. depends on the mass of the chest E. depends on the contents of the chest 212 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 29. A small steel ball oats in a half-full container of mercury. When water is added: A. the ball will oat on the water B. the ball will rise slightly C. the mercury will oat on the water D. the ball will sink to the bottom of the container E. the ball will lower slightly more into the mercury 30. A cork oats on the surface of an incompressible liquid in a container exposed to atmospheric pressure. The container is then sealed and the air above the liquid is evacuated. The cork: A. sinks slightly B. rises slightly C. oats at the same height D. bobs up and down about its old position E. behaves erratically 31. An object hangs from a spring balance. The balance indicates 30 N in air and 20 N when the object is submerged in water. What does the balance indicate when the object is submersed in a liquid with a density that is half that of water? A. 20 N B. 25 N C. 30 N D. 35 N E. 40 N 32. A r wood board oats in fresh water with 60% of its volume under water. The density of the wood in g/cm3 is: A. 0.4 B. 0.5 C. 0.6 D. less than 0.4 E. more than 0.6 33. A boat oating in fresh water displaces 16, 000 N of water. How many newtons of saltwater would it displace if it oats in saltwater of specic gravity 1.17? A. 14, 500 B. 17, 600 C. 16, 000 D. 284 E. 234 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 213 34. A rock, which weighs 1400 N in air, has an apparent weight of 900 N when submerged in fresh 3 water (998 kg/m ). The volume of the rock is: A. 0.14 m3 B. 0.60 m3 C. 0.90 m3 D. 5.1 102 m3 E. 9.2 102 m3 35. A loaded ship passes from a lake (fresh water) to the ocean (saltwater). Saltwater is more dense than fresh water and as a result the ship will: A. ride higher in the water B. settle lower in the water C. ride at the same level in the water D. experience an increase in buoyant force E. experience a decrease in buoyant force 3 36. The dimensions of a wooden raft (density = 150 kg/m ) are 3.0 m 3.0 m 1.0 m. What 3 maximum load can it carry in seawater (density = 1020 kg/m )? A. 1350 kg B. 7800 kg C. 9200 kg D. 19, 500 kg E. 24, 300 kg 37. A tin can has a volume of 1000 cm3 and a mass of 100 g. Approximately what mass of lead shot can it carry without sinking in water? A. 900 g B. 100 g C. 1000 g D. 1100 g E. 980 g 38. A block of wood weighs 160 N and has a specic gravity of 0.60. To sink it in fresh water requires an additional downward force of: A. 54 N B. 64 N C. 96 N D. 110 N E. 240 N 214 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 39. A student standardizes the concentration of a saltwater solution by slowly adding salt until an egg will just oat. The procedure is based on the assumption that: A. all eggs have the same volume B. all eggs have the same weight C. all eggs have the same density D. all eggs have the same shape E. the salt tends to neutralize the cholesterol in the egg 40. A solid has a volume of 8 cm3 . When weighed on a spring scale calibrated in grams, the scale indicates 20 g. What does the scale indicate if the object is weighed while immersed in a liquid 3 of density 2 g/cm ? A. 4 g B. 10 g C. 12 g D. 16 g E. Zero, since the object will oat 3 41. A 210-g object apparently loses 30 g when suspended in a liquid of density 2.0 g/cm . The density of the object is: A. 7.0 g/cm3 3 B. 3.5 g/cm 3 C. 1.4 g/cm 3 D. 14 g/cm E. none of these 42. A steel ax and an aluminum piston have the same apparent weight in water. When they are weighed in air: A. they weigh the same B. the ax is heavier C. the piston is heavier D. both weigh less than they did in water E. depends on their shapes 43. The apparent weight of a steel sphere immersed in various liquids is measured using a spring scale. The greatest reading is obtained for that liquid: A. having the smallest density B. having the largest density C. subject to the greatest atmospheric pressure D. having the greatest volume E. in which the sphere was submerged deepest Chapter 14: FLUIDS 215 44. A 0.50-N metal sinker appears (as measured using a spring scale) to have a weight of 0.45 N when submerged in water. The specic gravity of the metal is: A. 6 B. 8 C. 9 D. 10 E. 12 45. An object oats on the surface of a uid. For purposes of calculating the torque on it, the buoyant force is taken to act at: A. the center of the bottom surface of the object B. the center of gravity of the object C. the center of gravity of the uid that the object replaced D. the geometric center of the object E. none of the above 46. A blast of wind tips a sailboat in the clockwise direction when viewed from the stern. When the wind ceases the boat rotates back toward the upright position if, when it is tilted, the center of buoyancy: A. is above the center of gravity B. is below the center of gravity C. is to the right of the center of gravity D. is to the left of the center of gravity E. coincides with the center of gravity 47. A cork oats in water in a bucket resting on the oor of an elevator. The elevator then accelerates upward. During the acceleration: A. the cork is immersed more B. the cork is immersed less C. the cork is immersed the same amount D. at rst the cork is immersed less but as the elevator speeds up it is immersed more E. at rst the cork is immersed more but as the elevator speeds up it is immersed less 48. Two balls have the same shape and size but one is denser than the other. If frictional forces are negligible when they are dropped in air, which has the greater acceleration? A. The heavier ball B. The lighter ball C. They have the same acceleration D. The heavier ball if atmospheric pressure is high, they lighter ball if it is low E. The lighter ball if atmospheric pressure is high, the heavier ball if it is low 216 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 49. The principle of uid pressure that is used in hydraulic brakes or lifts is that: A. pressure is the same at all levels in a uid B. increases of pressure are transmitted equally to all parts of a uid C. the pressure at a point in a uid is due to the weight of the uid above it D. increases of pressure can only be transmitted through uids E. the pressure at a given depth is proportional to the depth in the uid 50. Which of the following statements about Pascals principle is true? A. It is valid only for incompressible uids B. It explains why light objects oat C. It explains why the pressure is greater at the bottom of a lake than at the surface D. It is valid only for objects that are less dense than water E. None of the above are true 51. The hydraulic automobile jack illustrates: A. Archimedes principle B. Pascals principle C. Hookes law D. Newtons third law E. Newtons second law 52. One piston in a hydraulic lift has an area that is twice the area of the other. When the pressure at the smaller piston is increased by p the pressure at the larger piston: A. increases by 2p B. increases by p/2 C. increases by p D. increases by 4p E. does not change 53. A hydraulic press has one piston of diameter 2.0 cm and the other piston of diameter 8.0 cm. What force must be applied to the smaller piston to obtain a force of 1600 N at the larger piston? A. 6.25 N B. 25 N C. 100 N D. 400 N E. 1600 N Chapter 14: FLUIDS 217 54. The two arms of a U-tube are not identical, one having twice the diameter of the other. A cork in the narrow arm requires a force of 16 N to remove it. The tube is lled with water and the wide arm is tted with a piston. The minimum force that must be applied to the piston to push the cork out is: A. 4 N B. 8 N C. 16 N D. 32 N E. 64 N 55. A U-tube has dissimilar arms, one having twice the diameter of the other. It contains an incompressible uid and is tted with a sliding piston in each arm, with each piston in contact with the uid. When the piston in the narrow arm is pushed down a distance d, the piston in the wide arm rises a distance: A. d B. 2d C. d/2 D. 4d E. d/4 56. A U-tube has dissimilar arms, one having twice the diameter of the other. It contains an incompressible uid and is tted with a sliding piston in each arm, with each piston in contact with the uid. When an applied force does work W in pushing the piston in the narrow arm on the piston in the wide arm. down, the uid does work A. W B. 2W C. W/2 D. 4W E. W/4 57. A uid is undergoing incompressible ow. This means that: A. the pressure at a given point cannot change with time B. the velocity at a given point cannot change with time C. the velocity must be the same everywhere D. the pressure must be the same everywhere E. the density cannot change with time or location 58. A uid is undergoing steady ow. Therefore: A. the velocity of any given molecule of uid does not change B. the pressure does not vary from point to point C. the velocity at any given point does not vary with time D. the density does not vary from point to point E. the ow is not uphill or downhill 218 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 59. If p A. B. C. D. E. is a pressure and is a density then p/ has units of: m2 m2 /s2 N/m2 kg/m2 m3 /kg 3 60. One end of a cylindrical pipe has a radius of 1.5 cm. Water (density = 1.0 103 kg/m ) streams steadily out at 7.0 m/s. The rate at which mass is leaving the pipe is: A. 2.5 kg/s B. 4.9 kg/s C. 7.0 kg/s D. 48 kg/s E. 7.0 103 kg/s 3 61. One end of a cylindrical pipe has a radius of 1.5 cm. Water (density = 1.0 103 kg/m ) streams steadily out at 7.0 m/s. The volume ow rate is: A. 4.9 103 m3 /s B. 2.5 m3 /s C. 4.9 m3 /s D. 7.0 m3 /s E. 48 m3 /s 62. The equation of continuity for uid ow can be derived from the conservation of: A. energy B. mass C. angular momentum D. volume E. pressure Chapter 14: FLUIDS 219 63. The diagram shows a pipe of uniform cross section in which water is owing. The directions of ow and the volume ow rates (in cm3 /s) are shown for various portions of the pipe. The direction of ow and the volume ow rate in the portion marked A are: 6 3 5 4 A A. B. C. D. E. 3 and 3 cm3 /s and 7 cm3 /s and 9 cm3 /s and 11 cm3 /s and 15 cm3 /s 64. An incompressible liquid ows along the pipe as shown. The ratio of the speeds v2 /v1 is: ......................................................................... . .... .. ... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . ..... . . . .A . . 1. ..................................................................... . .. . . .. . . . . . . . v1... . . ............... .............. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . ... . A v2 .. . .............. .............. .. .. ... ... . .................................................................... .... ... .. ................................................................... A. A1 /A2 B. A2 /A1 C. A1 /A2 D. A2 /A1 E. v1 /v2 65. Water ows through a cylindrical pipe of varying cross section. The velocity is 3.0 m/s at a point where the pipe diameter is 1.0 cm. At a point where the pipe diameter is 3.0 cm, the velocity is: A. 9 m/s B. 3 m/s C. 1 m/s D. 0.33 m/s E. 0.11 m/s 220 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 66. A constriction in a pipe reduces its diameter from 4.0 cm to 2.0 cm. Where the pipe is narrow the water speed is 8.0 m/s. Where it is wide the water speed is: A. 2.0 m/s B. 4.0 m/s C. 8.0 m/s D. 16 m/s E. 32 m/s 67. Water ows from a 6.0-cm diameter pipe into an 8.0-cm diameter pipe. The speed in the 6.0-cm pipe is 5.0 m/s. The speed in the 8.0-cm pipe is: A. 2.8 m/s B. 3.7 m/s C. 6.6 m/s D. 8.8 m/s E. 9.9 m/s 68. A lawn sprinkler is made of a 1.0-cm diameter garden hose with one end closed and 25 holes, each with a diameter of 0.050 cm, cut near the closed end. If water ows at 2.0 m/s in the hose, the speed of the water leaving a hole is: A. 2.0 m/s B. 32 m/s C. 40 m/s D. 600 m/s E. 800 m/s 69. Bernoullis equation can be derived from the conservation of: A. energy B. mass C. angular momentum D. volume E. pressure 70. Which of the following assumptions is NOT made in the derivation of Bernoullis equation? A. Assume streamline ow B. Neglect viscosity C. Neglect friction D. Neglect gravity E. Neglect turbulence Chapter 14: FLUIDS 221 71. The quantity y appearing in Bernoullis equation MUST be measured: A. upward from the center of Earth B. upward from the surface of Earth C. upward from the lowest point in the ow D. downward from the highest point in the ow E. upward from any convenient level 72. Water ows through a constriction in a horizontal pipe. As it enters the constriction, the waters: A. speed increases and pressure decreases B. speed increases and pressure remains constant C. speed increases and pressure increases D. speed decreases and pressure increases E. speed decreases and pressure decreases 73. Water is pumped through the hose shown below, from a lower level to an upper level. Compared to the water at point 1, the water at point 2: upper level 2 .......................................................... ......................................................... ... ... ... .. .. .. ........................................................ ........................................................ .. ... . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . ... ... . . . ........................................ ........................................ . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... .... ..... ....... ......................................... ..................................... 1 lower level A. B. C. D. E. 222 has greater speed and greater pressure has greater speed and less pressure has less speed and less pressure has less speed and greater pressure has greater speed and the same pressure Chapter 14: FLUIDS 74. A non-viscous incompressible liquid is owing through a horizontal pipe of constant cross section. Bernoullis equation and the equation of continuity predict that the drop in pressure along the pipe: A. is zero B. depends on the length of the pipe C. depends on the uid velocity D. depends on the cross-sectional area of the pipe E. depends on the height of the pipe 75. A non-viscous incompressible uid is pumped steadily into the narrow end of a long tapered pipe and emerges from the wide end. The pressure at the input is greater than at the output. A possible explanation is: A. the uid speed increases from input to output B. the uid speed is the same at the two ends C. the uid is owing uphill D. the uid is owing downhill E. the uid is owing horizontally 76. Water is pumped into one end of a long pipe at the rate of 40 L/min. It emerges at the other end at 24 L/min. A possible reason for this decrease in ow is: A. the water is being pumped uphill B. the water is being pumped downhill C. the diameter of the pipe is not the same at the two ends D. friction in the pipe E. a leak in the pipe 77. Consider a pipe containing a uid, with the uid being at rest. To apply Bernoullis equation to this situation: A. set v equal to zero because there is no motion B. set g equal to zero because there is no acceleration C. set v and g both equal to zero D. set p equal to the atmospheric pressure E. cannot be done, Bernoullis equation applies only to uids in motion 3 78. Water (density = 1.0 103 kg/m ) ows through a horizontal tapered pipe. At the wide end its speed is 4.0 m/s. The dierence in pressure between the two ends is 4.5 103 Pa. The speed of the water at the narrow end is: A. 2.6 m/s B. 3.4 m/s C. 4.0 m/s D. 4.5 m/s E. 5.0 m/s Chapter 14: FLUIDS 223 79. Water is streaming downward from a faucet opening with an area of 3.0 105 m2 . It leaves the faucet with a speed of 5.0 m/s. The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.50 m below the faucet is: A. 1.5 105 m2 B. 2.0 105 m2 C. 2.5 105 m2 D. 3.0 105 m2 E. 3.5 105 m2 80. A large water tank, open at the top, has a small hole in the bottom. When the water level is 30 m above the bottom of the tank, the speed of the water leaking from the hole: A. is 2.5 m/s B. is 24 m/s C. is 44 m/s D. cannot be calculated unless the area of the hole is given E. cannot be calculated unless the areas of the hole and tank are given 81. A large tank lled with water has two holes in the bottom, one with twice the radius of the the speed of the water other. In steady ow the speed of water leaving the larger hole is leaving the smaller. A. twice B. four times C. half D. one-fourth E. the same as 82. A non-viscous incompressible uid is pumped steadily up a vertical pipe with uniform cross section. The dierence in pressure between points at the top and bottom: A. is the same as it would be if the uid were motionless B. is greater at higher ow rates than at lower ow rates C. is less at higher ow rates than at lower ow rates D. does not depend on the density of the uid E. is zero 224 Chapter 14: FLUIDS 83. A water line enters a house 2.0 m below ground. A smaller diameter pipe carries water to a faucet 5.0 m above ground, on the second oor. Water ows at 2.0 m/s in the main line and at 3 7.0 m/s on the second oor. Take the density of water to be 1.0 103 kg/m . The dierence in pressure between the main line and the second oor is: A. 7.15 104 Pa with the main line at the higher pressure B. 2.65 104 Pa with the main line at the higher pressure C. 7.15 104 Pa with the main line at the lower pressure D. 2.65 104 Pa with the main line at the lower pressure E. 9.4 104 Pa with the main line at the higher pressure 84. A person blows across the top of one arm of a U-tube partially lled with water. The water in that arm: A. rises slightly B. drops slightly C. remains at the same height D. rises if the blowing is soft but drops if it is hard E. rises if the blowing is hard but drops if it is soft Chapter 14: FLUIDS 225 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 1. In simple harmonic motion, the restoring force must be proportional to the: A. amplitude B. frequency C. velocity D. displacement E. displacement squared 2. An A. B. C. D. E. oscillatory motion must be simple harmonic if: the amplitude is small the potential energy is equal to the kinetic energy the motion is along the arc of a circle the acceleration varies sinusoidally with time the derivative, dU/dx, of the potential energy is negative 3. In simple harmonic motion, the magnitude of the acceleration is: A. constant B. proportional to the displacement C. inversely proportional to the displacement D. greatest when the velocity is greatest E. never greater than g 4. A particle is in simple harmonic motion with period T . At time t = 0 it is at the equilibrium point. Of the following times, at which time is it furthest from the equilibrium point? A. 0.5T B. 0.7T C. T D. 1.4T E. 1.5T 5. A particle moves back and forth along the x axis from x = xm to x = +xm , in simple harmonic motion with period T . At time t = 0 it is at x = +xm . When t = 0.75T : A. it is at x = 0 and is traveling toward x = +xm B. it is at x = 0 and is traveling toward x = xm C. it at x = +xm and is at rest D. it is between x = 0 and x = +xm and is traveling toward x = xm E. it is between x = 0 and x = xm and is traveling toward x = xm 226 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 6. A particle oscillating in simple harmonic motion is: A. never in equilibrium because it is in motion B. never in equilibrium because there is always a force C. in equilibrium at the ends of its path because its velocity is zero there D. in equilibrium at the center of its path because the acceleration is zero there E. in equilibrium at the ends of its path because the acceleration is zero there 7. An A. B. C. D. E. object is undergoing simple harmonic motion. Throughout a complete cycle it: has constant speed has varying amplitude has varying period has varying acceleration has varying mass 8. When a body executes simple harmonic motion, its acceleration at the ends of its path must be: A. zero B. less than g C. more than g D. suddenly changing in sign E. none of these 9. A particle is in simple harmonic motion with period T . At time t = 0 it is halfway between the equilibrium point and an end point of its motion, traveling toward the end point. The next time it is at the same place is: A. t = T B. t = T /2 C. t = T /4 D. t = T /8 E. none of the above 10. An A. B. C. D. E. object attached to one end of a spring makes 20 complete oscillations in 10 s. Its period is: 2 Hz 10 s 0.5 Hz 2s 0.50 s Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 227 11. An A. B. C. D. E. object attached to one end of a spring makes 20 vibrations in 10 s. Its frequency is: 2 Hz 10 s 0.05 Hz 2s 0.50 s 12. An is: A. B. C. D. E. object attached to one end of a spring makes 20 vibrations in 10 s. Its angular frequency 0.79 rad/s 1.57 rad/s 2.0 rad/s 6.3 rad/s 12.6 rad/s 13. Frequency f and angular frequency are related by A. f = B. f = 2 C. f = / D. f = /2 E. f = 2 / 14. A block attached to a spring oscillates in simple harmonic motion along the x axis. The limits of its motion are x = 10 cm and x = 50 cm and it goes from one of these extremes to the other in 0.25 s. Its amplitude and frequency are: A. 40 cm, 2 Hz B. 20 cm, 4 Hz C. 40 cm, 2 Hz D. 25 cm, 4 Hz E. 20 cm, 2 Hz 15. A weight suspended from an ideal spring oscillates up and down with a period T . If the amplitude of the oscillation is doubled, the period will be: A. T D. 1.5T B. 2T C. T /2 E. 4T 228 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 16. In simple harmonic motion, the magnitude of the acceleration is greatest when: A. the displacement is zero B. the displacement is maximum C. the speed is maximum D. the force is zero E. the speed is between zero and its maximum 17. In simple harmonic motion, the displacement is maximum when the: A. acceleration is zero B. velocity is maximum C. velocity is zero D. kinetic energy is maximum E. momentum is maximum 18. In simple harmonic motion: A. the acceleration is greatest at the maximum displacement B. the velocity is greatest at the maximum displacement C. the period depends on the amplitude D. the acceleration is constant E. the acceleration is greatest at zero displacement 19. The amplitude and phase constant of an oscillator are determined by: A. the frequency B. the angular frequency C. the initial displacement alone D. the initial velocity alone E. both the initial displacement and velocity 20. Two identical undamped oscillators have the same amplitude of oscillation only if: A. they are started with the same displacement x0 B. they are started with the same velocity v0 C. they are started with the same phase 2 D. they are started so the combination 2 x2 + v0 is the same 0 2 22 E. they are started so the combination x0 + v0 is the same 21. The amplitude of any oscillator can be doubled by: A. doubling only the initial displacement B. doubling only the initial speed C. doubling the initial displacement and halving the initial speed D. doubling the initial speed and halving the initial displacement E. doubling both the initial displacement and the initial speed Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 229 22. It is impossible for two particles, each executing simple harmonic motion, to remain in phase with each other if they have dierent: A. masses B. periods C. amplitudes D. spring constants E. kinetic energies 23. The acceleration of a body executing simple harmonic motion leads the velocity by what phase? A. 0 B. /8 rad C. /4 rad D. /2 rad E. rad 24. The displacement of an object oscillating on a spring is given by x(t) = xm cos( t + ). If the initial displacement is zero and the initial velocity is in the negative x direction, then the phase constant is: A. 0 B. /2 rad C. rad D. 3 /2 rad E. 2 rad 25. The displacement of an object oscillating on a spring is given by x(t) = xm cos( t + ). If the object is initially displaced in the negative x direction and given a negative initial velocity, then the phase constant is between: A. 0 and /2 rad B. /2 and rad C. and 3 /2 rad D. 3 /2 and 2 rad E. none of the above ( is exactly 0, /2, , or 3 /2 rad) 26. A certain spring elongates 9.0 mm when it is suspended vertically and a block of mass M is hung on it. The natural angular frequency of this block-spring system: A. is 0.088 rad/s B. is 33 rad/s C. is 200 rad/s D. is 1140 rad/s E. cannot be computed unless the value of M is given 230 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 27. An object of mass m, oscillating on the end of a spring with spring constant k , has amplitude A. Its maximum speed is: A. A k /m B. A2 k/m C. A m/k D. Am/k E. A2 m/k 28. A 0.20-kg object attached to a spring whose spring constant is 500 N/m executes simple harmonic motion. If its maximum speed is 5.0 m/s, the amplitude of its oscillation is: A. 0.0020 m B. 0.10 m C. 0.20 m D. 25 m E. 250 m 29. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of an particle of mass m and an ideal spring with spring constant k . Particle oscillates as shown in (i) with period T . If the spring is cut in half and used with the same particle, as shown in (ii), the period will be: ............. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .......... ....... ... ... . .. ...................... ........ .......... ........ . .. . . ....... . ........................... . . .. ... .. . ...................... .. .............. ......... ..... ...... .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... . . .. ......... ............... . ...................... .. ............ ......... .......... .. .......... . .. ..... .. ............ ........... . .. . .................... .. ....................... .. ................ ......... . .. . ........... ............ ............................ . . ... . ........... ..... .. ....................... .. .... . .... . .. . ..... . .. . . ... .. ........................ . ..................... .. .............. ....... .. ........ .. ... ...... . ... . . ...... .. . .. .. ...... ..... ........ . .................... .. ....................... .. . ....... ....... ... ...... . .. . . . ......................... ........................... . . ... ............ .. ...................... .... .. .... ... . .. . .. ......................... .. ....................... . .. ... .... ...... .... .. . . . . . (i) A. B. C. D. E. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .......... ........ ... ... . .. ...................... ................ .......... . .. . . ....... . ........................... . .... ... .. . ..................... .. .............. .......... ..... ...... .. .. . .. .. .. ... ..... . .. ......... .... .......... . ....................... .. ............ .......... .......... .. ..... .. . ..... .. . .. ........ .. ........... . .. . .................... .. ...................... . ... .. . .. .. .... ......... . .. ............ ............ ............................. . .... . . .. ... .... ...... ..... . . . . . . (ii) m m 2T 2 T T/ 2 T T /2 30. A particle moves in simple harmonic motion according to x = 2 cos(50t), where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Its maximum velocity in m/s is: A. 100 sin(50t) B. 100 cos(50t) C. 100 D. 200 E. none of these Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 231 31. A 3-kg block, attached to a spring, executes simple harmonic motion according to x = 2 cos(50t) where x is in meters and t is in seconds. The spring constant of the spring is: A. 1 N/m B. 100 N/m C. 150 N/m D. 7500 N/m E. none of these 32. Let U be the potential energy (with the zero at zero displacement) and K be the kinetic energy of a simple harmonic oscillator. Uavg and Kavg are the average values over a cycle. Then: A. Kavg > Uavg B. Kavg < Uavg C. Kavg = Uavg D. K = 0 when U = 0 E. K + U = 0 33. A particle is in simple harmonic motion along the x axis. The amplitude of the motion is xm . At one point in its motion its kinetic energy is K = 5 J and its potential energy (measured with U = 0 at x = 0) is U = 3 J. When it is at x = xm , the kinetic and potential energies are: A. K = 5 J and U = 3 J B. K = 5 J and U = 3 J C. K = 8 J and U = 0 D. K = 0 and U = 8 J E. K = 0 and U = 8 J 34. A particle is in simple harmonic motion along the x axis. The amplitude of the motion is xm . When it is at x = x1 , its kinetic energy is K = 5 J and its potential energy (measured with U = 0 at x = 0) is U = 3 J. When it is at x = 1 x1 , the kinetic and potential energies are: 2 A. K = 5 J and U = 3 J B. K = 5 J and U = 3 J C. K = 8 J and U = 0 D. K = 0 and U = 8 J E. K = 0 and U = 8 J 35. A 0.25-kg block oscillates on the end of the spring with a spring constant of 200 N/m. If the system has an energy of 6.0 J, then the amplitude of the oscillation is: A. 0.06 m B. 0.17 m C. 0.24 m D. 4.9 m E. 6.9 m 232 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 36. A 0.25-kg block oscillates on the end of the spring with a spring constant of 200 N/m. If the system has an energy of 6.0 J, then the maximum speed of the block is: A. 0.06 m/s B. 0.17 m/s C. 0.24 m/s D. 4.9 m/s E. 6.9 m/s 37. A 0.25-kg block oscillates on the end of the spring with a spring constant of 200 N/m. If the oscillation is started by elongating the spring 0.15 m and giving the block a speed of 3.0 m/s, then the maximum speed of the block is: A. 0.13 m/s B. 0.18 m/s C. 3.7 m/s D. 5.2 m/s E. 13 m/s 38. A 0.25-kg block oscillates on the end of the spring with a spring constant of 200 N/m. If the oscillation is started by elongating the spring 0.15 m and giving the block a speed of 3.0 m/s, then the amplitude of the oscillation is: A. 0.13 m B. 0.18 m C. 3.7 m D. 5.2 m E. 13 m 39. An object on the end of a spring is set into oscillation by giving it an initial velocity while it is at its equilibrium position. In the rst trial the initial velocity is v0 and in the second it is 4v0 . In the second trial: A. the amplitude is half as great and the maximum acceleration is twice as great B. the amplitude is twice as great and the maximum acceleration is half as great C. both the amplitude and the maximum acceleration are twice as great D. both the amplitude and the maximum acceleration are four times as great E. the amplitude is four times as great and the maximum acceleration is twice as great 40. A block attached to a spring undergoes simple harmonic motion on a horizontal frictionless surface. Its total energy is 50 J. When the displacement is half the amplitude, the kinetic energy is: A. zero B. 12.5 J C. 25 J D. 37.5 J E. 50 J Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 233 41. A mass-spring system is oscillating with amplitude A. The kinetic energy will equal the potential energy only when the displacement is: A. zero B. A/ 4 C. A/ 2 D. A/2 E. anywhere between A and +A 42. If the length of a simple pendulum is doubled, its period will: A. halve B. be greater by a factor of 2 C. be less by a factor of 2 D. double E. remain the same 43. The period of a simple pendulum is 1 s on Earth. When brought to a planet where g is one-tenth that on Earth, its period becomes: A. 1 s B. 1/ 10 s C. 1/10 s 10 s D. E. 10 s 44. The amplitude of oscillation of a simple pendulum is increased from 1 to 4 . Its maximum acceleration changes by a factor of: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 2 D. 4 E. 16 45. A simple pendulum of length L and mass M has frequency f . To increase its frequency to 2f : A. increase its length to 4L B. increase its length to 2L C. decrease its length to L/2 D. decrease its length to L/4 E. decrease its mass to < M/4 234 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 46. A simple pendulum consists of a small ball tied to a string and set in oscillation. As the pendulum swings the tension force of the string is: A. constant B. a sinusoidal function of time C. the square of a sinusoidal function of time D. the reciprocal of a sinusoidal function of time E. none of the above 47. A simple pendulum has length L and period T . As it passes through its equilibrium position, the string is suddenly clamped at its midpoint. The period then becomes: A. 2T B. T C. T /2 D. T /4 E. none of these 48. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of an elevator. The elevator is accelerating upwards with acceleration a. The period of this pendulum, in terms of its length L, g , and a is: A. 2 L/g B. 2 L/(g + a) C. 2 L/(g a) D. 2 L/a E. (1/2 ) g /L 49. Three physical pendulums, with masses m 1 , m2 = 2m1 , and m3 = 3m1 , have the same shape and size and are suspended at the same point. Rank them according to their periods, from shortest to longest. A. 1, 2, 3 B. 3, 2, 1 C. 2, 3, 1 D. 2, 1, 3 E. All the same Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 235 50. Five hoops are each pivoted at a point on the rim and allowed to swing as physical pendulums. The masses and radii are hoop 1: M = 150 g and R = 50 cm hoop 2: M = 200 g and R = 40 cm hoop 3: M = 250 g and R = 30 cm hoop 4: M = 300 g and R = 20 cm hoop 5: M = 350 g and R = 10 cm Order the hoops according to the periods of their motions, smallest to largest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 B. 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 1, 2, 3, 5, 4 D. 1, 2, 5, 4, 3 E. 5, 4, 1, 2, 3 51. A meter stick is pivoted at a point a distance a from its center and swings as a physical pendulum. Of the following values for a, which results in the shortest period of oscillation? A. a = 0.1 m B. a = 0.2 m C. a = 0.3 m D. a = 0.4 m E. a = 0.5 m 52. The rotational inertia of a uniform thin rod about its end is M L2 /3, where M is the mass and L is the length. Such a rod is hung vertically from one end and set into small amplitude oscillation. If L = 1.0 m this rod will have the same period as a simple pendulum of length: A. 33 cm B. 50 cm C. 67 cm D. 100 cm E. 150 cm 53. Two uniform spheres are pivoted on horizontal axes that are tangent to their surfaces. The one with the longer period of oscillation is the one with: A. the larger mass B. the smaller mass C. the larger rotational inertia D. the smaller rotational inertia E. the larger radius 236 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 54. The x and y coordinates of a point each execute simple harmonic motion. The result might be a circular orbit if: A. the amplitudes are the same but the frequencies are dierent B. the amplitudes and frequencies are both the same C. the amplitudes and frequencies are both dierent D. the phase constants are the same but the amplitudes are dierent E. the amplitudes and the phase constants are both dierent 55. The x and y coordinates of a point each execute simple harmonic motion. The frequencies are the same but the amplitudes are dierent. The resulting orbit might be: A. an ellipse B. a circle C. a parabola D. a hyperbola E. a square 56. For A. B. C. D. E. an oscillator subjected to a damping force proportional to its velocity: the displacement is a sinusoidal function of time. the velocity is a sinusoidal function of time. the frequency is a decreasing function of time. the mechanical energy is constant. none of the above is true. 57. Five particles undergo damped harmonic motion. Values for the spring constant k , the damping constant b, and the mass m are given below. Which leads to the smallest rate of loss of mechanical energy? A. k = 100 N/m, m = 50 g, b = 8 g/s B. k = 150 N/m, m = 50 g, b = 5 g/s C. k = 150 N/m, m = 10 g, b = 8 g/s D. k = 200 N/m, m = 8 g, b = 6 g/s E. k = 100 N/m, m = 2 g, b = 4 g/s 58. A sinusoidal force with a given amplitude is applied to an oscillator. To maintain the largest amplitude oscillation the frequency of the applied force should be: A. half the natural frequency of the oscillator B. the same as the natural frequency of the oscillator C. twice the natural frequency of the oscillator D. unrelated to the natural frequency of the oscillator E. determined from the maximum speed desired Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS 237 59. A sinusoidal force with a given amplitude is applied to an oscillator. At resonance the amplitude of the oscillation is limited by: A. the damping force B. the initial amplitude C. the initial velocity D. the force of gravity E. none of the above 60. An oscillator is subjected to a damping force that is proportional to its velocity. A sinusoidal force is applied to it. After a long time: A. its amplitude is an increasing function of time B. its amplitude is a decreasing function of time C. its amplitude is constant D. its amplitude is a decreasing function of time only if the damping constant is large E. its amplitude increases over some portions of a cycle and decreases over other portions 61. A block on a spring is subjected to a damping force that is proportional to its velocity and to an applied sinusoidal force. The energy dissipated by damping is supplied by: A. the potential energy of the spring B. the kinetic energy of the mass C. gravity D. friction E. the applied force 62. The table below gives the values of the spring constant k , damping constant b, and mass m for a particle in damped harmonic motion. Which of these takes the longest time for its mechanical energy to decrease to one-fourth of its initial value? k A B C D E 238 Chapter 15: OSCILLATIONS b m k0 3k0 k0 /2 4k0 k0 b0 2b0 6b0 b0 b0 m0 m0 2m0 2m0 10m0 Chapter 16: WAVES I 1. For a transverse wave on a string the string displacement is described by y (x, t) = f (x at), where f is a given function and a is a positive constant. Which of the following does NOT necessarily follow from this statement? A. The shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f (x). B. The shape of the waveform does not change as it moves along the string. C. The waveform moves in the positive x direction. D. The speed of the waveform is a. E. The speed of the waveform is x/t. 2. A sinusoidal wave is traveling toward the right as shown. Which letter correctly labels the amplitude of the wave? A E v .. ... .................. ...................... ...................... .. .. .. ......................... .... .... ..... | ...... ..... .... . . ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . .. .. ..... ..... B ..... ....... .... .... ...... ...... ...D ....... ..... ..... ............... .................. .................. | C 3. A sinusoidal wave is traveling toward the right as shown. Which letter correctly labels the wavelength of the wave? A E v .. ...... ........ ...................... ...................... .. .. ........ ............. ........ ............ .... .... .... | ... . . ..... ..... .... .... .... .... ..... .. .. .. B ..... ..... ..... ......... .... .... ...... ...... ...D ...... ...... ..... ............... | ................... ................... C Chapter 16: WAVES I 239 4. In the diagram below, the interval PQ represents: displacement ..................... ........ ...... ...... ..... .... ..... ..... . ... ..... ... .... ...... Q ......... .... P ... .................... ........... A. B. C. D. E. time wavelength/2 wavelength 2 amplitude period/2 period 5. Let f be the frequency, v the speed, and T the period of a sinusoidal traveling wave. The correct relationship is: A. f = 1/T B. f = v + T C. f = vT D. f = v/T E. f = T /v 6. Let f be the frequency, v the speed, and T the period of a sinusoidal traveling wave. The angular frequency is given by: A. 1/T B. 2 /T C. vT D. f /T E. T /f 7. The displacement of a string is given by y (x, t) = ym sin(kx + t) . The wavelength of the wave is: A. 2 k/ B. k/ C. k D. 2 /k E. k/2 240 Chapter 16: WAVES I 8. Three traveling sinusoidal waves are on identical strings, with the same tension. The mathematical forms of the waves are y1 (x, t) = ym sin(3x 6t), y2 (x, t) = ym sin(4x 8t), and y3 (x, t) = ym sin(6x 12t), where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Match each mathematical form to the appropriate graph below. y .. ...... .. ... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. x .. .. .. .. ... .... . .... . y . . ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . x .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. ... ... ii i A. B. C. D. E. y . . .... . ...... .. ... .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .x .. .. .. . ..... ... iii y1 : i, y2 : ii, y3 : iii y1 : iii, y2 : ii, y3 : i y1 : i, y2 : iii, y3 : ii y1 : ii, y2 : i, y3 : iii y1 : iii, y2 : i, y3 : ii 9. The displacement of a string is given by y (x, t) = ym sin(kx + t) . The speed of the wave is: A. 2 k/ B. /k C. k D. 2 /k E. k/2 10. A wave is described by y (x, t) = 0.1 sin(3x + 10t), where x is in meters, y is in centimeters, and t is in seconds. The angular wave number is: A. 0.10 rad/m B. 3 rad/m C. 10) rad/m D. 10 ) rad/m E. 3.0 rad/cm 11. A wave is described by y (x, t) = 0.1 sin(3x 10t), where x is in meters, y is in centimeters, and t is in seconds. The angular frequency is: A. 0.10 rad/s B. 3.0 rad/s C. 10 rad/s D. 20 rad/s E. (10 rad/s Chapter 16: WAVES I 241 12. Water waves in the sea are observed to have a wavelength of 300 m and a frequency of 0.07 Hz. The speed of these waves is: A. 0.00021 m/s B. 2.1 m/s C. 21 m/s D. 210 m/s E. none of these 13. Sinusoidal water waves are generated in a large ripple tank. The waves travel at 20 cm/s and their adjacent crests are 5.0 cm apart. The time required for each new whole cycle to be generated is: A. 100 s B. 4.0 s C. 2.0 s D. 0.5 s E. 0.25 s 14. A traveling sinusoidal wave is shown below. At which point is the motion 180 out of phase with the motion at point P? displacement .. . ...................... ...................... .. . ... ... . v A D ....................... ........................ ..... ..... ..... ..... . . .... .. ..... ..... . . . .... .... ..... ... C P .... E ... .................. B x 15. The displacement of a string carrying a traveling sinusoidal wave is given by y (x, t) = ym sin(kx t ) . At time t = 0 the point at x = 0 has a displacement of 0 and is moving in the positive y direction. The phase constant is: A. 45 B. 90 C. 135 D. 180 E. 270 242 Chapter 16: WAVES I 16. The displacement of a string carrying a traveling sinusoidal wave is given by y (x, t) = ym sin(kx t ) . At time t = 0 the point at x = 0 has a velocity of 0 and a positive displacement. The phase constant is: A. 45 B. 90 C. 135 D. 180 E. 270 17. The displacement of a string carrying a traveling sinusoidal wave is given by y (x, t) = ym sin(kx t ) . At time t = 0 the point at x = 0 has velocity v0 and displacement y0 . The phase constant is given by tan =: A. v0 / y0 B. y0 /v0 C. v0 /y0 D. y0 / v0 E. v0 y0 18. A sinusoidal transverse wave is traveling on a string. Any point on the string: A. moves in the same direction as the wave B. moves in simple harmonic motion with a dierent frequency than that of the wave C. moves in simple harmonic motion with the same angular frequency as the wave D. moves in uniform circular motion with a dierent angular speed than the wave E. moves in uniform circular motion with the same angular speed as the wave 19. Here are the equations for three waves traveling on separate strings. Rank them according to the maximum transverse speed, least to greatest. wave 1: y (x, t) = (2.0 mm) sin[(4.0 m1 )x (3.0 s1 )t] wave 2: y (x, t) = (1.0 mm) sin[(8.0 m1 )x (4.0 s1 )t] wave 3: y (x, t) = (1.0 mm) sin[(4.0 m1 )x (8.0 s1 )t] A. 1, 2, 3 B. 1, 3, 2 C. 2, 1, 3 D. 2, 3, 1 E. 3, 1, 2 Chapter 16: WAVES I 243 20. The transverse wave shown is traveling from left to right in a medium. The direction of the instantaneous velocity of the medium at point P is: ............ ...... ....... ........... ....... ..... ..... ..... .. .. .. .... .... ... ...... .... .... P ... ......................... ............ A. B. C. D. E. .. . ....................... ...................... ... .. . .. .. v no direction since v = 0 21. A wave traveling to the right on a stretched string is shown below. The direction of the instantaneous velocity of the point P on the string is: ... .. ....................... P ............................. ..................................................... v ...... ..... .... ... ... . ..... .... .. .... ..... ..... .... ..... ...... ..... ..... .. ....... .......................... ...... ..... ....... A. B. C. D. E. no direction since v = 0 22. Sinusoidal waves travel on ve dierent strings, all with the same tension. Four of the strings have the same linear mass density, but the fth has a dierent linear mass density. Use the mathematical forms of the waves, given below, to identify the string with the dierent linear mass density. In the expressions x and y are in centimeters and t is in seconds. A. y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(2x 4t) B. y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(4x 10t) C. y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(6x 12t) D. y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(8x 16t) E. y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(10x 20t) 23. Any point on a string carrying a sinusoidal wave is moving with its maximum speed when: A. the magnitude of its acceleration is a maximum B. the magnitude of its displacement is a maximum C. the magnitude of its displacement is a minimum D. the magnitude of its displacement is half the amplitude E. the magnitude of its displacement is one-fourth the amplitude 244 Chapter 16: WAVES I 24. The mathematical forms for three sinusoidal traveling waves are given by wave 1: y (x, t) = (2 cm) sin(3x 6t) wave 2: y (x, t) = (3 cm) sin(4x 12t) wave 3: y (x, t) = (4 cm) sin(5x 11t) where x is in meters and t is in seconds. Of these waves: A. wave 1 has the greatest wave speed and the greatest maximum transverse string speed B. wave 2 has the greatest wave speed and wave 1 has the greatest maximum transverse string speed C. wave 3 has the greatest wave speed and the greatest maximum transverse string speed D. wave 2 has the greatest wave speed and wave 3 has the greatest maximum transverse string speed E. wave 3 has the greatest wave speed and wave 2 has the greatest maximum transverse string speed 25. Suppose the maximum speed of a string carrying a sinusoidal wave is vs . When the displacement of a point on the string is half its maximum, the speed of the point is: A. vs /2 B. 2vs C. vs /4 D. s /4 3v 3vs /2 E. 26. A string carries a sinusoidal wave with an amplitude of 2.0 cm and a frequency of 100 Hz. The maximum speed of any point on the string is: A. 2.0 m/s B. 4.0 m/s C. 6.3 m/s D. 13 m/s E. unknown (not enough information is given) 27. A transverse traveling sinusoidal wave on a string has a frequency of 100 Hz, a wavelength of 0.040 m, and an amplitude of 2.0 mm. The maximum velocity in m/s of any point on the string is: A. 0.2 B. 1.3 C. 4 D. 15 E. 25 Chapter 16: WAVES I 245 28. A transverse traveling sinusoidal wave on a string has a frequency of 100 Hz, a wavelength of 0.040 m, and an amplitude of 2.0 mm. The maximum acceleration in m/s2 of any point on the string is: A. 0 B. 130 C. 395 D. 790 E. 1600 29. The speed of a sinusoidal wave on a string depends on: A. the frequency of the wave B. the wavelength of the wave C. the length of the string D. the tension in the string E. the amplitude of the wave 30. The time required for a small pulse to travel from A to B on a stretched cord shown is NOT altered by changing: A. the linear mass density of the cord B. the length between A and B C. the shape of the pulse D. the tension in the cord E. none of the above (changes in all alter the time) 31. The diagrams show three identical strings that have been put under tension by suspending blocks of 5 kg each. For which is the wave speed the greatest? . . .. ... . . . ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . . ... . . . ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. .. ... .... .. .. .. .. ..... .. . 1 A. B. C. D. E. 246 ... ..... .. .. . .. .. ..... .. WAVES I .. .. . .............. ... .. 2 1 2 3 1 and 3 tie 2 and 3 tie Chapter 16: . . .. .. . . . . ... . .. ... . .. .. . . .. ... . . ... . . . ... . .. ... . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . . ... . .. ... . .. .. . . .. ... . . ... . . . ... . .. ... . .. .. . . .. .. .. ..... .. .. . .. .... . .... .. ..... .. .. . .. .... . .... 3 32. For A. B. C. D. E. a given medium, the frequency of a wave is: independent of wavelength proportional to wavelength inversely proportional to wavelength proportional to the amplitude inversely proportional to the amplitude 33. The tension in a string with a linear mass density of 0.0010 kg/m is 0.40 N. A sinusoidal wave with a wavelength of 20 cm on this string has a frequency of: A. 0.0125 Hz B. 0.25 Hz C. 100 Hz D. 630 Hz E. 2000 Hz 34. When a 100-Hz oscillator is used to generate a sinusoidal wave on a certain string the wavelength is 10 cm. When the tension in the string is doubled the generator produces a wave with a frequency and wavelength of: A. 200 Hz and 20 cm B. 141 Hz and 10 cm C. 100 Hz and 20 cm D. 100 Hz and 14 cm E. 50 Hz and 14 cm 35. A source of frequency f sends waves of wavelength traveling with speed v in some medium. If the frequency is changed from f to 2f , then the new wavelength and new speed are (respectively): A. 2, v B. /2, v C. , 2v D. , v/2 E. /2, 2v 36. A long string is constructed by joining the ends of two shorter strings. The tension in the strings is the same but string I has 4 times the linear mass density of string II. When a sinusoidal wave passes from string I to string II: A. the frequency decreases by a factor of 4 B. the frequency decreases by a factor of 2 C. the wavelength decreases by a factor of 4 D. the wavelength decreases by a factor of 2 E. the wavelength increases by a factor of 2 Chapter 16: WAVES I 247 37. Three separate strings are made of the same material. String 1 has length L and tension , string 2 has length 2L and tension 2 , and string 3 has length 3L and tension 3 . A pulse is started at one end of each string. If the pulses start at the same time, the order in which they reach the other end is: A. 1, 2, 3 B. 3, 2, 1 C. 2, 3, 1 D. 3, 1, 2 E. they all take the same time 38. A long string is constructed by joining the ends of two shorter strings. The tension in the strings is the same but string I has 4 times the linear mass density of string II. When a sinusoidal wave passes from string I to string II: A. the frequency decreases by a factor of 4 B. the frequency decreases by a factor of 2 C. the wave speed decreases by a factor of 4 D. the wave speed decreases by a factor of 2 E. the wave speed increases by a factor of 2 39. Two identical but separate strings, with the same tension, carry sinusoidal waves with the same frequency. Wave A has a amplitude that is twice that of wave B and transmits energy at a that of wave B. rate that is A. half B. twice C. one-fourth D. four times E. eight times 40. Two identical but separate strings, with the same tension, carry sinusoidal waves with the same frequency. Wave A has an amplitude that is twice that of wave B and transmits energy at a that of wave B. rate that is A. half B. twice C. one-fourth D. four times E. eight times 248 Chapter 16: WAVES I 41. A sinusoidal wave is generated by moving the end of a string up and down periodically. The generator must supply the greatest power when the end of the string A. has its greatest acceleration B. has its greatest displacement C. has half its greatest displacement D. has one-fourth its greatest displacement E. has its least displacement 42. A sinusoidal wave is generated by moving the end of a string up and down periodically. The generator does not supply any power when the end of the string A. has its least acceleration B. has its greatest displacement C. has half its greatest displacement D. has one-fourth its greatest displacement E. has its least displacement 43. The sum of two sinusoidal traveling waves is a sinusoidal traveling wave only if: A. their amplitudes are the same and they travel in the same direction. B. their amplitudes are the same and they travel in opposite directions. C. their frequencies are the same and they travel in the same direction. D. their frequencies are the same and they travel in opposite directions. E. their frequencies are the same and their amplitudes are the same. 44. Two traveling sinusoidal waves interfere to produce a wave with the mathematical form y (x, t) = ym sin(kx + t + ) . If the value of is appropriately chosen, the two waves might be: A. y1 (x, t) = (ym /3) sin(kx + t) and y2 (x, t) = (ym /3) sin(kx + t + ) B. y1 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx t) and y2 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx t + ) C. y1 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx t) and y2 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx + t + ) D. y1 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin[(kx/2) ( t/2)] and y2 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin[(kx/2) ( t/2) + ] E. y1 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx + t) and y2 (x, t) = 0.7ym sin(kx + t + ) 45. Fully constructive interference between two sinusoidal waves of the same frequency occurs only if they: A. travel in opposite directions and are in phase B. travel in opposite directions and are 180 out of phase C. travel in the same direction and are in phase D. travel in the same direction and are 180 out of phase E. travel in the same direction and are 90 out of phase Chapter 16: WAVES I 249 46. Fully destructive interference between two sinusoidal waves of the same frequency and amplitude occurs only if they: A. travel in opposite directions and are in phase B. travel in opposite directions and are 180 out of phase C. travel in the same direction and are in phase D. travel in the same direction and are 180 out of phase E. travel in the same direction and are 90 out of phase 47. Two sinusoidal waves travel in the same direction and have the same frequency. Their amplitudes are y1m and y2m . The smallest possible amplitude of the resultant wave is: A. y1m + y2m and occurs if they are 180 out of phase B. |y1m y2m | and occurs if they are 180 out of phase C. y1m + y2m and occurs if they are in phase D. |y1m y2m | and occurs if they are in phase E. |y1m y2m | and occurs if they are 90 out of phase 48. Two sinusoidal waves have the same angular frequency, the same amplitude ym , and travel in the same direction in the same medium. If they dier in phase by 50 , the amplitude of the resultant wave is given by: A. 0.64ym B. 1.3ym C. 0.91ym D. 1.8ym E. 0.35ym 49. Two separated sources emit sinusoidal traveling waves that have the same wavelength and are in phase at their respective sources. One travels a distance 1 to get to the observation point while the other travels a distance 2 . The amplitude is a minimum at the observation point if 1 2 is: A. an odd multiple of /2 B. an odd multiple of /4 C. a multiple of D. an odd multiple of /2 E. a multiple of 250 Chapter 16: WAVES I 50. Two separated sources emit sinusoidal traveling waves that have the same wavelength and are in phase at their respective sources. One travels a distance 1 to get to the observation point while the other travels a distance 2 . The amplitude is a maximum at the observation point if 1 2 is: A. an odd multiple of /2 B. an odd multiple of /4 C. a multiple of D. an odd multiple of /2 E. a multiple of 51. Two sources, S1 and S2 , each emit waves of wavelength in the same medium. The phase dierence between the two waves, at the point P shown, is (2 /)( 2 1 ) + . The quantity is: . . ... .. S1 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... P . .. .. ... ..... ..... 1 ..... ..... . ... ..... ..... ..... . ... ..... ..... ..... ..... ... . ..... . ... ..... ..... ..... . ... ..... ..... ..... ..... ... . ..... 2 . ... ..... ..... ..... ... .... . ... ..... ..... ..... .. .... . ...... .. ..... ...... .. . ..... ...... S2 A. B. C. D. E. the distance S1 S2 the angle S1 PS2 /2 the phase dierence between the two sources zero for transverse waves, for longitudinal waves 52. A wave on a stretched string is reected from a xed end P of the string. The phase dierence, at P, between the incident and reected waves is: A. zero B. rad C. /2 rad D. depends on the velocity of the wave E. depends on the frequency of the wave 53. The sinusoidal wave y (x, t) = ym sin(kx t) is incident on the xed end of a string at x = L. The reected wave is given by: A. ym sin(kx + t) B. ym sin(kx + t) C. ym sin(kx + t kL) D. ym sin(kx + t 2kL) E. ym sin(kx + t + 2kL) Chapter 16: WAVES I 251 54. A wave on a string is reected from a xed end. The reected wave: A. is in phase with the original wave at the end B. is 180 out of phase with the original wave at the end C. has a larger amplitude than the original wave D. has a larger speed than the original wave E. cannot be transverse 55. A standing wave: A. can be constructed from two similar waves traveling in opposite directions B. must be transverse C. must be longitudinal D. has motionless points that are closer than half a wavelength E. has a wave velocity that diers by a factor of two from what it would be for a traveling wave 56. Which of the following represents a standing wave? A. y = (6.0 mm) sin[(3.0 m1 )x + (2.0 s1 )t] (6.0 mm) cos[(3.0 m1 )x + 2.0] B. y = (6.0 mm) cos[(3.0 m1 )x (2.0 s1 )t] + (6.0 mm) cos[(2.0 s1 )t + 3.0 m1 )x] C. y = (6.0 mm) cos[(3.0 m1 )x (2.0 s1 )t] (6.0 mm) sin[(2.0 s1 )t 3.0] D. y = (6.0 mm) sin[(3.0 m1 )x (2.0 s1 )t] (6.0 mm) cos[(2.0 s1 )t + 3.0 m1 )x] E. y = (6.0 mm) sin[(3.0 m1 )x] + (6.0 mm) cos[(2.0 s1 )t] 57. When a certain string is clamped at both ends, the lowest four resonant frequencies are 50, 100, 150, and 200 Hz. When the string is also clamped at its midpoint, the lowest four resonant frequencies are: A. 50, 100, 150, and 200 Hz B. 50, 150, 250, and 300 Hz C. 100, 200, 300, and 400 Hz D. 25, 50, 75, and 100 Hz E. 75, 150, 225, and 300 Hz 58. When a certain string is clamped at both ends, the lowest four resonant frequencies are measured to be 100, 150, 200, and 250 Hz. One of the resonant frequencies (below 200 Hz) is missing. What is it? A. 25 Hz B. 50 Hz C. 75 Hz D. 125 Hz E. 225 Hz 252 Chapter 16: WAVES I 59. Two traveling waves y1 = A sin[k (x vt)] and y2 = A sin[k (x + vt)] are superposed on the same string. The distance between the adjacent nodes is: A. vt/ B. vt/2 C. /2k D. /k E. 2 /k 60. If is the wavelength of each of the component sinusoidal traveling waves that form a standing wave, the distance between adjacent nodes in the standing wave is: A. /4 B. /2 C. 3/4 D. E. 2 61. A standing wave pattern is established in a string as shown. The wavelength of one of the component traveling waves is: . .. .. ... . ... ... . .. ... . .. ... . . ... . . .. ... . ... ... . .. ... . .. ... . . ... . . . .. .. .. . ... ... . ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... . ... ... .. . ............ ............ ............ ..... ......... ....... .......... ....... ......... | .... .... ... .... .... .... .. . .. .. ... ... 0.5 m ......... . .......... .... .. ...... .. ... .... ...... ...... .. .. ......... ......... .................... ......|..... . .. 6m A. B. C. D. E. 0.25 m 0.5 m 1m 2m 4m 62. Standing waves are produced by the interference of two traveling sinusoidal waves, each of frequency 100 Hz. The distance from the second node to the fth node is 60 cm. The wavelength of each of the two original waves is: A. 50 cm B. 40 cm C. 30 cm D. 20 cm E. 15 cm Chapter 16: WAVES I 253 63. A string of length 100 cm is held xed at both ends and vibrates in a standing wave pattern. The wavelengths of the constituent traveling waves CANNOT be: A. 400 cm B. 200 cm C. 100 cm D. 66.7 cm E. 50 cm 64. A string of length L is clamped at each end and vibrates in a standing wave pattern. The wavelengths of the constituent traveling waves CANNOT be: A. L B. 2L C. L/2 D. 2L/3 E. 4L 65. Two sinusoidal waves, each of wavelength 5 m and amplitude 10 cm, travel in opposite directions on a 20-m long stretched string that is clamped at each end. Excluding the nodes at the ends of the string, how many nodes appear in the resulting standing wave? A. 3 B. 4 C. 5 D. 7 E. 8 66. A string, clamped at its ends, vibrates in three segments. The string is 100 cm long. The wavelength is: A. 33.3 cm B. 66.7 cm C. 150 cm D. 300 cm E. need to know the frequency 67. A stretched string, clamped at its ends, vibrates in its fundamental frequency. To double the fundamental frequency, one can change the string tension by a factor of: A. 2 B. 4 2 C. D. 1/ 2 E. 1/ 2 254 Chapter 16: WAVES I 68. When a string is vibrating in a standing wave pattern the power transmitted across an antinode, compared to the power transmitted across a node, is: A. more B. less C. the same (zero) D. the same (non-zero) E. sometimes more, sometimes less, and sometimes the same 69. A 40-cm long string, with one end clamped and the other free to move transversely, is vibrating in its fundamental standing wave mode. The wavelength of the constituent traveling waves is: A. 10 cm B. 20 cm C. 40 cm D. 80 cm E. 160 cm 70. A 30-cm long string, with one end clamped and the other free to move transversely, is vibrating in its second harmonic. The wavelength of the constituent traveling waves is: A. 10 cm B. 30 cm C. 40 cm D. 60 cm E. 120 cm 71. A 40-cm long string, with one end clamped and the other free to move transversely, is vibrating in its fundamental standing wave mode. If the wave speed is 320 cm/s the frequency is: A. 32 Hz B. 16 Hz C. 8 Hz D. 4 Hz E. 2 Hz Chapter 16: WAVES I 255 Chapter 17: WAVES II 1. The speed of a sound wave is determined by: A. its amplitude B. its intensity C. its pitch D. number of harmonics present E. the transmitting medium 2. Take the speed of sound to be 340 m/s. A thunder clap is heard about 3 s after the lightning is seen. The source of both light and sound is: A. moving overhead faster than the speed of sound B. emitting a much higher frequency than is heard C. emitting a much lower frequency than is heard D. about 1000 m away E. much more than 1000 m away 3. A sound wave has a wavelength of 3.0 m. The distance from a compression center to the adjacent rarefaction center is: A. 0.75 m B. 1.5 m C. 3.0 m D. need to know wave speed E. need to know frequency 4. A re whistle emits a tone of 170 Hz. Take the speed of sound in air to be 340 m/s. The wavelength of this sound is about: A. 0.5 m B. 1.0 m C. 2.0 m D. 3.0 m E. 340 m 5. During a time interval of exactly one period of vibration of a tuning fork, the emitted sound travels a distance: A. equal to the length of the tuning fork B. equal to twice the length of the tuning fork C. of about 330 m D. which decreases with time E. of one wavelength in air 256 Chapter 17: WAVES II 6. At A. B. C. D. E. points in a sound wave where the gas is maximally compressed, the pressure is a maximum is a minimum is equal to the ambient value is greater than the ambient value but less than the maximum is less than the ambient value but greater than the minimum 7. You are listening to an A note played on a violin string. Let the subscript s refer to the violin string and a refer to the air. Then: A. fs = fa but s = a B. fs = fa and s = a C. s = a but fs = fa D. s = a and fs = fa E. linear density of string = volume density of air 8. Beats in sound refer to: A. interference of two waves of the same frequency B. combination of two waves of slightly dierent frequency C. reversal of phase of reected wave relative to incident wave D. two media having slightly dierent sound velocities E. eect of relative motion of source and observer 9. To A. B. C. D. E. produce beats it is necessary to use two waves: traveling in opposite directions of slightly dierent frequencies of equal wavelengths of equal amplitudes whose ratio of frequencies is an integer 10. In order for two sound waves to produce audible beats, it is essential that the two waves have: A. the same amplitude B. the same frequency C. the same number of harmonics D. slightly dierent amplitudes E. slightly dierent frequencies Chapter 17: WAVES II 257 11. The largest number of beats per second will be heard from which pair of tuning forks? A. 200 and 201 Hz B. 256 and 260 Hz C. 534 and 540 Hz D. 763 and 774 Hz E. 8420 and 8422 Hz 12. Two stationary tuning forks (350 and 352 Hz) are struck simultaneously. The resulting sound is observed to: A. beat with a frequency of 2 beats/s B. beat with a frequency of 351 beats/s C. be loud but not beat D. be Doppler shifted by 2 Hz E. have a frequency of 702 Hz 13. When listening to tuning forks of frequency 256 Hz and 260 Hz, one hears the following number of beats per second: A. zero B. 2 C. 4 D. 8 E. 258 14. Two identical tuning forks vibrate at 256 Hz. One of them is then loaded with a drop of wax, after which 6 beats/s are heard. The period of the loaded tuning fork is: A. 0.006 s B. 0.005 s C. 0.004 s D. 0.003 s E. none of these 15. Which of the following properties of a sound wave determine its pitch? A. Amplitude B. Distance from source to detector C. Frequency D. Phase E. Speed 258 Chapter 17: WAVES II 16. Two notes are an octave apart. The ratio of their frequencies is: A. 8 B. 10 8 C. D. 2 2 E. 17. Consider two imaginary spherical surfaces with dierent radii, each centered on a point sound source emitting spherical waves. The power transmitted across the larger sphere is the power transmitted across the smaller and the intensity at a point on the larger sphere is the intensity at a point on the smaller. A. greater than, the same as B. greater than, greater than C. greater than, less than D. the same as, less than E. the same as, the same as 2 18. The sound intensity 5.0 m from a point source is 0.50 W/m . The power output of the source is: A. 39 W B. 160 W C. 266 W D. 320 W E. 390 W 19. The standard reference sound level is about: A. the threshold of human hearing at 1000 Hz B. the threshold of pain for human hearing at 1000 Hz C. the level of sound produced when the 1 kg standard mass is dropped 1 m onto a concrete oor D. the level of normal conversation E. the level of sound emitted by a standard 60 Hz tuning fork 20. The intensity of sound wave A is 100 times that of sound wave B. Relative to wave B the sound level of wave A is: A. 2 db B. +2 db C. +10 db D. +20 db E. +100 db Chapter 17: WAVES II 259 2 21. The intensity of a certain sound wave is 6 W/cm . If its intensity is raised by 10 db, the new intensity (in W/cm2 ) is: A. 60 B. 6.6 C. 6.06 D. 600 E. 12 22. If the sound level is increased by 10 db the intensity increases by a factor of: A. 2 B. 5 C. 10 D. 20 E. 100 23. The sound level at a point P is 14 db below the sound level at a point 1.0 m from a point source. The distance from the source to point P is: A. 4.0 cm B. 20 2m C. 2.0 m D. 5.0 m E. 25 m 24. To A. B. C. D. E. raise the pitch of a certain piano string, the piano tuner: loosens the string tightens the string shortens the string lengthens the string removes some mass 25. A piano wire has length L and mass M . If its fundamental frequency is f , its tension is: A. 2Lf /m B. 4M Lf C. 2M f 2 /L D. 4f 2 L3 /M E. 4LM f 2 260 Chapter 17: WAVES II 26. If the length of a piano wire (of given density) is increased by 5%, what approximate change in tension is necessary to keep its fundamental frequency unchanged? A. Decrease of 10% B. Decrease of 5% C. Increase of 5% D. Increase of 10% E. Increase of 20% 27. A piano wire has a length of 81 cm and a mass of 2.0 g. If its fundamental frequency is to be 394 Hz, its tension must be: A. 0.32 N B. 63 N C. 130 N D. 250 N E. none of these 28. A stretched wire of length 1.0 m is clamped at both ends. It is plucked at its center as shown. The three longest wavelengths in the wire are (in meters): . . .. ... . ... ... . . .. .. . ... ... .. ... . .. ... . . .. ... . . .. .. . ... ... .. ... . .. .. .. .. . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... .. ... .. .. . ............................................. ................... ................... ................. .................. .. ... .................. A. B. C. D. E. 4, 2, 1 2, 1, 0.5 2, 0.67, 0.4 1, 0.5, 0.33 1, 0.67, 0.5 29. Two identical strings, A and B, have nearly the same tension. When they both vibrate in their fundamental resonant modes, there is a beat frequency of 3 Hz. When string B is tightened slightly, to increase the tension, the beat frequency becomes 6 Hz. This means: A. that before tightening A had a higher frequency than B, but after tightening, B has a higher frequency than A B. that before tightening B had a higher frequency than A, but after tightening, A has a higher frequency than B C. that before and after tightening A has a higher frequency than B D. that before and after tightening B has a higher frequency than A E. none of the above Chapter 17: WAVES II 261 30. Two pipes are each open at one end and closed at the other. Pipe A has length L and pipe B has length 2L. Which harmonic of pipe B matches in frequency the fundamental of pipe A? A. The fundamental B. The second C. The third D. The fourth E. There are none 31. A column of argon is open at one end and closed at the other. The shortest length of such a column that will resonate with a 200 Hz tuning fork is 42.5 cm. The speed of sound in argon must be: A. 85.0 m/s B. 170 m/s C. 340 m/s D. 470 m/s E. 940 m/s 32. A tuning fork produces sound waves of wavelength in air. This sound is used to cause resonance in an air column, closed at one end and open at the other. The length of this column CANNOT be: A. /4 B. 2/4 C. 3/4 D. 5/4 E. 7/4 33. A 1024 Hz tuning fork is used to obtain a series of resonance levels in a gas column of variable length, with one end closed and the other open. The length of the column changes by 20 cm from resonance to resonance. From this data, the speed of sound in this gas is: A. 20 cm/s B. 51 cm/s C. 102 cm/s D. 205 m/s E. 410 m/s 34. A vibrating tuning fork is held over a water column with one end closed and the other open. As the water level is allowed to fall, a loud sound is heard for water levels separated by 17 cm. If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s, the frequency of the tuning fork is: A. 500 Hz B. 1000 Hz C. 2000 Hz D. 5780 Hz E. 578, 000 Hz 262 Chapter 17: WAVES II 35. An organ pipe with one end open and the other closed is operating at one of its resonant frequencies. The open and closed ends are respectively: A. pressure node, pressure node B. pressure node, displacement node C. displacement antinode, pressure node D. displacement node, displacement node E. pressure antinode, pressure node 36. An organ pipe with one end closed and the other open has length L. Its fundamental frequency is proportional to: A. L B. 1/L C. 1/L2 D. 2 L E. L 37. Five organ pipes are described below. Which one has the highest frequency fundamental? A. A 2.3-m pipe with one end open and the other closed B. A 3.3-m pipe with one end open and the other closed C. A 1.6-m pipe with both ends open D. A 3.0-m pipe with both ends open E. A pipe in which the displacement nodes are 5 m apart 38. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the length of the shortest closed pipe that resonates at 218 Hz is: A. 23 cm B. 17 cm C. 39 cm D. 78 cm E. 1.56 cm 39. The lowest tone produced by a certain organ comes from a 3.0-m pipe with both ends open. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the frequency of this tone is approximately: A. 7 Hz B. 14 Hz C. 28 Hz D. 57 Hz E. 70 Hz Chapter 17: WAVES II 263 40. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. The length of the shortest pipe, closed at one end, that will respond to a 512 Hz tuning fork is approximately: A. 4.2 cm B. 9.4 cm C. 17 cm D. 33 cm E. 66 cm 41. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the two lowest frequencies of an 0.5-m organ pipe, closed at one end, are approximately: A. 170 and 340 Hz B. 170 and 510 Hz C. 340 and 680 Hz D. 340 and 1020 Hz E. 57 and 170 Hz 42. Organ pipe Y (open at both ends) is half as long as organ pipe X (open at one end) as shown. The ratio of their fundamental frequencies fX :fY is: X Y A. B. C. D. E. 1:1 1:2 2:1 1:4 4:1 43. A 200-cm organ pipe with one end open is in resonance with a sound wave of wavelength 270 cm. The pipe is operating in its: A. fundamental frequency B. second harmonic C. third harmonic D. fourth harmonic E. fth harmonic 264 Chapter 17: WAVES II 44. An organ pipe with both ends open is 0.85 m long. Assuming that the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the frequency of the third harmonic of this pipe is: A. 200 Hz B. 300 Hz C. 400 Hz D. 600 Hz E. none of these 45. The A on a trumpet and a clarinet have the same pitch, but the two are clearly distinguishable. Which property is most important in enabling one to distinguish between these two instruments? A. Intensity B. Fundamental frequency C. Displacement amplitude D. Pressure amplitude E. Harmonic content 46. The valves of a trumpet and the slide of a trombone are for the purpose of: A. playing short (staccato) notes B. tuning the instruments C. changing the harmonic content D. changing the length of the air column E. producing gradations in loudness 47. Two small identical speakers are connected (in phase) to the same source. The speakers are 3 m apart and at ear level. An observer stands at X, 4 m in front of one speaker as shown. If the amplitudes are not changed, the sound he hears will be most intense if the wavelength is: | | 3m | | ... .............. .................. .... ... ...................... ... ... .... ...... . . .... ..... . . ............ . . . . ............. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . ...... . ........... ....... . .. . ....... . .. ...... ..... .. . ....... speakers ... .............. .................. .... ... ...................... ... ... .... ...... . . .... ..... . . ............ . . . . ............. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . ...... . ........... ....... . .. . ....... . .. ...... ..... .. . ....... X 4m A. B. C. D. E. 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m Chapter 17: WAVES II 265 48. Two small identical speakers are connected (in phase) to the same source. The speakers are 3 m apart and at ear level. An observer stands at X, 4 m in front of one speaker as shown. The sound she hears will be most intense if the wavelength is: | | 3m | | ... ... ............... ... ......................... ... .................. ... .... ... ...... . .. ..... ..... . . ............. . . . .............. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . ....... . . ........... . ....... . .. ...... ....... . . ...... .... .. . speakers ... ... ............... ... ......................... ... .................. ... .... ... ...... . .. ..... ..... . . ............. . . . .............. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . ....... . . ........... . ....... . .. ...... ....... . . ...... .... . .. X 4m A. B. C. D. E. 5m 4m 3m 2m 1m 49. The rise in pitch of an approaching siren is an apparent increase in its: A. speed B. amplitude C. frequency D. wavelength E. number of harmonics 50. The diagram shows four situations in which a source of sound S with variable frequency and a detector D are either moving or stationary. The arrows indicate the directions of motion. The speeds are all the same. Detector 3 is stationary. The frequency detected is the same. Rank the situations according to the frequency of the source, lowest to highest. .......... ..... .... .. ... ... .. .. . ........................ D S . .......... ......... . ... ... .. 1 A. B. C. D. E. 266 .......... ..... .... .. ... ... .. D 2 1, 2, 3, 4 4, 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 4, 2 2, 1, 2, 3 None of the above Chapter 17: S WAVES II .. . ........................ S D 3 .. . . . ........................ ........................... S D 4 51. A stationary source generates 5.0 Hz water waves whose speed is 2.0 m/s. A boat is approaching the source at 10 m/s. The frequency of these waves, as observed by a person in the boat, is: A. 5.0 Hz B. 15 Hz C. 20 Hz D. 25 Hz E. 30 Hz 52. A stationary source S generates circular outgoing waves on a lake. The wave speed is 5.0 m/s and the crest-to-crest distance is 2.0 m. A person in a motor boat heads directly toward S at 3.0 m/s. To this person, the frequency of these waves is: A. 1.0 Hz B. 1.5 Hz C. 2.0 Hz D. 4.0 Hz E. 8.0 Hz 53. A stationary source emits a sound wave of frequency f . If it were possible for a man to travel toward the source at the speed of sound, he would observe the emitted sound to have a frequency of: A. zero B. f /2 C. 2f /3 D. 2f E. innity 54. A source emits sound with a frequency of 1000 Hz. It and an observer are moving in the same direction with the same speed, 100 m/s. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the observer hears sound with a frequency of: A. 294 Hz B. 545 Hz C. 1000 Hz D. 1830 Hz E. 3400 Hz 55. A source emits sound with a frequency of 1000 Hz. It and an observer are moving toward each other, each with a speed of 100 m/s. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s, the observer hears sound with a frequency of: A. 294 Hz B. 545 Hz C. 1000 Hz D. 1830 Hz E. 3400 Hz Chapter 17: WAVES II 267 56. A source emits sound with a frequency of 1000 Hz. It is moving at 20 m/s toward a stationary reecting wall. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s an observer at rest directly behind the source hears a beat frequency of: A. 11 Hz B. 86 Hz C. 97 Hz D. 118 Hz E. 183 Hz 57. In each of the following two situations a source emits sound with a frequency of 1000 Hz. In situation I the source is moving at 100 m/s toward an observer at rest. In situation II the observer is moving at 100 m/s toward the source, which is stationary. The speed of sound is 340 m/s. The frequencies heard by the observers in the two situations are: A. I: 1417 Hz; II: 1294 Hz B. I: 1417 Hz; II: 1417 Hz C. I: 1294 Hz; II: 1294 Hz D. I: 773 Hz; II: 706 Hz E. I: 773 Hz; II: 773 Hz 58. The Doppler shift formula for the frequency detected is f =f v vD , v vS where f is the frequency emitted, v is the speed of sound, vD is the speed of the detector, and vS is the speed of the source. Suppose the source is traveling at 5 m/s away from the detector, the detector is traveling at 7 m/s toward the source, and there is a 3-m/s wind blowing from the source toward the detector. The values that should be substituted into the Doppler shift equation are: A. vD = 7 m/s and vS = 5 m/s B. vD = 10 m/s and vS = 8 m/s C. vD = 4 m/s and vS = 2 m/s D. vD = 10 m/s and vS = 2 m/s E. vD = 4 m/s and vS = 8 m/s 59. A plane produces a sonic boom only when: A. it emits sound waves of very long wavelength B. it emits sound waves of high frequency C. it ys at high altitudes D. it ys on a curved path E. it ys faster than the speed of sound 268 Chapter 17: WAVES II 60. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s a plane ying at 400 m/s creates a conical shock wave with an apex half angle of: A. 0 (no shock wave) B. 32 C. 40 D. 50 E. 58 61. The speed of sound is 340 m/s. A plane ys horizontally at an altitude of 10, 000 m and a speed of 400 m/s. When an observer on the ground hears the sonic boom the horizontal distance from the point on its path directly above the observer to the plane is: A. 5800 m B. 6200 m C. 8400 m D. 12, 000 m E. 16, 000 m Chapter 17: WAVES II 269 Chapter 19: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 1. If two objects are in thermal equilibrium with each other: A. they cannot be moving B. they cannot be undergoing an elastic collision C. they cannot have dierent pressures D. they cannot be at dierent temperatures E. they cannot be falling in Earths gravitational eld 2. When two gases separated by a diathermal wall are in thermal equilibrium with each other: A. only their pressures must be the same B. only their volumes must be the same C. they must have the same number of particles D. they must have the same pressure and the same volume E. only their temperatures must be the same 3. A balloon is lled with cold air and placed in a warm room. It is NOT in thermal equilibrium with the air of the room until: A. it rises to the ceiling B. it sinks to the oor C. it stops expanding D. it starts to contract E. none of the above 4. Suppose object C is in thermal equilibrium with object A and with object B. The zeroth law of thermodynamics states: A. that C will always be in thermal equilibrium with both A and B B. that C must transfer energy to both A and B C. that A is in thermal equilibrium with B D. that A cannot be in thermal equilibrium with B E. nothing about the relationship between A and B 5. The zeroth law of thermodynamics allows us to dene: A. work B. pressure C. temperature D. thermal equilibrium E. internal energy 270 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 6. If the zeroth law of thermodynamics were not valid, which of the following could not be considered a property of an object? A. Pressure B. Center of mass energy C. Internal energy D. Momentum E. Temperature 7. The international standard thermometer is kept: A. near Washington, D.C. B. near Paris, France C. near the north pole D. near Rome, Italy E. nowhere (there is none) 8. In constructing a thermometer it is NECESSARY to use a substance that: A. expands with rising temperature B. expands linearly with rising temperature C. will not freeze D. will not boil E. undergoes some change when heated or cooled 9. The triple point of a substance is that point for which the temperature and pressure are such that: A. only solid and liquid are in equilibrium B. only liquid and vapor are in equilibrium C. only solid and vapor are in equilibrium D. solid, liquid, and vapor are all in equilibrium E. the temperature, pressure and density are all numerically equal 10. Constant-volume gas thermometers using dierent gases all indicate nearly the same temperature when in contact with the same object if: A. the volumes are all extremely large B. the volumes are all the same D. the pressures are all extremely large C. the pressures are the same E. the particle concentrations are all extremely small Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 271 11. A constant-volume gas thermometer is used to measure the temperature of an object. When the thermometer is in contact with water at its triple point (273.16 K) the pressure in the thermometer is 8.500 104 Pa. When it is in contact with the object the pressure is 9.650 104 Pa. The temperature of the object is: A. 37.0 K B. 241 K C. 310 K D. 314 K E. 2020 K 12. When a certain constant-volume gas thermometer is in thermal contact with water at its triple point (273.16 K) the pressure is 6.30 104 Pa. For this thermometer a kelvin corresponds to a change in pressure of about: A. 4.34 102 Pa B. 2.31 102 Pa C. 1.72 103 Pa D. 2.31 103 Pa E. 1.72 107 Pa 13. The diagram shows four thermometers, labeled W, X, Y, and Z. The freezing and boiling points of water are indicated. Rank the thermometers according to the size of a degree on their scales, smallest to largest. 100 175 75 0 45 55 35 W A. B. C. D. E. 125 X Y boiling point Z freezing point W, X, Y, Z Z, Y, X, W Z, Y, W, X Z, X, W, Y W, Y, Z, X 14. There is a temperature at which the reading on the Kelvin scale is numerically: A. equal to that on the Celsius scale B. lower than that on the Celsius scale C. equal to that on the Fahrenheit scale D. less than zero E. none of the above 272 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 15. Fahrenheit and Kelvin scales agree numerically at a reading of: A. -40 B. 0 C. 273 D. 301 E. 574 16. Which one of the following statements is true? A. Temperatures diering by 25 on the Fahrenheit scale must dier by 45 on the Celsius scale B. 40 K corresponds to 40 C C. Temperatures which dier by 10 on the Celsius scale must dier by 18 on the Fahrenheit scale D. Water at 90 C is warmer than water at 202 F E. 0 F corresponds to 32 C 17. A Kelvin thermometer and a Fahrenheit thermometer both give the same reading for a certain sample. The corresponding Celsius temperature is: A. 574 C B. 232 C C. 301 C D. 614 C E. 276 C 18. Room temperature is about 20 degrees on the: A. Kelvin scale B. Celsius scale C. Fahrenheit scale D. absolute scale E. C major scale 19. A thermometer indicates 98.6 C. It may be: A. outdoors on a cold day B. in a comfortable room C. in a cup of hot tea D. in a normal persons mouth E. in liquid air Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 273 20. The air temperature on a summer day might be about: A. 0 C B. 10 C C. 25 C D. 80 C E. 125 C 21. The two metallic strips that constitute some thermostats must dier in: A. length B. thickness C. mass D. rate at which they conduct heat E. coecient of linear expansion 22. Thin strips of iron and zinc are riveted together to form a bimetallic strip that bends when heated. The iron is on the inside of the bend because: A. it has a higher coecient of linear expansion B. it has a lower coecient of linear expansion C. it has a higher specic heat D. it has a lower specic heat E. it conducts heat better 23. It is more dicult to measure the coecient of volume expansion of a liquid than that of a solid because: A. no relation exists between linear and volume expansion coecients B. a liquid tends to evaporate C. a liquid expands too much when heated D. a liquid expands too little when heated E. the containing vessel also expands 24. A surveyors 30-m steel tape is correct at 68 F. On a hot day the tape has expanded to 30.01 m. On that day, the tape indicates a distance of 15.52 m between two points. The true distance between these points is: A. 15.50 m B. 15.51 m C. 15.52 m D. 15.53 m E. 15.54 m 274 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 25. The gure shows a rectangular brass plate at 0 C in which there is cut a rectangular hole of dimensions indicated. If the temperature of the plate is raised to 150 C: ............................................................... ............................................................... ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... .. ............................................................... ............................................................... ... ... x A. B. C. D. E. z | y | x will increase and y will decrease both x and y will decrease x will decrease and y will increase both x and y will increase the changes in x and y depend on the dimension z 26. The Stanford linear accelerator contains hundreds of brass disks tightly tted into a steel tube (see gure). The coecient of linear expansion of the brass is 2.00 105 per C . The system was assembled by cooling the disks in dry ice (57 C) to enable them to just slide into the close-tting tube. If the diameter of a disk is 80.00 mm at 43 C, what is its diameter in the dry ice? ............... . . ............... .. brass disk .. .. . . ... . .. . . ... ..... ... ........................................................................................................................................................... .. ..... . . ... .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .... ... .... ... ... .. . ................................................................................................................................................. . .. .... . .. .. ..... .... steel tube A. B. C. D. E. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .................... ................... . 78.40 mm 79.68 mm 80.16 mm 79.84 mm None of these 27. When the temperature of a copper penny is increased by 100 C, its diameter increases by 0.17%. The area of one of its faces increases by: A. 0.17% B. 0.34% C. 0.51% D. 0.13% E. 0.27% Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 275 28. An annular ring of aluminum is cut from an aluminum sheet as shown. When this ring is heated: ..... ........... . . . . .. ............................................................. ........ . .... .... . . ......... . ...... ... ... . . ................ . ...... . .......... ...... . ... . ... ... ... .... .... .. ...... ..... ..... .................... .... . .. . .. .. . . .. .. ... .. .... .. .... . .. ... .. . .. .. . . .. ......... . .. .... .... ......... ..... .. . ... . .. ... .. . . .. .... ..... .. ... . .... . .. . ... . .. .. .. . . ... . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .... . .. .. . ... . .. . . .... . .. ...... ... . ... . .... . .. . . . .... ......... ... .... .. ...... . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .... .. . .. .. . ........ .. . .... .. . . .. .. . . ............................. ............................. .. .. ... ... . . ... . ... ............. ... ...... ...................................................... .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . ... . ..... . . . . .... ...... ................... . ............ A. B. C. D. E. the aluminum expands outward and the hole remains the same in size the hole decreases in diameter the area of the hole expands the same percent as any area of the aluminum the area of the hole expands a greater percent than any area of the aluminum linear expansion forces the shape of the hole to be slightly elliptical 29. Possible units for the coecient of volume expansion are: A. mm/C B. mm3 /C C. (C )3 D. 1/(C )3 E. 1/C 30. The mercury column in an ordinary medical thermometer doubles in length when its temperature changes from 95 F to 105 F. Choose the correct statement: A. the coecient of volume expansion of mercury is 0.1 per F B. the coecient of volume expansion of mercury is 0.3 per F C. the coecient of volume expansion of mercury is (0.1/3) per F D. the vacuum above the column helps to pull up the mercury this large amount E. none of the above is true 31. The coecient of linear expansion of iron is 1.0 105 per C . The surface area of an iron cube, with an edge length of 5.0 cm, will increase by what amount if it is heated from 10 C to 60 C? A. 0.0125 cm2 B. 0.025 cm2 C. 0.075 cm2 D. 0.15 cm2 E. 0.30 cm2 276 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 32. The diagram shows four rectangular plates and their dimensions. All are made of the same material. The temperature now increases. Of these plates: L 2L L L 1 A. the vertical most B. the vertical most C. the vertical most D. the vertical most E. the vertical most 3L 2L 2L L 2 3 4 dimension of plate 1 increases the most and the area of plate 1 increases the dimension of plate 2 increases the most and the area of plate 4 increases the dimension of plate 3 increases the most and the area of plate 1 increases the dimension of plate 4 increases the most and the area of plate 3 increases the dimension of plate 4 increases the most and the area of plate 4 increases the 33. The coecient of linear expansion of steel is 11 106 per C . A steel ball has a volume of exactly 100 cm3 at 0 C. When heated to 100 C, its volume becomes: A. 100.33 cm3 B. 100.0011 cm3 C. 100.0033 cm3 D. 100.000011 cm3 E. none of these 34. The coecient of linear expansion of a certain steel is 0.000012 per C . The coecient of volume expansion, in (C )1 , is: A. (0.000012)3 B. (4 /3)(0.000012)3 C. 3 0.000012 D. 0.000012 E. depends on the shape of the volume to which it will be applied 35. Metal pipes, used to carry water, sometimes burst in the winter because: A. metal contracts more than water B. outside of the pipe contracts more than the inside C. metal becomes brittle when cold D. ice expands when it melts E. water expands when it freezes Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 277 36. A gram of distilled water at 4 C: A. will increase slightly in weight when heated to 6 C B. will decrease slightly in weight when heated to 6 C C. will increase slightly in volume when heated to 6 C D. will decrease slightly in volume when heated to 6 C E. will not change in either volume or weight 37. Heat is: A. energy transferred by virtue of a temperature dierence B. energy transferred by macroscopic work C. energy content of an object D. a temperature dierence E. a property objects have by virtue of their temperatures 38. Heat has the same units as: A. temperature B. work C. energy/time D. heat capacity E. energy/volume 39. A calorie is about: A. 0.24 J B. 8.3 J C. 250 J D. 4.2 J E. 4200 J 40. The heat capacity of an object is: A. the amount of heat energy that raises its temperature by 1 C B. the amount of heat energy that changes its state without changing its temperature C. the amount of heat energy per kilogram that raises its temperature by 1 C D. the ratio of its specic heat to that of water E. the change in its temperature caused by adding 1 J of heat 278 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 41. The specic heat of a substance is: A. the amount of heat energy to change the state of one gram of the substance B. the amount of heat energy per unit mass emitted by oxidizing the substance C. the amount of heat energy per unit mass to raise the substance from its freezing to its boiling point D. the amount of heat energy per unit mass to raise the temperature of the substance by 1 C E. the temperature of the object divided by its mass 42. Two dierent samples have the same mass and temperature. Equal quantities of energy are absorbed as heat by each. Their nal temperatures may be dierent because the samples have dierent: A. thermal conductivities B. coecients of expansion C. densities D. volumes E. heat capacities 43. The same energy Q enters ve dierent substances as heat. The temperature of 3 g of substance A increases by 10 K The temperature of 4 g of substance B increases by 4 K The temperature of 6 g of substance C increases by 15 K The temperature of 8 g of substance D increases by 6 K The temperature of 10 g of substance E increases by 10 K Which substance has the greatest specic heat? 44. For constant-volume processes the heat capacity of gas A is greater than the heat capacity of gas B. We conclude that when they both absorb the same energy as heat at constant volume: A. the temperature of A increases more than the temperature of B B. the temperature of B increases more than the temperature of A C. the internal energy of A increases more than the internal energy of B D. the internal energy of B increases more than the internal energy of A E. A does more positive work than B 45. The heat capacity at constant volume and the heat capacity at constant pressure have dierent values because: A. heat increases the temperature at constant volume but not at constant pressure B. heat increases the temperature at constant pressure but not at constant volume C. the system does work at constant volume but not at constant pressure D. the system does work at constant pressure but not at constant volume E. the system does more work at constant volume than at constant pressure Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 279 46. A cube of aluminum has an edge length of 20 cm. Aluminum has a density 2.7 times that of 3 water (1 g/cm ) and a specic heat 0.217 times that of water (1 cal/g C ). When the internal energy of the cube increases by 47000 cal its temperature increases by: A. 5 C B. 10 C C. 20 C D. 100 C E. 200 C 47. An insulated container, lled with water, contains a thermometer and a paddle wheel. The paddle wheel can be rotated by an external source. This apparatus can be used to determine: A. specic heat of water B. relation between kinetic energy and absolute temperature C. thermal conductivity of water D. eciency of changing work into heat E. mechanical equivalent of heat 48. Take the mechanical equivalent of heat as 4 J/cal. A 10-g bullet moving at 2000 m/s plunges into 1 kg of paran wax (specic heat 0.7 cal/g C ). The wax was initially at 20 C. Assuming that all the bullets energy heats the wax, its nal temperature (in C) is: A. 20.14 B. 23.5 C. 20.006 D. 27.1 E. 30.23 49. The energy given o as heat by 300 g of an alloy as it cools through 50 C raises the temperature of 300 g of water from 30 C to 40 C. The specic heat of the alloy (in cal/g C ) is: A. 0.015 B. 0.10 C. 0.15 D. 0.20 E. 0.50 50. The specic heat of lead is 0.030 cal/g C . 300 g of lead shot at 100 C is mixed with 100 g of water at 70 C in an insulated container. The nal temperature of the mixture is: A. 100 C B. 85.5 C C. 79.5 C D. 74.5 C E. 72.5 C 280 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 51. Object A, with heat capacity CA and initially at temperature TA , is placed in thermal contact with object B, with heat capacity CB and initially at temperature TB . The combination is thermally isolated. If the heat capacities are independent of the temperature and no phase changes occur, the nal temperature of both objects is: A. (CA TA CB TB )/(CA + CB ) B. (CA TA + CB TB )/(CA + CB ) C. (CA TA CB TB )/(CA CB ) D. (CA CB )|TA TB | E. (CA + CB )|TA TB | 52. The heat capacity of object B is twice that of object A. Initially A is at 300 K and B is at 450 K. They are placed in thermal contact and the combination is isolated. The nal temperature of both objects is: A. 200 K B. 300 K C. 400 K D. 450 K E. 600 K 53. A heat of transformation of a substance is: A. the energy absorbed as heat during a phase transformation B. the energy per unit mass absorbed as heat during a phase transformation C. the same as the heat capacity D. the same as the specic heat E. the same as the molar specic heat 54. The heat of fusion of water is cal/g. This means 80 cal of energy are required to: A. raise the temperature of 1 g of water by 1 K B. turn 1 g of water to steam C. raise the temperature of 1 g of ice by 1 K D. melt 1 g of ice E. increase the internal energy of 80 g of water by 1 cal 55. Solid A, with mass M , is at its melting point TA . It is placed in thermal contact with solid B, with heat capacity CB and initially at temperature TB (TB > TA ). The combination is thermally isolated. A has latent heat of fusion L and when it has melted has heat capacity CA . If A completely melts the nal temperature of both A and B is: A. (CA TA + CB TB M L)/(CA + CB ) B. (CA TA CB TB + M L)/(CA + CB ) C. (CA TA CB TB M L)/(CA + CB ) D. (CA TA + CB TB + M L)/(CA CB ) E. (CA TA + CB TB + M L)/(CA CB ) Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 281 56. During the time that latent heat is involved in a change of state: A. the temperature does not change B. the substance always expands C. a chemical reaction takes place D. molecular activity remains constant E. kinetic energy changes into potential energy 57. The formation of ice from water is accompanied by: A. absorption of energy as heat B. temperature increase C. decrease in volume D. an evolution of heat E. temperature decrease 58. How many calories are required to change one gram of 0 C ice to 100 C steam? The latent heat of fusion is 80 cal/g and the latent heat of vaporization is 540 cal/g. The specic heat of water is 1.00 cal/g K. A. 100 B. 540 C. 620 D. 720 E. 900 59. Ten grams of ice at 20 C is to be changed to steam at 130 C. The specic heat of both ice and steam is 0.5 cal/g C . The heat of fusion is 80 cal/g and the heat of vaporization is 540 cal/g. The entire process requires: A. 750 cal B. 1250 cal C. 6950 cal D. 7450 cal E. 7700 cal 60. Steam at 1 atm and 100 C enters a radiator and leaves as water at 1 atm and 80 C. Take the heat of vaporization to be 540 cal/g. Of the total energy given o as heat, what percent arises from the cooling of the water? A. 100 B. 54 C. 26 D. 14 E. 3.6 282 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 61. A certain humidier operates by raising water to the boiling point and then evaporating it. Every minute 30 g of water at 20 C are added to replace the 30 g that are evaporated. The heat of fusion of water is 333 kJ/kg, the heat of vaporization is 2256 kJ/kg, and the specic heat is 4190 J/kg K. How many joules of energy per minute does this humidier require? A. 3.0 104 B. 8.8 104 C. 7.8 104 D. 1.1 105 E. 2.0 104 62. A metal sample of mass M requires a power input P to just remain molten. When the heater is turned o, the metal solidies in a time T . The specic latent heat of fusion of this metal is: A. P/M T B. T /P M C. P M/T D. P M T E. P T /M 63. Fifty grams of ice at 0 C is placed in a thermos bottle containing one hundred grams of water at 6 C. How many grams of ice will melt? The heat of fusion of water is 333 kJ/kg and the specic heat is 4190 J/kg K. A. 7.5 B. 2.0 C. 8.3 D. 17 E. 50 64. According to the rst law of thermodynamics, applied to a gas, the increase in the internal energy during any process: A. equals the heat input minus the work done on the gas B. equals the heat input plus the work done on the gas C. equals the work done on the gas minus the heat input D. is independent of the heat input E. is independent of the work done on the gas Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 283 65. Pressure versus volume graphs for a certain gas undergoing ve dierent cyclic processes are shown below. During which cycle does the gas do the greatest positive work? p p ........................... .. .. . ............... . .. .. ... . ... .. . . . . .... . . .......... ........................... .................. .. .... . . . .. V A p ............... . ...... . . ................... . .................... ... . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . .. .... ..................... . .. .. .. . . V .................. . .. . .. ............................. . .. . .... ... .. . . . . . .......................... .. ........................... .. . .. . ... .. V B D p ........ . .................... . . ........... . .. .. .. ..... .... .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .......... ........................... .................. ...... . . .. .. C V p ................................ . .. .. .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ................................ ..................... ..... . . .. . E V 66. During an adiabatic process an object does 100 J of work and its temperature decreases by 5 K. During another process it does 25 J of work and its temperature decreases by 5 K. Its heat capacity for the second process is: A. 20 J/K B. 24 J/K C. 5 J/K D. 15 J/K E. 100 J/K 67. A system undergoes an adiabatic process in which its internal energy increases by 20 J. Which of the following statements is true? A. 20 J of work was done on the system B. 20 J of work was done by the system C. the system received 20 J of energy as heat D. the system lost 20 J of energy as heat E. none of the above are true 68. In an adiabatic process: A. the energy absorbed as heat equals the work done by the system on its environment B. the energy absorbed as heat equals the work done by the environment on the system C. the absorbed as heat equals the change in internal energy D. the work done by the environment on the system equals the change in internal energy E. the work done by the system on its environment equals to the change in internal energy 284 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 69. In a certain process a gas ends in its original thermodynamic state. Of the following, which is possible as the net result of the process? A. It is adiabatic and the gas does 50 J of work B. The gas does no work but absorbs 50 J of energy as heat C. The gas does no work but loses 50 J of energy as heat D. The gas loses 50 J of energy as heat and does 50 J of work E. The gas absorbs 50 J of energy as heat and does 50 J of work 70. Of A. B. C. D. E. the following which might NOT vanish over one cycle of a cyclic process? the change in the internal energy of the substance the change in pressure of the substance the work done by the substance the change in the volume of the substance the change in the temperature of the substance 71. Of A. B. C. D. E. the following which might NOT vanish over one cycle of a cyclic process? the work done by the substance minus the energy absorbed by the substance as heat the change in the pressure of the substance the energy absorbed by the substance as heat the change in the volume of the substance the change in the temperature of the substance 72. The unit of thermal conductivity might be: A. cal cm/(s C ) B. cal/(cm s C ) C. cal s/(cm C ) D. cm s C C/cal E. C /(cal cm s) 73. A slab of material has area A, thickness L, and thermal conductivity k . One of its surfaces (P) is maintained at temperature T1 and the other surface (Q) is maintained at a lower temperature T2 . The rate of heat ow by conduction from P to Q is: A. kA(T1 T2 )/L2 B. kL(T1 T2 )/A C. kA(T1 T2 )/L D. k (T1 T2 )/(LA) E. LA(T1 T2 )/k Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 285 74. The rate of heat ow by conduction through a slab does NOT depend upon the: A. temperature dierence between opposite faces of the slab B. thermal conductivity of the slab C. slab thickness D. cross-sectional area of the slab E. specic heat of the slab 75. The rate of heat ow by conduction through a slab is Pcond . If the slab thickness is doubled, its cross-sectional area is halved, and the temperature dierence across it is doubled, then the rate of heat ow becomes: A. 2Pcond B. Pcond /2 C. Pcond D. Pcond /8 E. 8Pcond 76. The diagram shows four slabs of dierent materials with equal thickness, placed side by side. Heat ows from left to right and the steady-state temperatures of the interfaces are given. Rank the materials according to their thermal conductivities, smallest to largest. d d d d 1 35 C A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 3, 3, 4, 1, 3, 4, 2, 4, 3, 2, 2 30 C 3 20 C 4 0 C 15 C 4 4 2 1 1 77. Inside a room at a uniform comfortable temperature, metallic objects generally feel cooler to the touch than wooden objects do. This is because: A. a given mass of wood contains more heat than the same mass of metal B. metal conducts heat better than wood C. heat tends to ow from metal to wood D. the equilibrium temperature of metal in the room is lower than that of wood E. the human body, being organic, resembles wood more closely than it resembles metal 286 Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 78. On a very cold day, a child puts his tongue against a fence post. It is much more likely that his tongue will stick to a steel post than to a wooden post. This is because: A. steel has a higher specic heat B. steel is a better radiator of heat C. steel has a higher specic gravity D. steel is a better heat conductor E. steel is a highly magnetic material 79. An A. B. C. D. E. iron stove, used for heating a room by radiation, is more ecient if: its inner surface is highly polished its inner surface is covered with aluminum paint its outer surface is covered with aluminum paint its outer surface is rough and black its outer surface is highly polished 80. To help keep buildings cool in the summer, dark colored window shades have been replaced by light colored shades. This is because light colored shades: A. are more pleasing to the eye B. absorb more sunlight C. reect more sunlight D. transmit more sunlight E. have a lower thermal conductivity 81. Which of the following statements pertaining to a vacuum ask (thermos) is NOT correct? A. Silvering reduces radiation loss B. Vacuum reduces conduction loss C. Vacuum reduces convection loss D. Vacuum reduces radiation loss E. Glass walls reduce conduction loss 82. A thermos bottle works well because: A. its glass walls are thin B. silvering reduces convection C. vacuum reduces heat radiation D. silver coating is a poor heat conductor E. none of the above Chapter 18: TEMPERATURE, HEAT, AND THE FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 287 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 1. Evidence that a gas consists mostly of empty space is the fact that: A. the density of a gas becomes much greater when it is liqueed B. gases exert pressure on the walls of their containers C. gases are transparent D. heating a gas increases the molecular motion E. nature abhors a vacuum 2. Air enters a hot-air furnace at 7 C and leaves at 77 C. If the pressure does not change each entering cubic meter of air expands to: A. 0.80 m3 B. 1.25 m3 C. 1.9 m3 D. 7.0 m3 E. 11 m3 3. 273 cm3 of an ideal gas is at 0 C. It is heated at constant pressure to 10 C. It will now occupy: A. 263 cm3 B. 273 cm3 C. 283 cm3 D. 278 cm3 E. 293 cm3 4. Two identical rooms in a house are connected by an open doorway. The temperatures in the two rooms are maintained at dierent values. Which room contains more air? A. the room with higher temperature B. the room with lower temperature C. the room with higher pressure D. neither because both have the same pressure E. neither because both have the same volume 5. It is known that 28 g of a certain ideal gas occupy 22.4 liters at standard conditions (0 C, 1 atm). The volume occupied by 42 g of this gas at standard conditions is: A. 14.9 liters B. 22.4 liters C. 33.6 liters D. 42 liters E. more data are needed 288 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 6. An automobile tire is pumped up to a gauge pressure of 2.0 105 Pa when the temperature is 27 C. What is its gauge pressure after the car has been running on a hot day so that the tire temperature is 77 C? Assume that the volume remains xed and take atmospheric pressure to be 1.013 105 Pa. A. 1.6 105 Pa B. 2.6 105 Pa C. 3.6 105 Pa D. 5.9 105 Pa E. 7.9 105 Pa 7. A sample of an ideal gas is compressed by a piston from 10 m3 to 5 m3 and simultaneously cooled from 273 C to 0 C. As a result there is: A. an increase in pressure B. a decrease in pressure C. a decrease in density D. no change in density E. an increase in density 8. A 2-m3 weather balloon is loosely lled with helium at 1 atm (76 cm Hg) and at 27 C. At an elevation of 20, 000 ft, the atmospheric pressure is down to 38 cm Hg and the helium has expanded, being under no constraint from the conning bag. If the temperature at this elevation is -48 C, the gas volume (in m3 ) is: A. 3 B. 4 C. 2 D. 2.5 E. 5.3 9. Oxygen (molar mass = 32 g) occupies a volume of 12 liters when its temperature is 20 C and its pressure is 1 atm. Using R = 0.082 liter atm/mol K, calculate the mass of the oxygen: A. 6.4 g B. 10. g7 C. 16 g D. 32 g E. 64 g 10. An ideal gas occupies 12 liters at 293 K and 1 atm (76 cm Hg). Its temperature is now raised to 373 K and its pressure increased to 215 cm Hg. The new volume is: A. 0.2 liters B. 5.4 liters C. 13.6 liters D. 20.8 liters E. none of these Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 289 11. Use R = 8.2 105 m3 atm/mol K and NA = 6.02 1023 mol1 . The approximate number of air molecules in a 1 m3 volume at room temperature (300 K and atmospheric pressure is: A. 41 B. 450 C. 2.5 1025 D. 2.7 1026 E. 5.4 1026 3 12. An air bubble doubles in volume as it rises from the bottom of a lake (1000 kg/m ). Ignoring any temperature changes, the depth of the lake is: A. 21 m B. 0.76 m C. 4.9 m D. 10 m E. 0.99 m 13. An A. B. C. D. E. isothermal process for an ideal gas is represented on a p-V diagram by: a horizontal line a vertical line a portion of an ellipse a portion of a parabola a portion of a hyperbola 14. An ideal gas undergoes an isothermal process starting with a pressure of 2 105 Pa and a volume of 6 cm3 . Which of the following might be the pressure and volume of the nal state? A. 1 105 Pa and 10 cm3 B. 3 105 Pa and 6 cm3 C. 4 105 Pa and 4 cm3 D. 6 105 Pa and 2 cm3 E. 8 105 Pa and 2 cm3 15. The pressures p and volumes V of ve ideal gases, with the same number of molecules, are given below. Which has the highest temperature? A. p = 1 105 Pa and V = 10 cm3 B. p = 3 105 Pa and V = 6 cm3 C. p = 4 105 Pa and V = 4 cm3 D. p = 6 105 Pa and V = 2 cm3 E. p = 8 105 Pa and V = 2 cm3 290 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 16. During a slow adiabatic expansion of a gas: A. the pressure remains constant B. energy is added as heat C. work is done on the gas D. no energy enters or leaves as heat E. the temperature is constant 17. An A. B. C. D. E. adiabatic process for an ideal gas is represented on a p-V diagram by: a horizontal line a vertical line a hyperbola a circle none of these 18. A real gas undergoes a process that can be represented as a curve on a p-V diagram. The work done by the gas during this process is: A. pV B. p(V2 V1 ) C. (p2 p1 )V D. p dV E. V dp 19. A real gas is changed slowly from state 1 to state 2. During this process no work is done on or by the gas. This process must be: A. isothermal B. adiabatic C. isovolumic D. isobaric E. a closed cycle with state 1 coinciding with state 2 20. A given mass of gas is enclosed in a suitable container so that it may be maintained at constant volume. Under these conditions, there can be no change in what property of the gas? A. Pressure B. Density C. Molecular kinetic energy D. Internal energy E. Temperature Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 291 21. A quantity of an ideal gas is compressed to half its initial volume. The process may be adiabatic, isothermal, or isobaric. Rank those three processes in order of the work required of an external agent, least to greatest. A. adiabatic, isothermal, isobaric B. adiabatic, isobaric, isothermal C. isothermal, adiabatic, isobaric D. isobaric, adiabatic, isothermal E. isobaric, isothermal, adiabatic 22. During a reversible adiabatic expansion of an ideal gas, which of the following is NOT true? A. pV = constant B. pV = nRT C. T V 1 = constant D. |W | = p dV E. pV = constant 23. In order that a single process be both isothermal and isobaric: A. one must use an ideal gas B. such a process is impossible C. a change of phase is essential D. one may use any real gas such as N2 E. one must use a solid 24. Over 1 cycle of a cyclic process in which a system does net work on its environment: A. the change in the pressure of the system cannot be zero B. the change in the volume of the system cannot be zero C. the change in the temperature of the system cannot be zero D. the change in the internal energy of the system cannot be zero E. none of the above 25. Evidence that molecules of a gas are in constant motion is: A. winds exert pressure B. two gases interdiuse quickly C. warm air rises D. energy as heat is needed to vaporize a liquid E. gases are easily compressed 292 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 26. According to the kinetic theory of gases, the pressure of a gas is due to: A. change of kinetic energy of molecules as they strike the wall B. change of momentum of molecules as the strike the wall C. average kinetic energy of the molecules D. force of repulsion between the molecules E. rms speed of the molecules 27. The force on the walls of a vessel of a contained gas is due to: A. the repulsive force between gas molecules B. a slight loss in the speed of a gas molecule during a collision with the wall C. a change in momentum of a gas molecule during a collision with the wall D. elastic collisions between gas molecules E. inelastic collisions between gas molecules 28. A gas is conned to a cylindrical container of radius 1 cm and length 1 m. The pressure exerted on an end face, compared with the pressure exerted on the long curved face, is: A. smaller because its area is smaller B. smaller because most molecules cannot traverse the length of the cylinder without undergoing collisions C. larger because the face is at D. larger because the molecules have a greater distance in which to accelerate before they strike the face E. none of these 29. Air A. B. C. D. E. is pumped into a bicycle tire at constant temperature. The pressure increases because: more molecules strike the tire wall per second the molecules are larger the molecules are farther apart each molecule is moving faster each molecule has more kinetic energy 30. The temperature of a gas is most closely related to: A. the kinetic energy of translation of its molecules B. its total molecular kinetic energy C. the sizes of its molecules D. the potential energy of its molecules E. the total energy of its molecules Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 293 31. The temperature of low pressure hydrogen is reduced from 100 C to 20 C. The rms speed of its molecules decreases by approximately: A. 80% B. 89% C. 46% D. 21% E. 11% 32. The mass of an oxygen molecule is 16 times that of a hydrogen molecule. At room temperature, the ratio of the rms speed of an oxygen molecule to that of a hydrogen molecule is: A. 16 B. 4 C. 1 D. 1/4 E. 1/16 33. The rms speed of an oxygen molecule at 0 C is 460 m/s. If the molar mass of oxygen is 32 g and that of helium is 4 g, then the rms speed of a helium molecule at 0 C is: A. 230 m/s B. 326 m/s C. 650 m/s D. 920 m/s E. 1300 m/s 34. A sample of argon gas (molar mass 40 g) is at four times the absolute temperature of a sample of hydrogen gas (molar mass 2 g). The ratio of the rms speed of the argon molecules to that of the hydrogen is: A. 1 B. 5 C. 1/5 5 D. E. 1/ 5 35. If the molecules in a tank of hydrogen have the same rms speed as the molecules in a tank of oxygen, we may be sure that: A. the pressures are the same B. the hydrogen is at the higher temperature C. the hydrogen is at the greater pressure D. the temperatures are the same E. the oxygen is at the higher temperature 294 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 36. The principle of equipartition of energy states that the internal energy of a gas is shared equally: A. among the molecules B. between kinetic and potential energy C. among the relevant degrees of freedom D. between translational and vibrational kinetic energy E. between temperature and pressure 37. The number of degrees of freedom of a rigid diatomic molecule is: A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5 E. 6 38. The number of degrees of freedom of a triatomic molecule is: A. 1 B. 3 C. 6 D. 8 E. 9 39. Five molecules have speeds of 2.8, 3.2, 5.8, 7.3, and 7.4 m/s. Their root-mean-square speed is closest to: A. 5.3 m/s B. 5.7 m/s C. 7.3 m/s D. 28 m/s E. 32 m/s 40. The speeds of 25 molecules are distributed as follows: 5 in the range from 2 to 3 m/s, 10 in the range from 3 to 4 m/s, 5 in the range from 4 to 5 m/s, 3 in the range from 5 to 6 m/s, 1 in the range from 6 to 7 m/s, and 1 in the range from 7 to 8 m/s. Their average speed is about: A. 2 m/s B. 3 m/s C. 4 m/s D. 5 m/s E. 6 m/s Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 295 41. In a system of N gas molecules, the individual speeds are v1 , v2 , . . ., vN . The rms speed of these molecules is: 1 v1 + v 2 + . . . + vN A. N 1 2 2 2 B. v1 + v 2 + . . . + v N N C. 2 2 2 (v1 + v2 + . . . + vN )/N D. [(v1 + v2 + . . . + vN )/N ] E. (v1 + v2 + . . . + vN )2 /N 2 42. A system consists of N gas molecules, each with mass m. Their rms speed is vrms . Their total translational kinetic energy is: A. (1/2)m(N vrms )2 B. (1/2)N (mvrms )2 2 C. (1/2)mvrms 2 D. (1/2)N mvrms 2 E. N [(1/2)mvrms ] 43. The average speeds v and molecular diameters d of ve ideal gases are given below. The number of molecules per unit volume is the same for all of them. For which is the collision rate the greatest? A. v = v0 and d = d0 B. v = 2v0 and d = d0 /2 C. v = 3v0 and d = d0 D. v = v0 and d = 2d0 E. v = 4v0 and d = d0 /2 44. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends on: A. the temperature only B. the pressure only C. the volume only D. the temperature and pressure only E. temperature, pressure, and volume 296 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 45. The diagram shows three isotherms for an ideal gas, with T3 T2 the same as T2 T1 . It also shows ve thermodynamic processes carried out on the gas. Rank the processes in order of the change in the internal energy of th gas, least to greatest. p ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ..... ...... ...... ..... ....... ....... ..... ..... ........ ....... ..... ...... ........ ........ ...... ...... ......... ......... ...... ...... .......... .......... ....... ....... ........... ........... ........ ........ ............ ............ ........ ......... ... ... .......... ........... ........... ............ ............. .............. ............... ........ ........ ................ ................ ......... ......... ................. ............. .......... .......... .. ............ ............ ................ ................ ................... ................... ......................... .......................... .................................. .................................. ..... .... . . .. ..... . . . . . . II .... . .. . . . . I. . . . . . . . ..... .. III. ......... ..... ... ........................................... ............................................. . . .. .. .. IV ... .......................................... ............. .....V. .................. ... .. T3 T2 T1 V A. B. C. D. E. I, II, III, IV, V V, then I, III, and IV tied, then II V, I, then III and IV tied, then II IV, V, III, I, II II, I, then III, IV, and V tied 46. An ideal gas of N monatomic molecules is in thermal equilibrium with an ideal gas of the same number of diatomic molecules and equilibrium is maintained as the temperature is increased. The ratio of the changes in the internal energies Edia /Emon is: A. 1/2 B. 3/5 C. 1 D. 5/3 E. 2 47. Two ideal gases, each consisting of N monatomic molecules, are in thermal equilibrium with each other and equilibrium is maintained as the temperature is increased. A molecule of the rst gas has mass m and a molecule of the second has mass 4m. The ratio of the changes in the internal energies E4m /Em is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 297 48. Three gases, one consisting of monatomic molecules, one consisting of diatomic molecules, and one consisting of polyatomic molecules, are in thermal equilibrium with each other and remain in thermal equilibrium as the temperature is raised. All have the same number of molecules. The gases with the least and greatest change in internal energy are respectively: A. polyatomic, monatomic B. monatomic, polyatomic C. diatomic, monatomic D. polyatomic, diatomic E. monatomic, diatomic 49. An ideal gas of N diatomic molecules has temperature T . If the number of molecules is doubled without changing the temperature, the internal energy increases by: A. 0 B. (1/2)N kT C. (3/2)N kT D. (5/2)N kT E. 3N kT 50. Both the pressure and volume of an ideal gas of diatomic molecules are doubled. The ratio of the new internal energy to the old, both measured relative to the internal energy at 0 K, is A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 51. The pressure of an ideal gas of diatomic molecules is doubled by halving the volume. The ratio of the new internal energy to the old, both measured relative to the internal energy at 0 K, is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 52. When work W is done on an ideal gas of N diatomic molecules in thermal isolation the temperature increases by: A. W/2N k B. W/3N k C. 2W/3N k D. 2W/5N k E. W/N k 298 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 53. When work W is done on an ideal gas of diatomic molecules in thermal isolation the increase in the total rotational energy of the molecules is: A. 0 B. W/3 C. 2W/3 D. 2W/5 E. W 54. When work W is done on an ideal gas of diatomic molecules in thermal isolation the increase in the total translational kinetic energy of the molecules is: A. 0 B. 2W/3 C. 2W/5 D. 3W/5 E. W 55. The pressure of an ideal gas is doubled in an isothermal process. The root-mean-square speed of the molecules: A. does not change B. increases by a factor of 2 C. decreases by a factor of 1/ 2 D. increases by a factor of 2 E. decreases by a factor of 1/2 56. The Maxwellian speed distribution provides a direct explanation of: A. thermal expansion B. the ideal gas law C. heat D. evaporation E. boiling 57. For a gas at thermal equilibrium the average speed v , the most probable speed vp , and the root-mean-square speed vrms are in the order: A. vp < vrms < v B. vrms < vp < v C. v < vrms < vp D. vp < v < vrms E. v < vp < vrms Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 299 58. The average speed of air molecules at room temperature is about: A. zero B. 2 m/s (walking speed) C. 30 m/s (fast car) D. 500 m/s (supersonic airplane) E. 3 108 m/s (speed of light) 59. The root-mean-square sped of molecules in a gas is: A. the most probable speed B. that speed such that half the molecules are moving faster than vrms and the other half are moving slower C. the average speed of the molecules D. the square root of the square of the average speed E. none of the above 60. According to the Maxwellian speed distribution, as the temperature increases the number of molecules with speeds within a small interval near the most probable speed: A. increases B. decreases C. increases at high temperatures and decreases at low D. decreases at high temperatures and increases at low E. stays the same 61. According to the Maxwellian speed distribution, as the temperature increases the most probable speed: A. increases B. decreases C. increases at high temperatures and decreases at low D. decreases at high temperatures and increases at low E. stays the same 62. According to the Maxwellian speed distribution, as the temperature increases the average speed: A. increases B. decreases C. increases at high temperatures and decreases at low D. decreases at high temperatures and increases at low E. stays the same 300 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 63. As A. B. C. D. E. the pressure in an ideal gas is increased isothermally the average molecular speed: increases decreases increases at high temperature, decreases at low decreases at high temperature, increases at low stays the same 64. As A. B. C. D. E. the volume of an ideal gas is increased at constant pressure the average molecular speed: increases decreases increases at high temperature, decreases at low decreases at high temperature, increases at low stays the same 65. Two ideal monatomic gases are in thermal equilibrium with each other. Gas A is composed of molecules with mass m while gas B is composed of molecules with mass 4m. The ratio of the average molecular speeds vA /vB is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 66. Ideal monatomic gas A is composed of molecules with mass m while ideal monatomic gas B is composed of molecules with mass 4m. The average molecular speeds are the same if the ratio of the temperatures TA /TB is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 67. Two monatomic ideal gases are in thermal equilibrium with each other. Gas A is composed of molecules with mass m while gas B is composed of molecules with mass 4m. The ratio of the average translational kinetic energies KA /KB is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 301 68. Ideal monatomic gas A is composed of molecules with mass m while ideal monatomic gas B is composed of molecules with mass 4m. The average translational kinetic energies are the same if the ratio of the temperatures TA /TB is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 69. Which of the following change when the pressure of an ideal gas is changed isothermally? A. Mean free path B. Root-mean-square molecular speed C. Internal energy D. Most probable kinetic energy E. Average speed 70. When an ideal gas undergoes a slow isothermal expansion: A. the work done by the gas is the same as the energy absorbed as heat B. the work done by the environment is the same as the energy absorbed as heat C. the increase in internal energy is the same as the energy absorbed as heat D. the increase in internal energy is the same as the work done by the gas E. the increase in internal energy is the same as the work done by the environment 71. The pressure of an ideal gas is doubled during a process in which the energy given up as heat by the gas equals the work done on the gas. As a result, the volume is: A. doubled B. halved C. unchanged D. need more information to answer E. nonsense; the process is impossible 72. The energy absorbed as heat by an ideal gas for an isothermal process equals: A. the work done by the gas B. the work done on the gas C. the change in the internal energy of the gas D. the negative of the change in internal energy of the gas E. zero since the process is isothermal 302 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 73. An ideal gas has molar specic heat Cp at constant pressure. When the temperature of n moles is increased by T the increase in the internal energy is: A. nCp T B. n(Cp + R) T C. n(Cp R) T D. n(2Cp + R) T E. n(2Cp R) T 74. The temperature of n moles of an ideal monatomic gas is increased by T at constant pressure. The energy Q absorbed as heat, change Eint in internal energy, and work W done by the environment are given by: A. Q = (5/2)nR T , Eint = 0, W = nR T B. Q = (3/2)nR T , Eint = (5/2)nR T , W = (3/2)nR T C. Q = (5/2)nR T , Eint = (5/2)nR T , W = 0 D. Q = (3/2)nR T , Eint = 0, W = nR T E. Q = (5/2)nR T , Eint = (3/2)nR T , W = nR T 75. The temperature of n moles of an ideal monatomic gas is increased by T at constant volume. The energy Q absorbed as heat, change Eint in internal energy, and work W done by the environment are given by: A. Q = (5/2)nR T , Eint = 0, W = 0 B. Q = (3/2)nR T , Eint = (3/2)nR T , W = 0 C. Q = (3/2)nR T , Eint = (1/2)nR T , W = nR t D. Q = (5/2)nR T , Eint = (3/2)nR T , W = nR T E. Q = (3/2)nR T , Eint = 0, W = (3/2)nR T 76. The heat capacity at constant volume of an ideal gas depends on: A. the temperature B. the pressure C. the volume D. the number of molecules E. none of the above 77. The specic heat at constant volume of an ideal gas depends on: A. the temperature B. the pressure C. the volume D. the number of molecules E. none of the above Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 303 78. The dierence between the molar specic heat at constant pressure and the molar specic heat at constant volume for an ideal gas is: A. the Boltzmann constant k B. the universal gas constant R C. the Avogadro constant NA D. kT E. RT 79. An A. B. C. D. E. ideal monatomic gas has a molar specic heat Cv at constant volume of: R 3R/2 5R/2 7R/2 9R/2 80. The specic heat Cv at constant volume of a monatomic gas at low pressure is proportional to T n where the exponent n is: A. 1 B. 0 C. 1 D. 1/2 E. 2 81. An A. B. C. D. E. ideal diatomic gas has a molar specic heat at constant pressure Cp of: R 3R/2 5R/2 7R/2 9R/2 82. The specic heat of a polyatomic gas is greater than the specic heat of a monatomic gas because: A. the polyatomic gas does more positive work when energy is absorbed as heat B. the monatomic gas does more positive work when energy is absorbed as heat C. the energy absorbed by the polyatomic gas is split among more degrees of freedom D. the pressure is greater in the polyatomic gas E. a monatomic gas cannot hold as much heat 304 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 83. The ratio of the specic heat of a gas at constant volume to its specic heat at constant pressure is: A. 1 B. less than 1 C. more than 1 D. has units of pressure/volume E. has units of volume/pressure 84. The ratio of the specic heat of an ideal gas at constant volume to its specic heat at constant pressure is: A. R B. 1/R C. dependent on the temperature D. dependent on the pressure E. dierent for monatomic, diatomic, and polyatomic gases 85. Consider the ratios of the heat capacities = Cp /Cv for the three types of ideal gases: monatomic, diatomic, and polyatomic. A. is the greatest for monatomic gases B. is the greatest for polyatomic gases C. is the same only for diatomic and polyatomic gases D. is the same only for monatomic and diatomic gases E. is the same for all three 86. T V 1 is constant for an ideal gas undergoing an adiabatic process, where is the ratio of heat capacities Cp /Cv . This is a direct consequence of: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics alone B. the zeroth law and the ideal gas equation of state C. the rst law of thermodynamics alone D. the ideal gas equation of state alone E. the rst law and the equation of state 87. Monatomic, diatomic, and polyatomic ideal gases each undergo slow adiabatic expansions from the same initial volume and the same initial pressure to the same nal volume. The magnitude of the work done by the environment on the gas: A. is greatest for the polyatomic gas B. is greatest for the diatomic gas C. is greatest for the monatomic gas D. is the same only for the diatomic and polyatomic gases E. is the same for all three gases Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 305 88. The mean free path of a gas molecule is: A. the shortest dimension of the containing vessel B. the cube root of the volume of the containing vessel C. approximately the diameter of a molecule D. average distance between adjacent molecules E. average distance a molecule travels between intermolecular collisions 89. The mean free path of molecules in a gas is: A. the average distance a molecule travels before escaping B. the average distance a molecule travels between collisions C. the greatest distance a molecule travels between collisions D. the shortest distance a molecule travels between collisions E. the average distance a molecule travels before splitting apart 90. The mean free path of air molecules at room temperature and atmospheric pressure is about: A. 103 m B. 105 m C. 107 m D. 109 m E. 1011 m 91. The mean free path of molecules in a gas is proportional to: A. the molecular cross-sectional area B. the reciprocal of the molecular cross-sectional area C. the root-mean-square molecular speed D. the square of the average molecular speed E. the molar mass 92. The mean free path of molecules in a gas is proportional to: A. the molecular diameter B. the reciprocal of the molecular diameter C. the molecular concentration D. the reciprocal of the molecular concentration E. the average molecular speed 306 Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 93. In a certain gas the molecules are 5.0 109 m apart on average, have a mean free path of 5.0 106 m, and have an average speed of 500 m/s. The rate at which a molecule has collisions with other molecules is about: A. 1011 s1 B. 108 s1 C. 1 s1 D. 108 s1 E. 1011 s1 94. If the temperature T of an ideal gas is increased at constant pressure the mean free path: A. decreases in proportion to 1/T B. decreases in proportion to 1/T 2 C. increases in proportion to T D. increases in proportion to T 2 E. does not change 95. A certain ideal gas has a temperature 300 K and a pressure 5.0 104 Pa. The molecules have a mean free path of 4.0 107 m. If the temperature is raised to 350 K and the pressure is reduced to 1.0 104 Pa the mean free path is then: A. 6.9 108 m B. 9.3 108 m C. 3.3 107 m D. 1.7 106 m E. 2.3 106 m Chapter 19: THE KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 307 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 1. In a reversible process the system: A. is always close to equilibrium states B. is close to equilibrium states only at the beginning and end C. might never be close to any equilibrium state D. is close to equilibrium states throughout, except at the beginning and end E. is none of the above 2. A slow (quasi-static) process is NOT reversible if: A. the temperature changes B. energy is absorbed or emitted as heat C. work is done on the system D. friction is present E. the pressure changes 3. The dierence in entropy S = SB SA for two states A and B of a system can be computed as the integral dQ/T provided: A. A and B are on the same adiabat B. A and B have the same temperature C. a reversible path is used for the integral D. the change in internal energy is rst computed E. the energy absorbed as heat by the system is rst computed 4. Possible units of entropy are: A. J B. J/K C. J1 D. literatm E. cal/mol 5. Which of the following is NOT a state variable? A. Work B. Internal energy C. Entropy D. Temperature E. Pressure 308 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 6. The change in entropy is zero for: A. reversible adiabatic processes B. reversible isothermal processes C. reversible processes during which no work is done D. reversible isobaric processes E. all adiabatic processes 7. Which of the following processes leads to a change in entropy of zero for the system undergoing the process? A. Non-cyclic isobaric (constant pressure) B. Non-cyclic isochoric (constant volume) C. Non-cyclic isothermal (constant temperature) D. Any closed cycle E. None of these 8. Rank, from smallest to largest, the changes in entropy of a pan of water on a hot plate, as the temperature of the water 1. goes from 20 C to 30 C 2. goes from 30 C to 40 C 3. goes from 40 C to 45 C 4. goes from 80 C to 85 C A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 1 and 2 tie, then 3 and 4 tie D. 3 and 4 tie, then 1 and 2 tie E. 4, 3, 2, 1 9. An A. D. B. E. C. ideal gas expands into a vacuum in a rigid vessel. As a result there is: a change in entropy an increase of pressure a change in temperature a decrease of internal energy a change in phase 10. Consider all possible isothermal contractions of an ideal gas. The change in entropy of the gas: A. is zero for all of them B. does not decrease for any of them C. does not increase for any of them D. increases for all of them E. decreases for all of them Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 309 11. An ideal gas is to taken reversibly from state i, at temperature T1 , to any of the other states labeled I, II, III, IV, and V on the p-V diagram below. All are at the same temperature T2 . Rank the ve processes according to the change in entropy of the gas, least to greatest. p T2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ...... ...... ...... ...... ....... ....... ....... ........ ........ ........ ......... .......... ....... ... .I . .. .... . . . . . . .... ...... II . . . ... . . ..... ...... III ... . .. . . .. . .. ..................... . ... ......... . . . ............................ IV . V .. .......... . .. . .... ....... . ...................................................................... i .. ...... ........... ...................................... ... ... ... . . ... ... . .. T1 V A. B. C. D. E. I, II, III, IV, V V, IV, III, II, I I, then II, III, IV, and V tied I, II, III, and IV tied, then V I and V tied, then II, III, IV 12. An ideal gas, consisting of n moles, undergoes a reversible isothermal process during which the volume changes from Vi to Vf . The change in entropy of the thermal reservoir in contact with the gas is given by: A. nR(Vf Vi ) B. nR ln(Vf Vi ) C. nR ln(Vi /Vf ) D. nR ln(Vf /Vi ) E. none of the above (entropy cant be calculated for a reversible process) 13. One mole of an ideal gas expands reversibly and isothermally at temperature T until its volume is doubled. The change of entropy of this gas for this process is: A. R ln 2 B. (ln 2)/T C. 0 D. RT ln 2 E. 2R 310 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 14. An ideal gas, consisting of n moles, undergoes an irreversible process in which the temperature has the same value at the beginning and end. If the volume changes from Vi to Vf , the change in entropy of the gas is given by: A. nR(Vf Vi ) B. nR ln(Vf Vi ) C. nR ln(Vi /Vf ) D. nR ln(Vf /Vi ) E. none of the above (entropy cant be calculated for an irreversible process) 15. The temperature of n moles of a gas is increased from Ti to Tf at constant volume. If the molar specic heat at constant volume is CV and is independent of temperature, then change in the entropy of the gas is: A. nCV ln(Tf /Ti ) B. nCV ln(Ti /Tf ) C. nCV ln(Tf Ti ) D. nCV ln(1 Ti /Tf ) E. nCV (Tf Ti ) 16. Consider the following processes: The temperature of two identical gases are increased from the same initial temperature to the same nal temperature. Reversible processes are used. For gas A the process is carried out at constant volume while for gas B it is carried out at constant pressure. The change in entropy: A. is the same for A and B B. is greater for A C. is greater for B D. is greater for A only if the initial temperature is low E. is greater for A only if the initial temperature is high 17. A hot object and a cold object are placed in thermal contact and the combination is isolated. They transfer energy until they reach a common temperature. The change Sh in the entropy of the hot object, the change Sc in the entropy of the cold object, and the change Stotal in the entropy of the combination are: A. Sh > 0, Sc > 0, Stotal > 0 B. Sh < 0, Sc > 0, Stotal > 0 C. Sh < 0, Sc > 0, Stotal < 0 D. Sh > 0, Sc < 0, Stotal > 0 E. Sh > 0, Sc < 0, Stotal < 0 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 311 18. Let SI denote the change in entropy of a sample for an irreversible process from state A to state B. Let SR denote the change in entropy of the same sample for a reversible process from state A to state B. Then: A. SI > SR B. SI = SR C. SI < SR D. SI = 0 E. SR = 0 19. For A. B. C. D. E. all adiabatic processes: the entropy of the system the entropy of the system the entropy of the system the entropy of the system the entropy of the system 20. For A. B. C. D. E. all reversible processes involving a system and its environment: the entropy of the system does not change the entropy of the system increases the total entropy of the system and its environment does not change the total entropy of the system and its environment increases none of the above 21. For A. B. C. D. E. all irreversible processes involving a system and its environment: the entropy of the system does not change the entropy of the system increases the total entropy of the system and its environment does not change the total entropy of the system and its environment increases none of the above does not change increases decreases does not increase does not decrease 22. According to the second law of thermodynamics: A. heat energy cannot be completely converted to work B. work cannot be completely converted to heat energy C. for all cyclic processes we have dQ/T < 0 D. the reason all heat engine eciencies are less than 100% is friction, which is unavoidable E. all of the above are true 312 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 23. Consider the following processes: I. Energy ows as heat from a hot object to a colder object II. Work is done on a system and an equivalent amount of energy is rejected as heat by the system III. Energy is absorbed as heat by a system and an equivalent amount of work is done by the system Which are never found to occur? A. Only I B. Only II C. Only III D. Only II and III E. I, II, and III 24. An inventor suggests that a house might be heated by using a refrigerator to draw energy as heat from the ground and reject energy as heat into the house. He claims that the energy supplied to the house as heat can exceed the work required to run the refrigerator. This: A. is impossible by rst law B. is impossible by second law C. would only work if the ground and the house were at the same temperature D. is impossible since heat energy ows from the (hot) house to the (cold) ground E. is possible 25. In a thermally insulated kitchen, an ordinary refrigerator is turned on and its door is left open. The temperature of the room: A. remains constant according to the rst law of thermodynamics B. increases according to the rst law of thermodynamics C. decreases according to the rst law of thermodynamics D. remains constant according to the second law of thermodynamics E. increases according to the second law of thermodynamics 26. A heat engine: A. converts heat input to an equivalent amount of work B. converts work to an equivalent amount of heat C. takes heat in, does work, and loses energy as heat D. uses positive work done on the system to transfer heat from a low temperature reservoir to a high temperature reservoir E. uses positive work done on the system to transfer heat from a high temperature reservoir to a low temperature reservoir. Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 313 27. A heat engine absorbs energy of magnitude |QH | as heat from a high temperature reservoir, does work of magnitude |W |, and transfers energy of magnitude |QL | as heat to a low temperature reservoir. Its eciency is: A. |QH |/|W | B. |QL |/|W | C. |QH |/|QL | D. |W |/|QH | E. |W |/|QL | 28. The temperatures TC of the cold reservoirs and the temperatures TH of the hot reservoirs for four Carnot heat engines are engine 1: TC = 400 K and TH = 500 K engine 2: TC = 500 K and TH = 600 K engine 3: TC = 400 K and TH = 600 K engine 4: TC = 600 K and TH = 800 K Rank these engines according to their eciencies, least to greatest A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 1 and 2 tie, then 3 and 4 tie C. 2, 1, 3, 4 D. 1, 2, 4, 3 E. 2, 1, 4, 3 29. A Carnot heat engine runs between a cold reservoir at temperature TC and a hot reservoir at temperature TH . You want to increase its eciency. Of the following, which change results in the greatest increase in eciency? The value of T is the same for all changes. A. Raise the temperature of the hot reservoir by T B. Raise the temperature of the cold reservoir by T C. Lower the temperature of the hot reservoir by T D. Lower the temperature of the cold reservoir by T E. Lower the temperature of the hot reservoir by 1 T and raise the temperature of the cold 2 reservoir by 1 T 2 30. 31. A certain heat engine draws 500 cal/s from a water bath at 27 C and transfers 400 cal/s to a reservoir at a lower temperature. The eciency of this engine is: A. 80% B. 75% C. 55% D. 25% E. 20% 314 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 32. A heat engine that in each cycle does positive work and loses energy as heat, with no heat energy input, would violate: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. the rst law of thermodynamics C. the second law of thermodynamics D. the third law of thermodynamics E. Newtons second law 33. A cyclical process that transfers energy as heat from a high temperature reservoir to a low temperature reservoir with no other change would violate: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. the rst law of thermodynamics C. the second law of thermodynamics D. the third law of thermodynamics E. none of the above 34. On a warm day a pool of water transfers energy to the air as heat and freezes. This is a direct violation of: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. the rst law of thermodynamics C. the second law of thermodynamics D. the third law of thermodynamics E. none of the above 35. A heat engine in each cycle absorbs energy of magnitude |QH | as heat from a high temperature reservoir, does work of magnitude |W |, and then absorbs energy of magnitude |QL | as heat from a low temperature reservoir. If |W | = |QH | + |QL | this engine violates: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. the rst law of thermodynamics C. the second law of thermodynamics D. the third law of thermodynamics E. none of the above 36. A heat engine in each cycle absorbs energy from a reservoir as heat and does an equivalent amount of work, with no other changes. This engine violates: A. the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. the rst law of thermodynamics C. the second law of thermodynamics D. the third law of thermodynamics E. none of the above Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 315 37. A Carnot cycle: A. is bounded by two isotherms and two adiabats on a p-V graph B. consists of two isothermal and two constant volume processes C. is any four-sided process on a p-V graph D. only exists for an ideal gas E. has an eciency equal to the enclosed area on a p-V diagram 38. According to the second law of thermodynamics: A. all heat engines have the same eciency B. all reversible heat engines have the same eciency C. the eciency of any heat engine is independent of its working substance D. the eciency of a Carnot engine depends only on the temperatures of the two reservoirs E. all Carnot engines theoretically have 100% eciency 39. A Carnot heat engine operates between 400 K and 500 K. Its eciency is: A. 20% B. 25% C. 44% D. 79% E. 100% 40. A Carnot heat engine operates between a hot reservoir at absolute temperature TH and a cold reservoir at absolute temperature TC . Its eciency is: A. TH /TC B. TC /TH C. 1 TH /TC D. 1 TC /TH E. 100% 41. A heat engine operates between a high temperature reservoir at TH and a low temperature reservoir at TL . Its eciency is given by 1 TL /TH : A. only if the working substance is an ideal gas B. only if the engine is reversible C. only if the engine is quasi-static D. only if the engine operates on a Stirling cycle E. no matter what characteristics the engine has 316 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 42. The maximum theoretical eciency of a Carnot heat engine operating between reservoirs at the steam point and at room temperature is about: A. 10% B. 20% C. 50% D. 80% E. 99% 43. An inventor claims to have a heat engine that has an eciency of 40% when it operates between a high temperature reservoir of 150 C and a low temperature reservoir of 30 C. This engine: A. must violate the zeroth law of thermodynamics B. must violate the rst law of thermodynamics C. must violate the second law of thermodynamics D. must violate the third law of thermodynamics E. does not necessarily violate any of the laws of thermodynamics 44. A Carnot heat engine and an irreversible heat engine both operate between the same high temperature and low temperature reservoirs. They absorb the same energy from the high temperature reservoir as heat. The irreversible engine: A. does more work B. transfers more energy to the low temperature reservoir as heat C. has the greater eciency D. has the same eciency as the reversible engine E. cannot absorb the same energy from the high temperature reservoir as heat without violating the second law of thermodynamics 45. A perfectly reversible heat pump with a coecient of performance of 14 supplies energy to a building as heat to maintain its temperature at 27 C. If the pump motor does work at the rate of 1 kW, at what rate does the pump supply energy to the building as heat? A. 15 kW B. 3.85 kW C. 1.35 kW D. 1.07 kW E. 1.02 kW 46. A heat engine operates between 200 K and 100 K. In each cycle it takes 100 J from the hot reservoir, loses 25 J to the cold reservoir, and does 75 J of work. This heat engine violates: A. both the rst and second laws of thermodynamics B. the rst law but not the second law of thermodynamics C. the second law but not the rst law of thermodynamics D. neither the rst law nor the second law of thermodynamics E. cannot answer without knowing the mechanical equivalent of heat Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 317 47. A refrigerator absorbs energy of magnitude |QC | as heat from a low temperature reservoir and transfers energy of magnitude |QH | as heat to a high temperature reservoir. Work W is done on the working substance. The coecient of performance is given by: A. |QC |/W B. |QH |/W C. (|QC | + |QH |)/W D. W/|QC | E. W/|QH | 48. A reversible refrigerator operates between a low temperature reservoir at TC and a high temperature reservoir at TH . Its coecient of performance is given by: A. (TH TC )/TC B. TC /(TH TC ) C. (TH TC )/TH D. TH /(TH TC ) E. TH (TH + TC ) 49. An Carnot refrigerator runs between a cold reservoir at temperature TC and a hot reservoir at temperature TH . You want to increase its coecient of performance. Of the following, which change results in the greatest increase in the coecient? The value of T is the same for all changes. A. Raise the temperature of the hot reservoir by T B. Raise the temperature of the cold reservoir by T C. Lower the temperature of the hot reservoir by T D. Lower the temperature of the cold reservoir by T E. Lower the temperature of the hot reservoir by 1 T and raise the temperature of the cold 2 reservoir by 1 T 2 50. For one complete cycle of a reversible heat engine, which of the following quantities is NOT zero? A. the change in the entropy of the working gas B. the change in the pressure of the working gas C. the change in the internal energy of the working gas D. the work done by the working gas E. the change in the temperature of the working gas 318 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 51. Twenty-ve identical molecules are in a box. Microstates are designated by identifying the molecules in the left and right halves of the box. The multiplicity of the conguration with 15 molecules in the right half and 10 molecules in the left half is: A. 1.03 1023 B. 3.27 106 C. 150 D. 25 E. 5 52. Twenty-ve identical molecules are in a box. Microstates are designated by identifying the molecules in the left and right halves of the box. The Boltzmann constant is 1.38 1023 J/K. The entropy associated with the conguration for which 15 molecules are in the left half and 10 molecules are in the right half is: A. 2.07 1022 J/K B. 7.31 1022 J/K C. 4.44 1023 J/K D. 6.91 1023 J/K E. 2.22 1023 J/K 53. The thermodynamic state of a gas changes from one with 3.8 1018 microstates to one with 7.9 1019 microstates. The Boltzmann constant is 1.38 1023 J/K. The change in entropy is: A. S = 0 B. S = 1.04 1023 J/K C. S = 1.04 1023 J/K D. S = 4.19 1023 J/K E. S = 4.19 1023 J/K 54. Let k be the Boltzmann constant. If the conguration of the molecules in a gas changes so that the multiplicity is reduced to one-third its previous value, the entropy of the gas changes by: A. S = 0 B. S = 3k ln 2 C. S = 3k ln 2 D. S = k ln 3 E. S = k ln 3 55. Let k be the Boltzmann constant. If the conguration of molecules in a gas changes from one with a multiplicity of M1 to one with a multiplicity of M2 , then entropy changes by: A. S = 0 B. S = k (M2 M1 ) C. S = kM2 /M1 D. S = k ln(M2 M1 ) E. S = k ln(M2 /M1 ) Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 319 56. Let k be the Boltzmann constant. If the thermodynamic state of a gas at temperature T changes isothermally and reversibly to a state with three times the number of microstates as initially, the energy input to the gas as heat is: A. Q = 0 B. Q = 3kT C. Q = 3kT D. kT ln 3 E. kT ln 3 320 Chapter 20: ENTROPY AND THE SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 1. A coulomb is the same as: A. an ampere/second B. half an amperesecond2 C. an ampere/meter2 D. an amperesecond E. a newtonmeter2 2. A kiloamperehour is a unit of: A. current B. charge per time C. power D. charge E. energy 3. The magnitude of the charge on an electron is approximately: A. 1023 C B. 1023 C C. 1019 C D. 1019 C E. 109 C 4. The total negative charge on the electrons in 1 mol of helium (atomic number 2, molar mass 4) is: A. 4.8 104 C B. 9.6 104 C C. 1.9 105 C D. 3.8 105 C E. 7.7 105 C 5. The total negative charge on the electrons in 1 kg of helium (atomic number 2, molar mass 4) is: A. 48 C B. 2.4 107 C C. 4.8 107 C D. 9.6 108 C E. 1.9 108 C Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 321 6. A wire carries a steady current of 2 A. The charge that passes a cross section in 2 s is: A. 3.2 1019 C B. 6.4 1019 C C. 1 C D. 2 C E. 4 C 7. A wire contains a steady current of 2 A. The number of electrons that pass a cross section in 2 s is: A. 2 B. 4 C. 6.3 1018 D. 1.3 1019 E. 2.5 1019 8. The charge on a glass rod that has been rubbed with silk is called positive: A. by arbitrary convention B. so that the proton charge will be positive C. to conform to the conventions adopted for G and m in Newtons law of gravitation D. because like charges repel E. because glass is an insulator 9. To A. B. C. D. E. 10. To A. B. C. D. E. 322 make an uncharged object have a negative charge we must: add some atoms remove some atoms add some electrons remove some electrons write down a negative sign make an uncharged object have a positive charge: remove some neutrons add some neutrons add some electrons remove some electrons heat it to cause a change of phase Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 11. When a hard rubber rod is given a negative charge by rubbing it with wool: A. positive charges are transferred from rod to wool B. negative charges are transferred from rod to wool C. positive charges are transferred from wool to rod D. negative charges are transferred from wool to rod E. negative charges are created and stored on the rod 12. An A. B. C. D. E. electrical insulator is a material: containing no electrons through which electrons do not ow easily that has more electrons than protons on its surface cannot be a pure chemical element must be a crystal 13. A conductor is distinguished from an insulator with the same number of atoms by the number of: A. nearly free atoms B. electrons C. nearly free electrons D. protons E. molecules 14. The diagram shows two pairs of heavily charged plastic cubes. Cubes 1 and 2 attract each other and cubes 1 and 3 repel each other. 1 1 2 3 Which of the following illustrates the forces of cube 2 on cube 3 and cube 3 on cube 2? 2 3 A 2 3 B 2 3 2 3 D C 2 3 E Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 323 15. The diagram shows a pair of heavily charged plastic cubes that attract each other. 1 2 Cube 3 is a conductor and is uncharged. Which of the following illustrates the forces between cubes 1 and 3 and between cubes 2 and 3? 1 2 1 3 3 3 A 1 2 3 1 3 B C 2 3 D 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 E 16. A neutral metal ball is suspended by a string. A positively charged insulating rod is placed near the ball, which is observed to be attracted to the rod. This is because: A. the ball becomes positively charged by induction B. the ball becomes negatively charged by induction C. the number of electrons in the ball is more than the number in the rod D. the string is not a perfect insulator E. there is a rearrangement of the electrons in the ball 17. A positively charged insulating rod is brought close to an object that is suspended by a string. If the object is attracted toward the rod we can conclude: A. the object is positively charged B. the object is negatively charged C. the object is an insulator D. the object is a conductor E. none of the above 324 Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 18. A positively charged insulating rod is brought close to an object that is suspended by a string. If the object is repelled away from the rod we can conclude: A. the object is positively charged B. the object is negatively charged C. the object is an insulator D. the object is a conductor E. none of the above 19. Two uncharged metal spheres, L and M, are in contact. A negatively charged rod is brought close to L, but not touching it, as shown. The two spheres are slightly separated and the rod is then withdrawn. As a result: L M ........... ........... ............... ............... ..... ..... ... ... .... .... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . ... . . . . . .. . ........ .. . . .. . ........ .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . . . . ... ... . . .. .. ... ... .. . ... ... .... ... .... ... .... .... . .. .. .. ............... ............... ...... ....... ...... ....... . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. + + + + + + + + + insulating supports A. B. C. D. E. both spheres are neutral both spheres are positive both spheres are negative L is negative and M is positive L is positive and M is negative 20. A positively charged metal sphere A is brought into contact with an uncharged metal sphere B. As a result: A. both spheres are positively charged B. A is positively and charged B is neutral C. A is positively charged and B is negatively charged D. A is neutral and B is positively charged E. A is neutral and B is negatively charged 21. The leaves of a positively charged electroscope diverge more when an object is brought near the knob of the electroscope. The object must be: A. a conductor B. an insulator C. positively charged D. negatively charged E. uncharged Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 325 22. A negatively charged rubber rod is brought near the knob of a positively charged electroscope. The result is that: A. the electroscope leaves will move farther apart B. the rod will lose its charge C. the electroscope leaves will tend to collapse D. the electroscope will become discharged E. nothing noticeable will happen 23. An electroscope is charged by induction using a glass rod that has been made positive by rubbing it with silk. The electroscope leaves: A. gain electrons B. gain protons C. lose electrons D. lose protons E. gain an equal number of protons and electrons 24. Consider the following procedural steps: 1. ground an electroscope 2. remove the ground from the electroscope 3. touch a charged rod to the electroscope 4. bring a charged rod near, but not touching, the electroscope 5. remove the charged rod To charge an electroscope by induction, use the sequence: A. 1, 4, 5, 2 B. 4, 1, 2, 5 C. 3, 1, 2, 5 D. 4, 1, 5, 2 E. 3, 5 25. A charged insulator can be discharged by passing it just above a ame. This is because the ame: A. warms it B. dries it C. contains carbon dioxide D. contains ions E. contains more rapidly moving atoms 326 Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 26. A small object has charge Q. Charge q is removed from it and placed on a second small object. The two objects are placed 1 m apart. For the force that each object exerts on the other to be a maximum. q should be: A. 2Q B. Q C. Q/2 D. Q/4 E. 0 27. Two small charged objects attract each other with a force F when separated by a distance d. If the charge on each object is reduced to one-fourth of its original value and the distance between them is reduced to d/2 the force becomes: A. F/16 B. F/8 C. F/4 D. F/2 E. F 28. Two identical conducting spheres A and B carry equal charge. They are separated by a distance much larger than their diameters. A third identical conducting sphere C is uncharged. Sphere C is rst touched to A, then to B, and nally removed. As a result, the electrostatic force between A and B, which was originally F , becomes: A. F/2 B. F/4 C. 3F/8 D. F/16 E. 0 29. Two particles, X and Y, are 4 m apart. X has a charge of 2Q and Y has a charge of Q. The force of X on Y: A. has twice the magnitude of the force of Y on X B. has half the magnitude of the force of Y on X C. has four times the magnitude of the force of Y on X D. has one-fourth the magnitude of the force of Y on X E. has the same magnitude as the force of Y on X 30. The units of 1/4 A. N2 C2 B. N m/C 2 C. N2 m2 /C 2 D. N m2 /C 2 E. m2 /C 0 are: Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 327 31. A 5.0-C charge is 10 m from a 2.0-C charge. The electrostatic force on the positive charge is: A. 9.0 108 N toward the negative charge B. 9.0 108 N away from the negative charge C. 9.0 109 N toward the negative charge D. 9.0 109 N away from the negative charge E. none of these 32. Two identical charges, 2.0 m apart, exert forces of magnitude 4.0 N on each other. The value of either charge is: A. 1.8 109 C B. 2.1 105 C C. 4.2 105 C D. 1.9 105 C E. 3.8 105 C 33. Two electrons (e1 and e2 ) and a proton (p) lie on a straight line, as shown. The directions of the force of e2 on e1 , the force of p on e1 , and the total force on e1 , respectively, are: e1 A. B. C. D. E. , , , , , , , , , , e2 p 34. Two protons (p1 and p2 ) and an electron (e) lie on a straight line, as shown. The directions of the force of p1 on e, the force of p2 on e, and the total force on e, respectively, are: p1 A. B. C. D. E. 328 , , , , , , , , , , e Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE p2 35. Two particles have charges Q and Q (equal magnitude and opposite sign). For a net force of zero to be exerted on a third charge it must be placed: A. midway between Q and Q B. on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining Q and Q, but not on that line itself C. on the line joining Q and Q, to the side of Q opposite Q D. on the line joining Q and Q, to the side of Q opposite Q E. at none of these places (there is no place) 36. Particles 1, with charge q1 , and 2, with charge q2 , are on the x axis, with particle 1 at x = a and particle 2 at x = 2a. For the net force on a third charged particle, at the origin, to be zero, q1 and q2 must be related by q2 =: A. 2q1 B. 4q1 C. 2q1 D. 4q1 E. q1 /4 37. Two particles A and B have identical charge Q. For a net force of zero to be exerted on a third charged particle it must be placed: A. midway between A and B B. on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining A and B but away from the line C. on the line joining A and B, not between the particles D. on the line joining A and B, closer to one of them than the other E. at none of these places (there is no place) 38. A particle with charge 2-C is placed at the origin, an identical particle, with the same charge, is placed 2 m from the origin on the x axis, and a third identical particle, with the same charge, is placed 2 m from the origin on the y axis. The magnitude of the force on the particle at the origin is: A. 9.0 103 N B. 6.4 103 N C. 1.3 102 N D. 1.8 102 N E. 3.6 102 N 39. Charge Q is spread uniformly along the circumference of a circle of radius R. A point particle with charge q is placed at the center of this circle. The total force exerted on the particle can be calculated by Coulombs law: A. just use R for the distance B. just use 2R for the distance C. just use 2 R for the distance D. the result of the calculation is zero E. none of the above Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 329 40. Two particles, each with charge Q, and a third particle, with charge q , are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle as shown. The total force on the particle with charge q is: .... ..... .. .. . .. . . .. .. ...... .... .. ... . . .. . .. .... ... .... ... . . . ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. ... .... ... .... .. .... ... .. .. .. . .. ... .... ... ... .... .. .. . . ... ............................................. .. .. .. . .. ................................................... .. .. . . . . ... .. .. . .. . . .. .. . ... ... ...... . .. . ... .. +q Q+ A. B. C. D. E. +Q parallel to the left side of the triangle parallel to the right side of the triangle parallel to the bottom side of the triangle perpendicular to the bottom side of the triangle perpendicular to the left side of the triangle 41. A particle with charge Q is on the y axis a distance a from the origin and a particle with charge q is on the x axis a distance d from the origin. The value of d for which the x component of the force on the second particle is the greatest is: A. 0 B. a 2a C. D. a/ 2 E. a/ 2 42. In the Rutherford model of the hydrogen atom, a proton (mass M , charge Q) is the nucleus and an electron (mass m, charge q ) moves around the proton in a circle of radius r . Let k denote the Coulomb force constant (1/4 0 ) and G the universal gravitational constant. The ratio of the electrostatic force to the gravitational force between electron and proton is: A. kQq/GM mr2 B. GQq/kM m C. kM m/GQq D. GM m/kQq E. kQq/GM m 43. A particle with a charge of 5 106 C and a mass of 20 g moves uniformly with a speed of 7 m/s in a circular orbit around a stationary particle with a charge of 5 106 C. The radius of the orbit is: A. 0 B. 0.23 m C. 0.62 m D. 1.6 E. 4.4 m 330 Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 44. Charge is distributed uniformly on the surface of a spherical balloon (an insulator). A point particle with charge q is inside. The electrical force on the particle is greatest when: A. it is near the inside surface of the balloon B. it is at the center of the balloon C. it is halfway between the balloon center and the inside surface D. it is anywhere inside (the force is same everywhere and is not zero) E. it is anywhere inside (the force is zero everywhere) 45. Charge is distributed on the surface of a spherical conducting shell. A point particle with charge q is inside. If polarization eects are negligible the electrical force on the particle is greatest when: A. it is near the inside surface of the balloon B. it is at the center of the balloon C. it is halfway between the balloon center and the inside surface D. it is anywhere inside (the force is same everywhere and is not zero) E. it is anywhere inside (the force is zero everywhere) Chapter 21: ELECTRIC CHARGE 331 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 1. An A. B. C. D. E. electric eld is most directly related to: the momentum of a test charge the kinetic energy of a test charge the potential energy of a test charge the force acting on a test charge the charge carried by a test charge 2. As A. B. C. D. E. used in the denition of electric eld, a test charge: has zero charge has charge of magnitude 1 C has charge of magnitude 1.6 1019 C must be an electron none of the above 3. Experimenter A uses a test charge q0 and experimenter B uses a test charge 2q0 to measure an electric eld produced by stationary charges. A nds a eld that is: A. the same in both magnitude and direction as the eld found by B B. greater in magnitude than the eld found by B C. less in magnitude than the eld found by B D. opposite in direction to the eld found by B E. either greater or less than the eld found by B, depending on the accelerations of the test charges 4. The units of the electric eld are: A. N C2 B. C/N C. N D. N/C 2 E. C/m 5. The units of the electric eld are: A. J/(Cm) B. J/C C. JC D. J/m E. none of these 332 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 6. Electric eld lines: A. are trajectories of a test charge B. are vectors in the direction of the electric eld C. form closed loops D. cross each other in the region between two point charges E. are none of the above 7. Two thin spherical shells, one with radius R and the other with radius 2R, surround an isolated charged point particle. The ratio of the number of eld lines through the larger sphere to the number through the smaller is: A. 1 B. 2 C. 4 D. 1/2 E. 1/4 8. A certain physics textbook shows a region of space in which two electric eld lines cross each other. We conclude that: A. at least two point charges are present B. an electrical conductor is present C. an insulator is present D. the eld points in two directions at the same place E. the author made a mistake 9. Choose the correct statement concerning electric eld lines: A. eld lines may cross B. eld lines are close together where the eld is large C. eld lines point away from a negatively charged particle D. a charged point particle released from rest moves along a eld line E. none of these are correct 10. The diagram shows the electric eld lines due to two charged parallel metal plates. We conclude that: .. . . . . ... ... ................ .... .. .. ......... .. .. .Y. .Z. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . ...... .. .... .. . . .. . .. .. .. ... .. . ... .... .... .... .... .... ..... ..... .......................................... metal ... . . . .... .. . . . .. plates .... .. . .. ...... .. . . . .X. . . .............. .. . . . . . .. . ... . .. . A. B. C. D. E. the upper plate is positive and the lower plate is negative a proton at X would experience the same force if it were placed at Y a proton at X experiences a greater force than if it were placed at Z a proton at X experiences less force than if it were placed at Z an electron at X could have its weight balanced by the electrical force Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 333 11. Let k denote 1/4 0 . The magnitude of the electric eld at a distance r from an isolated point particle with charge q is: A. kq/r B. kr/q C. kq/r 3 D. kq/r2 E. kq 2 /r2 12. The diagram shows the electric eld lines in a region of space containing two small charged spheres (Y and Z). Then: .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... . . . . . .. . . ... . . . ..... . . . ................ . .. .. ................. . .. . . .. .. ... . . .. . ... . .... . ... .. ... . . . ..... ... . . . ... . . . .. . .. . . .. . ... .. ... . .. .... .. .. ... .... . . . .... . .. ... .. . . .. . .. ... .. .. . . ... . . .. . ... .. . .... .. .. .... ... ... .. . .. .... ... . ...... ... .. .. ....... . .. . .. ................... ...... . . .................... ... ... ... ..... ..... ... ..... ... .... .. . .... .. . ... .... .... .. . .... . ... . ... .... ..... ............................. ............................. ................ ........... .... .. .. ............. ............ .... . ... . . ... .. .... . ... .... ... ..... .. .. .... ..... ... ......... .... ......... . .... . .. .... . . . .. ....... .................. . .................. . . ..... . ... .. .... ... .... . . .. ... ..... .. .. ..... . .. . . ... .. .. . ... ... . . .. . . ... .... . .. ... .. . . ... .... . .. .. . . .. .... .. ... .. . ... ... . . . .... . . . . .. .. ... ... ... . . . ... . . .. . . . .. ........ ....... . ...... ... ..... .. . . ... ....... . .. . .... . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. .... . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . .......... ... ... .. Y .. ... . . ........ A. B. C. D. E. .......... ... ... .. Z .. ... . . ........ X Y is negative and Z is positive the magnitude of the electric eld is the same everywhere the electric eld is strongest midway between Y and Z the electric eld is not zero anywhere (except innitely far from the spheres) Y and Z must have the same sign 13. The diagram shows the electric eld lines in a region of space containing two small charged spheres (Y and Z). Then: .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. . . .. . . . . ... . . . . ..... .... ..... ......... . . . ............... . .. . .. . . . . .. ... . . ... . ... . .... . .. . .... . .... . . . ... . . . ... .. . . ... . . . .. . ... ... . .. .... .. .. .. . ... .... . . .. . .... .. ... .. .. . . .. ... . .. ... .. . . .... ..... ... . .... . . . . ... . .... .... . . .. ...... . ... . .... . .......... ...... . . . .. ................. ..... . . .... ...... ... .......... . ..... .... ... ..... ... .... . .. . ... . .... .... . .... .. .... ... . ... .... ..... ............................. ............................. ................ ............... ... .. ............. ............ .... ... . . ... .... ... ... .... .... .. .. ... ..... .... ..... ... ... ......... .. .. ..... .. . .... .. ...... .................. ............... ... . ... . . ... . ... ...... ... ..... . .. . . . . .... .. . ... . .... ... .... ... . ... ... . .. .. . ... . . .. .. . . .. . .... .. . .. . .. . .. . .. ... . . .. ... .. . ... .. ... . . .... . . . . .. . . ... . .... . ... .. . .... . . . .. ... . . ........... .... .. .... . .................. .... . .... . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . ... . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ........ .... ... .. Y .. .. ... .......... A. B. C. D. E. 334 ........ .... ... .. Z .. .. ... .......... Y is negative and Z is positive the magnitude of the electric eld is the same everywhere the electric eld is strongest midway between Y and Z Y is positive and Z is negative Y and Z must have the same sign Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 14. The electric eld at a distance of 10 cm from an isolated point particle with a charge of 2109 C is: A. 1.8 N/C B. 180 N/C C. 18 N/C D. 1800 N/C E. none of these 15. An isolated charged point particle produces an electric eld with magnitude E at a point 2 m away from the charge. A point at which the eld magnitude is E/4 is: A. 1 m away from the particle B. 0.5 m away from the particle C. 2 m away from the particle D. 4 m away from the particle E. 8 m away from the particle 16. An isolated charged point particle produces an electric eld with magnitude E at a point 2 m away. At a point 1 m from the particle the magnitude of the eld is: A. E B. 2E C. 4E D. E/2 E. E/4 17. Two protons (p1 and p2 ) are on the x axis, as shown below. The directions of the electric eld at points 1, 2, and 3, respectively, are: 1 A. B. C. D. E. , , , , , , , , , , p1 2 p2 3 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 335 18. Two point particles, with a charges of q1 and q2 , are placed a distance r apart. The electric eld is zero at a point P between the particles on the line segment connecting them. We conclude that: A. q1 and q2 must have the same magnitude and sign B. P must be midway between the particles C. q1 and q2 must have the same sign but may have dierent magnitudes D. q1 and q2 must have equal magnitudes and opposite signs E. q1 and q2 must have opposite signs and may have dierent magnitudes 19. The diagrams below depict four dierent charge distributions. The charge particles are all the same distance from the origin. The electric eld at the origin: 5q 2q 3q 5q 3q 1 A. B. C. D. E. 5q 3q 2 2q 2q 5q 3 5q 2q 2q 5q 4 is greatest for situation 1 is greatest for situation 3 is zero for situation 4 is downward for situation 1 is downward for situation 3 20. The diagram shows a particle with positive charge Q and a particle with negative charge Q. The electric eld at point P on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining them is: Q P +Q A. B. C. D. E. 336 zero Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 21. The diagram shows two identical particles, each with positive charge Q. The electric eld at point P on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining them is: +Q P +Q A. B. C. D. E. zero 22. Two point particles, one with charge +8 109 C and the other with charge 2 109 C, are separated by 4 m. The electric eld in N/C midway between them is: A. 9 109 B. 13, 500 C. 135, 000 D. 36 109 E. 22.5 23. Two charged point particles are located at two vertices of an equilateral triangle and the electric eld is zero at the third vertex. We conclude: A. the two particles have charges with opposite signs and the same magnitude B. the two particles have charges with opposite signs and dierent magnitudes C. the two particles have identical charges D. the two particles have charges with the same sign but dierent magnitudes E. at least one other charged particle is present 24. Two point particles, with the same charge, are located at two vertices of an equilateral triangle. A third charged particle is placed so the electric eld at the third vertex is zero. The third particle must: A. be on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining the rst two charges B. be on the line joining the rst two charges C. have the same charge as the rst two particles D. have charge of the same magnitude as the rst two charges but its charge may have a dierent sign E. be at the center of the triangle Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 337 25. Positive charge Q is uniformly distributed on a semicircular rod. What is the direction of the electric eld at point P, the center of the semicircle? Q A. B. C. D. E. .. .... ......... .. .......... . ......... .......... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ..... .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .... .... ..... ...... ....... ... .... ............ .... ....... ......... ........ . P 26. Positive charge +Q is uniformly distributed on the upper half a semicircular rod and negative charge Q is uniformly distributed on the lower half. What is the direction of the electric eld at point P, the center of the semicircle? +Q ........................................................... .. . .. .... ..... .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ...... ....... ......... .... ........ .......... ....... . .... .. P Q A. B. C. D. E. 27. Positive charge +Q is uniformly distributed on the upper half a rod and negative charge Q is uniformly distributed on the lower half. What is the direction of the electric eld at point P, on the perpendicular bisector of the rod? +Q Q A. B. C. D. E. 338 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS P 28. The electric eld due to a uniform distribution of charge on a spherical shell is zero: A. everywhere B. nowhere C. only at the center of the shell D. only inside the shell E. only outside the shell 29. A charged particle is placed in an electric eld that varies with location. No force is exerted on this charge: A. at locations where the electric eld is zero B. at locations where the electric eld strength is 1/(1.6 1019 ) N/C C. if the particle is moving along a eld line D. if the particle is moving perpendicularly to a eld line E. if the eld is caused by an equal amount of positive and negative charge 30. The magnitude of the force of a 400-N/C electric eld on a 0.02-C point charge is: A. 8.0 N B. 8 105 N C. 8 103 N D. 0.08 N E. 2 1011 N 31. A 200-N/C electric eld is in the positive x direction. The force on an electron in this eld is: A. 200 N in the positive x direction B. 200 N in the negative x direction C. 3.2 1017 N in the positive x direction D. 3.2 1017 N in the negative x direction E. 0 32. An electron traveling north enters a region where the electric eld is uniform and points north. The electron: A. speeds up B. slows down C. veers east D. veers west E. continues with the same speed in the same direction Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 339 33. An electron traveling north enters a region where the electric eld is uniform and points west. The electron: A. speeds up B. slows down C. veers east D. veers west E. continues with the same speed in the same direction 34. Two charged particles are arranged as shown. In which region could a third particle, with charge +1 C, be placed so that the net electrostatic force on it is zero? I ......... ........... ... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . ... .... ..... ... ...... ... + 2C A. B. C. D. E. II ......... ........... ... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . ... .... ..... ... ...... ... III 4 C I only I and II only lII only I and III only II only 35. An electric dipole consists of a particle with a charge of +6 106 C at the origin and a particle with a charge of 6 106 C on the x axis at x = 3 103 m. Its dipole moment is: A. 1.8 108 C m, in the positive x direction B. 1.8 108 C m, in the negative x direction C. 0 because the net charge is 0 D. 1.8 108 C m, in the positive y direction E. 1.8 108 C m, in the negative y direction 36. The force exerted by a uniform electric eld on a dipole is: A. parallel to the dipole moment B. perpendicular to the dipole moment C. parallel to the electric eld D. perpendicular to the electric eld E. none of the above 37. An A. B. C. D. E. electric eld exerts a torque on a dipole only if: the eld is parallel to the dipole moment the eld is not parallel to the dipole moment the eld is perpendicular to the dipole moment the eld is not perpendicular to the dipole moment the eld is uniform 340 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 38. The torque exerted by an electric eld on a dipole is: A. parallel to the eld and perpendicular to the dipole moment B. parallel to both the eld and dipole moment C. perpendicular to both the eld and dipole moment D. parallel to the dipole moment and perpendicular to the eld E. not related to the directions of the eld and dipole moment 39. The diagrams show four possible orientations of an electric dipole in a uniform electric eld E . Rank them according to the magnitude of the torque exerted on the dipole by the eld, least to greatest. p E ............................................... ............................ .................. ........ . .. . . ......... ...................... ... A. B. C. D. E. 1 1, 2, 3, 4 4, 3, 2, 1 1, 2, 4, 3 3, 2 and 4 tie, then 1 1, 2 and 4 tie, then 3 pE . .... ........ .................... ................................................. ................................................ . . . . .. 2 p . ... ...............................................E... . . ........................... ........................ ... .. .... .... ... .. . .. . . 3 p .... .... .... .. 4 E .... .... .................................................. .................................................. ... ... .... .... 40. A uniform electric eld of 300 N/C makes an angle of 25 with the dipole moment of an electric dipole. If the torque exerted by the eld has a magnitude of 2.5 107 N m, the dipole moment must be: A. 8.3 1010 C m B. 9.2 1010 C m C. 2.0 109 C m D. 8.3 105 C m E. 1.8 104 C m 41. When the dipole moment of a dipole in a uniform electric eld rotates to become more nearly aligned with the eld: A. the eld does positive work and the potential energy increases B. the eld does positive work and the potential energy decreases C. the eld does negative work and the potential energy increases D. the eld does negative work and the potential energy decreases E. the eld does no work Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS 341 42. The dipole moment of a dipole in a 300-N/C electric eld is initially perpendicular to the eld, but it rotates so it is in the same direction as the eld. If the moment has a magnitude of 2 109 C m, the work done by the eld is: A. 12 107 J B. 6 107 J C. 0 D. 6 107 J E. 12 107 J 43. An electric dipole is oriented parallel to a uniform electric eld, as shown. p ........ ...... . ... E .... .... .................................................... ................................................. . ..... ... ... It is rotated to one of the ve orientations shown below. Rank the nal orientations according to the change in the potential energy of the dipole-eld system, most negative to most positive. pE ..... ........ ................. .................................................. ................................................. . . . . .. A. B. C. D. E. 1 1, 2, 3, 4 4, 3, 2, 1 1, 2, 4, 3 3, 2 and 4 tie, then 1 1, 2 and 4 tie, then 3 p .. . . ...............................................E... . ........................... ........................ ... .. ..... ..... . .. . .. . . 2 p .... ... .... ... 3 E .... .... .. ................................................... ................................................... .. ... .... p . ........ . ...... E .... .... .. ................................................... ................................................... .. ... .... 4 44. The purpose of Millikens oil drop experiment was to determine: A. the mass of an electron B. the charge of an electron C. the ratio of charge to mass for an electron D. the sign of the charge on an electron E. viscosity 45. A charged oil drop with a mass of 2 104 kg is held suspended by a downward electric eld of 300 N/C. The charge on the drop is: A. +1.5 106 C B. 1.5 106 C C. +6.5 106 C D. 6.5 106 C E. 0 342 Chapter 22: ELECTRIC FIELDS Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 1. A total charge of 6.3 108 C is distributed uniformly throughout a 2.7-cm radius sphere. The volume charge density is: A. 3.7 107 C/m3 3 B. 6.9 106 C/m 2 C. 6.9 106 C/m 3 D. 2.5 104 C/m E. 7.6 104 C/m3 2. Charge is placed on the surface of a 2.7-cm radius isolated conducting sphere. The surface 2 charge density is uniform and has the value 6.9 106 C/m . The total charge on the sphere is: A. 5.6 1010 C B. 2.1 108 C C. 4.7 108 C D. 6.3 108 C E. 9.5 103 C 3. A spherical shell has an inner radius of 3.7 cm and an outer radius of 4.5 cm. If charge is distributed uniformly throughout the shell with a volume density of 6.1 104 C/m3 the total charge is: A. 1.0 107 C B. 1.3 107 C C. 2.0 107 C D. 2.3 107 C E. 4.0 107 C 4. A cylinder has a radius of 2.1 cm and a length of 8.8 cm. Total charge 6.1 107 C is distributed uniformly throughout. The volume charge density is: 3 A. 5.3 105 C/m 2 B. 5.3 105 C/m 3 C. 8.5 104 C/m D. 5.0 103 C/m3 3 E. 6.3 102 C/m Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 343 5. When a piece of paper is held with one face perpendicular to a uniform electric eld the ux through it is 25 N m2 /C. When the paper is turned 25 with respect to the eld the ux through it is: A. 0 B. 12 N m2 /C C. 21 N m2 /C D. 23 N m2 /C E. 25 N m2 /C 6. The ux of the electric eld (24 N/C) + (30 N/C) + (16 N/C) k through a 2.0 m2 portion of i j the yz plane is: A. 32 N m2 /C B. 34 N m2 /C C. 42 N m2 /C D. 48 N m2 /C E. 60 N m2 /C 7. Consider Gausss law: A. B. C. D. E. E dA = q/ 0 . Which of the following is true? E must be the electric eld due to the enclosed charge If q = 0, then E = 0 everywhere on the Gaussian surface If the three particles inside have charges of +q , +q , and 2q , then the integral is zero on the surface E is everywhere parallel to dA If a charge is placed outside the surface, then it cannot aect E at any point on the surface 8. A charged point particle is placed at the center of a spherical Gaussian surface. The electric ux E is changed if: A. the sphere is replaced by a cube of the same volume B. the sphere is replaced by a cube of one-tenth the volume C. the point charge is moved o center (but still inside the original sphere) D. the point charge is moved to just outside the sphere E. a second point charge is placed just outside the sphere 9. Choose the INCORRECT statement: A. Gauss law can be derived from Coulombs law B. Gauss law states that the net number of lines crossing any closed surface in an outward direction is proportional to the net charge enclosed within the surface C. Coulombs law can be derived from Gauss law and symmetry D. Gauss law applies to a closed surface of any shape E. According to Gauss law, if a closed surface encloses no charge, then the electric eld must vanish everywhere on the surface 344 Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 10. The outer surface of the cardboard center of a paper towel roll: A. is a possible Gaussian surface B. cannot be a Gaussian surface because it encloses no charge C. cannot be a Gaussian surface since it is an insulator D. cannot be a Gaussian surface because it is not a closed surface E. none of the above 11. A physics instructor in an anteroom charges an electrostatic generator to 25 C, then carries it into the lecture hall. The net electric ux in N m2 /C through the lecture hall walls is: A. 0 B. 25 106 C. 2.2 105 D. 2.8 106 E. can not tell unless the lecture hall dimensions are given 12. A point particle with charge q is placed inside the cube but not at its center. The electric ux through any one side of the cube: A. is zero B. is q/ 0 C. is q/4 0 D. is q/6 0 E. cannot be computed using Gauss law 13. A particle with charge 5.0-C is placed at the corner of a cube. The total electric ux in N m2 /C through all sides of the cube is: A. 0 B. 7.1 104 C. 9.4 104 D. 1.4 105 E. 5.6 105 14. A point particle with charge q is at the center of a Gaussian surface in the form of a cube. The electric ux through any one face of the cube is: A. q/ 0 B. q/4 0 C. q/3 0 D. q/6 0 E. q/12 0 Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 345 15. The table below gives the electric ux in N m2 /C through the ends and round surfaces of four Gaussian surfaces in the form of cylinders. Rank the cylinders according to the charge inside, from the most negative to the most positive. cylinder cylinder cylinder cylinder A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 3, 4, 2, 3, 1, 4, 4, 3, 1, 1: 2: 3: 4: left end +2 109 +3 109 2 109 +2 109 right end +4 109 2 109 5 109 5 109 rounded surface 6 109 +6 109 +3 109 3 109 4 1 1 2 2 16. A conducting sphere of radius 0.01 m has a charge of 1.0 109 C deposited on it. The magnitude of the electric eld in N/C just outside the surface of the sphere is: A. 0 B. 450 C. 900 D. 4500 E. 90, 000 17. A round wastepaper basket with a 0.15-m radius opening is in a uniform electric eld of 300 N/C, perpendicular to the opening. The total ux through the sides and bottom, in N m2 C, is: A. 0 B. 4.2 C. 21 D. 280 E. can not tell without knowing the areas of the sides and bottom 18. 10 C of charge are placed on a spherical conducting shell. A particle with a charge of 3 C is placed at the center of the cavity. The net charge on the inner surface of the shell is: A. 7 C B. 3 C C. 0 C D. +3 C E. +7 C 346 Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 19. 10 C of charge are placed on a spherical conducting shell. A particle with a charge of 3 C is placed at the center of the cavity. The net charge on the outer surface of the shell is: A. 7 C B. 3 C C. 0 C D. +3 C E. +7 C 20. A 30-N/C uniform electric eld points perpendicularly toward the left face of a large neutral 2 conducting sheet. The surface charge density in C/m on the left and right faces, respectively, are: A. 2.7 109 C/m2 ; +2.7 109 C/m2 2 2 B. +2.7 109 C/m ; 2.7 109 C/m 2 2 C. 5.3 109 C/m ; +5.3 109 C/m 2 2 D. +5.3 109 C/m ; 5.3 109 C/m E. 0; 0 21. A solid insulating sphere of radius R contains positive charge that is distributed with a volume charge density that does not depend on angle but does increase with distance from the sphere center. Which of the graphs below might give the magnitude E of the electric eld as a function of the distance r from the center of the sphere? E .. ... .... ... .... ... .... . . . . . . . ............. ........... r . R A E E ............. ............. .. .. .. ... .. ...... . .. E r R B .. .... . .. .... . .. .... .... .... .. . . ... .. .. .. r R D E . ... .. . .. ..... . . .. ... . . ..... .. . .. .. . .. . . r R C .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .... . .. . ....... . . . ............. ............ r R E Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 347 22. Which of the following graphs represents the magnitude of the electric eld as a function of the distance from the center of a solid charged conducting sphere of radius R? E .. ... .... ... .... ... .... . . . . . . . ........... ............. r . E ............. ............. .. .. .. ... .. ...... . .. E r R A .. .... .. .. .. .... ... . .. .... . ..... .. .. . .. . .. r R B E .. .... .. .... .. ..... .... . .... .. . ... .. .. .. . R D R C E r .. . . .. . .. . .. . ... . . .. . .... . . ... . . ............. ............ r R E 23. Charge Q is distributed uniformly throughout an insulating sphere of radius R. The magnitude of the electric eld at a point R/2 from the center is: A. Q/4 0 R2 B. Q/ 0 R2 C. 3Q/4 0 R2 D. Q/8 0 R2 E. none of these 24. Positive charge Q is distributed uniformly throughout an insulating sphere of radius R, centered at the origin. A particle with positive charge Q is placed at x = 2R on the x axis. The magnitude of the electric eld at x = R/2 on the x axis is: A. Q/4 0 R2 B. Q/8 0 R2 C. Q/72 0 R2 D. 17Q/72 0 R2 E. none of these 25. Charge Q is distributed uniformly throughout a spherical insulating shell. The net electric ux in N m2 /C through the inner surface of the shell is: A. 0 B. Q/ 0 C. 2Q/ 0 D. Q/4 0 E. Q/2 0 348 Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 26. Charge Q is distributed uniformly throughout a spherical insulating shell. The net electric ux in N m2 /C through the outer surface of the shell is: A. 0 B. Q/ 0 C. 2Q/ 0 D. Q/4 0 E. Q/2 0 27. A 3.5-cm radius hemisphere contains a total charge of 6.6 107 C. The ux through the rounded portion of the surface is 9.8 104 N m2 /C. The ux through the at base is: A. 0 B. +2.3 104 N m2 /C C. 2.3 104 N m2 /C D. 9.8 104 N m2 /C E. +9.8 104 N m2 /C 28. Charge is distributed uniformly along a long straight wire. The electric eld 2 cm from the wire is 20 N/C. The electric eld 4 cm from the wire is: A. 120 N/C B. 80 N/C C. 40 N/C D. 10 N/C E. 5 N/C 29. Positive charge Q is placed on a conducting spherical shell with inner radius R1 and outer radius R2 . A particle with charge q is placed at the center of the cavity. The magnitude of the electric eld at a point in the cavity, a distance r from the center, is: A. zero 2 B. Q/4 0 R1 2 C. q/4 0 r D. (q + Q)/4 0 r 2 2 E. (q + Q)/4 0 (R1 r 2 ) 30. Positive charge Q is placed on a conducting spherical shell with inner radius R1 and outer radius R2 . A point charge q is placed at the center of the cavity. The magnitude of the electric eld at a point outside the shell, a distance r from the center, is: A. zero B. Q/4 0 r 2 C. q/4 0 r 2 D. (q + Q)/4 0 r 2 2 E. (q + Q)/4 0 (R1 r 2 ) Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 349 31. Positive charge Q is placed on a conducting spherical shell with inner radius R1 and outer radius R2 . A point charge q is placed at the center of the cavity. The magnitude of the electric eld produced by the charge on the inner surface at a point in the interior of the conductor, a distance r from the center, is: A. 0 2 B. Q/4v 0 R1 2 C. Q/4 0 R2 D. q/4 0 r 2 E. Q/4 0 r 2 32. A long line of charge with charge per unit length runs along the cylindrical axis of a cylindrical shell which carries a charge per unit length of c . The charge per unit length on the inner and outer surfaces of the shell, respectively are: A. and c B. and c + C. and c c D. + c and c E. c and c + 33. Charge is distributed uniformly on the surface of a large at plate. The electric eld 2 cm from the plate is 30 N/C. The electric eld 4 cm from the plate is: A. 120 N/C B. 80 N/C C. 30 N/C D. 15 N/C E. 7.5 N/C 34. Two large insulating parallel plates carry charge of equal magnitude, one positive and the other negative, that is distributed uniformly over their inner surfaces. Rank the points 1 through 5 according to the magnitude of the electric eld at the points, least to greatest. 1 A. B. C. D. E. 350 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2, then 1, 3, and 4 tied, then 5 1, 4, and 5 tie, then 2 and 3 tie 2 and 3 tie, then 1 and 4 tie, then 5 2 and 3 tie, then 1, 4, and 5 tie Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW + + + + + 23 + + 45 35. Two large parallel plates carry positive charge of equal magnitude that is distributed uniformly over their inner surfaces. Rank the points 1 through 5 according to the magnitude of the electric eld at the points, least to greatest. 1 A. B. C. D. E. + + + + + 23 + + + + + + + + + 45 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 1, 4, and 5 tie, then 2 and 3 tie 2 and 3 tie, then 1 and 4 tie, then 5 2 and 3 tie, then 1, 4, and 5 tie 36. A particle with charge Q is placed outside a large neutral conducting sheet. At any point in the interior of the sheet the electric eld produced by charges on the surface is directed: A. toward the surface B. away from the surface C. toward Q D. away from Q E. none of the above 37. A hollow conductor is positively charged. A small uncharged metal ball is lowered by a silk thread through a small opening in the top of the conductor and allowed to touch its inner surface. After the ball is removed, it will have: A. a positive charge B. a negative charge C. no appreciable charge D. a charge whose sign depends on what part of the inner surface it touched E. a charge whose sign depends on where the small hole is located in the conductor 38. A spherical conducting shell has charge Q. A particle with charge q is placed at the center of the cavity. The charge on the inner surface of the shell and the charge on the outer surface of the shell, respectively, are: A. 0, Q B. q , Q q C. Q, 0 D. q , Q + q E. q , 0 Chapter 23: GAUSS LAW 351 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 1. An electron moves from point i to point f , in the direction of a uniform electric eld. During this displacement: E ... .. ......................................................................... ...... ......................................................................... ..... . .. .. .. .. . i f A. the work done by the eld is positive and the potential energy of the electron-eld increases B. the work done by the eld is negative and the potential energy of the electron-eld increases C. the work done by the eld is positive and the potential energy of the electron-eld decreases D. the work done by the eld is negative and the potential energy of the electron-eld decreases E. the work done by the eld is positive and the potential energy of the electron-eld does not change system system system system system 2. A particle with a charge of 5.5 108 C is 3.5 cm from a particle with a charge of 2.3 108 C. The potential energy of this two-particle system, relative to the potential energy at innite separation, is: A. 3.2 104 J B. 3.2 104 J C. 9.3 103 J D. 9.3 103 J E. zero 3. A particle with a charge of 5.5 108 C is xed at the origin. A particle with a charge of 2.3 108 C is moved from x = 3.5 cm on the x axis to y = 4.3 cm on the y axis. The change in potential energy of the two-particle system is: A. 3.1 103 J B. 3.1 103 J C. 6.0 105 J D. 6.0 105 J E. 0 352 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 4. A particle with a charge of 5.5 108 C charge is xed at the origin. A particle with a charge of 2.3 108 C charge is moved from x = 3.5 cm on the x axis to y = 3.5 cm on the y axis. The change in the potential energy of the two-particle system is: A. 3.2 104 J B. 3.2 104 J C. 9.3 103 J D. 9.3 103 J E. 0 5. Three particles lie on the x axis: particle 1, with a charge of 1 108 C is at x = 1 cm, particle 2, with a charge of 2 108 C, is at x = 2 cm, and particle 3, with a charge of 3 108 C, is at x = 3 cm. The potential energy of this arrangement, relative to the potential energy for innite separation, is: A. +4.9 104 J B. 4.9 104 J C. +8.5 104 J D. 8.5 104 J E. zero 6. Two identical particles, each with charge q , are placed on the x axis, one at the origin and the other at x = 5 cm. A third particle, with charge q , is placed on the x axis so the potential energy of the three-particle system is the same as the potential energy at innite separation. Its x coordinate is: A. 13 cm B. 2.5 cm C. 7.5 cm D. 10 cm E. 5 cm 7. Choose the correct statement: A. A proton tends to go from a region of low potential to a region of high potential B. The potential of a negatively charged conductor must be negative C. If E = 0 at a point P then V must be zero at P D. If V = 0 at a point P then E must be zero at P E. None of the above are correct 8. If 500 J of work are required to carry a charged particle between two points with a potential dierence of 20 V, the magnitude of the charge on the particle is: A. 0.040 C B. 12.5 C C. 20 C D. cannot be computed unless the path is given E. none of these Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 353 9. The potential dierence between two points is 100 V. If a particle with a charge of 2 C is transported from one of these points to the other, the magnitude of the work done is: A. 200 J B. 100 J C. 50 J D. 100 J E. 2 J 10. During a lightning discharge, 30 C of charge move through a potential dierence of 1.0 108 V in 2.0 102 s. The energy released by this lightning bolt is: A. 1.5 1011 J B. 3.0 109 J C. 6.0 107 J D. 3.3 106 J E. 1500 J 11. Points R and T are each a distance d from each of two particles with charges of equal magnitudes and opposite signs as shown. If k = 1/4 0 , the work required to move a particle with a negative charge q from R to T is: R . .. ... ... . .... . ..... ..... ... .. .. . ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .... .... . ..... .. .... ... ... . .. .. . . . .. .. ..... .. . ........ . . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. ... . ... ... . ..... ... .. .... ......... . ... ... .... . . .... .. ... . .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ... .. . .... ..... ..... .... .... ... ... . . d d Q Q+ d d T A. B. C. D. E. 354 0 kqQ/d2 kqQ/d kqQ/( 2d) kQq/(2d) Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 12. Points R and T are each a distance d from each of two particles with equal positive charges as shown. If k = 1/4 0 , the work required to move a particle with charge q from R to T is: R .. .. . .... ..... ..... ..... .. .... .. . .... .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .... .. .... ... . ..... ... .... .... .. .......... .... .... .. .. ... . .. ... .. . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .... . ... .. ... .... .... . . .. .... ... ..... ... .... ... .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ... ... .... .. ... .. ..... ..... .... .... d d Q+ +Q d d T A. B. C. D. E. 0 kQq/d2 kQq/d kQq/( 2d) kQq/(2d) 13. Two particle with charges Q and Q are xed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle with sides of length a. If k = 1/4 0 , the work required to move a particle with charge q from the other vertex to the center of the line joining the xed particles is: q . . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... . . .. .. .. ..... . ... .. . ... .... .. .. .. .. . . .................................... . . . . . . . . .................................. . . .. .. .. ... .. ... ....... ....... .... .... a Q A. B. C. D. E. a a Q 0 kQq/a kQq/a2 2kQq/a 2kQq/a Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 355 14. A particle with mass m and charge q is projected with speed v0 into the region between two parallel plates as shown. The potential dierence between the two plates is V and their separation is d. The change in kinetic energy of the particle as it traverses this region is: 0 V m, q .. . .. . ... . .. .............. .............. ... . v0 d A. B. C. D. E. qV /d 2 2qV /mv0 qV 2 mv0 /2 none of these 15. An electron is accelerated from rest through a potential dierence V . Its nal speed is proportional to: A. V B. 2 V C. V D. 1/V E. 1/ V 16. In separate experiments, four dierent particles each start from far away with the same speed and impinge directly on a gold nucleus. The masses and charges of the particles are particle 1: mass m0 , charge q0 particle 2: mass 2m0 , charge 2q0 particle 3: mass 2m0 , charge q0 /2 particle 4: mass m0 /2, charge 2q0 Rank the particles according to the distance of closest approach to the gold nucleus, from smallest to largest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 3, 1 and 2 tie, then 4 D. 4, 1 and 2 tie, then 1 E. 1 and 2 tie, then 3, 4 356 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 17. Two large parallel conducting plates are separated by a distance d, placed in a vacuum, and connected to a source of potential dierence V . An oxygen ion, with charge 2e, starts from rest on the surface of one plate and accelerates to the other. If e denotes the magnitude of the electron charge, the nal kinetic energy of this ion is: A. eV /2 B. eV /d C. eV d D. V d/e E. 2eV 18. An A. B. C. D. E. electron volt is : the force acting on an electron in a eld of 1 N/C the force required to move an electron 1 meter the energy gained by an electron in moving through a potential dierence of 1 volt the energy needed to move an electron through 1 meter in any electric eld the work done when 1 coulomb of charge is moved through a potential dierence of 1 volt. 19. An electron has charge e and mass me . A proton has charge e and mass 1840me . A proton volt is equal to: A. 1 eV B. 1840 eV C. (1/1840) eV 1840 eV D. E. (1/ 1840) eV 20. Two conducting spheres, one having twice the diameter of the other, are separated by a distance large compared to their diameters. The smaller sphere (1) has charge q and the larger sphere (2) is uncharged. If the spheres are then connected by a long thin wire: d .. ... . . .. ..... ...... .... ..... .. ... .. .... ... .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .... ... .. .. . .... .. . .... .... .. ............ .. . ..... 1 q A. B. C. D. E. . ............... ................ .. ... .... . .... ... .... . .... .. ... ... .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. . .. ... ... .... .. . ... .. . . . .... . .... . .. .... .. ............... ........... . 2 2d 1 and 2 have the same potential 2 has twice the potential of 1 2 has half the potential of 1 1 and 2 have the same charge all of the charge is dissipated Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 357 21. Two conducting spheres are far apart. The smaller sphere carries a total charge Q. The larger sphere has a radius that is twice that of the smaller and is neutral. After the two spheres are connected by a conducting wire, the charges on the smaller and larger spheres, respectively, are: A. Q/2 and Q/2 B. Q/3 and 2Q/3 C. 2Q/3 and Q/3 D. zero and Q E. 2Q and Q 22. Three possible congurations for an electron e and a proton p are shown below. Take the zero of potential to be at innity and rank the three congurations according to the potential at S, from most negative to most positive. d D e p S 1 D d e p S 2 d S p | | D | | e 3 A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3 3, 2, 1 2, 3, 1 1 and 2 tie, then 3 1 and 3 tie, then 2 23. A conducting sphere with radius R is charged until the magnitude of the electric eld just outside its surface is E . The electric potential of the sphere, relative to the potential far away, is: A. zero B. E/R C. E/R2 D. ER E. ER2 358 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 2 24. A 5-cm radius conducting sphere has a surface charge density of 2 106 C/m on its surface. Its electric potential, relative to the potential far away, is: A. 1.1 104 V B. 2.2 104 V C. 2.3 105 V D. 3.6 105 V E. 7.2 106 V 25. A hollow metal sphere is charged to a potential V . The potential at its center is: A. V B. 0 C. V D. 2V E. V 26. Positive charge is distributed uniformly throughout a non-conducting sphere. The highest electric potential occurs: A. at the center B. at the surface C. halfway between the center and surface D. just outside the surface E. far from the sphere 27. A total charge of 7 108 C is uniformly distributed throughout a non-conducting sphere with a radius of 5 cm. The electric potential at the surface, relative to the potential far away, is about: A. 1.3 104 V B. 1.3 104 V C. 7.0 105 V D. 6.3 104 V E. 0 28. Eight identical spherical raindrops are each at a potential V , relative to the potential far away. They coalesce to make one spherical raindrop whose potential is: A. V /8 B. V /2 C. 2V D. 4V E. 8V Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 359 29. A metal sphere carries a charge of 5 109 C and is at a potential of 400 V, relative to the potential far away. The potential at the center of the sphere is: A. 400 V B. 400 V C. 2 106 V D. 0 E. none of these 30. A 5-cm radius isolated conducting sphere is charged so its potential is +100 V, relative to the potential far away. The charge density on its surface is: 2 A. +2.2 107 C/m B. 2.2 107 C/m2 2 C. +3.5 107 C/m 2 D. 3.5 107 C/m 2 E. +1.8 108 C/m 31. A conducting sphere has charge Q and its electric potential is V , relative to the potential far away. If the charge is doubled to 2Q, the potential is: A. V B. 2V C. 4V D. V /2 E. V /4 32. The potential dierence between the ends of a 2-meter stick that is parallel to a uniform electric eld is 400 V. The magnitude of the electric eld is: A. zero B. 100 V/m C. 200 V/m D. 400 V/m E. 800 V/m 33. In a certain region of space the electric potential increases uniformly from east to west and does not vary in any other direction. The electric eld: A. points east and varies with position B. points east and does not vary with position C. points west and varies with position D. points west and does not vary with position E. points north and does not vary with position 360 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 34. If the electric eld is in the positive x direction and has a magnitude given by E = Cx2 , where C is a constant, then the electric potential is given by V =: A. 2Cx B. 2Cx C. Cx3 /3 D. Cx3 /3 E. 3Cx3 35. An electron goes from one equipotential surface to another along one of the four paths shown below. Rank the paths according to the work done by the electric eld, from least to greatest. 1 ..................................... ................................... ... .. 2 .............. ........... . .. 3 ...................................... ................................. . . .. ............... ..... .... . . 4 ......... .............. .. ... ......................... ... ................... 90 V 80 V 70 V 60 V 50 V A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 4 4, 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 4 and 2 tie 4 and 2 tie, then 3, then 1 4, 3, 1, 2 36. The work required to carry a particle with a charge of 6.0 C from a 5.0-V equipotential surface to a 6.0-V equipotential surface and back again to the 5.0-V surface is: A. 0 B. 1.2 105 J C. 3.0 105 J D. 6.0 105 J E. 6.0 106 J 37. The equipotential surfaces associated with a charged point particles are: A. radially outward from the particle B. vertical planes C. horizontal planes D. concentric spheres centered at the particle E. concentric cylinders with the particle on the axis. Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 361 38. The electric eld in a region around the origin is given by E = C (x + y where C is a i j), constant. The equipotential surfaces in that region are: A. concentric cylinders with axes along the z axis B. concentric cylinders with axes along the x axis C. concentric spheres centered at the origin D. planes parallel to the xy plane E. planes parallel to the yz plane 39. The electric potential in a certain region of space is given by V = 7.5x2 + 3x, where V is in volts and x is in meters. In this region the equipotential surfaces are: A. planes parallel to the x axis B. planes parallel to the yz plane C. concentric spheres centered at the origin D. concentric cylinders with the x axis as the cylinder axis E. unknown unless the charge is given 40. In the diagram, the points 1, 2, and 3 are all the same very large distance from a dipole. Rank the points according to the values of the electric potential at them, from the most negative to the most positive. 2 . . . p .. . . 1 A. B. C. D. E. 362 1, 2, 3 3, 2, 1 2, 3, 1 1, 3, 2 1 and 2 tie, then 3 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 3 41. A particle with charge q is to be brought from far away to a point near an electric dipole. No work is done if the nal position of the particle is on: A. the line through the charges of the dipole B. a line that is perpendicular to the dipole moment C. a line that makes an angle of 45 with the dipole moment D. a line that makes an angle of 30 with the dipole moment E. none of the above 42. Equipotential surfaces associated with an electric dipole are: A. spheres centered on the dipole B. cylinders with axes along the dipole moment C. planes perpendicular to the dipole moment D. planes parallel to the dipole moment E. none of the above 43. The diagram shows four pairs of large parallel conducting plates. The value of the electric potential is given for each plate. Rank the pairs according to the magnitude of the electric eld between the plates, least to greatest. 20 V +70 V 1 A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 4, 1, 3, 2, 4, +20 V +70 V 10 V 2 +90 V 3 +30 V +90 V 4 4 1 4 3 1 Chapter 24: ELECTRIC POTENTIAL 363 Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 1. The units of capacitance are equivalent to: A. J/C B. V/C C. J2 /C D. C/J E. C2 /J 2. A farad is the same as a: A. J/V B. V/J C. C/V D. V/C E. N/C 3. A capacitor C has a charge Q. The actual charges on its plates are: A. Q, Q B. Q/2, Q/2 C. Q, Q D. Q/2, Q/2 E. Q, 0 4. Each plate of a capacitor stores a charge of magnitude 1 mC when a 100-V potential dierence is applied. The capacitance is: A. 5 F B. 10 F C. 50 F D. 100 F E. none of these 5. To A. B. C. D. E. 364 charge a 1-F capacitor with 2 C requires a potential dierence of: 2V 0.2 V 5V 0.5 V none of these Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 6. The capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor with plate area A and plate separation d is given by: A. 0 d/A B. 0 d/2A C. 0 A/d D. 0 A/2d E. Ad/ 0 7. The capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor is: A. proportional to the plate area B. proportional to the charge stored C. independent of any material inserted between the plates D. proportional to the potential dierence of the plates E. proportional to the plate separation 8. The plate areas and plate separations of ve parallel plate capacitors are capacitor 1: area A0 , separation d0 capacitor 2: area 2A0 , separation 2d0 capacitor 3: area 2A0 , separation d0 /2 capacitor 4: area A0 /2, separation 2d0 capacitor 5: area A0 , separation d0 /2 Rank these according to their capacitances, least to greatest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 B. 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 5, 3 and 4 tie, then 1, 2 D. 4, 1 and 2 tie, then 5, 3 E. 3, 5, 1 and 2 tie, 1, 4 9. The capacitance of a parallel-plate capacitor can be increased by: A. increasing the charge B. decreasing the charge C. increasing the plate separation D. decreasing the plate separation E. decreasing the plate area 10. If both the plate area and the plate separation of a parallel-plate capacitor are doubled, the capacitance is: A. doubled B. halved C. unchanged D. tripled E. quadrupled Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 365 11. If the plate area of an isolated charged parallel-plate capacitor is doubled: A. the electric eld is doubled B. the potential dierence is halved C. the charge on each plate is halved D. the surface charge density on each plate is doubled E. none of the above 12. If the plate separation of an isolated charged parallel-plate capacitor is doubled: A. the electric eld is doubled B. the potential dierence is halved C. the charge on each plate is halved D. the surface charge density on each plate is doubled E. none of the above 13. Pulling the plates of an isolated charged capacitor apart: A. increases the capacitance B. increases the potential dierence C. does not aect the potential dierence D. decreases the potential dierence E. does not aect the capacitance 14. If the charge on a parallel-plate capacitor is doubled: A. the capacitance is halved B. the capacitance is doubled C. the electric eld is halved D. the electric eld is doubled E. the surface charge density is not changed on either plate 15. A parallel-plate capacitor has a plate area of 0.2 m2 and a plate separation of 0.1 mm. To obtain an electric eld of 2.0 106 V/m between the plates, the magnitude of the charge on each plate should be: A. 8.9 107 C B. 1.8 106 C C. 3.5 106 C D. 7.1 106 C E. 1.4 105 C 366 Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 16. A parallel-plate capacitor has a plate area of 0.2 m2 and a plate separation of 0.1 mm. If the charge on each plate has a magnitude of 4 106 C the potential dierence across the plates is approximately: A. 0 B. 4 102 V C. 1 102 V D. 2 102 V E. 4 108 V 17. The capacitance of a spherical capacitor with inner radius a and outer radius b is proportional to: A. a/b B. b a C. b2 a2 D. ab/(b a) E. ab/(b2 a2 ) 18. The capacitance of a single isolated spherical conductor with radius R is proportional to: A. R B. R2 C. 1/R D. 1/R2 E. none of these 19. Two conducting spheres have radii of R1 and R2 , with R1 greater than R2 . If they are far apart the capacitance is proportional to: A. R1 R2 /(R1 R2 ) 2 2 B. R1 R2 C. (R1 R2 )/R1 R2 2 2 D. R1 + R2 E. none of these 20. The capacitance of a cylindrical capacitor can be increased by: A. decreasing both the radius of the inner cylinder and the length B. increasing both the radius of the inner cylinder and the length C. increasing the radius of the outer cylindrical shell and decreasing the length D. decreasing the radius of the inner cylinder and increasing the radius of the outer cylindrical shell E. only by decreasing the length Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 367 21. A battery is used to charge a series combination of two identical capacitors. If the potential dierence across the battery terminals is V and total charge Q ows through the battery during the charging process then the charge on the positive plate of each capacitor and the potential dierence across each capacitor are: A. Q/2 and V /2, respectively B. Q and V , respectively C. Q/2 and V , respectively D. Q and V /2, respectively E. Q and 2V , respectively 22. A battery is used to charge a parallel combination of two identical capacitors. If the potential dierence across the battery terminals is V and total charge Q ows through the battery during the charging process then the charge on the positive plate of each capacitor and the potential dierence across each capacitor are: A. Q/2 and V /2, respectively B. Q and V , respectively C. Q/2 and V , respectively D. Q and V /2, respectively E. Q and 2V , respectively 23. A 2-F and a 1-F capacitor are connected in series and a potential dierence is applied across the combination. The 2-F capacitor has: A. twice the charge of the 1-F capacitor B. half the charge of the 1-F capacitor C. twice the potential dierence of the 1-F capacitor D. half the potential dierence of the 1-F capacitor E. none of the above 24. A 2-F and a 1-F capacitor are connected in parallel and a potential dierence is applied across the combination. The 2-F capacitor has: A. twice the charge of the 1-F capacitor B. half the charge of the 1-F capacitor C. twice the potential dierence of the 1-F capacitor D. half the potential dierence of the 1-F capacitor E. none of the above 25. Let Q denote charge, V denote potential dierence, and U denote stored energy. Of these quantities, capacitors in series must have the same: A. Q only B. V only C. U only D. Q and U only E. V and U only 368 Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 26. Let Q denote charge, V denote potential dierence, and U denote stored energy. Of these quantities, capacitors in parallel must have the same: A. Q only B. V only C. U only D. Q and U only E. V and U only 27. Capacitors C1 and C2 are connected in parallel. The equivalent capacitance is given by: A. C1 C2 /(C1 + C2 ) B. (C1 + C2 )/C1 C2 C. 1/(C1 + C2 ) D. C1 /C2 E. C1 + C2 28. Capacitors C1 and C2 are connected in series. The equivalent capacitance is given by: A. C1 C2 /(C1 + C2 ) B. (C1 + C2 )/C1 C2 C. 1/(C1 + C2 ) D. C1 /C2 E. C1 + C2 29. Capacitors C1 and C2 are connected in series and a potential dierence is applied to the combination. If the capacitor that is equivalent to the combination has the same potential dierence, then the charge on the equivalent capacitor is the same as: A. the charge on C1 B. the sum of the charges on C1 and C2 C. the dierence of the charges on C1 and C2 D. the product of the charges on C1 and C2 E. none of the above 30. Capacitors C1 and C2 are connected in parallel and a potential dierence is applied to the combination. If the capacitor that is equivalent to the combination has the same potential dierence, then the charge on the equivalent capacitor is the same as: A. the charge on C1 B. the sum of the charges on C1 and C2 C. the dierence of the charges on C1 and C2 D. the product of the charges on C1 and C2 E. none of the above Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 369 31. Two identical capacitors are connected in series and two, each identical to the rst, are conthe equivalent nected in parallel. The equivalent capacitance of the series connection is capacitance of parallel connection. A. twice B. four times C. half D. one-fourth E. the same as 32. Two identical capacitors, each with capacitance C , are connected in parallel and the combination is connected in series to a third identical capacitor. The equivalent capacitance of this arrangement is: A. 2C/3 B. C C. 3C/2 D. 2C E. 3C 33. A 2-F and a 1-F capacitor are connected in series and charged from a battery. They store charges P and Q, respectively. When disconnected and charged separately using the same battery, they have charges R and S , respectively. Then: A. R > S > Q = P B. P > Q > R = S C. R > P = Q > S D. R = P > S = Q E. R > P > S = Q 34. Capacitor C1 is connected alone to a battery and charged until the magnitude of the charge on each plate is 4.0 108 C. Then it is removed from the battery and connected to two other capacitors C2 and C3 , as shown. The charge on the positive plate of C1 is then 1.0 108 C. The charges on the positive plates of C2 and C3 are: C1 A. B. C. D. E. 370 q2 = 3.0 108 C q2 = 2.0 108 C q2 = 5.0 108 C q2 = 3.0 108 C q2 = 1.0 108 C Chapter 25: and and and and and q3 q3 q3 q3 q3 = 3.0 108 C = 2.0 108 C = 1.0 108 C = 1.0 108 C = 3.0 108 C CAPACITANCE C2 C3 35. Each of the four capacitors shown is 500 F. The voltmeter reads 1000 V. The magnitude of the charge, in coulombs, on each capacitor plate is: ......... .......... . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. .......... ........ V A. B. C. D. E. 0.2 0.5 20 50 none of these 36. The diagram shows four 6-F capacitors. The capacitance between points a and b is: a b A. B. C. D. E. 3 F 4 F 6 F 9 F 1 F 37. Each of the two 25-F capacitors shown is initially uncharged. How many coulombs of charge pass through the ammeter A after the switch S is closed? .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. S 4000 V .......... ............ ... .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. ... .... ..... ..... ... .... A A. B. C. D. E. 0.10 0.20 10 0.05 none of these Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 371 38. A 20-F capacitor is charged to 200 V. Its stored energy is: A. 4000 J B. 4 J C. 0.4 J D. 2000 J E. 0.1 J 39. A charged capacitor stores 10 C at 40 V. Its stored energy is: A. 400 J B. 4 J C. 0.2 J D. 2.5 J E. 200 J 40. A 2-F and a 1-F capacitor are connected in series and charged by a battery. They store energies P and Q, respectively. When disconnected and charged separately using the same battery, they store energies R and S , respectively. Then: A. R > P > S > Q B. P > Q > R > S C. R > P > Q > S D. P > R > S > Q E. R > S > Q > P 41. The quantity (1/2) 0 E 2 has the signicance of: A. energy/farad B. energy/coulomb C. energy D. energy/volume E. energy/volt 42. Capacitors A and B are identical. Capacitor A is charged so it stores 4 J of energy and capacitor B is uncharged. The capacitors are then connected in parallel. The total stored energy in the capacitors is now: A. 16 J B. 8 J C. 4 J D. 2 J E. 1 J 372 Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 43. To store a total of 0.040 J of energy in the two identical capacitors shown, each should have a capacitance of: 200 V A. B. C. D. E. 0.10 F 0.50 F0.10 F 1.0 J 1.5 F 2.0 F 44. A battery is used to charge a parallel-plate capacitor, after which it is disconnected. Then the plates are pulled apart to twice their original separation. This process will double the: A. capacitance B. surface charge density on each plate C. stored energy D. electric eld between the two places E. charge on each plate 45. A parallel-plate capacitor has a plate area of 0.3 m2 and a plate separation of 0.1 mm. If the charge on each plate has a magnitude of 5 106 C then the force exerted by one plate on the other has a magnitude of about: A. 0 B. 5 N C. 9 N D. 1 104 N E. 9 105 N 46. A certain capacitor has a capacitance of 5.0 F. After it is charged to 5.0 C and isolated, the plates are brought closer together so its capacitance becomes 10 F. The work done by the agent is about: A. zero B. 1.25 106 J C. 1.25 106 J D. 8.3 107 J E. 8.3 107 J Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 373 47. A dielectric slab is slowly inserted between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor, while the potential dierence between the plates is held constant by a battery. As it is being inserted: A. the capacitance, the potential dierence between the plates, and the charge on the positive plate all increase B. the capacitance, the potential dierence between the plates, and the charge on the positive plate all decrease C. the potential dierence between the plates increases, the charge on the positive plate decreases, and the capacitance remains the same D. the capacitance and the charge on the positive plate decrease but the potential dierence between the plates remains the same E. the capacitance and the charge on the positive plate increase but the potential dierence between the plates remains the same 48. An air-lled parallel-plate capacitor has a capacitance of 1 pF. The plate separation is then doubled and a wax dielectric is inserted, completely lling the space between the plates. As a result, the capacitance becomes 2 pF. The dielectric constant of the wax is: A. 0.25 B. 0.5 C. 2.0 D. 4.0 E. 8.0 49. One of materials listed below is to be placed between two identical metal sheets, with no, air gap, to form a parallel-plate capacitor. Which produces the greatest capacitance? A. material of thickness 0.1 mm and dielectric constant 2 B. material of thickness 0.2 mm and dielectric constant 3 C. material of thickness 0.3 mm and dielectric constant 2 D. material of thickness 0.4 mm and dielectric constant 8 E. material of thickness 0.5 mm and dielectric constant 11 50. Two capacitors are identical except that one is lled with air and the other with oil. Both capacitors carry the same charge. The ratio of the electric elds Eair /Eoil is: A. between 0 and 1 B. 0 C. 1 D. between 1 and innity E. innite 374 Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 51. A parallel-plate capacitor, with air dielectric, is charged by a battery, after which the battery is disconnected. A slab of glass dielectric is then slowly inserted between the plates. As it is being inserted: A. a force repels the glass out of the capacitor B. a force attracts the glass into the capacitor C. no force acts on the glass D. a net charge appears on the glass E. the glass makes the plates repel each other 52. Two parallel-plate capacitors with the same plate separation but dierent capacitance are connected in parallel to a battery. Both capacitors are lled with air. The quantity that is NOT the same for both capacitors when they are fully charged is: A. potential dierence B. energy density C. electric eld between the plates D. charge on the positive plate E. dielectric constant 53. Two parallel-plate capacitors with the same plate area but dierent capacitance are connected in parallel to a battery. Both capacitors are lled with air. The quantity that is the same for both capacitors when they are fully charged is: A. potential dierence B. energy density C. electric eld between the plates D. charge on the positive plate E. plate separation 54. Two parallel-plate capacitors with dierent plate separation but the same capacitance are connected in series to a battery. Both capacitors are lled with air. The quantity that is NOT the same for both capacitors when they are fully charged is: A. potential dierence B. stored energy C. electric eld between the plates D. charge on the positive plate E. dielectric constant 55. Two parallel-plate capacitors with dierent capacitance but the same plate separation are connected in series to a battery. Both capacitors are lled with air. The quantity that is the same for both capacitors when they are fully charged is: A. potential dierence B. stored energy C. energy density D. electric eld between the plates E. charge on the positive plate Chapter 25: CAPACITANCE 375 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 1. A car battery is rated at 80 A h. An ampere-hour is a unit of: A. power B. energy C. current D. charge E. force 2. Current has units: A. kilowatthour B. coulomb/second C. coulomb D. volt E. ohm 3. Current has units: A. kilowatthour B. ampere C. coulomb D. volt E. ohm 4. The units of resistivity are: A. ohm B. ohmmeter C. ohm/meter D. ohm/meter2 E. none of these 5. The rate at which electrical energy is used may be measured in: A. watt/second B. wattsecond C. watt D. joulesecond E. kilowatthour 376 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 6. Energy may be measured in: A. kilowatt B. joulesecond C. watt D. wattsecond E. volt/ohm 7. Which one of the following quantities is correctly matched to its unit? A. Power kWh B. Energy kW C. Potential dierence J/C D. Current A/s E. Resistance V/C 8. Current is a measure of: A. force that moves a charge past a point B. resistance to the movement of a charge past a point C. energy used to move a charge past a point D. amount of charge that moves past a point per unit time E. speed with which a charge moves past a point 9. A 60-watt light bulb carries a current of 0.5 A. The total charge passing through it in one hour is: A. 120 C B. 3600 C C. 3000 C D. 2400 C E. 1800 C 10. A 10-ohm resistor has a constant current. If 1200 C of charge ow through it in 4 minutes what is the value of the current? A. 3.0 A B. 5.0 A C. 11 A D. 15 A E. 20 A Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 377 11. Conduction electrons move to the right in a certain wire. This indicates that: A. the current density and electric eld both point right B. the current density and electric eld both point left C. the current density points right and the electric eld points left D. the current density points left and the electric eld points right E. the current density points left but the direction of the electric eld is unknown 12. Two wires made of dierent materials have the same uniform current density. They carry the same current only if: A. their lengths are the same B. their cross-sectional areas are the same C. both their lengths and cross-sectional areas are the same D. the potential dierences across them are the same E. the electric elds in them are the same 13. A wire with a length of 150 m and a radius of 0.15 mm carries a current with a uniform current 2 density of 2.8 107 A/m . The current is: A. 0.63 A2 B. 2.0 A C. 5.9 A2 D. 296 A E. 400 A2 14. In a conductor carrying a current we expect the electron drift speed to be: A. much greater than the average electron speed B. much less than the average electron speed C. about the same as the average electron speed D. less than the average electron speed at low temperature and greater than the average electron speed at high temperature E. less than the average electron speed at high temperature and greater than the average electron speed at low temperature 15. Two substances are identical except that the electron mean free time for substance A is twice the electron mean free time for substance B. If the same electric eld exists in both substances the electron drift speed in A is: A. the same as in B B. twice that in B C. half that in B D. four times that in B E. one-fourth that in B 378 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 16. The current is zero in a conductor when no potential dierence is applied because: A. the electrons are not moving B. the electrons are not moving fast enough C. for every electron with a given velocity there is another with a velocity of equal magnitude and opposite direction. D. equal numbers of electrons and protons are moving together E. otherwise Ohms law would not be valid 17. The current density is the same in two wires. Wire A has twice the free-electron concentration of wire B. The drift speed of electrons in A is: A. twice that of electrons in B B. four times that of electrons in B C. half that of electrons in B D. one-fourth that of electrons in B E. the same as that of electrons in B 18. Copper contains 8.4 1028 free electrons/m3 . A copper wire of cross-sectional area 7.4 107 m2 carries a current of 1 A. The electron drift speed is approximately: A. 3 108 m/s B. 103 m/s C. 1 m/s D. 104 m/s E. 1023 m/s 19. If J is the current density and dA is a vector element of area then the integral area represents: A. the electric ux through the area B. the average current density at the position of the area C. the resistance of the area D. the resistivity of the area E. the current through the area J dA over an 20. If the potential dierence across a resistor is doubled: A. only the current is doubled B. only the current is halved C. only the resistance is doubled D. only the resistance is halved E. both the current and resistance are doubled Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 379 21. Five cylindrical wires are made of the same material. Their lengths and radii are wire 1: length , radius r wire 2: length /4, radius r/2 wire 3: length /2, radius r/2 wire 4: length , radius r/2 wire 5: length 5 , radius 2r Rank the wires according to their resistances, least to greatest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 B. 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 1 and 2 tie, then 5, 3, 4 D. 1, 3, 4, 2, 5 E. 1, 2, 4, 3, 5 22. Of A. B. C. D. E. the following, the copper conductor that has the least resistance is: thin, long and hot thick, short and cool thick, long and hot thin, short and cool thin, short and hot 23. A cylindrical copper rod has resistance R. It is reformed to twice its original length with no change of volume. Its new resistance is: A. R B. 2R C. 4R D. 8R E. R/2 24. The resistance of a rod does NOT depend on: A. its temperature B. its material C. its length D. its conductivity E. the shape of its (xed) cross-sectional area 25. A certain wire has resistance R. Another wire, of the same material, has half the length and half the diameter of the rst wire. The resistance of the second wire is: A. R/4 B. R/2 C. R D. 2R E. 4R 380 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 26. A nichrome wire is 1 m long and 1 106 m2 in cross-sectional area. When connected to a potential dierence of 2 V, a current of 4 A exists in the wire. The resistivity of this nichrome is: A. 107 m B. 2 107 m C. 4 107 m D. 5 107 m E. 8 107 m 27. Two conductors are made of the same material and have the same length. Conductor A is a solid wire of diameter 1 m. Conductor B is a hollow tube of inside diameter 1 m and outside diameter 2 m. The ratio of their resistance, RA /RB , is: A. 1 2 B. C. 2 D. 3 E. 4 28. Conductivity is: A. the same as resistivity, it is just more convenient to use for good conductors B. expressed in 1 C. equal to 1/resistance D. expressed in ( m)1 E. not a meaningful quantity for an insulator 29. A certain sample carries a current of 4 A when the potential dierence is 2 V and a current of 10 A when the potential dierence is 4 V. This sample: A. obeys Ohms law B. has a resistance of 0.5 at 1 V C. has a resistance of 2.5 at 1 V D. has a resistance of 2.5 at 2 V E. does not have a resistance 30. A current of 0.5 A exists in a 60-ohm lamp. The applied potential dierence is: A. 15 V B. 30 V C. 60 V D. 120 V E. none of these Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 381 31. Which of the following graphs best represents the current-voltage relationship of an incandescent light bulb? i ... .... ........ . .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . i i .... . .. ....... ......... . ..... . .. ...... V V . .. .. . . ... ... . .. ... ..... .. ....... B A i. .. .. .. ... .. ... .... ... .... ......... .... V C i ......................... ......... ..... ..... .. V V E D 32. Which of the following graphs best represents the current-voltage relationship for a device that obeys Ohms law? i . .. ......... . .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. . i V A i. .. .. .. ... .. ... .... ... .... ......... .... i . ... . .. ... . .. . ... ... .. ... .. ... . .. .... . V B .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ... ... ....... . ..... V C i ......................... ......... ..... ..... .. V D V E 33. Two wires are made of the same material and have the same length but dierent radii. They are joined end-to-end and a potential dierence is maintained across the combination. Of the following the quantity that is the same for both wires is: A. potential dierence B. current C. current density D. electric eld E. conduction electron drift speed 382 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 34. For A. B. C. D. E. an ohmic substance the resistivity is the proportionality constant for: current and potential dierence current and electric eld current density and potential dierence current density and electric eld potential dierence and electric eld 35. For A. B. C. D. E. an ohmic resistor, resistance is the proportionality constant for: potential dierence and electric eld current and electric eld current and length current and cross-sectional area current and potential dierence 36. For A. B. C. D. E. an ohmic substance, the resistivity depends on: the electric eld the potential dierence the current density the electron mean free time the cross-sectional area of the sample 37. For A. B. C. D. E. a cylindrical resistor made of ohmic material, the resistance does NOT depend on: the current the length the cross-sectional area the resistivity the electron drift velocity 38. For A. B. C. D. E. an ohmic substance, the electron drift velocity is proportional to: the cross-sectional area of the sample the length of the sample the mass of an electron the electric eld in the sample none of the above Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 383 39. You wish to triple the rate of energy dissipation in a heating device. To do this you could triple: A. the potential dierence keeping the resistance the same B. the current keeping the resistance the same C. the resistance keeping the potential dierence the same D. the resistance keeping the current the same E. both the potential dierence and current 40. A student kept her 60-watt, 120-volt study lamp turned on from 2:00 PM until 2:00 AM. How many coulombs of charge went through it? A. 150 B. 3, 600 C. 7, 200 D. 18, 000 E. 21, 600 41. A at iron is marked 120 V, 600 W. In normal use, the current in it is: A. 2 A B. 4 A C. 5 A D. 7.2 A E. 0.2 A 42. An certain resistor dissipates 0.5 W when connected to a 3 V potential dierence. When connected to a 1 V potential dierence, this resistor will dissipate: A. 0.5 W B. 0.167 W C. 1.5 W D. 0.056 W E. none of these 43. An A. B. C. D. E. ordinary light bulb is marked 60 W, 120 V. Its resistance is: 60 120 180 240 15 384 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 44. The mechanical equivalent of heat is 1 cal = 4.18 J. The specic heat of water is 1 cal/g K. An electric immersion water heater, rated at 400 W, should heat a kilogram of water from 10 C to 30 C in about: A. 3.5 min B. 1 min C. 15 min D. 45 min E. 15 s 45. It is better to send 10, 000 kW of electric power long distances at 10, 000 V rather than at 220 V because: A. there is less heating in the transmission wires B. the resistance of the wires is less at high voltages C. more current is transmitted at high voltages D. the insulation is more eective at high voltages E. the iR drop along the wires is greater at high voltage 46. Suppose the electric company charges 10 cents per kWh. How much does it cost to use a 125 W lamp 4 hours a day for 30 days? A. $1.20 B. $1.50 C. $1.80 D. $7.20 E. none of these 47. A certain x-ray tube requires a current of 7 mA at a voltage of 80 kV. The rate of energy dissipation (in watts) is: A. 560 B. 5600 C. 26 D. 11.4 E. 87.5 48. The mechanical equivalent of heat is 1 cal = 4.18 J. A heating coil, connected to a 120-V source, provides 60, 000 calories in 10 minutes. The current in the coil is: A. 0.83 A B. 2 A C. 3.5 A D. 20 A E. 50 A Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE 385 49. You buy a 75 W light bulb. The label means that: A. no matter how you use the bulb, the power will be 75 W B. the bulb was lled with 75 W at the factory C. the actual power dissipated will be much higher than 75 W since most of the power appears as heat D. the bulb is expected to burn out after you use up its 75 W E. none of the above 50. A current of 0.3 A is passed through a lamp for 2 minutes using a 6-V power supply. The energy dissipated by this lamp during the 2 minutes is: A. 1.8 J B. 12 J C. 20 J D. 36 J E. 216 J 386 Chapter 26: CURRENT AND RESISTANCE Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 1. The sum of the currents into a junction equals the sum of the currents out of the junction is a consequence of: A. Newtons third law B. Ohms law C. Newtons second law D. conservation of energy E. conservation of charge 2. The sum of the emfs and potential dierences around a closed loop equals zero is a consequence of: A. Newtons third law B. Ohms law C. Newtons second law D. conservation of energy E. conservation of charge 3. A portion of a circuit is shown, with the values of the currents given for some branches. What is the direction and value of the current i? 2 A 5A A. B. C. D. E. 4 A i 3 A 2 A , 6 A , 6 A , 4 A , 4 A , 2 A 4. Four wires meet at a junction. The rst carries 4 A into the junction, the second carries 5 A out of the junction, and the third carries 2 A out of the junction. The fourth carries: A. 7 A out of the junction B. 7 A into the junction C. 3 A out of the junction D. 3 A into the junction E. 1 A into the junction Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 387 5. In the context of the loop and junctions rules for electrical circuits a junction is: A. where a wire is connected to a resistor B. where a wire is connected to a battery C. where only two wires are joined D. where three or more wires are joined E. where a wire is bent 6. For any circuit the number of independent equations containing emfs, resistances, and currents equals: A. the number of junctions B. the number of junctions minus 1 C. the number of branches D. the number of branches minus 1 E. the number of closed loops 7. If a circuit has L closed loops, B branches, and J junctions the number of independent loop equations is: A. B J + 1 B. B J C. B D. L E. L J 8. A battery is connected across a series combination of two identical resistors. If the potential dierence across the terminals is V and the current in the battery is i, then: A. the potential dierence across each resistor is V and the current in each resistor is i B. the potential dierence across each resistor is V /2 and the current in each resistor is i/2 C. the potential dierence across each resistor is V and the current in each resistor is i/2 D. the potential dierence across each resistor is V /2 and the current in each resistor is i E. none of the above are true 9. A battery is connected across a parallel combination of two identical resistors. If the potential dierence across the terminals is V and the current in the battery is i, then: A. the potential dierence across each resistor is V and the current in each resistor is i B. the potential dierence across each resistor is V /2 and the current in each resistor is i/2 C. the potential dierence across each resistor is V and the current in each resistor is i/2 D. the potential dierence across each resistor is V /2 and the current in each resistor is i E. none of the above are true 388 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 10. A total resistance of 3.0 is to be produced by combining an unknown resistor R with a 12 resistor. What is the value of R and how is it to be connected to the 12 resistor? A. 4.0 , parallel B. 4.0 , series C. 2.4 , parallel D. 2.4 , series E. 9.0 , series 11. By using only two resistors, R1 and R2 , a student is able to obtain resistances of 3 , 4 , 12 , and 16 . The values of R1 and R2 (in ohms) are: A. 3, 4 B. 2, 12 C. 3, 16 D. 4, 12 E. 4, 16 12. Four 20- resistors are connected in parallel and the combination is connected to a 20-V emf device. The current in the device is: A. 0.25 A B. 1.0 A C. 4.0 A D. 5.0 A E. 100 A 13. Four 20- resistors are connected in parallel and the combination is connected to a 20-V emf device. The current in any one of the resistors is: A. 0.25 A B. 1.0 A C. 4.0 A D. 5.0 A E. 100 A 14. Four 20- resistors are connected in series and the combination is connected to a 20-V emf device. The current in any one of the resistors is: A. 0.25 A B. 1.0 A C. 4.0 A D. 5.0 A E. 100 A Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 389 15. Four 20- resistors are connected in series and the combination is connected to a 20-V emf device. The potential dierence across any one of the resistors is: A. 1 V B. 4 V C. 5 V D. 20 V E. 80 V 16. Nine identical wires, each of diameter d and length L, are connected in parallel. The combination has the same resistance as a single similar wire of length L but whose diameter is: A. 3d B. 9d C. d/3 D. d/9 E. d/81 17. Nine identical wires, each of diameter d and length L, are connected in series. The combination has the same resistance as a single similar wire of length L but whose diameter is: A. 3d B. 9d C. d/3 D. d/9 E. d/81 18. Two wires made of the same material have the same lengths but dierent diameters. They are connected in parallel to a battery. The quantity that is NOT the same for the wires is: A. the end-to-end potential dierence B. the current C. the current density D. the electric eld E. the electron drift velocity 19. Two wires made of the same material have the same lengths but dierent diameters. They are connected in series to a battery. The quantity that is the same for the wires is: A. the end-to-end potential dierence B. the current C. the current density D. the electric eld E. the electron drift velocity 390 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 20. The equivalent resistance between points 1 and 2 of the circuit shown is: 1 1 ... .. ... ... . ............. ... ... ... .. ... ... . ............. ... ... 1 ... ... ... ............... .. .. .. ... ... ... ............... .. .. .. 2 2 2 ... .... .. . . .... .... .... .. .... .... .... ... . . ... .... .. . .. .. ... 1 ......................... A. B. C. D. E. 4 3 4 5 6 7 21. Each of the resistors in the diagram has a resistance of 12 . The resistance of the entire circuit is: . .. ... ... . ............ ... ... . .. ... ... . ............ ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... A. B. C. D. E. .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... .. ... ... ... . ............. ... ... 5.76 25 48 120 none of these 22. The resistance of resistor 1 is twice the resistance of resistor 2. The two are connected in parallel and a potential dierence is maintained across the combination. Then: A. the current in 1 is twice that in 2 B. the current in 1 is half that in 2 C. the potential dierence across 1 is twice that across 2 D. the potential dierence across 1 is half that across 2 E. none of the above are true Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 391 23. The resistance of resistor 1 is twice the resistance of resistor 2. The two are connected in series and a potential dierence is maintained across the combination. Then: A. the current in 1 is twice that in 2 B. the current in 1 is half that in 2 C. the potential dierence across 1 is twice that across 2 D. the potential dierence across 1 is half that across 2 E. none of the above are true 24. Resistor 1 has twice the resistance of resistor 2. The two are connected in series and a potential dierence is maintained across the combination. The rate of thermal energy generation in 1 is: A. the same as that in 2 B. twice that in 2 C. half that in 2 D. four times that in 2 E. one-fourth that in 2 25. Resistor 1 has twice the resistance of resistor 2. The two are connected in parallel and a potential dierence is maintained across the combination. The rate of thermal energy generation in 1 is: A. the same as that in 2 B. twice that in 2 C. half that in 2 D. four times that in 2 E. one-fourth that in 2 26. The emf of a battery is equal to its terminal potential dierence: A. under all conditions B. only when the battery is being charged C. only when a large current is in the battery D. only when there is no current in the battery E. under no conditions 27. The terminal potential dierence of a battery is less than its emf: A. under all conditions B. only when the battery is being charged C. only when the battery is being discharged D. only when there is no current in the battery E. under no conditions 392 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 28. A battery has an emf of 9 V and an internal resistance of 2 . If the potential dierence across its terminals is greater than 9 V: A. it must be connected across a large external resistance B. it must be connected across a small external resistance C. the current must be out of the positive terminal D. the current must be out of the negative terminal E. the current must be zero 29. A battery with an emf of 24 V is connected to a 6- resistor. As a result, current of 3 A exists in the resistor. The terminal potential dierence of the battery is: A. 0 B. 6 V C. 12 V D. 18 V E. 24 V 30. In the diagram R1 > R2 > R3 . Rank the three resistors according to the current in them, least to greatest. R1 ... ... ... ... . ..... ..... ..... ... ... ... . ... .... . .. .. .. .... .... .... ... . .. .... .... .... ... .. .. . E R2 ... ... ... ... . ..... ..... ..... ... ... ... R3 A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 2 3, 1, 3 All are the same 31. Resistances of 2.0 , 4.0 , and 6.0 and a 24-V emf device are all in parallel. The current in the 2.0- resistor is: A. 12 A B. 4.0 A C. 2.4 A D. 2.0 A E. 0.50 A Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 393 32. Resistances of 2.0 , 4.0 , and 6.0 and a 24-V emf device are all in series. The potential dierence across the 2.0- resistor is: A. 4 V B. 8 V C. 12 V D. 24 V E. 48 V 33. A battery with an emf of 12 V and an internal resistance of 1 is used to charge a battery with an emf of 10 V and an internal resistance of 1 . The current in the circuit is: A. 1 A B. 2 A C. 4 A D. 11 A E. 22 A 34. In the diagram, the current in the 3- resistor is 4 A. The potential dierence between points 1 and 2 is: 3 A. B. C. D. E. 2 ... ... .... .... . .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... 1 ... ... .... .... . .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... 2 0.75 V 0.8 V 1.25 V 12 V 20 V 35. The current in the 5.0- resistor in the circuit shown is: . ... .... .... . ............... 6.0 12 V . ... .... .... ............... ... ... .... .... . ................ ... 4.0 12 . ... .... .... . ............... 3.0 A. B. C. D. E. 394 0.42 A 0.67 A 1.5 A 2.4 A 3.0 A Chapter 27: CIRCUITS . ... .... .... . ............... 5.0 36. A 3- and a 1.5- resistor are wired in parallel and the combination is wired in series to a 4- resistor and a 10-V emf device. The current in the 3- resistor is: A. 0.33 A B. 0.67 A C. 2.0 A D. 3.3 A E. 6.7 A 37. A 3- and a 1.5- resistor are wired in parallel and the combination is wired in series to a 4- resistor and a 10-V emf device. The potential dierence across the 3- resistor is: A. 2.0 V B. 6.0 V C. 8.0 V D. 10 V E. 12 V 38. Two identical batteries, each with an emf of 18 V and an internal resistance of 1 , are wired in parallel by connecting their positive terminals together and connecting their negative terminals together. The combination is then wired across a 4- resistor. The current in the 4- resistor is: A. 1.0 A B. 2.0 A C. 4.0 A D. 3.6 A E. 7.2 A 39. Two identical batteries, each with an emf of 18 V and an internal resistance of 1 , are wired in parallel by connecting their positive terminals together and connecting their negative terminals together. The combination is then wired across a 4- resistor. The current in each battery is: A. 1.0 A B. 2.0 A C. 4.0 A D. 3.6 A E. 7.2 A Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 395 40. Two identical batteries, each with an emf of 18 V and an internal resistance of 1 , are wired in parallel by connecting their positive terminals together and connecting their negative terminals together. The combination is then wired across a 4- resistor. The potential dierence across the 4- resistor is: A. 4.0 V B. 8.0 V C. 14 V D. 16 V E. 29 V 41. In the diagrams, all light bulbs are identical and all emf devices are identical. In which circuit (A, B, C, D, E) will the bulbs glow with the same brightness as in circuit X? ....... ........ . .. .. .... . . ..... .. . ..... . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. ... ... .. . .... ...... . .. .. . .... . ........ . .. ... .. .. .... .. . ..... . . ..... . . . ... . .. . . .. . .. ... .. .. ...... . ...... .. .. .. . ....... ........ . .. .. .... . . ..... .. . ..... . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. ... ... .. . .... ...... . .. .. A . . .. . . ....... ....... ....... .... ... .... ... .... ... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. . ..... .. . ..... .. . ..... .. . . . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. . .. .. ...... ...... ...... ..... ..... ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. . .... . ........ . .. ... .. .. .... .. . ..... . . ..... . . . ... . .. . . .. . .. ... .. .. .. ...... . ...... .. .. B C .. ....... ... .... ......... . . ......... . ..... . .... . . .......... .. . ........... ...... .. ........ ...... .. ....... ... .... ......... . . ......... . ..... . .... . . .......... .. . ........... ...... .. ........ ...... ...... ....... . .. .... . .. ..... .. . ... . .. . . ..... . . ... . . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. ... .. ..... ...... .. .. D X .. .... . .... ..... ...... ... . . ......... . .......... .. . . . . .......... . ......... ..... . ..... .. ....... .... ...... ....... . .. .... . .. ..... .. . ... . . .. . ..... . . ... . . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. ... .. ..... ...... .. .. E 42. In the diagrams, all light bulbs are identical and all emf devices are identical. In which circuit (A, B, C, D, E) will the bulbs be dimmest? ..... ....... . .. ...... .. .... .. . . ..... . . ... . . . .. . . .. . . . .. .. ... .. .. ....... ...... .. .. .. ..... ..... ..... ....... ....... ....... .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. ..... .. .. ..... .. .. ..... .. . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . .. .. .. . ..... . . ..... . . ..... . . ... . . . ... . . . ... . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... . ..... ..... .. .... .. . ...... ...... .. .. .. . .. .. ..... ....... . .. ...... .. .... .. . . ..... . . ... . . . .. . . .. . . . .. .. ... .. .. ....... ...... .. .. .. A ..... ....... .. . . .. .. ..... .. . ..... . .. . ..... . . ... . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. ........ ...... .. .. . ... ...... ... . ... .......... . .. . . ..... . . ..... . . ... . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. ........ ...... .. .. C 396 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS B ... ..... ... .. .. .. .. .... ... . ..... .. . ..... . . ... . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. ... .. .. ...... . ..... .. ... ..... ... .. .. .. .. .... ... . ..... . . ..... . . . ... . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. ... .. .. ...... . ..... .. D ..... ....... .. ... ... .. .. .... . . ..... . . . ..... . . ... . . .. . . .. .. ... ... .. ...... ...... .. .. .. .. ... ....... .. .. ... ... .. .... .. . ..... . . ..... . . ... . . . .. .. . . .. .. ... .. ....... ...... .. .. .. E 43. A 120-V power line is protected by a 15-A fuse. What is the maximum number of 120 V, 500 W light bulbs that can be operated at full brightness from this line? A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 4 E. 5 44. Two 110-V light bulbs, one 25 W and the other 100 W, are connected in series to a 110 V source. Then: A. the current in the 100-W bulb is greater than that in the 25-W bulb B. the current in the 100-W bulb is less than that in the 25-W bulb C. both bulbs will light with equal brightness D. each bulb will have a potential dierence of 55 V E. none of the above 45. A resistor with resistance R1 and a resistor with resistance R2 are connected in parallel to an ideal battery with emf E . The rate of thermal energy generation in the resistor with resistance R1 is: A. E 2 /R1 B. E 2 R1 /(R1 + R2 )2 C. E 2 /(R1 + R2 ) D. E 2 /R2 2 E. E 2 R1 /R2 46. In an antique automobile, a 6-V battery supplies a total of 48 W to two identical headlights in parallel. The resistance (in ohms) of each bulb is: A. 0.67 B. 1.5 C. 3 D. 4 E. 8 47. Resistor 1 has twice the resistance of resistor 2. They are connected in parallel to a battery. The ratio of the thermal energy generation rate in 1 to that in 2 is: A. 1 : 4 B. 1 : 2 C. 1 : 1 D. 2 : 1 E. 4 : 1 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 397 48. A series circuit consists of a battery with internal resistance r and an external resistor R. If these two resistances are equal (r = R) then the thermal energy generated per unit time by the internal resistance r is: A. the same as by R B. half that by R C. twice that by R D. one-third that by R E. unknown unless the emf is given 49. The positive terminals of two batteries with emfs of E1 and E2 , respectively, are connected together. Here E2 > E1 . The circuit is completed by connecting the negative terminals. If each battery has an internal resistance r , the rate with which electrical energy is converted to chemical energy in the smaller battery is: 2 A. E1 /r 2 B. E1 /2r C. (E2 E1 )E1 /r D. (E2 E1 )E1 /2r 2 E. E2 /2r 50. In the gure, voltmeter V1 reads 600 V, voltmeter V2 reads 580 V, and ammeter A reads 100 A. The power wasted in the transmission line connecting the power house to the consumer is: power house 398 1 kW 2 kW 58 kW 59 kW 60 kW Chapter 27: CIRCUITS A ......... .......... .. .. . . . . . . . .. 1 .. . .. ......... ......... V A. B. C. D. E. ..... ........ ... .... .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ......... ..... ... ......... .......... .. .. . . . . . . . .. 2 .. . .. ......... ......... V transmission line consumer 51. The circuit shown was wired for the purpose of measuring the resistance of the lamp L. Inspection shows that: . . ..... ... . . . ... . .. . . . . . ... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. R ........ .......... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ......... ........ L ......... .......... .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .......... ........ ........ .......... .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ......... ........ A to 120 V A. B. C. D. E. V voltmeter V and rheostat R should be interchanged the circuit is satisfactory the ammeter A should be in parallel with R, not L the meters, V and A, should be interchanged L and V should be interchanged 52. When switch S is open, the ammeter in the circuit shown reads 2.0 A. When S is closed, the ammeter reading: 15 ... ... .... .... . .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... ......... .......... .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .......... ......... A 20 ... .... .. . .. . . .. .... .... .. . .. . . .. .... .... .... ... ... ... ... .... .. . .. . . . .... .... .... ... . .. .... .... .... .. ... ... 60 ........... . . .. .. S A. B. C. D. E. increases slightly remains the same decreases slightly doubles halves 53. A certain galvanometer has a resistance of 100 and requires 1 mA for full scale deection. To make this into a voltmeter reading 1 V full scale, connect a resistance of: A. 1000 in parallel B. 900 in series C. 1000 in series D. 10 in parallel E. 0.1 in series Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 399 54. To A. B. C. D. E. make a galvanometer into an ammeter, connect: a high resistance in parallel a high resistance in series a low resistance in series a low resistance in parallel a source of emf in series 55. A certain voltmeter has an internal resistance of 10, 000 and a range from 0 to 100 V. To give it a range from 0 to 1000 V, one should connect: A. 100, 000 in series B. 100, 000 in parallel C. 1000 in series D. 1000 in parallel E. 90, 000 in series 56. A certain ammeter has an internal resistance of 1 and a range from 0 to 50 mA. To make its range from 0 to 5 A, use: A. a series resistance of 99 B. an extremely large (say 106 ) series resistance C. a resistance of 99 in parallel D. a resistance of 1/99 in parallel E. a resistance of 1/1000 in parallel 57. A galvanometer has an internal resistance of 12 and requires 0.01 A for full scale deection. To convert it to a voltmeter reading 3 V full scale, one must use a series resistance of: A. 102 B. 288 C. 300 D. 360 E. 412 58. A certain voltmeter has an internal resistance of 10, 000 and a range from 0 to 12 V. To extend its range to 120 V, use a series resistance of: A. 1, 111 B. 90, 000 C. 100, 000 D. 108, 000 E. 120, 000 400 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 59. Four circuits have the form shown in the diagram. The capacitor is initially uncharged and the switch S is open. S .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . R . ... ... .... .... . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... E C The values of the emf E , resistance R, and capacitance C for each of the circuits are circuit 1: E = 18 V, R = 3 , C = 1 F circuit 2: E = 18 V, R = 6 , C = 9 F circuit 3: E = 12 V, R = 1 , C = 7 F circuit 4: E = 10 V, R = 5 , C = 7 F Rank the circuits according to the current just after switch S is closed least to greatest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 4, 2, 3, 1 D. 4, 2, 1, 3 E. 3, 1, 2, 4 60. Four circuits have the form shown in the diagram. The capacitor is initially uncharged and the switch S is open. S .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . E R ... ... .... .... . .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... C The values of the emf E , resistance R, and capacitance C for each of the circuits are circuit 1: E = 18 V, R = 3 , C = 1 F circuit 2: E = 18 V, R = 6 , C = 9 F circuit 3: E = 12 V, R = 1 , C = 7 F circuit 4: E = 10 V, R = 5 , C = 7 F Rank the circuits according to the time after switch S is closed for the capacitors to reach half their nal charges, least to greatest. A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 4, 3, 2, 1 C. 1, 3, 4, 2 D. 1 and 2 tied, then 4, 3 E. 4, 3, then 1 and 2 tied Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 401 61. The time constant RC has units of: A. second/farad B. second/ohm C. 1/second D. second/watt E. none of these 62. In the circuit shown, both resistors have the same value R. Suppose switch S is initially closed. When it is then opened, the circuit has a time constant a . Conversely, suppose S is initially open. When it is then closed, the circuit has a time constant b . The ratio a /b is: . ... .... .... . ............... R C R ... ... ... ... ... ... S ... .... .. . . .... .... ... .. . ... . ..... .... .. .. E A. B. C. D. E. 1 2 0.5 0.667 1.5 63. In the circuit shown, the capacitor is initially uncharged. At time t = 0, switch S is closed. If denotes the time constant, the approximate current through the 3 resistor when t = /10 is: ... .. .. .. ............. .. .. .. ... S 6 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 10 V A. B. C. D. E. 402 0.38 A 0.50 A 0.75 A 1.0 A 1.5 A Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 6 F ... .... .. . . .... .... .... .. .... .... .... ... . .. 3 64. Suppose the current charging a capacitor is kept constant. Which graph below correctly gives the potential dierence V across the capacitor as a function of time? V .. ... ......... .... ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . V V ...................... ..................... t t A .. ... . .. .... . ... .... ... .... .. .... . . B V .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .......... ... D C V t t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t E 65. A charged capacitor is being discharged through a resistor. At the end of one time constant the charge has been reduced by (1 1/e) = 63% of its initial value. At the end of two time constants the charge has been reduced by what percent of its initial value? A. 82% B. 86% C. 100% D. Between 90% and 100% E. Need to know more data to answer the question 66. An initially uncharged capacitor C is connected in series with resistor R. This combination is then connected to a battery of emf V0 . Sucient time elapses so that a steady state is reached. Which of the following statements is NOT true? A. The time constant is independent of V0 B. The nal charge on C is independent of R C. The total thermal energy generated by R is independent of R D. The total thermal energy generated by R is independent of V0 E. The initial current (just after the battery was connected) is independent of C 67. A certain capacitor, in series with a resistor, is being charged. At the end of 10 ms its charge is half the nal value. The time constant for the process is about: A. 0.43 ms B. 2.3 ms C. 6.9 ms D. 10 ms E. 14 ms Chapter 27: CIRCUITS 403 68. A certain capacitor, in series with a 720- resistor, is being charged. At the end of 10 ms its charge is half the nal value. The capacitance is about: A. 9.6 F B. 14 F C. 20 F D. 7.2 F E. 10 F 69. In the capacitor discharge formula q = q0 et/RC the symbol t represents: A. the time constant B. the time it takes for C to lose the fraction 1/e of its initial charge C. the time it takes for C to lose the fraction (1 1/e) of its initial charge D. the time it takes for C to lose essentially all of its initial charge E. none of the above 404 Chapter 27: CIRCUITS Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 1. Units of a magnetic eld might be: A. Cm/s B. Cs/m C. C/kg D. kg/Cs E. N/Cm 2. In the formula F = q v B : A. F must be perpendicular to v but not necessarily to B B. F must be perpendicular to B but not necessarily to v C. v must be perpendicular to B but not necessarily to F D. all three vectors must be mutually perpendicular E. F must be perpendicular to both v and B 3. An electron moves in the negative x direction, through a uniform magnetic eld in the negative y direction. The magnetic force on the electron is: y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .... . ... . . .. . ... . .. ................................................................ ................................................................ ... .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . .. . ... . . .. .. . . . . .. . ... . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . v. ............. . . ............ . . . . . . .... . .. B . x z A. B. C. D. E. 4. At A. B. C. D. E. in the negative x direction in the positive y direction in the negative y direction in the positive z direction in the negative z direction any point the magnetic eld lines are in the direction of: the magnetic force on a moving positive charge the magnetic force on a moving negative charge the velocity of a moving positive charge the velocity of a moving negative charge none of the above Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 405 5. The magnetic force on a charged particle is in the direction of its velocity if: A. it is moving in the direction of the eld B. it is moving opposite to the direction of the eld C. it is moving perpendicular to the eld D. it is moving in some other direction E. never 6. A magnetic eld exerts a force on a charged particle: A. always B. never C. if the particle is moving across the eld lines D. if the particle is moving along the eld lines E. if the particle is at rest 7. The direction of the magnetic eld in a certain region of space is determined by ring a test charge into the region with its velocity in various directions in dierent trials. The eld direction is: A. one of the directions of the velocity when the magnetic force is zero B. the direction of the velocity when the magnetic force is a maximum C. the direction of the magnetic force D. perpendicular to the velocity when the magnetic force is zero E. none of the above 8. An electron is moving north in a region where the magnetic eld is south. The magnetic force exerted on the electron is: A. zero B. up C. down D. east E. west 9. A magnetic eld CANNOT: A. exert a force on a charged particle B. change the velocity of a charged particle C. change the momentum of a charged particle D. change the kinetic energy of a charged particle E. change the trajectory of a charged particle 406 Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 10. A proton (charge e), traveling perpendicular to a magnetic eld, experiences the same force as an alpha particle (charge 2e) which is also traveling perpendicular to the same eld. The ratio of their speeds, vproton /valpha , is: A. 0.5 B. 1 C. 2 D. 4 E. 8 11. A hydrogen atom that has lost its electron is moving east in a region where the magnetic eld is directed from south to north. It will be deected: A. up B. down C. north D. south E. not at all 12. A beam of electrons is sent horizontally down the axis of a tube to strike a uorescent screen at the end of the tube. On the way, the electrons encounter a magnetic eld directed vertically downward. The spot on the screen will therefore be deected: A. upward B. downward C. to the right as seen from the electron source D. to the left as seen from the electron source E. not at all 13. An electron (charge = 1.6 1019 C) is moving at 3 105 m/s in the positive x direction. A magnetic eld of 0.8 T is in the positive z direction. The magnetic force on the electron is: A. 0 B. 4 1014 N, in the positive z direction C. 4 1014 N, in the negative z direction D. 4 1014 N, in the positive y direction E. 4 1014 N, in the negative y direction 14. At one instant an electron (charge = 1.6 1019 C) is moving in the xy plane, the components of its velocity being vx = 5 105 m/s and vy = 3 105 m/s. A magnetic eld of 0.8 T is in the positive x direction. At that instant the magnitude of the magnetic force on the electron is: A. 0 B. 2.6 1014 N C. 3.8 1014 N D. 6.4 1014 N E. 1.0 1013 N Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 407 15. At one instant an electron (charge = 1.6 1019 C) is moving in the xy plane, the components of its velocity being vx = 5 105 m/s and vy = 3 105 m/s. A magnetic eld of 0.8 T is in the positive x direction. At that instant the magnitude of the magnetic force on the electron is: A. 0 B. 3.8 1014 N C. 5.1 1014 N D. 6.4 1014 N E. 7.5 1014 N 16. An electron travels due north through a vacuum in a region of uniform magnetic eld B that is also directed due north. It will: A. be unaected by the eld B. speed up C. slow down D. follow a right-handed corkscrew path E. follow a left-handed corkscrew path 17. At one instant an electron is moving in the positive x direction along the x axis in a region where there is a uniform magnetic eld in the positive z direction. When viewed from a point on the positive z axis, it subsequent motion is: A. straight ahead B. counterclockwise around a circle in the xy plane C. clockwise around a circle in the xy plane D. in the positive z direction E. in the negative z direction 18. A uniform magnetic eld is directed into the page. A charged particle, moving in the plane of the page, follows a clockwise spiral of decreasing radius as shown. A reasonable explanation is: .............. ..................... ...... .... . .... ... . .... ... . ... .. ... ... ...... ....... ...... ............... ...... . .. .. .... .. ... ..... .... ... ..... . .. .. ..... .. . .. ..... .. .. . ............. . .. .. .............. ... .. . . . . . . . .. ... .. . . . . ... . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. ........ ...... . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. ... . .. . .... ... . . . ......... . .... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ... .. . ... .. .. ... .... .. ..... ........ .. ... ...... ..... . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .... ...... .... .............. ........... A. B. C. D. E. 408 MAGNETIC FIELDS B the charge is positive and slowing down the charge is negative and slowing down the charge is positive and speeding up the charge is negative and speeding up none of the above Chapter 28: particle 19. An electron and a proton each travel with equal speeds around circular orbits in the same uniform magnetic eld, as shown in the diagram (not to scale). The eld is into the page on the diagram. Because the electron is less massive than the proton and because the electron is negatively charged and the proton is positively charged: ... ................ ...... ........ .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . ... . ... ... ..... ...... ......... .......... .. B ....................... ........................ ..... .... ..... .... .. . .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ... .... ... ..... ..... .... .... ....................... .......... .......... A. the electron travels clockwise around the smaller circle and the proton travels counterclockwise around the larger circle B. the electron travels counterclockwise around the smaller circle and the proton travels clockwise around the larger circle C. the electron travels clockwise around the larger circle and the proton travels counterclockwise around the smaller circle D. the electron travels counterclockwise around the larger circle and the proton travels clockwise around the smaller circle E. the electron travels counterclockwise around the smaller circle and the proton travels counterclockwise around the larger circle 20. An electron is launched with velocity v in a uniform magnetic eld B . The angle between v and B is between 0 and 90 . As a result, the electron follows a helix, its velocity vector v returning to its initial value in a time interval of: A. 2 m/eB B. 2 mv/eB C. 2 mv sin /eB D. 2 mv cos /eB E. none of these 21. An electron and a proton are both initially moving with the same speed and in the same direction at 90 to the same uniform magnetic eld. They experience magnetic forces, which are initially: A. identical B. equal in magnitude but opposite in direction C. in the same direction and diering in magnitude by a factor of 1840 D. in opposite directions and diering in magnitude by a factor of 1840 E. equal in magnitude but perpendicular to each other. Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 409 22. An electron enters a region of uniform perpendicular E and B elds. It is observed that the velocity v of the electron is unaected. A possible explanation is: A. v is parallel to E and has magnitude E/B B. v is parallel to B C. v is perpendicular to both E and B and has magnitude B/E D. v is perpendicular to both E and B and has magnitude E/B E. the given situation is impossible 23. A charged particle is projected into a region of uniform, parallel, E and B elds. The force on the particle is: A. zero B. at some angle < 90 with the eld lines C. along the eld lines D. perpendicular to the eld lines E. unknown (need to know the sign of the charge) 24. A uniform magnetic eld is in the positive z direction. A positively charged particle is moving in the positive x direction through the eld. The net force on the particle can be made zero by applying an electric eld in what direction? A. Positive y B. Negative y C. Positive x D. Negative x E. Positive z 25. An electron is traveling in the positive x direction. A uniform electric eld E is in the negative y direction. If a uniform magnetic eld with the appropriate magnitude and direction also exists in the region, the total force on the electron will be zero. The appropriate direction for the magnetic eld is: y v .. .......... .......... . .. . . . . .... .. E . A. B. C. D. E. 410 the positive y direction the negative y direction into the page out of the page the negative x direction Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS x 26. An ion with a charge of +3.2 1019 C is in a region where a uniform electric eld of 5 104 V/m is perpendicular to a uniform magnetic eld of 0.8 T. If its acceleration is zero then its speed must be: A. 0 B. 1.6 104 m/s C. 4.0 104 m/s D. 6.3 104 m/s E. any value but 0 27. The current is from left to right in the conductor shown. The magnetic eld is into the page and point S is at a higher potential than point T. The charge carriers are: S ... .. . ................................. ................................ ... .. . .. .. .. . i T A. B. C. D. E. positive negative neutral absent moving near the speed of light 28. Electrons (mass m, charge e) are accelerated from rest through a potential dierence V and are then deected by a magnetic eld B that is perpendicular to their velocity. The radius of the resulting electron trajectory is: 2 A. ( eV /m)/B B. B 2eV /m 2 C. ( mV /e)/B D. B 2mV /e E. none of these 29. In a certain mass spectrometer, an ion beam passes through a velocity lter consisting of mutually perpendicular elds E and B . The beam then enters a region of another magnetic eld B p erpendicular to the beam. The radius of curvature of the resulting ion beam is proportional to: A. EB /B B. EB/B C. BB /E D. B/EB E. E/BB Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 411 30. A cyclotron operates with a given magnetic eld and at a given frequency. If R denotes the radius of the nal orbit, the nal particle energy is proportional to: A. 1/R B. R C. R2 D. R3 E. R4 31. J. J. Thomsons experiment, involving the motion of an electron beam in mutually perpendicular E and B elds, gave the value of: A. mass of an electron B. charge of an electron C. Earths magnetic eld D. charge/mass ratio for electrons E. Avogadros number 32. The diagram shows a straight wire carrying a ow of electrons into the page. The wire is between the poles of a permanent magnet. The direction of the magnetic force exerted on the wire is: N A. B. C. D. E. 412 into the page Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS .. ..... ... .... .. .. . . . . .. ... ... .... .... ... S 33. The gure shows the motion of electrons in a wire that is near the N pole of a magnet. The wire will be pushed: .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . ... .. . .. . .. ................... . .. . .. . .. .. . ... . .. . .. ............. .. . ... .. .. . .... . ..... . .. .. . .. .. .... ... . .... .... . .. . .. . . .. .. .... .... .. .... .... ..... .... . .. . . .. .. .... .... .... .. .... .... ...... . . .. . . .. ...... ........ .... ..... . .. .... ...... . .. .. . ... .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. ..... .. . . .... ..... . .... . . .. . . .. ......... ... .. .......... ... . . . . . .................. . .... ... ..... .. .. . . . .. . ..... .. .... .... . ...... ........ . .. . . .. . .. .... .... ..... . ... .... . .. .... . .. . .... ..... . .. .... .... . . . ... ... ... .... ...... . .. .... .... .. .... .... ..... .... ..... . .. .... .... .... .... ... . .... . . ...... .. . .... . ...... ... . . ..... .. . ...... . ....... .... . .. .... . ... ... .. . A. B. C. D. E. electron ow toward the magnet away from the magnet downwards upwards along its length 34. The diagram shows a straight wire carrying current i in a uniform magnetic eld. The magnetic force on the wire is indicated by an arrow but the magnetic eld is not shown. Of the following possibilities, the direction of the magnetic eld is: i .. . ............................... .............................. .. . .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . ... . . ... .. . . . A. B. C. D. E. F opposite the direction of the current opposite the direction of F in the direction of F into the page out of the page Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 413 35. The gure shows a uniform magnetic eld B directed to the left and a wire carrying a current into the page. The magnetic force acting on the wire is: .. ... .................................................................................................... ................................................................................................... .. ..... .... .. . . .. .. .................................................................................................... .............. ..................................................................................... .. ..... .... . ... . B i .. .... ... .. .................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... .. ... ... .. ... .................................................................................................... ................................................................................................... .. ..... .... .. . . A. B. C. D. E. toward toward toward toward zero the the the the top of the page bottom of the page left right 36. A loop of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A is in the shape of a right triangle with two equal sides, each 15 cm long. A 0.7 T uniform magnetic eld is parallel to the hypotenuse. The resultant magnetic force on the two equal sides has a magnitude of: A. 0 B. 0.21 N C. 0.30 N D. 0.41 N E. 0.51 N 37. A loop of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A is in the shape of a right triangle with two equal sides, each 15 cm long. A 0.7 T uniform magnetic eld is in the plane of the triangle and is perpendicular to the hypotenuse. The magnetic force on either of the two equal sides has a magnitude of: A. zero B. 0.105 N C. 0.15 N D. 0.21 N E. 0.25 N 38. A current is clockwise around the outside edge of this page and a uniform magnetic eld is directed parallel to the page, from left to right. If the magnetic force is the only force acting on the page, the page will turn so the right edge: A. moves toward you B. moves away from you C. moves to your right D. moves to your left E. does not move 414 Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 39. A square loop of wire lies in the plane of the page and carries a current I as shown. There is a uniform magnetic eld B parallel to the side MK as indicated. The loop will tend to rotate: R .. .. K .......................................... L .. ............................ ... .......... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Q . . . . P. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .... . . . . .. I .... . . . . I ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................... ............ ... ......................................... . . . . . . M N . . S A. B. C. D. E. about PQ with KL coming out of the page about PQ with KL going into the page about RS with MK coming out of the page about RS with MK going into the page about an axis perpendicular to the page. 40. The units of magnetic dipole moment are: A. ampere B. amperemeter C. amperemeter2 D. ampere/meter E. ampere/meter2 41. You are facing a loop of wire which carries a clockwise current of 3.0 A and which surrounds an area of 5.8 102 m2 . The magnetic dipole moment of the loop is: A. 3.0 A m2 , away from you B. 3.0 A m2 , toward you C. 0.17 A m2 , away from you D. 0.17 A m2 , toward you E. 0.17 A m2 , left to right 42. The magnetic torque exerted on a at current-carrying loop of wire by a uniform magnetic eld B is: A. maximum when the plane of the loop is perpendicular to B B. maximum when the plane of the loop is parallel to B C. dependent on the shape of the loop for a xed loop area D. independent of the orientation of the loop E. such as to rotate the loop around the magnetic eld lines Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 415 43. A circular loop of wire with a radius of 20 cm lies in the xy plane and carries a current of 2 A, counterclockwise when viewed from a point on the positive z axis. Its magnetic dipole moment is: A. 0.25 A m2 , in the positive z direction B. 0.25 A m2 , in the negative z direction C. 2.5 A m2 , in the positive z direction D. 2.5 A m2 , in the negative z direction E. 0.25 A m2 , in the xy plane 44. The diagrams show ve possible orientations of a magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic eld B . For which of these does the magnetic torque on the dipole have the greatest magnitude? . . ..... ....... .. ........................................ ....................................... . . . . .. B . . . . A .. .............. ........... . . . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... B ..... ... ... ... .... .. . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... B B C .... ... . .. ... .... .. . . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... B D ............. ............ . .. . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... B E 45. The magnetic dipole moment of a current-carrying loop of wire is in the positive z direction. If a uniform magnetic eld is in the positive x direction the magnetic torque on the loop is: A. 0 B. in the positive y direction C. in the negative y direction D. in the positive z direction E. in the negative z direction 46. For a loop of current-carrying wire in a uniform magnetic eld the potential energy is a minimum if the magnetic dipole moment of the loop is: A. in the same direction as the eld B. in the direction opposite to that of the eld C. perpendicular to the eld D. at an angle of 45 to the eld E. none of the above 47. The diagrams show ve possible orientations of a magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic eld B . For which of these is the potential energy the greatest? .. .... ........ .. ........................................ ....................................... . . . . . . B . . . A .. .............. ........... . . . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... B B 416 Chapter 28: ..... ... ... ... .... .. . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... MAGNETIC FIELDS C B .... ... . .. ... .... .. . . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... D B ............. ............ . .. . . ........................................ ........................................ . . .... .... E B 48. A loop of current-carrying wire has a magnetic dipole moment of 5 104 A m2 . The moment initially is aligned with a 0.5-T magnetic eld. To rotate the loop so its dipole moment is perpendicular to the eld and hold it in that orientation, you must do work of: A. 0 B. 2.5 104 J C. 2.5 104 J D. 1.0 103 J E. 1.0 103 J Chapter 28: MAGNETIC FIELDS 417 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 1. Suitable units for 0 are: A. tesla B. newton/ampere2 C. weber/meter D. kilogramampere/meter E. teslameter/ampere 2. A coulomb is: A. one ampere per second B. the quantity of charge that will exert a force of 1 N on a similar charge at a distance of 1 m C. the amount of current in each of two long parallel wires, separated by 1 m, that produces a force of 2 107 N/m D. the amount of charge that ows past a point in one second when the current is 1 A E. an abbreviation for a certain combination of kilogram, meter and second 3. Electrons are going around a circle in a counterclockwise direction as shown. At the center of the circle they produce a magnetic eld that is: .. ............... .... .. .................... ...... .... .... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... .. . .. ... . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . ... ... . . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .... ... .... ... .................... ................... electron A. B. C. D. E. 418 into the page out of the page to the left to the right zero Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 4. In the gure, the current element i d , the point P, and the three vectors (1, 2, 3) are all in the plane of the page. The direction of dB , due to this current element, at the point P is: 3 . . . . . .. .. . . .. . ..... . ..... . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . ...... ...... . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . ... . ... . . .. . ... . . .. .. .................................................. .. ..................................................... .... .... i ....................... .. ........................ ... .. .. . .. . .... ............... .. . . ... . ... . .. . . .. . ............ . .. ... .. . .. . . ....................... .. .. ......................... ... d 2 P A. B. C. D. E. 1 in the direction marked 1 in the direction marked 2 in the direction marked 3 out of the page into the page 5. The magnitude of the magnetic eld at point P, at the center of the semicircle shown, is given by: .. i .............................. ........ ..... .. .... ...... ... .............. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. R .............. . .. . ................................... . . .. . .................................... .. . P A. B. C. D. E. 20 i/R 0 i/R 0 i/4 R 0 i/2R 0 i/4R Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 419 6. The diagrams show three circuits consisting of concentric circular arcs (either half or quarter circles of radii r , 2r , and 3r ) and radial lengths. The circuits carry the same current. Rank them according to the magnitudes of the magnetic elds they produce at C, least to greatest. ............... ................... ...... .... ..... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . ................... . . ......................... . ........................ . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ... . ... ............ ....... ... 1 C A. B. C. D. E. ............... ................... ...... .... ..... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . ......... . ........... . . . . .... ... . .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . ................... . . ......................... . ........................ . 2 C ............... ................... ...... .... ..... .... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. .. .. . ........ .. ........ . .. .. .. .. . . .. ... . .. ... .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . . . . ... .. . . . ... .. . . . ... . . . ... . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... . . . ................. . . ......... . . . . ........... 3 C 1, 2, 3 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 2 2, 3, 1 2, 1, 3 7. Lines of the magnetic eld produced by a long straight wire carrying a current are: A. in the direction of the current B. opposite to the direction of the current C. radially outward from the wire D. radially inward toward the wire E. circles that are concentric with the wire 8. In an overhead straight wire, the current is north. The magnetic eld due to this current, at our point of observation, is: A. east B. up C. north D. down E. west 9. A wire carrying a large current i from east to west is placed over an ordinary magnetic compass. The end of the compass needle marked N will point: A. north B. south C. east D. west E. the compass will act as an electric motor, hence the needle will keep rotating 420 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 10. The magnetic eld outside a long straight current-carrying wire depends on the distance R from the wire axis according to: A. R B. 1/R C. 1/R2 D. 1/R3 E. 1/R3/2 11. Which graph correctly gives the magnitude of the magnetic eld outside an innitely long straight current-carrying wire as a function of the distance r from the wire? B B .. .. .. .. ... .. .... ..... .......... . r A B. .. .. .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ....... ....... . D B .... .... . .. ... .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. r B r .. .... ....... . .. ... .. ... ... .. .. .. . r C B. .... . .. .... . .. ... . .. ... . .. .... . .. ... .. r E 12. The magnetic eld a distance 2 cm from a long straight current-carrying wire is 2.0 105 T. The current in the wire is: A. 0.16 A B. 1.0 A C. 2.0 A D. 4.0 A E. 25 A 13. Two long parallel straight wires carry equal currents in opposite directions. At a point midway between the wires, the magnetic eld they produce is: A. zero B. non-zero and along a line connecting the wires C. non-zero and parallel to the wires D. non-zero and perpendicular to the plane of the two wires E. none of the above Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 421 14. Two long straight wires are parallel and carry current in the same direction. The currents are 8.0 and 12 A and the wires are separated by 0.40 cm. The magnetic eld in tesla at a point midway between the wires is: A. 0 B. 4.0 104 C. 8.0 104 D. 12 104 E. 20 104 15. Two long straight wires are parallel and carry current in opposite directions. The currents are 8.0 and 12 A and the wires are separated by 0.40 cm. The magnetic eld in tesla at a point midway between the wires is: A. 0 B. 4.0 104 C. 8.0 104 D. 12 104 E. 20 104 16. Two long straight current-carrying parallel wires cross the x axis and carry currents I and 3I in the same direction, as shown. At what value of x is the net magnetic eld zero? x 0 1 3 . . . .. .. ... . ... . . . . . A. B. C. D. E. 422 I 4 5 7 . . . .. .. ... . ... . . . . . 3I 0 1 3 5 7 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 17. Two long straight wires pierce the plane of the paper at vertices of an equilateral triangle as shown below. They each carry 2 A, out of the paper. The magnetic eld at the third vertex (P) has magnitude (in T): P . . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . ............................................ .......................................... . . . ... . .. 4 cm 2 A A. B. C. D. E. 4 cm 4 cm 2A 1.0 105 1.7 105 2.0 105 5.0 106 8.7 106 18. The diagram shows three equally spaced wires that are perpendicular to the page. The currents are all equal, two being out of the page and one being into the page. Rank the wires according to the magnitudes of the magnetic forces on them, from least to greatest. ....... ........ .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . ........ ....... ....... ........ .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . ........ ....... ....... ........ .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. . ........ ....... 1 2 3 A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3 2, 1 and 3 tie 2 and 3 tie, then 1 1 and 3 tie, then 2 3, 2, 1 19. Two parallel wires carrying equal currents of 10 A attract each other with a force of 1 mN. If both currents are doubled, the force of attraction will be: A. 1 mN B. 4 mN C. 0.5 mN D. 0.25 mN E. 2 mN Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 423 20. Two parallel long wires carry the same current and repel each other with a force F per unit length. If both these currents are doubled and the wire separation tripled, the force per unit length becomes: A. 2F/9 B. 4F/9 C. 2F/3 D. 4F/3 E. 6F 21. Two parallel wires, 4 cm apart, carry currents of 2 A and 4 A respectively, in the same direction. The force per unit length in N/m of one wire on the other is: A. 1 103 , repulsive B. 1 103 , attractive C. 4 105 , repulsive D. 4 105 , attractive E. none of these 22. Two parallel wires, 4 cm apart, carry currents of 2 A and 4 A respectively, in opposite directions. The force per unit length in N/m of one wire on the other is: A. 1 103 , repulsive B. 1 103 , attractive C. 4 105 , repulsive D. 4 105 , attractive E. none of these 23. Four long straight wires carry equal currents into the page as shown. The magnetic force exerted on wire F is: N W F A. B. C. D. E. 424 E S north east south west zero Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 24. A constant current is sent through a helical coil. The coil: A. tends to get shorter B. tends to get longer C. tends to rotate about its axis D. produces zero magnetic eld at its center E. none of the above 25. The diagram shows three arrangements of circular loops, centered on vertical axes and carrying identical currents in the directions indicated. Rank the arrangements according to the magnitudes of the magnetic elds at the midpoints between the loops on the central axes. ............... ..................... ...... ... .. .... ... .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. . .. ... .... ... ... ....... ........... .................... ....... .. .. . ............... ..................... ...... ... .. .... ... .. .. .. . . . . . . . .. . .. ... .... ... ... ....... ........... .................... ....... .. .. . ..... ....... ... .......... ... ....... ........ ....... ........... .... ...... .... ..................... ...... ... ... ... ..... ... ...... ... .. .. .. .... .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. .. ... .... ... .... ... .... ... . ... . .... ..................... ..... .... ................... ..... .. .. ....... ... ... ....... ........ ... . ........ ............ ..... .. . ... ...................... ....................... .. . .... .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ... .... ... ... ....... .......... .................. ....... .. ... . ...................... ....................... .. . .... .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ... .... ... ... ....... .......... .................. ....... .. ... . 1 A. B. C. D. E. ...................... ....................... .. . .... .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ... .... . ... ... ........... ....... ................... . ... .. . . .. 2 3 1, 2, 3 2, 1, 3 2, 3, 1 3, 2, 1 3, 1, 2 26. Helmholtz coils are commonly used in the laboratory because the magnetic eld between them: A. can be varied more easily than the elds of other current arrangements B. is especially strong C. nearly cancels Earths magnetic eld D. is parallel to the plane of the coils E. is nearly uniform 27. If the radius of a pair of Helmholtz coils is R then the distance between the coils is: A. R/4 B. R/2 C. R D. 2R E. 4R Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 425 28. If R is the distance from a magnetic dipole, then the magnetic eld it produces is proportional to: A. R B. 1/R C. R2 D. 1/R2 E. 1/R3 29. A square loop of current-carrying wire with edge length a is in the xy plane, the origin being at its center. Along which of the following lines can a charge move without experiencing a magnetic force? A. x = 0, y = a/2 B. x = a/2, y = a/2 C. x = a/2, y = 0 D. x = 0, y = 0 E. x = 0, z = 0 30. In Amperes law, B ds = 0 i, the integration must be over any: A. surface B. closed surface C. path D. closed path E. closed path that surrounds all the current producing B 31. In Amperes law, B ds = 0 i, the symbol ds is: A. an innitesimal piece of the wire that carries current i B. in the direction of B C. perpendicular to B D. a vector whose magnitude is the length of the wire that carries current i E. none of the above 32. In Amperes law, B ds = 0 i, the direction of the integration around the path: A. must be clockwise B. must be counterclockwise C. must be such as to follow the magnetic eld lines D. must be along the wire in the direction of the current E. none of the above 426 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 33. A long straight wire carrying a 3.0 A current enters a room through a window 1.5 m high and 1.0 m wide. The path integral B ds around the window frame has the value (in Tm): A. 0.20 B. 2.5 107 C. 3.0 107 D. 3.8 106 E. none of these 34. Two long straight wires enter a room through a door. One carries a current of 3.0 A into the room while the other carries a current of 5.0 A out. The magnitude of the path integral B ds around the door frame is: A. 2.5 106 T m B. 3.8 106 T m C. 6.3 106 T m D. 1.0 105 T m E. none of these 35. If the magnetic eld B is uniform over the area bounded by a circle with radius R, the net current through the circle is: A. 0 B. 2 RB/0 C. R2 B/0 D. RB/20 E. 2RB/0 36. The magnetic eld at any point is given by B = Ar k, where r is the position vector of the point and A is a constant. The net current through a circle of radius R, in the xy plane and centered at the origin is given by: A. AR2 /0 B. 2 AR/0 C. 4 AR3 /30 D. 2 AR2 /0 E. AR2 /20 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 427 37. A hollow cylindrical conductor (inner radius = a, outer radius = b) carries a current i uniformly spread over its cross section. Which graph below correctly gives B as a function of the distance r from the center of the cylinder? B B ................ ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a ................. . ................. . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . ... . .... . ..... r . a b B r b . ......... ... .. ... ... . .. . . ... .. .. .. .. ... ... .. ....... .r . a b B A B . .... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. ... .... .. ...... .. . .. . . r a b D C B ................ ................... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . ... .. .. .... . . ..... . . . r a b E 38. A long straight cylindrical shell carries current i parallel to its axis and uniformly distributed over its cross section. The magnitude of the magnetic eld is greatest: A. at the inner surface of the shell B. at the outer surface of the shell C. inside the shell near the middle D. in hollow region near the inner surface of the shell E. near the center of the hollow region 39. A long straight cylindrical shell has inner radius Ri and outer radius Ro . It carries current i, uniformly distributed over its cross section. A wire is parallel to the cylinder axis, in the hollow region (r < Ri ). The magnetic eld is zero everywhere outside the shell (r > Ro ). We conclude that the wire: A. is on the cylinder axis and carries current i in the same direction as the current in the shell B. may be anywhere in the hollow region but must be carrying current i in the direction opposite to that of the current in the shell C. may be anywhere in the hollow region but must be carrying current i in the same direction as the current in the shell D. is on the cylinder axis and carries current i in the direction opposite to that of the current in the shell E. does not carry any current 428 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 40. A long straight cylindrical shell has inner radius Ri and outer radius Ro . It carries a current i, uniformly distributed over its cross section. A wire is parallel to the cylinder axis, in the hollow region (r < Ri ). The magnetic eld is zero everywhere in the hollow region. We conclude that the wire: A. is on the cylinder axis and carries current i in the same direction as the current in the shell B. may be anywhere in the hollow region but must be carrying current i in the direction opposite to that of the current in the shell C. may be anywhere in the hollow region but must be carrying current i in the same direction as the current in the shell D. is on the cylinder axis and carries current i in the direction opposite to that of the current in the shell E. does not carry any current 41. The magnetic eld B inside a long ideal solenoid is independent of: A. the current B. the core material C. the spacing of the windings D. the cross-sectional area of the solenoid E. the direction of the current 42. Two long ideal solenoids (with radii 20 mm and 30 mm, respectively) have the same number of turns of wire per unit length. The smaller solenoid is mounted inside the larger, along a common axis. The magnetic eld within the inner solenoid is zero. The current in the inner solenoid must be: A. two-thirds the current in the outer solenoid B. one-third the current in the outer solenoid C. twice the current in the outer solenoid D. half the current in the outer solenoid E. the same as the current in the outer solenoid 43. Magnetic eld lines inside the solenoid shown are: ....... ............ .......................... ....... .... ... ..... .... .. .. ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... .. . .... . . . . . ........................ . ........... . .... . ........................ ................................. . . . .. .................................... ................................... ....... ........ .... . . .. . . . . .. .. ... ... .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .... .. .. ... . . .. .. . .... . . .. ... . . .... ... . . ....... ... . . .. . ..... ... . . .. . ..... ... . .. .... ... . .............................. .... ... ...................... ... ..... ... . .. . .... .... . . . .. . ... ............. .. .............. .. . .................................. .... ............ .... .. . . . . ... . . .. .... . ... ... . . ... . .. .... . . ......................................... .................. ....................... ........................................ ........ ........ ....................... . . . . . . .... .... .... . .... . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . ... .... ... ..... .... . ........ ............. ............ ......... .......... I I A. B. C. D. E. clockwise circles as one looks down the axis from the top of the page counterclockwise circles as one looks down the axis from the top of the page toward the top of the page toward the bottom of the page in no direction since B = 0 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS 429 44. Solenoid 2 has twice the radius and six times the number of turns per unit length as solenoid 1. The ratio of the magnetic eld in the interior of 2 to that in the interior of 1 is: A. 2 B. 4 C. 6 D. 1 E. 1/3 45. A solenoid is 3.0 cm long and has a radius of 0.50 cm. It is wrapped with 500 turns of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A. The magnetic eld at the center of the solenoid is: A. 9.9 108 T B. 1.3 103 T C. 4.2 102 T D. 16 T E. 20 T 46. A toroid with a square cross section carries current i. The magnetic eld has its largest magnitude: A. at the center of the hole B. just inside the toroid at its inner surface C. just inside the toroid at its outer surface D. at any point inside (the eld is uniform) E. none of the above 47. A toroid has a square cross section with the length of an edge equal to the radius of the inner surface. The ratio of the magnitude of the magnetic eld at the inner surface to the magnitude of the eld at the outer surface is: A. 1/4 B. 1/2 C. 1 D. 2 E. 4 430 Chapter 29: MAGNETIC FIELDS DUE TO CURRENTS Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 1. The normal to a certain 1-m2 area makes an angle of 60 with a uniform magnetic eld. The magnetic ux through this area is the same as the ux through a second area that is perpendicular to the eld if the second area is: A. 0.866 m2 B. 1.15 m2 C. 0.5 m2 D. 2 m2 E. 1 m2 2. Suppose this page is perpendicular to a uniform magnetic eld and the magnetic ux through it is 5 Wb. If the page is turned by 30 around an edge the ux through it will be: A. 2.5 Wb B. 4.3 Wb C. 5 Wb D. 5.8 Wb E. 10 Wb 3. A 2-T uniform magnetic eld makes an angle of 30 with the z axis. The magnetic ux through a 3-m2 portion of the xy plane is: A. 2.0 Wb B. 3.0 Wb C. 5.2 Wb D. 6.0 Wb E. 12 Wb 4. A uniform magnetic eld makes an angle of 30 with the z axis. If the magnetic ux through a 1-m2 portion of the xy plane is 5 Wb then the magnetic ux through a 2-m2 portion of the same plane is: A. 2.5 Wb B. 4.3 Wb C. 5 Wb D. 5.8 Wb E. 10 Wb 5. 1 weber is the same as: A. 1 V/s B. 1 T/s C. 1 T/m D. 1 T m2 2 E. 1 T/m Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 431 6. 1 weber is the same as: A. 1 V s B. 1 T s C. 1 T/m D. 1 V/s E. 1 T/m2 7. The units of motional emf are: A. volt/second B. voltmeter/second C. volt/tesla D. tesla/second E. teslameter2 /second 8. Faradays law states that an induced emf is proportional to: A. the rate of change of the magnetic eld B. the rate of change of the electric eld C. the rate of change of the magnetic ux D. the rate of change of the electric ux E. zero 9. The emf that appears in Faradays law is: A. around a conducting circuit B. around the boundary of the surface used to compute the magnetic ux C. throughout the surface used to compute the magnetic ux D. perpendicular to the surface used to compute the magnetic ux E. none of the above 10. If the magnetic ux through a certain region is changing with time: A. energy must be dissipated as heat B. an electric eld must exist at the boundary C. a current must ow around the boundary D. an emf must exist around the boundary E. a magnetic eld must exist at the boundary 432 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 11. A square loop of wire lies in the plane of the page. A decreasing magnetic eld is directed into the page. The induced current in the loop is: A. counterclockwise B. clockwise C. zero D. up the left edge and from right to left along the top edge E. through the middle of the page 12. As an externally generated magnetic eld through a certain conducting loop increases in magnitude, the eld produced at points inside the loop by the current induced in the loop must be: A. increasing in magnitude B. decreasing in magnitude C. in the same direction as the applied eld D. directed opposite to the applied eld E. perpendicular to the applied eld 13. At any instant of time the total magnetic ux through a stationary conducting loop is less in magnitude than the ux associated with an externally applied eld. This might occur because: A. the applied eld is normal to the loop and increasing in magnitude B. the applied eld is normal to the loop and decreasing in magnitude C. the applied eld is parallel to the plane of the loop and increasing in magnitude D. the applied eld is parallel to the plane of the loop and decreasing in magnitude E. the applied eld is tangent to the loop 14. A long straight wire is in the plane of a rectangular conducting loop. The straight wire carries a constant current i, as shown. While the wire is being moved toward the rectangle the current in the rectangle is: i A. B. C. D. E. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. zero clockwise counterclockwise clockwise in the left side and counterclockwise in the right side counterclockwise in the left side and clockwise in the right side Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 433 15. A long straight wire is in the plane of a rectangular conducting loop. The straight wire carries an increasing current in the direction shown. The current in the rectangle is: i A. B. C. D. E. . . . . .. .. . .. .. zero clockwise counterclockwise clockwise in the left side and counterclockwise in the right side counterclockwise in the left side and clockwise in the right side 16. A long straight wire is in the plane of a rectangular conducting loop. The straight wire initially carries a constant current i in the direction shown. While the current i is being shut o, the current in the rectangle is: i A. B. C. D. E. 434 . . .. .. .. . .. .. zero clockwise counterclockwise clockwise in the left side and counterclockwise in the right side counterclockwise in the left side and clockwise in the right side Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 17. A rectangular loop of wire is placed midway between two long straight parallel conductors as shown. The conductors carry currents i 1 and i2 , as indicated. If i1 is increasing and i2 is constant, then the induced current in the loop is: . .. .. i1 ........ A. B. C. D. E. . . . .. .. . .. .. . i2 zero clockwise counterclockwise depends on i1 i2 depends on i1 + i2 18. You push a permanent magnet with its north pole away from you toward a loop of conducting wire in front of you. Before the north pole enters the loop the current in the loop is: A. zero B. clockwise C. counterclockwise D. to your left E. to your right 19. A vertical bar magnet is dropped through the center of a horizontal loop of wire, with its north pole leading. At the instant when the midpoint of the magnet is in the plane of the loop, the induced current at point P, viewed from above, is: A. maximum and clockwise B. maximum and counterclockwise C. not maximum but clockwise D. not maximum but counterclockwise E. essentially zero 20. A circular loop of wire rotates about a diameter in a magnetic eld that is perpendicular to the axis of rotation. Looking in the direction of the eld at the loop the induced current is: A. always clockwise B. always counterclockwise C. clockwise in the lower half of the loop and counterclockwise in the upper half D. clockwise in the upper half of the loop and counterclockwise in the lower half E. sometimes clockwise and sometimes counterclockwise Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 435 21. In the experiment shown: .. .. S............. ... .... ... ... ..... ..... ..... ..... . .. .............. . ....................... .... .... .... ... .............. . .................... ... ................ ................ ................. .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................................................................... . .............................................................................................. ......... . . . . . . . . . . A. B. C. D. E. .... .... .... .... ..... ..... ..... ..... .. . . .. . . ....................... ....................... ....................... .............................................. ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . .......... . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. ... ... . ........... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................ ............................................................ G there is a steady reading in G as long as S is closed a motional emf is generated when S is closed the current in the battery goes through G there is a current in G just after S is opened or closed since the two loops are not connected, the current in G is always zero 22. The emf developed in a coil X due to the current in a neighboring coil Y is proportional to the: A. magnetic eld in X B. rate of change of magnetic eld in X C. resistance of X D. thickness of the wire in X E. current in Y 23. One hundred turns of insulated copper wire are wrapped around an iron core of cross-sectional area 0.100 m2 . The circuit is completed by connecting the coil to a 10- resistor. As the magnetic eld along the coil axis changes from 1.00 T in one direction to 1.00 T in the other direction, the total charge that ows through the resistor is: A. 102 C B. 2 102 C C. 1 C D. 2 C E. 0.20 C 436 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 24. In the circuit shown, there will be a non-zero reading in galvanometer G: ............................................................. ............................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . ........ ......... . ........ . ....... . . . . . . . ........ ........ . ....... . ....... . . . . . . .. . . . .... . . .......... . .......... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. .................. .. . ................... .. . .............. . .............. . A. B. C. D. E. S ................................................. ................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . .... . . . . . . . . ....... ......... ......... .. . .......... . .. . . . ...... .. .. . ...... .. . . .. . . ...... . . .... ... . . . . . . . .. . . . ......... . . . ...... .. .. . ....... ......... .. .. . .... ..... ........... ..... . ........ ... . . . . . . .. . ... . . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................... . . ................................... . . G only just after S is closed only just after S is opened only while S is kept closed never only just after S is opened or closed 25. A magnet moves inside a coil. Consider the following factors: I. strength of the magnet II. number of turns in the coil III. speed at which the magnet moves Which can aect the emf induced in the coil? A. I only B. II only C. III only D. I and II only E. I, II, III 26. The graph shows the magnitude B of a uniform magnetic eld that is perpendicular to the plane of a conducting loop. Rank the ve regions indicated on the graph according to the magnitude of the emf induced in the loop, from least to greatest. B 2 ........................ . ............................. .... ... . .. . .. ... 3 . .. ... .. .... . ... ... ... 1... .... . .... .. ... .. .... .. .. ....... .. . ........ 4 . ........ .. .. ........ . . ........ ... ... . t A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3, 2, 4, 3, 4, 3, 1, 1, 3, 4, 4, 3, 2, 4 1 2 2 1 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 437 27. The circuit shown is in a uniform magnetic eld that is into the page. The current in the circuit is 0.20 A. At what rate is the magnitude of the magnetic eld changing? Is it increasing or decreasing?: 12 cm | | 12 cm | | ... ... ...................... ..... ..... .................... . ...................... .. .. .. .. .. ................. . . ... . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................... ........................... ...................... ............................ . 10 4V A. B. C. D. E. zero 140 T/s, 140 T/s, 420 T/s, 420 T/s, decreasing increasing decreasing increasing 28. A changing magnetic eld pierces the interior of a circuit containing three identical resistors. Two voltmeters are connected to the same points, as shown. V1 reads 1 mV. V2 reads: ........ ............ ... .. .. . . . . . . ..................... . . ............................ ........................... . .................... . . . . . . .. 2 ..... . . .. . . . . .... ... ..... .... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . ... ... .......................... ............ .... .... .............. . .... .... ........................... . . .... . .................................. . . ... ................ . . .. .. . ......................... . . . .. .. .. . . . . .. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . ............................ ... ... ..................... . . . . . . . .. .. . ............................ . . ... ....................... . ... . . . .. . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ ......... . . .. . . ... .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . ............................................... . ...................................... . .................................................... ..... ....................................... . . . . . . . 1 .... .. .. .... .... ...... ... ... V R R R V A. B. C. D. E. 438 0 1/3 mV 1/2 mV 1 mV 2 mV Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 29. A circular loop of wire is positioned half in and half out of a square region of constant uniform magnetic eld directed into the page, as shown. To induce a clockwise current in this loop: A. B. C. D. E. y B loop x move it in +x direction move it in +y direction move it in y direction move it in x direction increase the strength of the magnetic eld 30. The four wire loops shown have edge lengths of either L, 2L, or 3L. They will move with the same speed into a region of uniform magnetic eld B , directed out of the page. Rank them according to the maximum magnitude of the induced emf, least to greatest. ... .. .............................. .............................. .... ... . .. .. .. . 1 A. B. C. D. E. 2 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 and 2 tie, then 3 and 4 tie 3 and 4 tie, then 1 and 2 tie 4, 2, 3, 1 1, then 2 and 3 tie, then 4 1, 2, 3, 4 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 439 31. A square loop of wire moves with a constant speed v from a eld-free region into a region of constant uniform magnetic eld, as shown. Which of the ve graphs correctly shows the induced current i in the loop as a function of time t? v .... ... . .................... .. .................. . ... ... i .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . ... . A ... . . .. . .. . ... . .. . .. . .. . . i i t . ... . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .......... . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B D t B i .......... . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i . ... . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . . . .. t .......... . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . .............. .................. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . . C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ......... . . t t 32. The gure shows a bar moving to the right on two conducting rails. To make an induced current i in the direction indicated, a constant magnetic eld in region A should be in what direction? i . ........................ ........................ ... .. .... ... i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... . .... . . .. . .. . A i . .. .. . .. . .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v .. . .. ..................... .................... . .... ... .. . .. ..................... .................... . .... ... i A. B. C. D. E. 440 Right Left Into the page Out of the page Impossible; this cannot be done with a constant magnetic eld Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 33. A car travels northward at 75 km/h along a straight road in a region where Earths magnetic eld has a vertical component of 0.50 104 T. The emf induced between the left and right side, separated by 1.7 m, is: A. 0 B. 1.8 mV C. 3.6 mV D. 6.4 mV E. 13 mV 34. Coils P and Q each have a large number of turns of insulated wire. When switch S is closed, the pointer of galvanometer G is deected toward the left. With S now closed, to make the pointer of G deect toward the right one could: . .. .......... ........... . . .. .. .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . . .. .. . . ... ... ... ... ...... ... .... .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ................................................................... . .................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... . .... .. . . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. .... .. .. . .. . . . ... . . .... .. .................. .. .. .. .. .. ......................... .... ................... . .. .. . . . . . ............. ........ . .. . . . . . . ... ... .. .. .. .. P S R A. B. C. D. E. .. .......... . ........... . . .. .. .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .... .. .. . . .. .. . . ....... ... . ....... .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ................................................................................. ................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . .......... ... .... . . . . . . . . . ............................ . ......................... . . . . .......................... . . .... ....................... . .... . . .. .. .. .. ........ ....... Q G move the slide of the rheostat R quickly to the right move coil P toward coil Q move coil Q toward coil P open S do none of the above 35. A rod lies across frictionless rails in a constant uniform magnetic eld B , as shown. The rod moves to the right with speed v . In order for the emf around the circuit to be zero, the magnitude of the magnetic eld should: .... ........................... v .. . ............................ .......... ........................... .......... . .. . ....................... ......... . . . ......................... .......... . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . ......................... .......... . ......... . . ....................... . . . ............................ .......... ........................... ......... . .. . .. ... . ... A. B. C. D. E. not change increase linearly with time decrease linearly with time increase quadratically with time decrease quadratically with time Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 441 36. A rectangular loop of wire has area A. It is placed perpendicular to a uniform magnetic eld B and then spun around one of its sides at frequency f . The maximum induced emf is: A. BAf B. BAf C. 2BAf D. 2 BAf E. 4 BAf 37. A rectangular loop of wire is placed perpendicular to a uniform magnetic eld and then spun around one of its sides at frequency f . The induced emf is a maximum when: A. the ux is zero B. the ux is a maximum C. the ux is half its maximum value D. the derivative of the ux with respect to time is zero E. none of the above 38. The diagram shows a circular loop of wire that rotates at a steady rate about a diameter O that is perpendicular to a uniform magnetic eld. The maximum induced emf occurs when the point X on the loop passes: e ........................................................................................... .......................................................................................... ......................................... .. ................................................ .......................................... ................................................ ........................................................................................... .......................................................................................... ........................................................................................... .......................................................................................... d c b O a X ........................................................................................... .......................................................................................... A. B. C. D. E. .... ..... .. .... .... .... ..... .. .... .... .... ..... .. .... .... B .... ..... .. .... .... .... ..... .. .... .... a b c d e 39. A copper hoop is held in a vertical east-west plane in a uniform magnetic eld whose eld lines run along the north-south direction. The largest induced emf is produced when the hoop is: A. rotated about a north-south axis B. rotated about an east-west axis C. moved rapidly, without rotation, toward the east D. moved rapidly, without rotation, toward the south E. moved rapidly, without rotation, toward the northwest 442 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 40. A 10-turn conducting loop with a radius of 3.0 cm spins at 60 revolutions per second in a magnetic eld of 0.50 T. The maximum emf generated is: A. 0.014 V B. 0.53 V C. 5.3 V D. 18 V E. 180 V 41. A single loop of wire with a radius of 7.5 cm rotates about a diameter in a uniform magnetic eld of 1.6 T. To produce a maximum emf of 1.0 V, it should rotate at: A. 0 B. 2.7 rad/s C. 5.6 rad/s D. 35 rad/s E. 71 rad/s 42. A merry-go-round has an area of 300 m2 and spins at 2 rpm about a vertical axis at a place where Earths magnetic eld is vertical and has a magnitude of 5 105 T. The emf around the rim is: A. 0 B. 0.5 mV C. 3.1 mV D. 15 mV E. 30 mV Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 443 43. A copper penny slides on a horizontal frictionless table. There is a square region of constant uniform magnetic eld perpendicular to the table, as shown. Which graph correctly shows the speed v of the penny as a function of time t? top view ... . ..... ..... .. ................. ................ v v B v ..................................... .................................... v ........ ........ ...... ........ .. .. ... .... ................. ............ t .. . ........... ....... ....... ....... ...... ....... ........ ..... .... . ... .. t A t B v C v ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... .......... ......... ......... ... .... ....... ....... .................. . ........ t D t E 44. A rod with resistance R lies across frictionless conducting rails in a constant uniform magnetic eld B , as shown. Assume the rails have negligible resistance. The magnitude of the force that must be applied by a person to pull the rod to the right at constant speed v is: | L | A. B. C. D. E. 444 x .... .................................. ... .. .. ..................................... .............. .................................... ............v . . .. . . . . ................................ ............. . . . ................................ ............ .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . ................................ ............. .. . . . ............................... ............ .. . . .. . .................................... ............. ..................................... ............. . .. . .. .. ... . ... 0 BLv BLv/R B 2 L2 v/R B 2 Lxv/R Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 45. A rod of length L and electrical resistance R moves through a constant uniform magnetic eld B , perpendicular to the rod. The force that must be applied by a person to keep the rod moving with constant velocity v is: A. 0 B. BLv C. BLv/R D. B 2 L2 v/R E. B 2 L2 v 2 /R 46. As a loop of wire with a resistance of 10 moves in a constant non-uniform magnetic eld, it loses kinetic energy at a uniform rate of 4.0 mJ/s. The induced current in the loop: A. is 0 B. is 2 mA C. is 2.8 mA D. is 20 mA E. cannot be calculated from the given data 47. As a loop of wire with a resistance of 10 moves in a non-uniform magnetic eld, it loses kinetic energy at a uniform rate of 5 mJ/s. The induced emf in the loop: A. is 0 B. is 0.2 V C. is 0.28 V D. is 2 V E. cannot be calculated from the given data 48. An A. B. C. D. E. electric eld is associated with every: magnetic eld time-dependent magnetic eld time-dependent magnetic ux object moving in a magnetic eld conductor moving in a magnetic eld 49. A cylindrical region of radius R = 3.0 cm contains a uniform magnetic eld parallel to its axis. If the electric eld induced at a point R/2 from the cylinder axis is 4.5 103 V/m the magnitude of the magnetic eld must be changing at the rate: A. 0 B. 0.30 T/s C. 0.60 T/s D. 1.2 T/s E. 2.4 T/s Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 445 50. A cylindrical region of radius R contains a uniform magnetic eld parallel to its axis. The eld is zero outside the cylinder. If the magnitude of the eld is changing at the rate dB/dt, the electric eld induced at a point 2R from the cylinder axis is: A. zero B. 2R dB/dt C. R dB/dt D. (R/2) dB/dt E. (R/4) dB/dt 51. A cylindrical region of radius R contains a uniform magnetic eld, parallel to its axis, with magnitude that is changing linearly with time. If r is the radial distance from the cylinder axis, the magnitude of the induced electric eld inside the cylinder is proportional to: A. R B. r C. r 2 D. 1/r E. 1/r2 52. A cylindrical region of radius R contains a uniform magnetic eld, parallel to its axis, with magnitude that is changing linearly with time. If r is the radial distance from the cylinder axis, the magnitude of the induced electric eld outside the cylinder is proportional to: A. R B. r C. r 2 D. 1/r E. 1/r2 53. The unit henry is equivalent to: A. voltsecond/ampere B. volt/second C. ohm D. amperevolt/second E. amperesecond/volt 446 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 54. The diagram shows an inductor that is part of a circuit. The direction of the emf induced in the inductor is indicated. Which of the following is possible? E . . . . .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . ........ . ............................ . ........................... . ....... . ... . . . . . . . . . .......................... . ........ ............................ ........ . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ............................................................ ...... ... ........ ... ........... ........... ....... ... A. B. C. D. E. The current is constant and rightward The current is constant and leftward The current is increasing and rightward The current is increasing and leftward None of the above 55. A 10-turn ideal solenoid has an inductance of 3.5 mH. When the solenoid carries a current of 2.0 A the magnetic ux through each turn is: A. 0 B. 3.5 104 wb C. 7.0 104 wb D. 7.0 103 wb E. 7.0 102 wb 56. A 10-turn ideal solenoid has an inductance of 4.0 mH. To generate an emf of 2.0 V the current should change at a rate of: A. zero B. 5.0 A/s C. 50 A/s D. 250 A/s E. 500 A/s 57. A long narrow solenoid has length area A. Its inductance is: A. 0 N 2 A B. 0 N 2 A/ C. 0 N A/ D. 0 N 2 /A E. none of these and a total of N turns, each of which has cross-sectional Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 447 58. A at coil of wire, having 5 turns, has an inductance L. The inductance of a similar coil having 20 turns is: A. 4L B. L/4 C. 16L D. L/16 E. L 59. An inductance L, resistance R, and ideal battery of emf E are wired in series. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. At any later time t the current i is given by: A. (E /R)(1 eLt/R ) B. (E /R)eLt/R C. (E /R)(1 + eRt/L ) D. (E /R)eRt/L E. (E /R)(1 eRt/L ) 60. An inductance L, resistance R, and ideal battery of emf E are wired in series. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. At any later time t the emf of the inductor is given by: A. E (1 eLt/R ) B. E eLt/R C. E (1 + eRt/L ) D. E eRt/L E. E (1 eRt/L ) 61. An inductance L, resistance R, and ideal battery of emf E are wired in series. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. At any later time t the potential dierence across the resistor is given by: A. E (1 eLt/R ) B. E eLt/R C. E (1 + eRt/L ) D. E eRt/L E. E (1 eRt/L ) 62. An 8.0-mH inductor and a 2.0- resistor are wired in series to an ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. The current reaches half its nal value at time: A. 2.8 ms B. 4.0 ms C. 3 s D. 170 s E. 250 s 448 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 63. An 8.0-mH inductor and a 2.0- resistor are wired in series to a 20-V ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. After a long time the current in the resistor and the current in the inductor are: A. 0, 0 B. 10 A, 10 A C. 2.5 A, 2.5 A D. 10 A, 2.5 A E. 10 A, 0 64. An 8.0-mH inductor and a 2.0- resistor are wired in series to a 20-V ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. Immediately after the switch is thrown the potential dierences across the inductor and resistor are: A. 0, 20 V B. 20 V, 0 C. 10 V, 10 V D. 16 V, 4 V E. unknown since the rate of change of the current is not given 65. An inductor with inductance L resistor with resistance R are wired in series to an ideal battery with emf E . A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. A long time after the switch is thrown the potential dierences across the inductor and resistor: A. 0, E B. E , 0 C. E /2, E /2 D. (L/R)E , (R/L)E E. cannot be computed unless the rate of change of the current is given 66. If both the resistance and the inductance in an LR series circuit are doubled the new inductive time constant will be: A. twice the old B. four times the old C. half the old D. one-fourth the old E. unchanged Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 449 67. When the switch S in the circuit shown is closed, the time constant for the growth of current in R2 is: . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . .. ... ... ... .. .. .. . . . .. . ............... . . ........................ . . . . . . . ........... ........................ . . . . . . . . ........ . . .. . . . .............. . . ... ... ... ... ... . . ...................... .. . . . . . .. . . . . .... . ...... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . .... .... . .. .. . .... .. . .. . . .. . .. . .... . .... . .. .... .. ... .... .... . . . .. ... 1 ......... 2 ....... . . . ... ... . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................................................................. . . . ......................................................................................................... .......... S L R A. B. C. D. E. R L/R1 L/R2 L/(R1 + R2 ) L(R1 + R2 )/(R1 R2 ) (L/R1 + L/R2 )/2 68. The diagrams show three circuits with identical batteries, identical inductors, and identical resistors. Rank them according to the current through the battery just after the switch is closed, from least to greatest. ... ... ... ... . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .... ... . . . .. . ...... . ......... ....... .. . . . ....... ....... . . ........ ...... . . . .. . . ...... ......... ........ .. . . . . ... ... . .. .. .. .. . .. .. A. B. C. D. E. 450 ... ... ... ... . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... ... ... .... .... . .... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... 1 .. ... .... ... .. .... .... .... .. .. .... .... .... .. . .. ... . .. .. .. .. . .. .. 2 3, 2, 1 2 and 3 ties, then 1 1, 3, 2 1, 2, 3 3, 1, 2 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE ... ... ... ... . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .... ... . . . .. . ...... . ......... ....... .. . . . ....... ....... . . ........ ...... . . . .. . . ...... ......... ........ .. . . . . ... ... .. ... .... ... .. .... .... .... .. .. .... .... .... .. . .. ... . .. .. .. .. . .. .. 3 .... ... . . . .. . ...... . ......... ....... .. . . . ....... ....... . . ........ ...... . . . .. . . ...... ......... ........ .. . . . . ... ... 69. Immediately after switch S in the circuit shown is closed, the current through the battery is: ... ... ... ... ................ . ..... ..... ........................................... . . . ................ ... ... ......................................... . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .... .. . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .... ... .... .......... . .. . .. . ... . ... . .. . . . . . . .. . .... .... ........ .. .... ......... .... ........ ...... . . . 2 .......... . . . .... ... ........ . ........ ........ . ...... . . . ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .... . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .......................... ...................... ............................ ...................... ... .. ......................... ....................... R V0 R L S A. B. C. D. E. 0 V0 /R1 V0 /R2 V0 /(R1 + R2 ) V0 (R1 + R2 )/(R1 R2 ) 70. A 3.5-mH inductor and a 4.5-mH inductor are connected in series. The equivalent inductance is: A. 2.0 mH B. 0.51 mH C. 0.13 mH D. 1.0 mH E. 8.0 mH 71. A 3.5-mH inductor and a 4.5-mH inductor are connected in series and a time varying current is established in them. When the total emf of the combination is 16 V, the emf of the larger inductor is: A. 7.0 V B. 9.0 V C. 2.3 V D. 28 V E. 36 V 72. A 3.5-mH inductor and a 4.5-mH inductor are connected in parallel. The equivalent inductance is: A. 2.0 mH B. 0.51 mH C. 0.13 mH D. 1.0 mH E. 8.0 mH Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 451 73. A 3.5-mH inductor and a 4.5-mH inductor are connected in parallel. When the total emf of the combination is 16 V, the rate of change of the current in the larger inductor is: A. 2.0 103 A/s B. 3.6 103 A/s C. 4.6 103 A/s D. 7.0 103 A/s E. 8.1 103 A/s 74. An inductor with inductance L and an inductor with inductance 2L are connected in parallel. When the rate of change of the current in the larger inductor is 1200 A/s the rate of change of the current in the smaller inductor is: A. 400 A/s B. 1200 A/s C. 1600 A/s D. 2000 A/s E. 2400 A/s 75. The stored energy in an inductor: A. depends, in sign, upon the direction of the current B. depends on the rate of change of current C. is proportional to the square of the inductance D. has units J/H E. none of the above 76. An inductance L and a resistance R are connected in series to an ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. The energy stored in the inductor is a maximum: A. just after the switch is closed B. at the time t = L/R after the switch is closed C. at the time t = L/R after the switch is closed D. at the time t = 2L/R after the switch is closed E. a long time after the switch is closed 77. An inductance L and a resistance R are connected in series to an ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. The rate of increase of the energy stored in the inductor is a maximum: A. just after the switch is closed B. at the time t = L/R after the switch is closed C. at the time t = L/R after the switch is closed D. at the time t = (L/R) ln 2 after the switch is closed E. a long time after the switch is closed 452 Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 78. In each of the following operations, energy is expended. The LEAST percentage of returnable electrical energy will be yielded by: A. charging a capacitor B. charging a storage battery C. sending current through a resistor D. establishing a current through an inductor E. moving a conducting rod through a magnetic eld 79. A current of 10 A in a certain inductor results in a stored energy of 40 J. When the current is changed to 5 A in the opposite direction, the stored energy changes by: A. 20 J B. 30 J C. 40 J D. 50 J E. 60 J 80. A 6.0-mH inductor is in a series circuit with a resistor and an ideal battery. At the instant the current in the circuit is 5.0 A the energy stored in the inductor is: A. 0 B. 7.5 102 J C. 15 102 J D. 30 102 J E. unknown since the rate of change of the current is not given 81. A 6.0-mH inductor is in a circuit. At the instant the current is 5.0 A and its rate of change is 200 A/s, the rate with which the energy stored in the inductor is increasing is: A. 7.5 102 W B. 120 W C. 240 W D. 3.0 W E. 6.0 W 82. A 6.0-mH inductor and a 3.0- resistor are wired in series to a 12-V ideal battery. A switch in the circuit is closed at time 0, at which time the current is zero. 2.0 ms later the energy stored in the inductor is: A. 0 B. 2.5 102 J C. 1.9 102 J D. 3.8 102 J E. 9.6 103 J Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE 453 83. The quantity B 2 /0 has units of: A. J B. J/H C. J/m D. J/m3 E. H/m3 84. A 0.20-cm radius cylinder, 3.0 cm long, is wrapped with wire to form an inductor. At the instant the magnetic eld in the interior is 5.0 mT the energy stored in the eld is about: A. 0 B. 3.8 106 J C. 7.5 106 J D. 7.5 104 J E. 9.9 J 85. In the diagram, assume that all the magnetic eld lines generated by coil 1 pass through coil 2. Coil 1 has 100 turns and coil 2 has 400 turns. Then: ..................... ..................... . . . ..................... ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . .......... ......... . .... .. . . . . . . . . ........ . ........ ........ . . .... .. . . . . . . ... . . .... . . . .......... .... .... . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . ...................... ..................... ....................... ...................... . #1 . .............................................. ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .... . . . . . . . . ....... .. ...... .. . .......... .. .. ........... . . . . .... .. .. . ..... .. . . . ....... . . ........ . . . . . . ....... . . ......... . . . .. .. . ....... .. ...... .. .. .... ..... ........... ........ ... ........ . . . . .. . .. . . ... . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................................... . ............................................................. ...... #2 G S A. B. C. D. E. 454 the power supplied to coil 1 is equal to the power delivered by coil 2 the emf around coil 1 will be one-fourth the emf around coil 2 the current in coil 1 will be one-fourth the current in coil 2 the emfs will be the same in the two coils none of the above Chapter 30: INDUCTION AND INDUCTANCE Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS AND ALTERNATING CURRENT 1. A charged capacitor and an inductor are connected in series. At time t = 0 the current is zero, but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of the resulting oscillations, the next time after t = 0 that the current is a maximum is: A. T B. T /4 C. T /2 D. T E. 2T 2. A charged capacitor and an inductor are connected in series. At time t = 0 the current is zero, but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of the resulting oscillations, the next time after t = 0 that the charge on the capacitor is a maximum is: A. T B. T /4 C. T /2 D. T E. 2T 3. A charged capacitor and an inductor are connected in series. At time t = 0 the current is zero, but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of the resulting oscillations, the next time after t = 0 that the voltage across the inductor is a maximum is: A. T B. T /4 C. T /2 D. T E. 2T 4. A charged capacitor and an inductor are connected in series. At time t = 0 the current is zero, but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of the resulting oscillations, the next time after t = 0 that the energy stored in the magnetic eld of the inductor is a maximum is: A. T B. T /4 C. T /2 D. T E. 2T Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 455 5. A charged capacitor and an inductor are connected in series. At time t = 0 the current is zero, but the capacitor is charged. If T is the period of the resulting oscillations, the next time after t = 0 that the energy stored in the electric eld of the capacitor is a maximum is: A. T B. T /4 C. T /2 D. T E. 2T 6. A capacitor in an LC oscillator has a maximum potential dierence of 15 V and a maximum energy of 360 J. At a certain instant the energy in the capacitor is 40 J. At that instant what is the potential dierence across the capacitor? A. zero B. 5 V C. 10 V D. 15 V E. 20 V 7. Which of the following has the greatest eect in decreasing the oscillation frequency of an LC circuit? Using instead: A. L/2 and C/2 B. L/2 and 2C C. 2L and C/2 D. 2L and 2C E. none of these 8. We desire to make an LC circuit that oscillates at 100 Hz using an inductance of 2.5 H. We also need a capacitance of: A. 1 F B. 1 mF C. 1 F D. 100 F E. 1 pF 9. An LC circuit consists of a 1-F capacitor and a 4 mH inductor. Its oscillation frequency is approximately: A. 0.025 Hz B. 25 Hz C. 60 Hz D. 2500 Hz E. 15, 800 Hz 456 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 10. An A. B. C. D. E. LC circuit has an oscillation frequency of 105 Hz. If C = 0.1 F, then L must be about: 10 mH 1 mH 25 H 2.5 H 1 pH 11. In the circuit shown, switch S is rst pushed up to charge the capacitor. When S is then pushed down, the current in the circuit will oscillate at a frequency of: ........................................ . ........................................ . ........................................ . . ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . ... .... . .. . . .................... ..... ..... .. . ................... ......................................................... . ........................................................ .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... .. ... ... . . . ... . . . . . . . ................................. . ........................................ . . . . . . ................................. . . ... ............................................ . . . . . . . .... .. .... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. . ............ ............ ..... ...... ..... .... 5 F V 50 mH A. B. C. D. E. 318 Hz 0.01 Hz 12.500 Hz 2000 Hz depends on V0 S 12. Radio receivers are usually tuned by adjusting the capacitor of an LC circuit. If C = C1 for a frequency of 600 kHz, then for a frequency of 1200 kHz one must adjust C to: A. C1 /2 B. C1 /4 C. 2C1 D. 1 4C E. 2C1 13. An LC series circuit with an inductance L and a capacitance C has an oscillation frequency f . Two inductors, each with inductance L, and two capacitors, each with capacitance C , are all wired in series and the circuit is completed. The oscillation frequency is: A. f /4 B. f /2 C. f D. 2f E. 4f Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 457 14. The electrical analog of a spring constant k is: A. L B. 1/L C. C D. 1/C E. R 15. Consider the mechanical system consisting of two springs and a block, as shown. Which one of the ve electrical circuits (A, B, C, D, E) is the analog of the mechanical system? \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \ \ .............. .............................. .............. \\ ..... .. .. .. .. .. . ........... .. .. .. .. .. ..... .......... .. .. .. .. .. ..... \ \ ................................................. m .......................................... \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ k1 k2 \\ \\ \\ \\ ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. . .............. . . . . . . .............. ............. ............. ............. . . . . . . ............. ............ ............ . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . ..... ..... ..... ...... ..... . .... . .... . .... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ . . ......................................................................... . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .............. . . . . . . .................................................. ............. . . . . . . ................................................. . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . ... . . . . . . ..... ..... ..... ...... ..... . .... . .... . .... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ . . . ......................................................................... . .. .. .. .. .. .. ................... ... .. ... .. ................... ............. ............. .................. .. .. .. .. ................... ............ ............ .. . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ . . ......................................................................... . A B C .. .. .. .. .. ... .................. ... .. ... .. ...................................................... .................. .. .. .. .. ..................................................... .. . . . . . . .. .. ... . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................ . . . ......................................................................... . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. . .. . . . . ... ... .............. . . . . . . ............. ............. . .. . . . . .............. ............. . . . . . . ............ ............ . . . . . . ............. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .... .... .... . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. ... ... ... . . . ... . . . ........................ ........................ ....................... ..... ..... ..... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................ . . ............................................................................................. . D E 16. A 150-g block on the end of a spring with a spring constant of 35 N/m is pulled aside 25 cm and released from rest. In the electrical analog the initial charge on the capacitor is: A. 0.15 C B. 6.67 C C. 0.025 C D. 40 C E. 35 C 458 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 17. A 150-g block on the end of a spring with a spring constant of 35 N/m is pulled aside 25 cm and released from rest. In the electrical analog the maximum charge on the capacitor is 0.25 C. The maximum current in the LC circuit is: A. 0.38 A B. 0.025 A C. 40 A D. 2.3 A E. 5.3 A 18. A capacitor in an LC oscillator has a maximum potential dierence of 15 V and a maximum energy of 360 J. At a certain instant the energy in the capacitor is 40 J. At that instant what is the potential dierence across the capacitor? A. zero B. 5 V C. 10 V D. 15 V E. 20 V 19. A capacitor in an LC oscillator has a maximum potential dierence of 15 V and a maximum energy of 360 J. At a certain instant the energy in the capacitor is 40 J. At that instant what is the emf induced in the inductor? A. zero B. 5 V C. 10 V D. 15 V E. 20 V 20. In an oscillating LC circuit, the total stored energy is U . The maximum energy stored in the capacitor during one cycle is: A. U/ 2 B. U/ 2 C. U D. U/(2 ) E. U/ 21. In an oscillating LC circuit, the total stored energy is U and the maximum charge on the capacitor is Q. When the charge on the capacitor is Q/2, the energy stored in the inductor is: A. U/2 B. U/4 C. (4/3)U D. 3U/2 E. 3U/4 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 459 22. The total energy in an LC circuit is 5.0 106 J. If C = 15 F the charge on the capacitor is: A. 0.82 C B. 8.5 C C. 12 C D. 17 C E. 24 C 23. The total energy in an LC circuit is 5.0 106 J. If L = 25 mH the maximum current is: A. 10 mA B. 14 mA C. 20 mA D. 28 mA E. 40 mA 24. At time t = 0 the charge on the 50-F capacitor in an LC circuit is 15 C and there is no current. If the inductance is 20 mH the maximum current is: A. 15 nA B. 15 A C. 6.7 mA D. 15 mA E. 15 A 25. An LC circuit has an inductance of 20 mH and a capacitance of 5.0 F. At time t = 0 the charge on the capacitor is 3.0 C and the current is 7.0 mA. The total energy is: A. 4.1 107 J B. 4.9 107 J C. 9.0 107 J D. 1.4 106 J E. 2.8 106 J 26. An LC circuit has a capacitance of 30 F and an inductance of 15 mH. At time t = 0 the charge on the capacitor is 10 C and the current is 20 mA. The maximum charge on the capacitor is: A. 8.9 C B. 10 C C. 12 C D. 17 C E. 24 C 460 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 27. An LC circuit has an inductance of 15 mH and a capacitance of 10 F. At one instant the charge on the capacitor is 25 C. At that instant the current is changing at the rate of: A. 0 B. 1.7 108 A/s C. 5.9 103 A/s D. 3.8 102 A/s E. 170 A/s 28. An LC circuit has a capacitance of 30 F and an inductance of 15 mH. At time t = 0 the charge on the capacitor is 10 C and the current is 20 mA. The maximum current is: A. 18 mA B. 20 mA C. 25 mA D. 35 mA E. 42 mA 29. The graphs show the total electromagnetic energy in two RLC circuits as functions of time. Which of the following statements might be true? E ... .. ... .... ..... ..... .. ..... .. . .. ..... .. . .... .. .... ... ....... .. ... 1 .... .... ................ .. . ......... ....... ... . . .. . ... . 2 .................. ...... . ........... . ...... t A. B. C. D. E. Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit 1 1 1 1 1 has has has has has a smaller resistance and a larger inductance a larger resistance and a smaller inductance the same resistance and a larger inductance a larger resistance and a larger capacitance the same resistance and a smaller capacitance 30. An RLC circuit has a resistance of 200 and an inductance of 15 mH. Its oscillation frequency is 7000 Hz. At time t = 0 the current is 25 mA and there is no charge on the capacitor. After ve complete cycles the current is: A. zero B. 1.8 106 A C. 2.1 104 A D. 2.3 103 A E. 2.5 102 A Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 461 31. An RLC circuit has an inductance of 25 mH and a capacitance of 5.0 F. The charge on the capacitor does NOT oscillate but rather decays exponentially to zero. The resistance in the circuit must be: A. greater than or equal to 20, 000 B. less than 20, 000 but greater than 10, 000 C. less than 10, 000 but greater than 5, 000 D. less than 5, 000 but greater than 0 E. 0 32. A series circuit with an inductance of 15 mH, a capacitance of 35 F, and a resistance of 5.0 contains a sinusoidal source of emf with a frequency of 500 Hz. The frequency with which the charge on the capacitor oscillates is: A. 500 Hz B. 1.4 kHz C. greater than 1.4 kHz D. less than 500 Hz E. between 500 Hz and 1.4 kHz 33. The rapid exponential decay in just a few cycles of the charge on the plates of capacitor in an RLC circuit might be due to: A. a large inductance B. a large capacitance C. a small capacitance D. a large resistance E. a small resistance 34. An RLC circuit has a capacitance of 12 F, an inductance of 25 mH, and a resistance of 60. The current oscillates with an angular frequency of: A. 1.2 103 rad/s B. 1.4 103 rad/s C. 1.8 103 rad/s D. 2.2 103 rad/s E. 2.6 103 rad/s 35. The angular frequency of a certain RLC series circuit is 0 . A source of sinusoidal emf, with angular frequency 2 , is inserted into the circuit. After transients die out the angular frequency of the current oscillations is: A. 0 /2 B. 0 C. 20 D. 1.50 E. 30 462 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 36. The angular frequency of a certain RLC series circuit is 0 . A source of sinusoidal emf, with angular frequency , is inserted into the circuit and is varied while the amplitude of the source is held constant. For which of the following values of is the amplitude of the current oscillations the greatest? A. 0 /5 B. 0 /2 C. 0 D. 20 E. None of them (they all produce the same current amplitude) 37. An RLC circuit has a sinusoidal source of emf. The average rate at which the source supplies energy is 5 nW. This must also be: A. the average rate at which energy is stored in the capacitor B. the average rate at which energy is stored in the inductor C. the average rate at which energy is dissipated in the resistor D. twice the average rate at which energy is stored in the capacitor E. three times the average rate at which energy is stored in the inductor 38. In a purely capacitive circuit the current: A. leads the voltage by one-fourth of a cycle B. leads the voltage by one-half of a cycle C. lags the voltage by one-fourth of a cycle D. lags the voltage by one-half of a cycle E. is in phase with the potential dierence across the plates 39. In a purely resistive circuit the current: A. leads the voltage by one-fourth of a cycle B. leads the voltage by one-half of a cycle C. lags the voltage by one-fourth of a cycle D. lags the voltage by one-half of a cycle E. is in phase with the voltage 40. In a purely inductive circuit, the current lags the voltage by: A. zero B. one-fourth of a cycle C. one-half of a cycle D. three-fourths of a cycle E. one cycle Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 463 41. A series RL circuit is connected to an emf source of angular frequency . The current: A. leads the applied emf by tan1 ( L/R) B. lags the applied emf by tan1 ( L/R) C. lags the applied emf by tan1 ( R/L) D. leads the applied emf by tan1 ( R/L) E. is zero 42. A series RC circuit is connected to an emf source having angular frequency . The current: A. leads the source emf by tan1 (1/ CR) B. lags the source emf by tan1 (1/ CR) C. leads the source emf by tan1 ( CR) D. lags the source emf by tan1 ( CR) E. leads the source emf by /4 43. In an RLC series circuit, which is connected to a source of emf Em cos( t), the current lags the voltage by 45 if: A. R = 1/ C L B. R = 1/ L C C. R = L 1/ C D. R = C 1/ L E. L = 1/ C 44. A coil has a resistance of 60 and an impedance of 100 . Its reactance, in ohms, is: A. 40 B. 60 C. 80 D. 117 E. 160 45. The reactance in ohms of a 35-F capacitor connected to a 400-Hz generator is: A. 0 B. 0.014 C. 0.088 D. 11 E. 71 464 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 46. A 35-F capacitor is connected to a source of sinusoidal emf with a frequency of 400 Hz and a maximum emf of 20 V. The maximum current is: A. 0 B. 0.28 A C. 1.8 A D. 230 A E. 1400 A 47. A 45-mH inductor is connected to a source of sinusoidal emf with a frequency of 400 Hz and a maximum emf of 20 V. The maximum current is: A. 0 B. 0.18 A C. 1.1 A D. 360 A E. 2300 A 48. The impedance of an RLC series circuit is denitely increased if: A. C decreases B. L increases C. L decreases D. R increases E. R decreases 49. An is: A. B. C. D. E. RLC series circuit has R = 4 , XC = 3 , and XL = 6 . The impedance of this circuit 5 7 9.8 13 7.8 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 465 50. The impedance of the circuit shown is: 50 0.20 H 150 F . . ... .. .. ... ... ... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .......... ... .. ... .. ... ........... . .. . . . . ................... . ................... . ................... . .......... .. .. ... .. ... ............ . . . . . . .................... .. . . . . .. .... .... .... ... ... . . ......................... .. .. .. . . .. .. .. ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . .......... . . . .... ...... . . .... .. . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . ..... . . . . . ..................................................... . . ................................................... . . . ..................................................... .. .. .......................................................... . . ...... ..... . . .. ........ . ..... . . . .. . . . .. . .. ... .. ... .. .............. ............. 50 Hz, 240 Vrms A. B. C. D. E. 21 50 63 65 98 51. An electric motor, under load, has an eective resistance of 30 and an inductive reactance of 40 . When powered by a source with a maximum voltage of 420 V, the maximum current is: A. 6.0 A B. 8.4 A C. 10.5 A D. 12.0 A E. 14.0 A 52. An RL series circuit is connected to an ac generator with a maximum emf of 20 V. If the maximum potential dierence across the resistor is 16 V, then the maximum potential dierence across the inductor is: A. 2 V B. 4 V C. 12 V D. 25.6 V E. 36 V 53. When the amplitude of the oscillator in a series RLC circuit is doubled: A. the impedance is doubled B. the voltage across the capacitor is halved C. the capacitive reactance is halved D. the power factor is doubled E. the current amplitude is doubled 466 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 54. When the frequency of the oscillator in a series RLC circuit is doubled: A. the capacitive reactance is doubled B. the capacitive reactance is halved C. the impedance is doubled D. the current amplitude is doubled E. the current amplitude is halved 55. In an RLC series circuit, the source voltage is leading the current at a given frequency f . If f is lowered slightly, then the circuit impedance will: A. increase B. decrease C. remain the same D. need to know the amplitude of the source voltage E. need to know whether the phase angle is larger or smaller than 45 56. In the diagram, the function y (t) = ym sin( t) is plotted as a solid curve. The other three curves have the form y (t) = ym sin( t + ), where is between /2 and + /2. Rank the curves according to the value of , from the most negative to the most positive. y (t) . . .... .. . ..... .. . . .. .. ... .......... ................... ... ... ... .... . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. ... ......... ... . ...... ......... . . .. . ... ... .. .. ..... .. .. .. ...... . .. . ..... ... ..... . ... . . . .. ... .. .. .. .. . . . .... .. .. ... .. .. .. . .. . .... .. . . .. 3.. . . . .. . .. . . . . . 2 .. .. 1.. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . . . .. . . .. t .. .. ... . .. .. . .. . . . . ... A. B. C. D. E. 1, 2, 3 2, 3, 1 3, 2, 1 1, 3, 2 2, 1, 3 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 467 57. An RLC series circuit has L = 100 mH and C = 1 F. It is connected to a 1000-Hz source and the source emf is found to lead the current by 75 . The value of R is: A. 12.6 B. 126 C. 175 D. 1750 E. 1810 58. An RLC series circuit is driven by a sinusoidal emf with angular frequency d . If d is increased without changing the amplitude of the emf the current amplitude increases. If L is the inductance, C is the capacitance, and R is the resistance, this means that: A. d L > 1/d C B. d L < 1/d C C. d L = 1/d C D. d L > R E. d L < R 59. In a sinusoidally driven series RLC circuit, the inductive reactance is XL = 200 , the capacitive reactance is XC = 100 , and the resistance is R = 50 . The current and applied emf would be in phase if: A. the resistance is increased to 100 , with no other changes B. the resistance is increased to 200 , with no other changes C. the inductance is reduced to zero, with no other changes D. the capacitance is doubled, with no other changes E. the capacitance is halved, with no other changes 60. In a sinusoidally driven series RLC circuit the current lags the applied emf. The rate at which energy is dissipated in the resistor can be increased by: A. decreasing the capacitance and making no other changes B. increasing the capacitance and making no other changes C. increasing the inductance and making no other changes D. increasing the driving frequency and making no other changes E. decreasing the amplitude of the driving emf and making no other changes 61. An A. B. C. D. E. RLC series circuit, connected to a source E, is at resonance. Then: the voltage across R is zero the voltage across R equals the applied voltage the voltage across C is zero the voltage across L equals the applied voltage the applied voltage and current dier in phase by 90 468 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 62. An RLC series circuit is connected to an oscillator with a maximum emf of 100 V. If the voltage amplitudes VR , VL , and VC are all equal to each other, then VR must be: A. 33 V B. 50 V C. 67 V D. 87 V E. 100 V 63. A resistor, an inductor, and a capacitor are connected in parallel to a sinusoidal source of emf. Which of the following is true? A. The currents in all branches are in phase. B. The potential dierences across all branches are in phase. C. The current in the capacitor branch leads the current in the inductor branch by one-fourth of a cycle D. The potential dierence across the capacitor branch leads the potential dierence across the inductor branch by one-fourth of a cycle. E. The current in the capacitor branch lags the current in the inductor branch by one-fourth of a cycle. 64. The rms value of an ac current is: A. its peak value B. its average value C. that steady current that produces the same rate of heating in a resistor as the actual current D. that steady current that will charge a battery at the same rate as the actual current E. zero 65. The rms value of a sinusoidal voltage is V0 / 2, where V0 is the amplitude. What is the rms value of its fully rectied wave? Recall that Vrect (t) = |V (t)|. V0 A. B. C. D. E. .. ... . ...... ....... .. . ... .. . ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. ... .... .......... . .. . V0 t .. .. ........... ........... . ... ..... .... ..... .. . .. ... . ... . . .. .. t V02 / 2 V02 /2 2V0 V0 / 2 V0 /(2 2) Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 469 66. A sinusoidal voltage V (t) has an rms value of 100 V. Its maximum value is: A. 100 V B. 707 V C. 70.7 V D. 141 V E. 200 V 67. An ac generator produces 10 V (rms) at 400 rad/s. It is connected to a series RL circuit (R = 17.3 , L = 0.025 H). The rms current is: A. 0.50 A and leads the emf by 30 B. 0.71 A and lags the emf by 30 C. 1.40 A and lags the emf by 60 D. 0.50 A and lags the emf by 30 E. 0.58 A and leads the emf by 90 68. An ac generator producing 10 V (rms) at 200 rad/s is connected in series with a 50- resistor, a 400-mH inductor, and a 200-F capacitor. The rms current in amperes is: A. 0.125 B. 0.135 C. 0.18 D. 0.20 E. 0.40 69. An ac generator producing 10 V (rms) at 200 rad/s is connected in series with a 50- resistor, a 400-mH inductor, and a 200-F capacitor. The rms voltage (in volts) across the resistor is: A. 2.5 B. 3.4 C. 6.7 D. 10.0 E. 10.8 70. An ac generator producing 10 V (rms) at 200 rad/s is connected in series with a 50- resistor, a 400-mH inductor, and a 200-F capacitor. The rms voltage (in volts) across the capacitor is: A. 2.5 B. 3.4 C. 6.7 D. 10.0 E. 10.8 470 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 71. An ac generator producing 10 V (rms) at 200 rad/s is connected in series with a 50- resistor, a 400-mH inductor, and a 200-F capacitor. The rms voltage (in volts) across the inductor is: A. 2.5 B. 3.4 C. 6.7 D. 10.0 E. 10.8 72. The ideal meters shown read rms current and voltage. The average power delivered to the load is: .......... .......... .. . . . . . .............................................. . . ..... ...................... . . . . ............................................. .. ............................ . . .. . . . . . . .......... . ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... ......... .......... .......... .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . . . . ..... . . . . . . .. ..... . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. ........ .......... ........ ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................................................... . . .................................................................................... . I V A. B. C. D. E. unknown load denitely equal to V I denitely more than V I possibly equal to V I even if the load contains an inductor and a capacitor denitely less than V I zero, as is the average of any sine wave 73. The average power supplied to the circuit shown passes through a maximum when which one of the following is increased continuously from a very low to a very high value? R E, f A. B. C. D. E. ... ... ... ... .... .... .. . .. . .. . .. .................... ..................... . .. ... .. ... .. ...................... . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .................... . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . .. . .... . .... . ... . ... ..... . . .. . . . .. .... . . . . ... . . . . . .. .. . . . . .... . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .... ..... .. ....... .. . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................ ....................................................................................... C Source emf E R C Source frequency f None of these Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 471 74. In a series RLC circuit the rms value of the generator emf is E and the rms value of the current is i. The current lags the emf by . The average power supplied by the generator is given by: A. (iE/2) cos B. iE C. i2 /Z D. i2 Z E. i2 R 75. The units of the power factor are: A. ohm B. watt C. radian D. ohm1/2 E. none of these 76. A series circuit consists of a 15- resistor, a 25-mH inductor, and a 35-F capacitor. If the frequency is 100 Hz the power factor is: A. 0 B. 0.20 C. 0.45 D. 0.89 E. 1.0 77. The main reason that alternating current replaced direct current for general use is: A. ac generators do not need slip rings B. ac voltages may be conveniently transformed C. electric clocks do not work on dc D. a given ac current does not heat a power line as much as the same dc current E. ac minimizes magnetic eects 78. A step-down transformer is used to: A. increase the power B. decrease the power C. increase the voltage D. decrease the voltage E. change ac to dc 472 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 79. Iron, rather than copper, is used in the core of transformers because iron: A. can withstand a higher temperature B. has a greater resistivity C. has a very high permeability D. makes a good permanent magnet E. insulates the primary from the secondary 80. The core of a transformer is made in a laminated form to: A. facilitate easy assembly B. reduce i2 R losses in the coils C. increase the magnetic ux D. save weight E. prevent eddy currents 81. A generator supplies 100 V to the primary coil of a transformer. The primary has 50 turns and the secondary has 500 turns. The secondary voltage is: A. 1000 V B. 500 V C. 250 V D. 100 V E. 10 V 82. The resistance of the primary coil of a well-designed, 1 : 10 step-down transformer is 1 . With the secondary circuit open, the primary is connected to a 12 V ac generator. The primary current is: A. essentially zero B. about 12 A C. about 120 A D. depends on the actual number of turns in the primary coil E. depends on the core material 83. The primary of an ideal transformer has 100 turns and the secondary has 600 turns. Then: A. the power in the primary circuit is less than that in the secondary circuit B. the currents in the two circuits are the same C. the voltages in the two circuits are the same D. the primary current is six times the secondary current E. the frequency in the secondary circuit is six times that in the primary circuit Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT 473 84. The primary of a 3 : 1 step-up transformer is connected to a source and the secondary is connected to a resistor R. The power dissipated by R in this situation is P . If R is connected directly to the source it will dissipate a power of: A. P/9 B. P/3 C. P D. 3P E. 9P 85. In an ideal 1 : 8 step-down transformer, the primary power is 10 kW and the secondary current is 25 A. The primary voltage is: A. 25, 600 V B. 3200 V C. 400 V D. 50 V E. 6.25 V 86. A source with an impedance of 100 is connected to the primary coil of a transformer and a resistance R is connected to the secondary coil. If the transformer has 500 turns in its primary coil and 100 turns in its secondary coil the greatest power will be dissipated in the resistor if R =: A. 0 B. 0.25 C. 4.0 D. 50 E. 100 474 Chapter 31: ELECTROMAGNETIC OSCILLATIONS & ALTERNATING CURRENT Chapter 32: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS; MAGNETISM AND MATTER 1. Gauss law for magnetism: A. can be used to nd B due to given currents provided there is enough symmetry B. is false because there are no magnetic poles C. can be used with open surfaces because there are no magnetic poles D. contradicts Faradays law because one says B = 0 and the other says E = dB /dt E. none of the above 2. Gauss law for magnetism tells us: A. the net charge in any given volume B. that the line integral of a magnetic eld around any closed loop must vanish C. the magnetic eld of a current element D. that magnetic monopoles do not exist E. charges must be moving to produce magnetic elds 3. The statement that magnetic eld lines form closed loops is a direct consequence of: A. Faradays law B. Amperes law C. Gauss law for electricity D. Gauss law for magnetism E. the Lorentz force 4. A magnetic eld parallel to the x axis with a magnitude that decreases with increasing x but does not change with y and z is impossible according to: A. Faradays law B. Amperes law C. Gauss law for electricity D. Gauss law for magnetism E. Newtons second law 5. According to Gauss law for magnetism, magnetic eld lines: A. form closed loops B. start at south poles and end at north poles C. start at north poles and end at south poles D. start at both north and south poles and end at innity E. do not exist Chapter 32: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS; MAGNETISM AND MATTER 475 6. The magnetic eld lines due to an ordinary bar magnet: A. form closed curves B. cross one another near the poles C. are more numerous near the N pole than near the S pole D. do not exist inside the magnet E. none of the above 7. Four closed surfaces are shown. The areas Atop and Abot of the top and bottom faces and the magnitudes Btop and Bbot of the uniform magnetic elds through the top and bottom faces are given. The elds are perpendicular to the faces and are either inward or outward. Rank the surfaces according to the magnitude of the magnetic ux through the curved sides, least to greatest. Atop = 2 cm2 Btop = 2 mT, inward Atop = 2 cm2 Btop = 2 mT, inward ................ ................... .... . .. .. .. ... ... . .................. . . . ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .... .... ... ... .. ......... .. .......... ................... .......... ..... .. ................ ................... .... .. . . ... ... . .................... . . ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... .... ... ..... ... .. ......... ........................... ...... ............ 1 2 Abot = 4 cm2 Bbot = 2 mT, outward Abot = 4 cm2 Bbot = 6 mT, outward Atop = 2 cm2 Btop = 3 mT, inward Atop = 2 cm2 Btop = 3 mT, inward ................ .................. .... ... . ... ... ................. ..... . ................ .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . ..... .. ...... .............. ............ ................ .................. .... ... .......... ........... ......................... .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ...... .................. ............. 3 Abot = 2 cm2 Bbot = 3 mT, outward A. B. C. D. E. 476 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1, 1, 2, 4, 4, 3, 2, 2, 1, 4, 4 Abot = 2 cm2 Bbot = 2 mT, outward 4 2 3 1 3 Chapter 32: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS; MAGNETISM AND MATTER 8. Consider the four Maxwell equations: 1. E d A = q/ 0 2. B dA = 0 3. E ds = dB /dt 4. B ds = 0 i + 0 0 dE /dt Which of these must be modied if magnetic poles are discovered? A. Only 1 B. Only 2 C. Only 2 and 3 D. Only 3 and 4 E. Only 2, 3, and 4 9. One of the Maxwell equations begins with B ds = . . .. The symbol ds means: A. an innitesimal displacement of a charge B. an innitesimal displacement of a magnetic pole C. an innitesimal inductance D. an innitesimal surface area E. none of the above 10. One of the Maxwell equations begins with E ds = . . .. The symbol in the integral sign means: A. the same as the subscript in 0 B. integrate clockwise around the path C. integrate counterclockwise around the path D. integrate around a closed path E. integrate over a closed surface 11. One of the Maxwell equations begins with B dA = . . .. The symbol in the integral sign means: A. the same as the subscript in 0 B. integrate clockwise around the path C. integrate counterclockwise around the path D. integrate around a closed path E. integrate over a closed surface 12. One of the crucial facts upon which the Maxwell equations are based is: A. the numerical value of the electron charge B. charge is quantized C. the numerical value of the charge/mass ratio of the electron D. there are three types of magnetic materials E. none of the above Chapter 32: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS; MAGNETISM AND MATTER 477 13. Two of Maxwells equations contain a path integral on the left side and an area integral on the right. For them: A. the path must pierce the area B. the path must be well-separated from the area C. the path must be along a eld line and the area must be perpendicular to the eld line D. the path must be the boundary of the area E. the path must lie in the area, away from its boundary 14. Two of Maxwells equations contain an integral over a closed surface. For them the innitesimal vector area dA is always: A. tangent to the surface B. perpendicular to the surface and pointing outward C. perpendicular to the surface and pointing inward D. tangent to a eld line E. perpendicular to a eld line 15. Two of Maxwells equations contain a path integral on the left side and an area integral on the right. The directions of the innitesimal path element ds and innitesimal area element dA are: A. always in the same direction B. always in opposite directions C. always perpendicular to each other D. never perpendicular to each other E. none of the above 16. Two of Maxwells equations contain a path integral on the left side and an area integral on the right. Suppose the area is the surface of a piece of paper at which you are looking and dA is chosen to point toward you. Then, the path integral is: A. clockwise around the circumference of the paper B. counterclockwise around the circumference of the paper C. from left to right D. from right to left E. from top to bottom 17. Which of the following equations can be used, along with a symmetry argument, to calculate the electric eld of a point charge? A. E dA = q/ 0 B. B dA = 0 C. E ds = dB /dt D. B ds = 0 i + 0 0 dE /dt E. None of these 478 Chapter 32: MAXWELLS EQUATIONS; MAGNETISM AND MATTER 18. Which of the following equations can be used, along with a symmetry argument, to calculate the magnetic eld of a long straight wire carrying current? A. E dA = q/ 0 B. B dA = 0 C. E ds = dB /dt D. B ds = 0 i + 0 0 dE /dt E. None of these